SANSKRIT  PRIMER: 

BASED  ON  THE 

LEITFADEN 
FUR  DEN  ELEMENTAR-CURSUS  DES  SANSKRIT 

OF 

PROFESSOR  GEORG  BUHLER 

OF  VIENNA 


BY 


EDWARD  DELAVAN  PERRY, 

OF  COLUMBIA  COLLEGE,  NEW- YORK. 


v 

BOSTON: 

GINN  AND  COMPANY 


r. ,   if- 


tS£ 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1885, 
By  E.    D.    PERRY, 
In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress  at  Washington. 

24.9 


(ffamposition  lip 
GEBRUDER     UNGER, 

SCHONEBBRGBR     StRASSE,    I'/  A, 
BKRTtN,    SW. 


Jprrssto-ir!*.  ij) 

JOHN    WILSON    AND    SON, 

university  press. 

Cambridgf,    Mass. 


tc(OI 


Preface. 


In  the  preface  to  the  work*  of  which  the  following  is  a  revision, 
Prof.  Bithler  writes  as  follows: 

"The  following  Leitfaden  was  written  last  winter  [1881 — 82], 
and,  printed  in  manuscript  form,  was  used  in  the  instruction  of 
quite  a  large  number  of  scholars.  It  is  based  upon  the  purely 
practical  method  of  Sanskrit  instruction,  which  was  introduced  at 
Haug's  and  my  own  instance  into  the  Indian  secondary  schools, 
and  has  become  established  there  by  means  of  R.  G.  Bhandarkar's 
text-books.  The  attempt  to  transfer  this  method  to  European  uni- 
versities is  justified  by  the  practical  success  which,  as  my  ex- 
perience shows,  is  to  be  gained  thereby.  For  I  have  found  that 
beginners  master  the  first  difficulties  of  Sanskrit  very  rapidly,  and 
that  learners  take  the  most  lively  and  continued  interest  in  the 
study,  if  opportunity  for  activity  on  their  own  part  is  given  them 
from  the  very  first,  and  they  are.  introduced  at  once  into  the  living 
language.  Moreover,  the  question  of  economy  of  time  is  made  the 
more  weighty  by  the  fact  that  the  elements  of  Sanskrit  form  an 


*  Leitfaden  fur  den  Elementarcursus  des Sanskrit;  mitUebungs- 
stiicken  und  zwei  Glossaren.  Von  Georg  Buhler.  Wien,  1883.  — 
I  have  translated  above  a  little  freely. 


iv 

important  aid  to  students  of  Classical  and  Germanic  Philology,  yet 
to  a  large  number  of  such  are  accessible  only  when  the  subject 
can  be  mastered  in  a  short  time.  On  the  other  hand,  the  disad- 
vantages necessarily  entailed  by  the  purely  practical  method  may 
readily  be   removed  later  by  a  short  methodical  exposition  of  the 

grammar The  verses  in   the   exercises  are  taken  chiefly 

from  Boehtlingk's  Indischen  Spruchen;  the  sentences  are  in  part 
derived  from  various  Sanskrit  works,  or  modelled  after  passages 
contained  in  them.  To  the  last  lessons  no  Sanskrit  exercises  have 
been  appended,  since  the  reading  of  the  Nala  or  of  some  other 
easy  Sanskrit  work  may  very  well  be  begun  as  soon  as  the  form- 
ation of  the  perfect  has  been  learned." 

After  using  the  Leitfaden  for  some  time  in  the  instruction  of 
a  class,  I  was  convinced  of  its  great  merits  as  a  practical  intro- 
duction to  the  language;  while  on  the  other  hand  it  seemed  very 
unfortunate  that  it  held  throughout  to  the  native  system  of  grammar, 
which,  since  the  appearance  of  Prof.  Whitney's  work,  we  in 
America  at  least  have  learned  to  distrust.  Under  these  circum- 
stances it  seemed  advisable  to  attempt  a  combination  of  Buhler's 
practical  exercises  with  Whitney's  theory;  and  to  this  end  the 
book  has  been  really  rewritten.  An  introduction  has  been  added, 
giving  a  general  view  of  the  structure  of  the  language;  the  exer- 
cises have  been  pruned  here  and  there,  chiefly  to  remove  forms 
which  seemed  too  unusual  or  doubtful  to  have  a  just  claim  on 
the  beginner's  memory;  and  the  number  of  lessons  has  been  re- 
duced from  forty-eight  to  forty-five,  by  condensing  the  description, 
needlessly  full  for  beginners,  of  the  aorist,  precative,  and  second- 
ary conjugations.  I  have  endeavored  to  retain  nothing  but  what 
would  supply  the  real  wants  of  those  for  whom  the  book  is  de- 


signed;  yet  here  and  there,  having  in  mind  those  who  may  take 
up  this  study  without  a  teacher,  I  have  added  explanations  which 
I  should  otherwise  have  left  for  oral  communication  by  the  instructor. 

A  detailed  explanation  of  the  changes  in  the  grammatical  part 
of  the  book  would  require  too  much  space  to  be  given  here.  They 
may  be  summarized  in  the  statement  that  I  have  striven  to  remove 
all  forms  at  present  "non- quotable".  In  the  explication  of  the 
rules  I  have  sought  to  be  brief,  but  never  to  the  sacrifice  of  clear- 
ness. In  very  many  cases  not  only  the  substance  but  also  the 
words  of  Prof.  Whitney's  rules  have  been  incorporated  into  those 
of  the  Primer,  which  was  done  with  his  sanction.  It  seemed  quite 
needless  to  designate  all  such  borrowings  by  quotation-marks. 

Many  acknowledgments  are  due  to  those  whose  aid  has  made 
possible  the  appearance  of  the  work.  Prof.  Buhler's  ready  gene- 
rosity in  consenting  to  the  rendering  of  his  book  into  a  very 
different  form  from  that  which  he  gave  it  deserves  most  grateful 
mention.  To  Prof.  Whitney  I  owe  deep  gratitude  for  many  valu- 
able suggestions;  he  was  kind  enough  to  look  over  the  work  in 
manuscript,  and,  later,  to  put  at  my  disposal  the  advance  sheets  of 
his  invaluable  collection  of  verb -forms.  To  Prof.  Lanman  I  am 
equally  indebted ;  as  well  for  many  useful  hints  as  for  the  arduous 
task  of  looking  over  proof-sheets,  which  he  imposed  on  himself 
with  characteristic  readiness.  My  pupil,  Mr.  A.  V.  W.  Jackson, 
assisted  me  not  a  little  in  the  compilation  of  the  Glossaries.  My 
acknowledgments  are  also  due  to  the  printers,  Gebr.  Unger 
(Th.  Grimm)  of  Berlin,  for  the  careful  manner  in  which  their  part 
of  the  work  has  been  done. 

From  V.  S.  Apte's  "Guide  to  Sanskrit  Composition"  I  have 
derived  occasional  examples. 


VI 

The  appearance  of  the  book  has  been  delayed  considerably 
beyond  the  date  originally  planned  for  it.  The  printing  was 
begun  in  November  last,  but  was  interrupted  by  my  illness,  and 
a  resulting  stay  of  considerable  length  in  the  West  Indies. 

I  shall  esteem  it  a  favor  if  any  who  may  use  this  book 

will  notify  me  of  misprints  or  inaccuracies  of  any  sort  which 

they  may  remark. 

E.  D.  P. 

Berlin,  August,  1885. 


NOTE    TO    THE    SECOND    EDITION. 

In  this  edition  errors  have  been  corrected  in  the  plates 

wherever  possible,  otherwise  noted  in  a  list  of  corrections  and 

additions   at  the  end  of  the  book.     My  thanks  are  due  to 

Prof.   Lanman   and   Prof.   H.   F.   Burton   of   Rochester  for 

corrections  furnished. 

E.  D.  P. 
New  York,  September,  1886. 


NOTE    TO    THE    THIRD    EDITION. 

The  revision  of  the  book  for  the  new  impression  I  owe  to 

Dr.  Louis  H.  Gray,  to  whom  I  am  glad  to  express  my  hearty 

thanks  for  his  kindness  in  undertaking  and  performing  this 

irksome  task. 

E.   D.   P. 
Munich,  July,  1901. 


Table  of  Contents, 

in  systematic  grammatical  arrangement. 

The  figures  iu  heavy  type  refer  to  paragraphs. 


Introductory  suggestions,  p.  xi. 

I.  Alphabet  and  Sounds. 

Characters,  1—20.  —  Classification  of  Sounds,  and  Pronunciation, 
21—47.  —  Light  and  Heavy  Syllables,  48.  —  Accent,  56. 

II.  Changes  of  Sounds.     Guna  and  Vrddni. 
49—54. 

III.  Bales  of  Euphonic  Combination. 

Rules  of  Vowel  Combination,  105,  106,  156—161,  164.  —  General 
Laws  concerning  Finals,  239—242.  —  Deaspiration,  242.  — 
Transferral  of  Aspiration,  244,  249,  428.  —  Surd  and  Sonant 
Assimilation,  147,  148,  266,  267.  —  Combinations  of  Final 
s  and  r,  95,  117—123,  129.  —  Conversion  of  s  to  »,  p.  27  (note**), 
191,  192,  342.  352.  —  Conversion  of  n  to  n,  p.  32  (note**),  166.  — 
Conversion  of  Dental  Mutes  to  Linguals  and  Palatals,  149,  150, 
p.  99  (note),  342.  —  Combinations  of  n,  p.  29  (note),  138—140, 
184.  —  Change  of  ch  to  cch,  p.  27  (note*),  165.  —  Combinations 
of  m,  p.  29  (note).  —  Final  n  [and  n]  184.  —  Final  k,  t,  p,  266. 
—  Final  t,  148—151. 

IV.  Declension. 

Gender,  Number,  Case,  83—89.  —  Case-endings,  90,  91.  — 
Paefo-endings,  91,  241. 

V.  Substantives  and  Adjectives. 

Vowel-stems: 
Stems  in  a,  m.  n.,  103,  III.  —  Stems  in  i,  m.,  113,  115;  n.,  114,  115. 


Vlll 

—  Stems  in  u,  m.,  128;  n.,  136,  137.  —  Stems  in  i  and  w,  f., 
185—187.  —  Stems  in  a,  z,  u:  (a)  Root-words.  In  a,  212,  213; 
in  i,  189,  212,  214;  in  fi,  197,  212,  214.  (b)  Derivative  Stems,  f. 
In  a,  162;  in  I,  183;  in  u,  198.  —  Stems  in  r,  201—205,  208.  — 
Stems  in  Diphthongs:  go,  209;  nau,  211;  rai,  277. 

Consonant-stems : 

General,  237—242.  —  (a)  Root-stems,  243,  244,  246—250.  — 
(b)  Derivative  Stems.  In  as,  is,  us,  252—254.  In  an  (an,  man, 
van),  265.  —  In  in  (in,  rain,  vin),  251.  —  In  ant  (ant,  mant,  vant) 
256—264.  —  Perfect  Participles  in  vans,  268.  —  Comparatives 
in  yas,  255. 

Irregular  Nouns:  269 — 284. 

Comparison,  337 — 345. 

Formation  of  Feminine-stems,  187,  251,  255,  262—264,  268. 

VI.  Numerals. 
328—336. 

VII.  Pronouns. 
223—236,  285—288,  413. 

VIII.  Conjugation.  (fM) 

Voice,  Tense,  Mode,  Number,  Person,  57—65.  —  Verbal  Ad- 
jectives and  Nouns,  66—68.  Secondary  Conjugation,  69 — 70.  — 
Mode  and  Tense-stems,  71. 

IX.  Present-System. 
Conjugation  Classes,  72 — 80. 

First  Conjugation. 

General,  383—387. 

I.   Root-class  (Hindu  second  or   ad-class),  404—412,  414 

—429. 
II.  Reduplicating  Class  (H.  third  or   Au-class),  430—440. 

III.  Nasal  Class  (H.  seventh  or  rudh-c\a,ss),  441 — 446. 

IV.  Nu  and  ^-Classes  (H.  fifth  and  eighth,  or  su  and  tan- 
classes),  388—395. 

V.  iVa-Class  (H.  ninth  or  &n-class),  399-403. 


IX 


Second,  or  a-Conjugation. 

VI.  a-Class    (H.  first   or  Mu-class),   92—94,    97—102,  134, 

135.    152—154,   178—182,  188,   193—196,   199,   200.    206, 

207,  210,  222,  260. 
VII.  Accented  a-Class  (Hindu  sixth  or  tad-class),   107 — 110, 

152—154  etc.  (as  for  a-class). 
VIII.  va-Class    (H.    fourth   or   tfw-class),   124—127,   131—134, 

152 — 155  etc.  (as  for  a-class). 
IX.  Accented   yd-C\ass   or   Passive    Conjugation,    168 — 176, 

188,  199,  200,  210,  222. 
[Causative  and  Denominative  Conjugation  (partly  =  H.  tenth 

or   cur-class),   141 — 146,   152 — 154   etc.  (as   for  a-class); 

also  215—221.] 

X.  Perfect-System. 
447—471,  474. 
Periphrastic  Perfect,  472,  473. 

XI.  Aorist-System. 

General,  486.  —  Simple  Aorist :  Root-aorist,  487;  a-aorist, 
488.  —  Reduplicated  Aorist,  489,  490.  —  Sibilant  Aorist: 
s-aorist,  491;  is-aorist,  492;  m-aorist,  493;  sa-aorist,  494.  — 
Aorist  Passive,  495,  496. 

XII.  Future-System. 

General,  475.  —  Simple  Future,  476—481.  —  Conditional,  482. 
—  Periphrastic  Future,  483—485. 

Xm.  Verbal  Adjectives  and  Substantives:  Participles,  Infinitive, 
Gerund. 

Passive  Participle  in  ta  or  «a,  289 — 301.  —  Past  Active  Par- 
ticiple in  tavant  or  navant,  302,  303.  —  Gerunds :  Absolutives, 
304—313.  —  Infinitive,  314—322.  —  Future  Passive  Participles: 
Gerundives,  323—327. 

XIV.  Derivative  or  Secondary  Conjugations. 

General,  497.  —  Passive,  498.  —  Causative,  507,  508.  — 
Intensive,  499 — 502.  —  Desiderative,  503 — 506.  —  Denomina- 
tive, 509,  510. 

XV.  Periphrastic  Conjugation. 

Perfect,  472,  473.  —  Future,  483-485. 


XVI.  Vcrhal  Prefixes:  Adverbs  and  Prepositions. 
81,  82,  167,  190,  395—397. 

XTII.  Formation  of  Compound  Stems. 

Classification,  346—353.  —  Copulative  Compounds,  354—357.  — 
Determinative  Compounds,  358;  Dependent,  359—361;  De- 
scriptive, 362—365.  —  Secondary  Adjective  Compounds,  366— 
370;  Possessive,  371—377;  with  Governed  Final  Member,  378. 
—  Adjective  Compounds  as  Nouns  and  Adverbs,  350,  379—381. 
[Z?t;awGfoa-compounds,  p.  136  (note);  Ta^wrusa-compounds,  p.  137 
(note  **) ;  A'armaJAara^a-compounds,  p.  137  (note  *) ;  Dvigu-com- 
pounds,  380;  Bahuvrlhi-compounds,  p.  142  (note);  Avyayibhava- 
compounds,  381.] 

XVIII.  Syntactical  Rules. 

Position  of  Modifiers,  p.  35  (note).  —  Repetition  of  Words,  p.  G7 
(note*).  —  Agreement  of  Adjectives,  245.  —  Force  of  Cases, 
104,  112.  —  Prepositions  with  Cases,  82,  130.  —  kirn  with 
Instrumental  (and  Genitive),  p.  89  (note).  -  Construction  with 
Comparatives,  345.  —  Numerals,  333.  —  Pronouns,  225,  234 
—236.  —  iti,  p.  47  (note).  —  Force  of  Tenses:  Present,  96; 
Imperfect,  182;  Perfect,  474;  Aorist,  486.  —  Force  of  Modes: 
Imperative,  194—196;  Optative,  207.  —  Causative,  221.  — 
Passive,  177.  —  Past  Passive  Participle,  290.  —  Past  Active 
Participle,  303.  —  Gerund,  311—313.  —  Infinitive,  320—322.  — 
Future  Passive  Participle,  327. 

Appendix. 

Hindu  Names  of  Letters.  —  Modern  Hindu  Accentuation  of 
Sanskrit. 


Suggestions  for  using  the  Primer. 


The  Primer  can  be  finished  by  earnest  students  in  sixteen  or 
seventeen  weeks,  reckoning  three  lessons  per  week,  with  here  and 
there  an  hour  for  review.  After  that  Lanman's  Sanskrit  Reader, 
an  introduction  to  which  this  work  is  partly  intended  to  be,  should 
be  taken  up.  Students  are  strongly  recommended  to  provide 
themselves  with  Whitney's  Sanskrit  Grammar  at  the  outset. 

It  seemed  advisable  to  leave  the  Introduction  undivided  into 
lessons,  as  different  teachers  may  prefer  to  impart  the  alphabet, 
etc.,  to  their  scholars  at  different  rates  of  speed.  Some  of  the 
exercises  for  translation  may  be  found  rather  too  long  to  be  com- 
pleted in  one  lesson.  In  such  cases  it  will  probably  be  better, 
after  requiring  the  translation  of  only  so  many  sentences  as  the 
pupil  may  reasonably  be  expected  to  master  in  the  preparation  of 
one  day's  lesson,  to  proceed  directly  to  the  next  lesson  in.  the 
following  hour,  leaving  the  untranslated  sentences  for  a  review. 

The  vocabularies  prefixed  to  each  exercise  are  not  exhaustive, 
since  words  which  have  been  treated  of  immediately  before  are 
sometimes  omitted  from  them.  The  glossaries  at  the  end  of  the 
book  will,  it  is  hoped,  be  found  complete  for  the  exercises;  but 
the  meaning  of  compound  words  must  in  most  cases  be  learned 
from  their  elements;  and  proper  names  have  often  been  omitted, 
their  Sanskrit  forms  being  discernible  from  the  transliteration. 

The  table  of  contents  in  systematic  grammatical  arrangement 
is  designed  to  facilitate  the  finding  of  any  desired  article;  it  may 
also  be  found  useful  as  an  outline  for  a  rapid  grammatical  review. 

Arrangement  of  Vocabularies.    The  vocabularies  are  arranged 


>:n 


in  strict  alphabetic  order  (see  below).  All  nouns,  whether  sub- 
stantives or  adjectives,  are  given  in  the  stem-form.  All  verb-forms 
are  placed  under  the  root;  prepositional  compounds  of  verbs  like- 
wise, and  not  in  the  alphabetic  place  of  the  preposition.  Of 
verbal  adjectives  and  nouns,  some  important  ones  have  been  given 
in  their  alphabetic  places,  but  the  meaning  of  most  of  them  must 
be  learned  from  their  respective  roots.  Pronouns  are  given  generally 
in  the  form  of  the  nominative.  • 

Alphabetic  Order.  The  alphabetic  order  is  that  given  in  §  I, 
but  the  following  points  are  to  be  noticed  here: 

The  visarga  stands  next  after  the  vowels;  but  a  visarga  re- 
garded as  equivalent  to  a  sibilant  and  exchangeable  with  it  has 
the  alphabetic  place  of  that  sibilant. 

The  sign  n,  representing  "the  anusvdra  of  more  independent 
origin",  has  its  place  before  all  the  mutes  etc.;  thus  dang  and 
danstrd  stand  before  daksa. 

The  sign  m,  representing  an  assimilated  m,  is  placed  according 
to  its  phonetic  value.  1.  If  m,  resulting  from  the  assimilation  of 
m  to  a  semivowel,  sibilant,  or  h,  represent  a  nasal  semivowel  or 
anusvdra,  then  its  place  is  like  that  of  n.  Thus  purhs  comes  before 
punya  and  samgaya  before  sakrt.  2.  But  if  m  be  the  product  of 
m  assimilated  to  a  mute,  representing  n,  n,  n,  n,  or  m,  then  its 
place  is  that  of  the  nasal  so  represented. 


Introduction. 


Alphabet. 

I.  Sanskrit  is  commonly  written  in  what  is  called  the 
Devanagarl  alphabet.  The  characters  of  this,  and  the  European 
characters  which  will  be  used  in  transliterating  them,  are  as  follows^ 


simple 


diphthongs 


Vowels. 

short 

^  a  & 
palatal    ^[  i 

labial      ^  u 

lingual    ^  r 

dental     *J  / 

palatal 

labial 


long 
^  u 


a=n 


Visarga   :   h. 

Anus  vara  —  n  or  m. 


a.  +7*  TJ  e 


\|  at 
3*1 


Consonants. 

surd  sr.rd  asp.     sonant  sonant  asp.  nasal 

guttural   ^  k  T§  kh  7[  g  Ti  gh  >gp  w 

palatal     ^  c  ^  c£  ^  j  ?J  jh  "5f  n 

lingual      <r  *  -J  ^  ^  d  %  dh  1$  n 

dental       7{  t  ^  th  ^  d  \f  ai>  *[  n 

labial       T(  p  qj  ph  ;    b  M  M  *  »» 

Perry,  Sanskrit  Primer.  1 


f 


I       3 


*  9 


2  Introduction. 

c  ,1  palatal  *J  y  lingual  T  r 

Semivowels  s 

r/"  V-'  w»r\  dental  ^  I  labial  ^  v. 

Sibilants:  palatal  If  p;      lingual  If  -y,      dental  ^J  8. 
Aspiration  ^  //. 

2.  The  above  order  is  that  in  which  the  sounds  are  catalogued 
by  native  grammarians ;  and  European  scholars  have  adopted  it 
as  the  alphabetic  order,  for  dictionaries,  etc.  The  writing  runs 
from  left  to  right. 

3.  The  theory  of  the  devanagari  mode  of  writing  is  syllabic 
and  consonantal.  That  is,  it  regards  as  the  written  unit,  not  the 
simple  sound,  but  the  syllable;  and  further,  it  regards  as  the  sub- 
stantial part  of  the  syllable  the  consonant  (or  the  consonants)  pre- 
ceding the  vowel  —  this  latter  being  merely  implied,  as  is  the 
case  with  short  ^J  a,  except  when  initial,  or,  if  written,  being 
written  by   a  subordinate  sign  attached  to  the  consonant. 

4.  Hence  follow  these  two  principles: 

A.  The  forms  of  the  vowel- characters  given  above  are  used 
only  when  the  vowel  forms  a  syllable  by  itself,  or  is  not  combined 
with  a  preceding  consonant:  that  is,  when  it  is  initial,  or  preceded 
by  another  vowel.  In  combination  with  a  consonant,  other  modes 
of  representation  are  used. 

B.  If  more  than  one  consonant  precede  a  vowel,  forming 
with  it  a  single  syllable,  their  characters  must  be  combined  into 
a  single  character. 

5.  According  to  the  Hindu  mode  of  dividing  syllables,  each 
syllable  must  end  in  a  vowel,  or  visarga.  or  anusvdra,  except  at 
the  end  of  the  word;  and  as  ordinary  Hindu  usage  does  not  divide 
the  words  of  a  sentence  in  writing,  a  final  consonant  is  combined 
into  one  syllable  with  the  initial  vowel  or  consonant  of  the  following 
word,  so  that  a  syllable  ends  in  a  consonant  only  at  the  end  of 
the  sentence. 


Introduction. 


Thus  the  sentence  ksetrem  siktdbhir  meghdndm  adbhir  dhdnyarh 


■ 


prarudham  —  '  by  the  water  which  drops  from  the  clouds  upon  the  - 
tields  the  grain  grows  tall'  —  would  be  considered  as  consisting  of 
the  syllables  kse  tre  m  si  kta  bhi  rme  ghd  nd  ma  dbhi  rdhd  nyam 
pra  ru  dham.  Each  of  these  syllables  would  be  indicated  by  a 
single  group  of  signs,  without  any  reference  whatever  to  the  di- 
vision of  the  words  composing  the  sentence;  and  the  syllables 
are  always  written  independently,  with  more  or  less  closeness  of 
approach;  either  like  this: 
%%|jfa  WrfaW^T  IT  *T  f^  ^T  *J  "H  ^^^  —  or  thus:^J- 

ftnfrrfaifV  w  ru  te  3rau^s*c- 

6.  In  Sanskrit  works  printed  in  Europe,  the  common  practice 
is  to  separate  the  words  so  far  as  this  can  be  done  without  any 
alteration  of  the  written  form.  Thus,  ^«£j«[  5W  indrdya  namah ; 
but  7f(^f f^ rf^^ igj T^  tat  savitur  varenyam,  because  the  final  ?^  I  and 
T"  r  are  not  written  with  their  full  forms.  But  some  few  works 
have  been  printed,  in  which,  by  a  free  use  of  a  sign  called  virdma 
(see  below,  §  8),  the  individual  words  are  separated.  In  translite- 
rated texts  there  is  no  good  reason  for  printing  otherwise  than 
with  all  the  words  separated. 

7.  Under  A.  Vowels  combined  with  preceding  consonants 
are  written  as  follows: 

1.  a:  Short  a  has  no  written  sign  at  all;  the  consonant-sign 
itself  implies  a  following  «,  unless  some  other  vowel-sign  is 
attached  to  it  (or  else  the  virdma  —  see  below,  §  8).  Thus 
the  consonant-signs  given  above  are  really  the  signs  for  ka, 
klc    ca,  clta,  etc.  (as  far  as  ^  ha). 

2.  a:  cRT  &      '^T  cd.    \tf  dha  etc. 

r 

3.  i  and  I:  f^R  hi.  fx?  pi.  f**  dhi.  —  eft  kl.  tft  pi.  \ft  dhx. 
The  hook  above,  turning  to  the  left  or  to  the  right,  is  histori- 
cally the  essential  part  of  the  character,  having  been  originally 

1* 


4  Introduction. 

the  whole  of  it:  the  hooks  were  only  later  prolonged,  so 
as  to  reach  all  the  way  down  beside  the  consonant.  Observe 
that  the  i-hooks  and  the  M-hooks,  respectively  above  and 
below  the  line,  are  analogous  in  turning  to  the  left  for  the 
short  vowel  and  to  the   right  for  the  long. 

4.  u  and  u:  <K  ku.  ^  cu.  ^  bu.  —  gj  ku.  ^f  cu.  «f  bhu.  Owing 
to  the  necessities  of  combination,  consonant  and  vowel-sign 
are  sometimes  disguised;  thus,  ^  du,  H"  du;  ^  ru,  ^  ru;  ^ 
or  ^  hu,  Jg  hu. 

5.  r  and  f  :   3  kr.     Xf  pr.    —     cfi  kr.     7{  tr.    With    the  fi-sign, 

a  <z  g  g 

the  vowel  -  hook  is  usually  attached  to  the  middle ;  thus, 
f  hr.  6.   I:  mkl. 

7.   Diphthongs,     e :  ift  ke.     ^  pe.     ^  ye.     di:  %  kdi.     \f  dhdi. 
o:  ^[  ko.    3ft  bho.     du:  ^"  kau.    ~^t  rdu. 
In   some  printed   texts   the  signs  for  o   and  du  are  separated, 
the  ior^.  being  placed  over  the  consonant-sign,  and  not  over  the 
perpendicular  stroke;  thus,  %T  ko,  %f  kau. 

8.  A  consonant-sign  may  be  made  to  signify  the  sound  of 
that  consonant  alone,  without  an  added  vowel,  by  writing  beneath 
it  a  stroke  called  the  virdma  ('rest',  'stop');  thus,  eft  k,  ||  h,  ^  d. 
Strictly,  the  virdma  should  be  used  only  at  the  end  of  a  sentence; 
but  it  is  often  used  by  scribes,  or  in  print,  in  the  middle  of  a  word 
or  sentence,  to  avoid  awkward  or  difficult  combinations;  thus, 
•f%sgfij:  Jidbhih.  f^&m  litsu, 

9.  Under  B.  The  combinations  of  consonants  are  in  general 
not  difficult.  The  perpendicular  and  horizontal  lines  are  common 
to  almost  all;  and  if  two  or  more  are  to  be  combined,  the  following 
method  is  pursued.  The  characteristic  part  of  a  consonant-sign 
that  is  to  be  added  to  another  is  taken  (to  the  exclusion  of  the 
perpendicular  or  of  the  horizontal  framing -line,  or  of  both),  and 
they  are  put  together  according  to  convenience,  either  side  by  side, 


Introduction.  5 

or  one  above  the  other:  in  some  combinations  either  arrangement 
is  allowed.  The  consonant  to  be  pronounced  first  is  set  first  in 
the  one  arrangement,  and  above  in  the  other  arrangement.  Only 
the  consonant  at  the  right  of  a  horizontal  group,  and  that  at  the 
top  of  a  perpendicular  group,  are  written  in  full. 

Examples  of  the  horizontal  arrangement  are: 

TJJ  gga,  ^  jja,  TJ[  pya,  «U  nma,  ^BT  ttha,  «j  bhya,  "^R  ska, 
■QJT  sna. 

Examples  of  the  perpendicular  arrangement  are:  gj  kka,  f|  eca, 
^  kva,  fT  nja,  fT  pta,  ft  tna. 

10.  In  some  combinations  there  is  more  or  less  abbreviation  or 
disguise  of  the  independent  form  of  a  consonant-sign. 

Thus,  of  ^j  k  in  JQ  kta\  and  in  ^TIJ  kna,  ^Sf  kya  etc.; 
of  ?£  ^  in   iff  tta; 

of  ?  d  in  |f  dga,  W  dda,  ^  ddha,  ^  dbha  etc.; 
of  *\  m  and  IT  y,  when  following   other  consonants, 

thus,  ^%kya,  ^f  kma,  ^T  nma,  "%J  dma,  ^T  dya,  ^(hma, 

W  %a,  gj  thya,  ST  dhya ; 
of  JJ  p,  which  generally  becomes  *T  when  followed  by 

a  consonant;  thus,  ^f  fca,   "*T  <;na,  "Q  gla,  ^?r  gya. 

The  same  change  is  usual  when    a    vowel- sign  is 

added  below;  thus,  *|  f«,  "*J  $r. 

11.  Other  combinations,  of  not  quite  obvious  value,  are  ^T  nna., 
H  §ta>  TJ  stha;  and  the  compounds  of  ^  h,  as  ^  hna,  jj"  hna. 

12.  In  a  case  or  two,  no  trace  of  the  constituent  letters  is 
recognizable;  thus,  ^  km,  "^  jna, 

13.  The  semivowel  "^  r,  in  making  combinations  with  other 
consonants,  is  treated  in  a  wholly  peculiar  manner,  analogous  with 
that  of  the  vowels.  1.  As  the  first  of  a  group  of  consonants  it  is 
written  with  a  hook  above,  opening  to  the  right  (like  the  subjoined 
sign   of  r) ;    thus,  ^  rka,  J(  rpta.    When   a  compound  consonant 


6  Introduction. 

thus  containing  r  as  its  first  member  is  followed  by  one  of  the 
vowels  i,  I,  e,  o,  ai,  au,  with  or  without  a  nasal  symbol,  the  r- 
sign  must  stand  at  the  extreme  right;  thus,  T%rke,  %f  rko,  %f  r&aw, 
fsjj  rki,  ^f  rki,  ifi  rkam,  oRt1%  r£a?i«,  *ff  rbhim. 

2.  If  pronounced  after  another  consonant  or  consonants,  r  is 
indicated  by  a  slanting  stroke  below,  to  the  left;  thus,  Tlgra,  If  pro, 
?jf  sra,  jj£  rfra.  And,  with  modifications  of  the  preceding  consonant- 
sign  like  those  noted  above,  "^  tra,  ^r  gra.  In  the  middle  of  a 
group,  r  has  the  same  sign  as  at  the  end ;  thus,  JZf  grya,  ^  srva. 

3.  "When  "^  r  is  to  be  combined  with  a  following  ^J  r,  it  is 
the  vowel  which  is  written  in  full,  with  its  initial  character,  and 
the  consonant  in  subordination  to  it;  thus,  ^g  rr,  fa-'ttfa  nirrti. 

14.  Combinations  of  three,  four,  or  even  five  consonants  (this 
latter  excessively  rare)  are  made  according  to  the  same  rules;  thus, 
^  ttva,  ;gr  ddhya,  gr  dvya,  51  drya,  X^  psva,  fljr  tsya,  *gr  ?c?/a, 
Wf  sthya;  ~\|?  nksva,  SJJ  s?r#a,  r^Rr  tsmya;  cfzH  rtsnya. 

15.  Both  MSS.  and  type-fonts  differ  considerably  in  their 
management  of  consonant-combinations,  but  a  little  practice  will 
enable  one  who  is  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  simple  signs  and 
with  the  principles  of  combination  to  decipher,  as  well  as  to  make 
for  himself,  all  such  groups. 

16.  A  sign  ($)  called  the  avagraha,  or  'separator',  is  used  in 
printed  texts  to  mark  the  elision  of  initial  a  after  final  e  or  0  (see 
below,  §  119,  158):  thus  %  SW^l.  te  'bruvan.  But  some  texts, 
especially  those  printed  in  India,  dispense  with  this  sign. 

In  our  transliteration  this  sign  will  be  represented  by  the 
inverted  comma,  as  in  the  example  just  given.  In  the  MSS.  the  $ 
is  also  used  as  a  hyphen,  and  sometimes  as  a  mark  of  hiatus. 

17.  The  sign  •  is  used  to  mark  an  omission  of  something  easily 
understood  (whether  from  the  context,  or  from  previous  knowledge), 


Introduction.  7 

and  thus  becomes  a  mark   of  abbreviation ;  thus,  1RR£  °<P^  0^*T 

^ctas  -tarn  -Una,  i.  e.  gatam  gatena  etc. 

18.  The  only  signs  of  punctuation  are  |  and  ||. 

19.  The  numeral  figures  are 

q  1,  ^  2,  ^  3,  g  4,  q  5,  $  6,  <0  7,  "C  8,  q.  9,  0  0. 
In  combination,  to  express  larger  numbers,  they  are  used  precisely 
as  are  European  digits;  thus,  ^g  24,  gtrq  485,  ^§^0  7620.  This 
system  of  notation  originated  in  India,  and  was  brought  to  Europe 
by  the  Arabs,  who  call  it  the  Indian  system,  as  we  style  it  the 
Arabic. 

20.  In  writing  Sanskrit  the  Hindus  generally  begin  at  the  left 
of  the  letter,  and  make  the  horizontal  top-stroke  last;  thus,  7,  *J, 
Tj  *>  *i>  ID  •'  ■•>  ""•  But  °ften  tne  horizontal  stroke  is  made 
first,  and  the  perpendicular  stroke  added  without  raising  the  pen 
from  the  paper;  thus,  "T,  ^;  1,  ^u, 

System  of  Sounds:  Pronunciation. 

21.  The  Sanskrit  is  used  in  India  to  this  day  very  much  as 
Latin  was  used  in  Europe  in  the  previous  century :  it  is  a  common 
medium  of  communication  between  the  learned,  be  their  native 
tongues  what  they  may,  and  it  is  not  the  vernacular  of  any  district 
whatever.  Hence  it  is  not  strange  that  the  pronunciation  of  San- 
skrit words  varies  greatly  among  scholars  from  different  parts  of 
India ;  and  probably  no  one  system  represents  the  true  ancient 
mode  of  utterance  with  much  exactness. 

I.  Vowels. 

22.  A.  The  a,  i,  and  u-vowels.  These  three  occur  both  short 
and  long,  and  are  to  be  pronounced  in  the  '  Italian '  manner  —  as 

&t(or-)gan  and  father,  pin  and  pique,  pull  and  rule,  respectively.  The 


8  Introduction. 

a-  vowel  stands  in  no  relation  of  kindred  with  any  of  the  classes 
of  consonantal  sounds.  But  the  i-  vowel  is  distinctly  palatal,  and 
the  w-vowel  as  distinctly  labial. 

23.  B.  The  r  and  /-vowels.  Both  of  these  are  plainly  the 
result  of  abbreviating  syllables  containing  a  "^  r  or  ^T  I  along  with 
another  vowel:  r  is  to  be  sounded  like  the  re  in  the  English  fibre, 
I  like  le  in  able.' 

24.  C.  The  diphthongs.  1.  The  e  and  o,  which  are  always 
long,  should  receive  the  long  e  and  o-sounds  of  the  English  they 
and  bone,  without  true  diphthongal  character.  In  their  origin,  both 
were  doubtless  in  the  main  pure  diphthongs  (e  =  a  +  ?',  o  =  a  +  u); 
but  they  lost  this  character  at  a  very  early  period. 

2.  The  ai  and  au  are  spoken  like  the  ai  in  English  aisle  and  au 
in  German  Baum  (ou  in  English  house) ;  that  is,  as  pure  diphthongs 
with  long  prior  element.  They  were  originally,  doubtless,  distin- 
guished from  e  and  o  only  by  the  length  of  the  first  element. 

II.  Consonants. 

25.  A.  Mates.  In  each  series  of  mutes  there  are  two  surd 
members,  two  sonants,  and  one  nasal  (also  sonant);  e.  g.,  in  the 
labial  series,  the  surds  p  and  ph,  the  sonants  b  and  bh,  and  the 
sonant  m. 

26.  The  first  and  third  members  of  each  series  are  the  ordinary 
corresponding  surd  and  sonant  mutes  of  European  languages;  thus, 
k  and  g,  t  and  d,  p  and  b. 

27.  Nor  is  the  character  of  the  nasal  any  more  doubtful. 
What  m  is  to  p  and  b,  or  n  is  to  t  and  d,  that  is  also  each  other 
nasal  to  its  own  series  of  mutes:  a  sonant  expulsion  of  breath  into 
and  through  the  nose,  while  the  mouth-organs  are  in  the  mute- 
contact. 

28.  The  second  and  fourth  of  each  series  are  aspirates;  tj 


" 


Introduction.  9 

beside  the  surd  mute  k  we  have  the  corresponding  surd  aspirate 
kh,  and  beside  the  sonant  g,  the  corresponding  aspirate  gh.  It  is 
u9ual  among  European  scholars  to  pronounce  both  classes  of  aspi- 
rates as  the  corresponding  non- aspirates  with  a  very  closely  fol- 
lowing h;  e.  g.,  th  nearly  as  in  boathouse,  ph  a6  in  haphazard,  dh 
as  in  madhouse.  This  is  inaccurate ;  but  the  question  of  the  original 
pronunciation  of  this  entire  group  of  sounds  is  one  of  great  difficulty, 
and  still  unsettled. 

29.  The  aspirates  are  not  double  letters. 

The  several  mute-series  will  now  be  taken  up  in  detail. 

30.  1.  Gutturals:  k,  kh,  g,  gh,  n.  These  are  the  ordinary 
English  k  and  g  ('lhard")-sounds,  with  their  corresponding  aspirates 
and  nasal;  the  last,  like  ng  in  singing. 

31.  2.  Palatals:  c,  ch,  j,  jh,  n.  This  whole  series  is  derivative, 
being  generated  by  the  corruption  of  original  gutturals.  (The  palatal 
mute  c  and  the  sibilant  c  often  represent  two  successive  stages 
of  corruption  of  A;;  the  corresponding  degrees  of  corruption  of  g  are 
both  represented  by  j.)  For  this  reason  the  euphonic  treatment 
of  the  palatals  is  in  many  respects  peculiar.  The  palatal  mutes 
c  and  j  are  pronounced  with  the  compound  sounds  of  English 
ch  and  j,    as  in  church  and  judge.   See  also  §  28. 

32.  3.  Unguals:  t,  th,  d,  dh,  n.  The  lingual  mutes  are  said 
to  be  uttered  with  the  tip  of  the  tongue  turned  up  and  drawn  back 
into  the  dome  of  the  palate,  somewhat  as  the  English  (or  rather 
American)  smooth  r,  e.  g.  in  very  is  pronounced.  In  practice 
European  Sanskritists  make  no  attempt  to  distinguish  them  from 
the  dentals :  t  is  pronounced  like  t,  d  like  d,  and  so  on. 

33.  4.  Dentals:  t,  th,  d,  dh,  n.  These  are  practically  the 
equivalents  of  our  so-called  dentals  t,  d,  n* 

*  But  the  Hindus  generally  use  Unguals  to  represent  the  English 
dentals;  thus,  <?JUsg«I  landana  -  'London.', 


]  0  Introduction. 

34.  5.  Labials:  p,  ph,  b,  bh,  m.  These  are  exactly  the  equi- 
valents of  the  English  p,  b,  m. 

35.  B.  Semivowels:  y,  r,  I,  v.  1.  The  palatal  semivowel  y 
stands  in  the  closest  relationship  with  the  vowel  i  (short  or  long): 
the  two  exchange  with  one  another  in  cases  innumerable.  Very 
probably  the  Sanskrit  y  had  everywhere  more  of  an  i-character 
than  our  y. 

36.  2.  The  r  is  clearly  a  lingual  sound.  It  thus  resembles 
the  English  smooth  r,  and  like  this  seems  to  have  been  untrilled. 

37.  3.  The  I  is  a  sound  of  dental  position,  quite  as  in  Euglish. 

38.  4.  The  labial  v  is  pronounced  as  English  or  French  v  by 
the  modern  Hindus  —  except  when  preceded  by  a  consonant 
(except  r)  in  the  same  syllable,  when  it  sounds  like  English  w; 
and  European  scholars  follow  the  same  practice  (with  or  without 
the  same  exception).  But  strictly  the  v  stands  related  to  an  u- 
vowel  precisely  as  y  to  an  i-vowel:  that  is,  it  is  a  w- sound  in  the 
English  sense,  or  perhaps  more  like  the  ou  in  French  out.  The 
rules  of  Sanskrit  euphony  affecting  this  sound,  and  the  name  "semi- 
vowel", have  no  application  except  to  such  a  w-sound :  a  v-  sound 
(German  w)  is  no  semivowel,   but  a  spirant,  like  the  English  th 

A  Af         '    €    -tour   fer»;*Af*A     *ri     ,?/<;*.;. 

sounds  and/.       ne     otA-r 


C  &rtJlf~.      f^ot-r. 


39.  C.  Sibilants:  p,  s,  s.  1.  The  s  is  of  plain  character:  a 
dental,  and  exactly  like  the  English  s  (as  in  lesson  —  never  as 
in  ease). 

40.  2.  The  s  is  the  sibilant  pronounced  in  the  lingual  position. 
It  is,  therefore,  a  kind  of  s^-sound,  and  by  Europeans  is  pronounced 
as  ordinary  English  sh,  no  attempt  being  made  to  give  it  its 
proper  lingual  quality. 

41.  3.  The  y  is  by  all  native  authorities  described  as  palatal. 
It  is  the  usual  sh-  sound  of  English,   though  the  Hindus   are  said 


Introduction.  11 

to  speak  it  somewhat  differently  nowadays.     By  Europeans  it  is 
variously  pronounced  —  perhaps  oftener  as  s  than  as  sh. 

42.  All  three  sibilants  are  always  surd. 

43.  D.  Aspiration:  h.  This  is  usually  pronounced  like  the 
ordinary  European  surd  aspiration  h.  But  its  true  value  in  the 
euphony  of  the  language  is  that  of  a  sonant.  It  is  not  an  original 
sound  of  the  language,  but  comes  in  most  cases  from  an  older  gh, 
in  some  few  cases  from  dh  or  bh.  It  appears  to  include  in  itself 
two  stages  of  corruption  of  gh:  one  corresponding  with  that  of  k 
to  c,  the  other  with  that  of  k  to  g. 

44.  E.  Yisarga:  h.  The  h  appears  to  be  merely  a  surd  breath- 
ing, a  final  h-  sound  (in  the  European  sense  of  h),  uttered  in  the 
articulating  position  of  the  preceding  vowel.  The  visarga  is  not 
original,  but  always  a  mere  substitute  for  final  s  or  r. 

45.  F.  Anusvara.  The  anusvdra,  n  or  to,  is  a  nasal  sound 
lacking  that  closure  of  the  organs  which  is  required  to  make  a 
nasal  mute;  in  its  utterance  there  is  nasal  resonance  along  with 
some  degree  of  openness  of  the  mouth.  European  scholars  give 
the  anusvdra  the  value  of  the  nasal  in  the  French  -an,  -on,  -en,  -in, 
etc.,  which  is  a  mere  nasal  coloring  of  the  preceding  vowel. 

46.  Two  different  signs,  Jl  and  2L,  are  used  in  the  MSS.  to 
indicate  the  anusvdra.  Most  commonly  _1  is  employed;  2L  will 
not  often  be  met  with  in  printed  texts,  except  to  mark  the  change 
of  a  nasal  mute  to  anusvdra  before  a  following  semivowel,  parti- 
cularly I;     thus,  HT^lf    ^WT't.  tdnl  labdhdn.    Cf.  §  139. 

47.  It  is  convenient  in  transliteration  to  distinguish  the  assi- 
milated to  (in  all  cases)  by  a  special  sign  to,  from  the  anusvdra  of 
more  independent  origin,  represented  by  n. 


12 


Introduction. 


Light  and  Heavy  Syllables. 

48.  For  metrical  purposes  syllables  (not  vowels)  are  dis- 
tinguished as  'heavy'  and  'light'.  A  syllable  is  heavy  if  its  vowel 
is  long,  or  short  and  followed  by  more  than  one  consonant  ("long 
by  position  ").  Visarga  and  anusvara  are  here  counted  as  full  con- 
sonants. The  aspirated  mutes,  of  course,  do  not  count  as  double 
letters. 

Changes  of  Sounds.    Guna  and  Vrddhi. 

49.  The  changes  to  which  both  the  vowels  and  the  consonants 
of  Sanskrit,  are  subject  are  very  numerous.  Among  the  vowel- 
changes,  the  most  regular  and  frequent  are  the  so-called  guna  and 
vrddhi,  which  are  of  frequent  occurrence  in  derivation  and  inflection. 

50.  The  following  table  exhibits  these  changes: 


Simple  vowels 

~%<i   ^n  a 

\i   t* 

^  U       ^|  M 

*Br 

Guna 

^H  a    "95IT  a 

He 

^r  o 

^rjT  ar 

Vrddhi 

,?TT  a 

T£  ai 

^stt  a>u 

"^TT  ar 

51.  Theoretically  the  changes  of  r  would  coincide  with  those 
of  r,  and  the  vrddhi  of  /  would  be  al;  but  actual  cases  of  these 
are  quite  unknown.  The  guna  of  /  is  al  (just  as  that  of  r  is  ar), 
but  it  occurs  only  in  one  root,  kip.  As  will  be  seen  in  the  sequel, 
the  <7wna-sound  coincides  with  the  result  of  the  combination  of 
an  ^  a  with  the  simple  vowel  corresponding  to  that  guna;  thus,  ^J  a 
combines  with  a  following  f;  i  or  ^  l  into  TJ  e,  which  is  also  the 
guna  of  ^  i  and  ^  *•  The  vrddhi,  in  like  maimer,  is  identical 
with  the  result  of  combining  an  ^  a  with  the  corresponding 
guna;  thus,  ^J  a  combines  with  a  following  XJ  e  into  X[  ai,  the 
vrddhi  of  ^  i  and  ^[  I.  For  the  present  the  table  is  to  be  learned 
outright. 

52.    In  all  gunating  processes  ^  a  remains  unchanged  —  or, 


Introduction.  13 

as  it  is  sometimes  expressed,  ^J  a  is  its  own  guna;  ^n  &  remains 
unchanged  for  both  guna  and  vrddhi. 

53.  The  guna-  increment  does  not,  except  in  exceedingly  rare 
instances,  take  place  in  a  heavy  syllable  (see  §  48)  ending  in  a 
consonant:  e.  g.,  f%t^  tit  may  become  %<^  cet,  and  «ft  nl  may 
become  %  ne;  but  f^«fT  tint  or  fa«^  mntf  or  iffa  7'w  may  not 
become  ^fnf   cent  or  ipB  wenrf  or  ^^  jev. 

V  V  N 

54.  Other  changes  of  vowels  and  consonants  occur  very  fre- 
quently, in  the  making-up  of  single  words  from  roots,  by  means 
of  suffixes  and  endings,  and  in  the  formation  of  compound  words 
by  the  union  of  two  or  more  stems  —  a  process  of  the  very 
greatest  frequency  in  Sanskrit.  Furthermore,  in  the  form  in  which 
the  language  is  handed  down  to  us  by  the  literature,  the  words 
composing  a  sentence  or  paragraph  are  adapted  to  and  combined 
with  each  other  by  nearly  the  same  rules  as  those  which  govern  the 
making  of  compounds,  so  that  it  is  impossible  to  take  apart  and 
understand  the  simplest  sentence  in  Sanskrit  without  understanding 
those  rules.  The  most  important  of  the  rules  for  such  combination 
will  be  given  piecemeal  in  the  lessons. 

Roots  and  Stems. 

55.  A  knowledge  on  the  student's  part  of  the  meaning  and 
application  of  the  terms  root,  stem,  personal  ending,  etc.,  is  pre- 
supposed. The  formative  processes  by  which  both  inflectional 
forms  and  derivative  stems  are  made,  by  the  addition  of  endings 
to  bases  and  roots,  are  more  regular  and  transparent  in  Sanskrit 
than  in  any  other  Indo-European  language.* 

In  the  present  work,  which  aims  preeminently  to  give  the 
student  considerable  practical  acquaintance  with  the  language 
within  a  brief  compass  of  lessons,  not  every  given  form  will  be 
explained  by  analysis.  But  wherever  any  explanation  of  forms  is 
given,  it  will  of  course  be  according  to  this  method. 


14  Introduction. 

Accent 

56.  The  phenomena  of  accent  are,  by  the  Hindu  grammarians 
of  all  ages  alike,  described  and  treated  as  depending  on  a  variation 
of  tone  or  pitch;  of  any  difference  of  stress  involved,  they  make 
no  account.  These  accents  are  marked  only  in  certain  Vedic  texts, 
and  employed  only  in  their  recitation,  whereas  the  accents  used 
nowadays  by  Hindus  in  the  pronunciation  of  Sanskrit  (and  left 
undenoted  in  writing)  are  mainly  ictus-accents,  i.  e.  variations  of 
stress.  The  principles  of  the  latter  system  will  be  given  in  an 
appendix.  The  older  system  of  accents  has  great  etymological  im- 
portance; the  latter  none  whatever;  and  only  the  older  system 
will  be  referred  to  in  the  following.  Here  it  will  be  enough  to  state 
that  the  primary  tones  or  accent-pitches  of  the  older  system  are 
two:  a  higher,  or  acute;  and  a  lower,  or  grave.  A  third,  called 
svarita,  is  always  of  secondary  origin,  being  ordinarily  the  result 
of  actual  combination  of  an  acute  vowel  and  a  grave  vowel  into 
one  syllable.  It  is  uniformly  defined  as  compound  in  pitch,  a  union 
of  higher  and  lower  tone  within  the  limits  of  a  single  syllable.  It 
is  thus  identical  in  physical  character  with  the  Greek  and  Latin 
circumflex,  and  fully  entitled  to  be  called  by  the  same  name. 
Whenever,  in  the  sequel,  accent  is  mentioned,  without  further  de- 
finition, the  acute  accent  is  to  be  understood;  and  it  will  be  de- 
signated by  the  ordinary  acute  sign. 

Conjugation  of  Verbs. 

57.  The  Sanskrit  verb  exhibits  the  closest  analogy  with  that 
of  Greek,  being  developed  in  tense-systems,  as  outgrowths  of  certain 
tense-stems.  In  the  older  stage  of  the  language,  i.  e.  in  the  so- 
called  Vedic  period,  the  modal  ramifications  of  each  tense -stem 
are  as  numerous  as  in  Greek;  but  in  the  later  stage,  the  Sanskrit 
proper  (also  called  the  classical  language),    these  outgrowths  have 


Introduction.  15 

been  lopped  off  to  so  very  great  an  extent,  that  with  one  insigni- 
ficant exception,  the  precative  or  aorist  optative,  only  the  present- 
system  still  retains  any  modal  variety  whatever. 

58.  There  is  a  simple  or  ordinary  conjugation  of  verbal  roots, 
which  we  call  primary;  and  there  are  certain  more  or  less  fully 
developed  secondary  or  derivative  conjugations  (§  69). 

59.  Voices.  There  are  two  voices,  active  and  middle,  which  extend 
throughout  the  whole  system  of  conjugation.  For  the  present- 
system  alone  there  is  a  special  passive  inflection;  the  middle  forms 
outside  that  system,  and  sometimes  even  within  it,  are  liable  to 
be  used  likewise  in  a  passive  sense.  An  active  form  is  called  by 
the  Hindu  grammarians  parasmdi  padam  'word  for  another';  a 
middle  form,  atmane  padam  'word  for  one's  self.'  Some  verbs  are 
conjugated  in  both  voices,  others  in  one  only;  sometimes  some  of 
the  tenses  are  inflected  only  in  one  voice,  others  only  in  the  other 
voice,  or  in  both ;  of  a  verb  usually  inflected  in  one  voice  sporadic 
forms  of  the  other  occur;  and  sometimes  the  voice  differs  as  the 
verb  is  compounded  with  certain  prepositions. 

60.  Persons  and  Numbers.  There  are  three  persons:  first, 
second,  and  third;  and,  as  with  substantives,  adjectives,  and  pro- 
nouns, three  numbers:  singular,  dual,  and  plural.  All  these  persons 
and  numbers  are  made  from  every  tense  and  mode — except  that 
the  first  persons  of  the  imperative  are  really  subjunctive  forms. 

61.  The  native  grammarians  denote  as  the  first  person  what 
we  call  the  third;  and  as  we  are  wont  to  speak  of  the  verb  Xeyuj, 
the  verb  ^o^uou,  the  verb  aino,  etc.,  so  the  Hindus  use  for  instance 
M<tfa  bhdvati  (3rd  sing.  pres.  indie,  of  j  bhu)  to  signify  the  whole 
system  of  verbal  forms  from  that  root,  since  ^^fa  heads  the  list 
of  forms  in  the  native  grammar,  as  Xeyw,  or  sp-^ofxxi,  or  amo,  does 
in  Greek  or  Latin.    The  Hindus   even  make  substantives  out  of  ' 


1 6  Introduction. 

such  catchword  forms,  and  inflect  them  according  to  the  needs  of 
expression. 

62.  In  the  following,  the  conjugation -class  of  verbs  will  be 
indicated  by  the  3rd  sing.  pres.  ind.,  placed  in  parenthesis  after 
the  root ;  thus,  V  bhu  (*r^"frT  bhdvati). 

63.  Tenses  and  modes.  The  scheme  of  tenses  and  modes  put 
forth  by  the  Hindus  holds  good  only  for  the  later  language,  and 
even  there  utterly  confounds  the  ideas  of  mode  and  tense. 

64.  The  only  logical  arrangement  of  the  modes  and  tenses  in 
Sanskrit  is  shown  in  the  following  table  (which  includes  only  the 
classical  speech): 

I.  Present -System:   a.  Indicative,    b.  Imperfect,    c.  Imperative. 
d.  Optative,   e.  Participle. 
II.  Perfect- System,    a.  Indicative,     b.  Participle. 

III.  Aorist  Systems  (of  triple  formation),     a.  Indicative,    b.  Op- 
tative (sometimes  =  "Precative"). 

IV.  Future  Systems. 

A.  Sibilant  Future,  a.  Indicative,  b.  Preterit(=  "Conditional''). 
c.  Participle. 

B.  Periphrastic  Future,   a.  Indicative. 

65.  The  tenses  here  distinguished  as  imperfect,  perfect,  and 
aorist  receive  those  names  from  their  correspondence  in  mode  of 
formation  with  tenses  so  called  in  other  languages  of  the  family, 
especially  in  Greek,  and  not  at  all  from  any  differences  of  time 
designated  by  them.  In  no  period  of  the  Sanskrit  language  is 
there  any  expression  of  imperfect  or  pluperfect  time  —  nor  of 
perfect  time,  except  in  the  older  language,  where  the  "aorist"  has 
this  value;  in  the  later  speech,  imperfect,  perfect,  and  aorist  (of 
rare  use)  are  so  many  undiscriminated  past  tenses  or  preterits. 


Introduction.  17 

Verbal  Adjectives  and  Substantives. 

66.  Participles.  The  participles  belonging  to  the  tense-systems 
have  been  already  indicated  in  the  table  at  §64.  There  is,  besides, 
a  participle  formed  directly  from  the  root  of  the  verb,  which  is 
prevailingly  of  past  and  passive  (sometimes  neuter)  meaning. 
Moreover,  future  passive  participles,  or  gerundives,  of  several 
different  formations,  are  made,  but  without  connection  with  the 
future-stems. 

67.  Infinitive*  The  classical  Sanskrit  has  a  single  infinitive. 
It  is  really  an  accusative  case  of  a  verbal  noun,  having  nothing 
whatever  to  do  with  the  tense-systems. 

68.  Gerund.  A  so-called  gerund,  or  absolutive,  is  especially 
frequent,  and  is,  like  the  infinitive,  a  stereotyped  case -form  (in- 
strumental) of  a  derivative  verbal  noun.  Its  value  is  that  of  an 
indeclinable  active  participle,  with  indeterminate,  but  oftenest  past, 
temporal  force. 

Secondary  Conjugations. 

69.  The  secondary  conjugations  are  as  follows:  1.  Passive; 
2.  Intensive;  3.  Desiderative;  4.  Causative.  In  these,  not  the 
simple  root,  but  a  conjugation-stem,  underlies  the  whole  system 
of  inflections.  Yet  in  them  all  is  plainly  visible  the  character  of 
a  present-system,  expanded  into  a  more  or  less  complete  conjuga- 
tion;   the  passive  is  palpably  a  present-system.  Compare  §  58—59. 

70.  Under  the  same  general  head  belong:  5.  Denominative 
conjugation,  which  results  from  the  conversion  of  noun-stems,  both 
substantive  and  adjective,  into  conjugation-stems;  6.  Compound  con- 
jugation, resulting  from  the  prefixion  of  prepositions  to  roots,  or 
from  the  addition  of  auxiliary  verbs  to  noun-stems ;  and  7.  Periphrastic 
conjugation,  from  the  looser  combination  of  auxiliaries  with  verbal 
nouns  and  adjectives. 

Perry,  Sanskrit  Primer.  n 


18  Introduction. 

71.  The  characteristic  of  a  proper  (i.  e.  finite  or  personal) 
verb-form  is  its  personal  ending.  By  this  alone  is  determined  its 
character  as  regards  person  and  number,  and  in  part  also  as  regards 
mode  and  tense.  But  the  distinctions  of  mode  and  tense  are 
mainly  made  by  the  formation  of  mode  and  tense-stems,  to  which, 
instead  of  to  the  bare  root,  the  personal  endings  are  appended. 

Conjugation  -  Classes. 

72.  Of  the  whole  conjugation,  the  present -system  is  the  im- 
portant and  prominent  part.  Its  forms  are  very  much  more  fre- 
quent than  those  of  all  the  other  systems  together.  As  there  is 
also  great  variety  in  the  manner  in  which  different  roots  form  their 
present-stems,  this,  as  being  their  most  conspicuous  difference,  is 
made  the  basis  of  their  principal  classification;  and  a  verb  is  said 
to  be  of  this  or  that  conjugation,  or  class,  according  to  the  way 
in  which  its  present-stem  is  made. 

73.  Of  these  conjugation- classes  there  are  nine,  including  the 
passive,  which  is  really  a  present-system  only.  The  first  five 
exhibit  coincidences  enough  to  justify  their  inclusion  into  one  con- 
jugation, and  the  remaining  four  will  compose  likewise  a  second 
conjugation.  The  chief  distinctions  between  the  two  groups  are 
as  follows: 

74.  In  the  first,  the  classes  have  in  common,  as  their  funda- 
mental characteristic,  a  shift  of  accent :  the  tone  is  now  upon  the 
personal  ending,  now  upon  the  root  or  the  class-sign.  Along  with 
this  goes  a  variation  in  the  stem  itself,  which  has  a  stronger,  or 
fuller,  form  when  the  accent  rests  upon  it,  and  a  weaker,  or  briefer^ 
form  when  the  accent  is  on  the  ending.  We  distinguish  these 
forms  as  the  strong  and  the  weak  stem-forms  respectively. 

75.  In  the  second  conjugation,  on  the  contrary,  the  accent 
has  a  fixed  place,   remaining  always  upon  the  same  syllable  of  the 


Introduction.  19 

stem,  and  never  being  shifted  to  the  endings ;  and  the  distinction  of 
strong  and  weak  forms  is  unknown.  Moreover,  the  present-stem 
of  every  verb  in  the  four  classes  of  this  conjugation  ends  in  ^  a. 
There  are  also  other  points  of  difference. 

76.  The  classification  current  among  the  Hindu,  and  hitherto 
among  the  European ,  grammarians  comprises  ten  conjugation- 
classes,  arranged  according  to  no  intelligible  principle  whatever. 
The  native  "tenth  class"  is  really  no  present-class  at  all,  but  a 
causative,  i.  e.  a  derivative  conjugation,  which  extends  beyond  the 
limits  of  the  present-system.  Probably  the  fact  that  by  no  means 
all  conjugation- stems  formed  by  the  causative  sign  had  really  a 
causative  value  induced  the  natives  to  adopt  such  a  present- class. 
The  Hindu  scheme  also  quite  omits  the  passive. 

77.  The  Hindu  first,  sixth,  fourth,  and  tenth  classes  form  the  so- 
called  first  conjugation  of  their  scheme,  which  corresponds,  except  as 
regards  the  tenth  class,  with  our  second  conjugation.  The  remainder 
of  the  classes  form  the  natives'  second  conjugation,  which  agrees 
in  the  main  with  our  first. 

78.  The  classes  are  then  as  follows: 

First  Conjugation. 

I.  The  root-class  (second  or  orf-class,  of  the  Hindus);  its 
present-stem  is  coincident  with  the  root  itself;  thus,  ^1^  ad,  'eat'; 
\h  'go';  f^TO  dvis,  'hate'. 

II.  The  reduplicating  class  (third  or  /m-class) ;  the  rool  is 
reduplicated  to  form  the  present- stem;  thus,  *fW  juhu  from  \'\  hu, 
'sacrifice';  ^^T  dada  from  Ida,  'give'. 

III.  The  nasal  class  (seventh  or  rudh-d&ss);  a  nasal,  extended 
to  the  syllable  na  [na]  in  strong  forms,  is  inserted  before  the  final 
consonant  of  the  root ;  thus,  ^«tr  rundh  (or  ^ZOV  runadh)  from 
^V   rudh,  'hinder'. 

9* 


20  Introduction. 

IV.  a.  The  ww-class  (fifth  or  su- class);  the  syllable  «f  nu  is 
added  to  the  root;  thus,  H«I  sunu  from  j/^J  su,  'press.' 

b.  A  very  small  number  of  roots  (only  half-a-dozen)  ending 
already  in  «^  n,  and  also  one  very  common  and  irregularly  inflected 
root  not  so  ending  (efi  kr,  'make'),  add  ^  u  alone  to  form  the 
present-stem.  This  is  the  eighth  or  tan-  class  of  the  Hindu  gram- 
marians; it  is  best  ranked  as  a  sub-class,  the  u-class;  thus,  <T5T  tanu 
from  l/<f^  tan,  'stretch.' 

V.  The  nd-  class  (ninth  or  kri-  class);  the  syllable  «fT  nd  (or, 
in  weak  forms,  «ft  ni)  is  added  to  the  root;  thus,  SJffan  krlnd  (or 
sftllH  krini)  from  \'^\  kri,  'buy'.    See  note**,  p.  32. 

Second  Conjugation. 

VI.  The  a-class,  or  unaccented  a-class  (first  or  &M-class); 
the  added  class-sign  is  a  simply ;  and  the  root,  which  bears  the 
accent,  is  strengthened  by  guna  throughout,  if  it  be  capable  of 
taking  guna  (see  §§  52—53);  thus,  1^  bhdva  (through  the  inter- 
mediate stage  bho-a)  from  y  vbhu,  'be.' 

VII.  The  a-class,  or  accented  a-class  (sixth  or  tud- class) ; 
the  added  class-sign  is  a,  as  in  the  preceding  class;  but  it  has  the 
accent,  and  the  unaccented  root  is  not  strengthened  by  guna;  thus, 
7Tq[  tudd  from  \!  Tfir  tud,  'thrust.' 

VIII.  The  ya-  class  (fourth  or  ofty-class) ;  ya  is  added  to  the 
root,  which  has  the  accent;  thus,  d\<H  divya  from  l'^fa^  dlv  (by 
the  Hindus  given  as  "fe^    div),  'play.' 

IX.  The  passive  conjugation  is  also  properly  a  present-system 
only,  having  a  class-sign  which  is  not  extended  into  the  other 
systems;  though  it  differs  markedly  from  the  remaining  classes 
in  having  a  specific  meaning,  and  in  being  formable  from  all  tran- 
sitive verbs,  but  with  endings  of  the  middle   voice    only.     It  forms 


Introduction.  21 

its  stem  by  adding  an  accented  yd  to  the  root;  thus,  from  j'^TCT  ad, 
^JTir  adyd;  from  j/^ff  rudh,  ^pzr  rudhyd. 

79.  Roots  are  not  wholly  limited,  even  in  the  later  language, 
to  one  mode  of  formation  of  their  present-stem,  but  are  sometimes 
reckoned  as  belonging  to  two  or  more  different  conjugation-classes. 

80.  The  verbs  of  our  second  conjugation  show  much  greater 
simplicity  of  formation  and  inflection  and  are  far  more  frequent 
and  numerous  than  those  of  our  first;  their  paradigms  will  there- 
fore  be  given  before  those  of  our  first. 

Prepositions  and  Prepositional  Prefixes. 

81.  Prepositions,  or,  more  strictly  speaking,  adverbial  prefixes, 
are  used  with  verbs  quite  as  frequently  in  Sanskrit  as  in  Greek; 
and  more  than  one  may  be  prefixed.  Thus  when  v'^V  budh  -f-  TjT9f 
anu  is  given  in  the  vocabulary,  this  signifies  that  the  preposition 
^l«J  is  prefixed  to  the  proper  verbal  form;  and  the  3rd  sing.  pres. 
ind.  act.  of  the  verb  would  then  be  ^Sf«T^t\jf?f  anubodhati;  so  dhd 
+  ^^-^TT  (or  ^WT)  sam-d,  3rd  sing.  ^mi^VJTfrT  samadadhati.  The 
rules  prevailing  in  Greek  for  the  prefixion  of  prepositions,  etc.,  to 
verbal  forms  will  be  found  to  hold  good  in  Sanskrit. 

82.  There  is  in  Sanskrit  no  proper  class  of  prepositions  (in 
the  modern  sense  of  the  term);  no  body  of  words  having  as  their 
exclusive  office  the  "government"  of  nouns.  But  many  adverbial 
words  are  used  with  nouns  in  a  way  which  approximates  them 
to  the  more  fully  developed  prepositions  of  other  languages.  Words 
are  used  prepositionally  along  with  all  the  noun-cases,  except  the 
dative  (and  of  course  the  nominative  and  vocative).  But  in  general 
their  office  is  directive  only,  determining  more  definitely,  or 
strengthening,  the  proper  case-use  of  the  noun. 


22  Introduction. 

Declension. 

83.  The  declension  of  substantives  and  that  of  adjectives  cor- 
respond so  closely  that  the  two  classes  of  words  must  be  treated 
together.  The  pronouns  and  numerals,  on  the  other  hand,  exhibit 
here  as  in  the  kindred  languages  many  striking  peculiarities. 

84.  Numbers  and  Genders.  There  are  three  numbers,  singular, 
dual,  and  plural;  and  the  usual  three  genders,  masculine,  feminine, 
and  neuter.  The  dual  is  used  much  more  extensively  than  in 
Greek,  where  it  appears  in  a  moribund  state. 

85.  Cases.  The  cases  are  eight  in  number,  given  generally  in  the 
following  order :  nominative,  accusative,  instrumental,  dative,  ablative, 
genitive,  locative,  and  vocative.  The  object  sought  in  the  arrange- 
ment is  simply  to  set  next  to  one  another  those  cases  which  are 
to  a  greater  or  less  extent,  in  one  number  or  another,  identical  in 
form;  and,  putting  the  nominative  first,  as  leading  case,  there  is 
no  other  order  by  which  that  object  could  be  attained. 

For  the  uses  of  the  cases  in  detail  see  Wli.  §§  267—305. 

86.  The  stems  of  substantives  and  adjectives  may  for  convenience 
be  classified  as  follows:  I.  Stems  in  ^  a.  II.  Stems  in  \i  and  ^  u. 
III.  Stems  in  ^TTd,  %  I,  and  ^?  u:  namely,  A.  radical- stems,  and  a 
few  others  inflected  like  them;  B.  derivative  stems.  IV. "Stems  in 
^g[  r  (or  ^J"^  or).     V.  Stems  in  consonants. 

87.  Strong  and  weak  cases.  In  stems  ending  in  consonants, 
and  those  in  ^jf  r  (or  ^T^  ar)->  tnere  *s  9een  a  distinction  of  stem- 
form  in  different  cases.  Sometimes  the  stem-forms  are  two,  when 
they  are  called  strong  and  weak  respectively;  sometimes  three: 
strong,  middle,  and  weakest.  As  is  the  case  with  verbs,  this  variation 
of  stem-form  often  goes  hand-in-hand  with  a  shift  of  accent. 

88.  In  the  masculine  and  feminine,  the  strong  cases  are  the 
nom.  and  ace,  both  sing,  and  dual,  and  the  nom.  pi.    The  rest 


Introduction.  23 

are  weak  ;  or,  if  there  be  the  distinction  of  three  stem-forms,  then 
the  instr.,  dat.,  abl.,  gen.,  and  loc.  sing.,  the  gen.  and  loc.  du., 
and  the  gen.  pi.  (all  of  which  take  endings  beginning  with  a  vowel), 
are  weakest;  and  the  instr.,  dat.,  and  abl.  du.,  the  instr.,  dat.,  abl., 
and  loc.  pi.  (whose  endings  begin  with  consonants),  are  middle. 

89.  In  the  neuter,  the  only  strong  cases  are  the  nom.  and 
ace.  pi. ;  if  there  be  the  triple  distinction,  then  the  nom.  and  ace. 
sing,  are  middle,  and  the  same  cases  in  the  dual  are  weakest. 
Otherwise  the  cases  are  classified  as  in  the  masculine. 

90.  Case-ending's.  The  normal  scheme  of  case -endings,  as 
recognized  by  the  native  grammarians  (and  conveniently  to  be 
assumed  as  the  basis  of  special  descriptions),  is  this: 


Singuli 

ir 

Dual 

Plural 

m.  f. 

n. 

m.f.       n. 

m.  f.      n. 

N. 

s 

m 

au         i 

as          i 

A. 

am 

du         * 
bhydm 

as         i 

I. 

a 

bhis 

D. 

e 

bhydm 

bhyas 

Ab. 

as 

bhydm 

bhyas 

G. 

as 

OS 

dm 

L. 

i 

OS 

su 

It  applies  entire  to  consonant-stems,  and  to  the  radical  division 
of  I  and  w-stems ;  and  to  other  vowel-stems,  with  considerable 
variations  and  modifications.  The  endings  which  have  almost  or 
quite  unbroken  range,  through  stems  of  all  classes,  are  bhydm  and 
os  of  the  dual,  and  bhis,  bhyas,  dm,  and  su  of  the  plural. 

91.  Pada-endings.  The  case-endings  bhydm,  bhis,  bhyas,  and 
su  —  i.  e.  those  of  the  middle  cases  —  are  called  pada  ("word")- 
endings.  The  treatment  of  stem-finals  before  them  is  generally  the 
same  as  in  the  combinations  of  words  with  one  another. 


I 


24  Lesson  I. 


Lesson  I. 

92.  Verbs.  Present  Indicative  active.  Unaccented  a-class.  A 
number  of  roots  conjugated  in  this  class  have  medial  short  ^  a. 
Inasmuch  as  "^ST  a  is  its  own  guna",  these  roots  merely  add  an  ^Jf  a 
to  form  the  present-stem;  e.  g.,  ^?  vad,  present-stem  ?T?  vdda. 
The  final  ^|  a  of  the  stem  is  lengthened  in  the  three  first  persons. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

i*  «ldlPH  vddfcmi  c(rf  M^  vdddvas  ^d\MH^  vdddmas 

2.  <f£'f4|  vdda/si  cj^VJJ^  vddajthas  o|^\i|  vddatha 

3.  ^<?f?l  vdddti  c|dr1^  vddakas  '^fnT  vddantt 

93.  The  ending  of  the  3rd  plur.  is  properly  ^jf«rT  a«#;  it  suffers 
abbreviation,  however,  by  the  loss  of  its  ^  a,  in  verbs  whose  stem 
ends  in  ^  a. 

94.  As  a  heavy  syllable  ending  in  a  consonant  cannot  be  gunated, 
a  root  like  ^H  jiv  makes  its  3rd  sing,  ^fffafff  jlvati;  f«i«d  nimi 
makes  f«i«d  (d  nindati,  etc.     See  §  53. 

*>W.  v*U»'  95  Euphonic  rule.  At  the  end  of  a  word  standing  in  the 
final  position  of  a  sentence,  or  alone,  ^  s  and  T  r  always  become 
visarija  ',  h;  and  generally  also  before  3  k,  *§f  kh,  T£  p,  VH  p/i,  and 
before  sibilants  [T([  p,  IT  s,  ^T  s],  whether  these  stand  in  the  same 
word,  or  as  initial  in  the  following  word;  e.  g.  ef^cTO  tj«fT 
vadatas  punar  becomes  always  eftf  iff:  q*H  vadatah  punah. 

96.  Force  of  the  present.  The  present  indicative  signifies 
1.  Present  time.  2.  Immediate  futurity.  3.  Past  time,  in  lively 
narration    ("historical  present"). 


-»  *. 


Lesson  I. 


25 


Vocabulary  I. 

Verbs  to  be  conjugated  like  ^^  vad: 

^"^  oar  (intr.)  go,  wander,  graz 


(ofcattle);(tr.)  perform,  commit. 
Sffa  jlv  live. 
f€T5T    tyqj  leave,  abandon. 
5TB  dah  burn. 
\JT^  dhav  run. 
•p^  nam  (intr.)  bow,   bend  one's 

self*;  (tr.)  honor,  reverence. 
TJ^r  pac  cook. 


■^  pat  fall ;  fly. 

"STSf   yaj  sacrifice  (c.  ace.  pers.  et 

instr.  rei). 
"5TJW   raks  protect. 
^Z  vad  speak,  say. 
^^  vas  dwell. 
^^  vah  (tr.)  carry,  bear;  (intr.) 

flow,  blow,  proceed. 
■5^  <;ans  praise. 


*MTU{  atas 


hence  TTfT?^  t°ta 


Adverbs  and  Conjunctions. 

J 


thence 

therefore 

thereupon 


^T^  atra       •  here 
^  iha  j  hither 


X^^ittliamf 


in  this  way 


so 


«pra;  kutas  \ 


whence? 
why? 


^SSWTT  a'ihuna  now 
^SRI  adya  to-day 
Tr^T^  eram  so,  thus 
TP^  eva  just,  exactly 


fpl  tatra 


TTOT  tatha 


ara  kutra 
gi  kva 


I 

( 

Iwhe 
whi 


there 

thither 

y<» titer 

in  that  way 
so 


ere? 
ther? 


^fff^  yatas 


^m  yatra 


whence 
wherefore 

where 
whither 


I  in  w 
as: 


which  way 


r\d\  tada  then 

ORT^  sarvatra  everywhere 

^f?T  iti  so,  thas 

^  ca  (postpos.)  -que 


Ifzn  yalh 


t%*4*y  katham  how? 
^RTf  kada  when? 

Qd\  yadd  wl         't 
...»n   .akes  pla* 

**^1  a  stem,  whether 

*T  'f  as  converted  into 

M 

vr**  instead  of  ^f*T<^ 


26  Lesson  I.  II. 

Exercise  I. 

15.  *Todayx  they  abandon2.  16.  Now1  ye  go2.  17.  Always1  / 
protect2.  18.  We  two  bow1  again2.  19.  Whither1  runnest2  thouJ 
20.  We  sacrifice.  21.  They  ttoo  cook.  22.  Ye  abandon.  23.  He 
burns.  24.  Now1  we  live2.  25.  Ye  two  praise.  26.  Why2  do  ye 
bend1?     27.  There1  they  fly2.     28.  Where1  do  ye  dwell2? 

Lesson  II. 

97.  Verbs.  Unaccented  a- class,  cont'd.  Roots  of  this  class 
■which  end  in  a  vowel,  and  consonant- roots  not  forming  heavy 
syllables  (§53),  gunate  their  vowels  in  forming  their  present-stems; 

J-*  e      e.  g.,  faji  and  «ftni  fc>rm  %./e  and  %  7<e>'  3"  dru  and  *1  Mw  form 
~>  ^      jft  rfro  and  ^t  bho;  ^ff  smr  forms  *jq"^  smar;  f^ft^  cit  and  ^\^  budh 
I '  ****  form  %c^  cet  and  ^t^  *orf/f;  oT^  vrs  forms  ^^  wars. 

98.  With  the  class-  sign  tQ  a,  a  final  TJ  e  of  the  gunated  root 
unites  to  form  ^STO  aya  —  see  §  159;  so  ^ff  o  with  ^  «  becomes 
^f  ava;  ^fT  ar  with  ^  a  yields  ^n;  ara.    Thus,  f^  ji,  3rd  sing. 

>l  WSTR!i%«-^;  1  °^  Wm  bkdvati;  ^T  smr  W^m  smarati. 

99.  Roots  in  consonants:  ^ST^  6wdA,  3rd  sing.  ^farf?T  bodha'i ; 
f^<^  c#,  %rTf?T  cetati:  efq  wrs,  cmfrT  vdrsati. 


*  The    superior  figures  indicate  the  position  in    the  Sanskrit 

sentence  of  equivalents  for  the  words  so  designated.     By  this  indi- 

, ,  aiao    -s  pyojdej  tne   necessity   of  applying  euphonic  rules  wh.ch 

96.     Force  <>en  stated.    The  order  of  words  in  Sanskrit  is  very 

,    „  .  influences  the  meaning  of  the  sentence.     From  the 

l  resent   i ini(b. 

^r  of  words  required  in  the  Sanskrit  sentence  will 

narration    ("histori  Words  in  Ital;M  are  QOt  t0  be  transiated. 


/ 


Lesson  II.  27 

100.  The  roots  IPR^  gam  and  7f1{  yam  make  the  present-stems 
If^  gdccha  and  HvQ  ydccha*. 

101.  The  root  ^fT  sac/,  'sit',  makes  the  present-stem  ^fte  sida. 
The  root  ^J^  at/A,  'hide',  makes  *I«frl  guhati. 

102.  Several  roots  in  final  t5U  a  form  their  present-stem  by  a 
peculiar  process  of  reduplication ;  thus,  ^fT  sthd,  3rd  sing,  frf8(d 
ththati**;  TTT  pa  f^f?T  pibati ;  1JT  ghrd  fayfd  jighrati. 

103.  Masculines  and  Neuters  in  ^  a. 

a.  Masculines:  <*^  deva,  'god'. 

Singular.  Dual.       v                     Plural. 

N.      ^^^  devas  %^  devdu  \^TT^  devas 

Ace.   ^"?RF^  devam  „  ^^T'l,  devdn 

Voc.  ^  deva  "                                     Je</«*    farr.) 

b.  Neuters:  Tfffi  phala,  'fruit'. 

N.       RPH9{  phalanx  n%  phale  (a  + 1)      lMlf«1  phaldni 
Ace.           r>  »  » 
Voc.  Ttf^f  phala.                                   t*  " 
— -v  -                   l<*^  <%  a-//  Ae*1*  "*'">**  soc^f.'c 

*  As  a  rule,  the  grammarians  do  not  allow  ^  ch  to  stand  in 
that  form  after  a  vowel,  but  require  it  to  be  doubled,  becoming 
x§g"  cch.  An  aspirate  is  doubled  by  prefixing  the  corresponding 
non-aspirate.  Cf.  §  165. 

**  The  dental  sibilant  ^  s  is  changed  to  the  lingual  H  «,  if  5-*$ 
immediately  preceded  by  any  vowel  save  ^Sf  a  and  tJIT  a,  or  by 
"a  k  or  T  t  —  unless  the  ^  s  be  final,  or  followed  by  "^  r.  Thus, 
f/d^lTd  ti-stha-ti  becomes  fjfgffff  tisthati  (the  change  of  ^T  th  to 
"S  th  —  a  process  of  assimilation  —  will  be  explained  below).  So 
■^rf^TO  agni-su  becomes  <*|ftlM  agnisu;  and  V*nHT  dhanus-d  becomes 
\HMI  dhanusd. 


The  nasalization  of  the  alterant  vowel,  or  in  other  words,  its 

jg  followed  by  anusvdra,  does  not  prevent  its  altering  effect  upon 

o   own  sibiiant.  thus,  ^cHffq  havimi.     And  the  alteration  takes  place 

in  the  initial  of  an  ending  after  the  final  "8  s  of  a  stem,  whether 

the  iatter  be  regarded  as  also  changed  to  H  s  or  as  converted  into 

rga;  thus,  ff%^  havu-su  or  ^Tfa:*|  havih-su  instead  of  fftT^J 


vtso 
havis-su 


28 


Lesson  II. 


Mom- 
Ace. 


CX+  e 

■  at- 


o 


%\ 

at 


104.    Force  of  cases.      1.  The  nominative  is  casus  mbjectivus. 
2.  The  accusative  is  casus  objectivus,  denoting  chiefly  the  nearer  or 
direct,  sometimes  however  the  more  remote,  object;  sometimes  also 
the  terminus  ad  quern,  and  extent  of  time  and  space. 
105.   Euphonic  combination  of  vowels. 

1.  ^f  a  or^a+^lor  "31T  =  "^ff-    e.  g.  l[r{J  ^fa  gata  api 
=  IfTTfa  gataJpi. 

2.  ^or^fl+S;  *  ort^i  =  X[e.    e.  g.  TOTT  +  tfTT^  =  ifftfftgateZii. 

3.  "^T  or  "?rr  +  ^  m   or  ^3>  S  =  ^  o.     e.g.   iffU  +  ^r{  uta 
=  Tfftfl  gatoHa. 

4.  "%  or  "9HT  +  ^J  T  =  ^TJ  a,r.   e.  g.  UfT  rnaha  +   ^-rfa:  rsih 
=  *T^"fa.  maharsih. 

5.  ^  or  ^IT  +  TJ  e  or  TJ  a/  =  t[  at.     e.  g.  T[<{\  +  ^  ewa 
=  Jfrfa  gatdi  'ua. 

6.  ^1  or  ^TT  +  ^  o  or  -^ft  a«  =  ^ft  au.     e.  g.  3T7TT  +  ^qfvr. 
osadhih  -  Jlfff^f^H  gafau  ''sadhih. 

106.  It  will  be  the  practice  everywhere  in  this  work  to 
separate  independent  words  in  transliteration,  but  not  in  the  deva- 
nagarl  text;  and  if  an  initial  vowel  of  a  following  word  has 
coalesced  with  a  final  of  the  preceding,  this  will  be  indicated 
by  an  apostrophe  —  single  if  the  initial  vowel  be  the  shorter, 
double  if  it  be  the  longer,  of  the  two  different  initials  which  in 
every  case  of  combination  yield  the  same  result.  To  aid  the  be- 
ginner, a  point  ♦  will  sometimes  be  placed,  in  the  devanagarl, 
under  a  long  vowel  formed  by  two  coalescing  vowels;  thus,  ^rfa- 
•nO*!!'IJi  agnina  'rtnam. 


Verbs,   a-  class : 
1&{  gam  {gdechati)  go. 
VTT  ghrd  (jighraii)  smell. 


Vocabulary  II.  r^- 

fSfiji  (tr.  and  intr.)  conquer,  to 
j|  dru  run.  '<}******  /  the 

•ft  nl  lead,  guide.  (  nij/**'  '   ^ 


/ 


Lesson  II. 


29 


XH  pet  (pibati)  drink. 
9f  bhu  become,  be,  exist,   fciuix^i1 
Tff^  yam  (ydechati)  furnish,  give. 
■gTf     vrs   rain,    give    rain;    (fig.) 

shower  down ;   overwhelm. 
TfH  smr  remember,   think  on. 

e. 

^rj  sth®  (tisthati)    stand  (intr.). 

Subst.  Masc: 
3T5J  gaja  elephant. 

J[9^  gandha  odor,  perfume. 

TTW  grama  village. 


•T^  nara  man  (vir  and  homo). 
•TXf  nrpa  king. 
tr^  pnira  son. 

Neut. : 
^H"^  kxira  milk. 

*r^  grha  house. 

^^  jala  water. 

^TT  dana  gift,  present. 

•TTT  nagara  city. 

Interj.: 

^  he  O,  ho. 


Exercise  II. 
^t^t  ^rpi  ^iTf^T  i  q  i  *i  *  *\T*k\*\:  Ri^ra  fxRfTf  5^:  i  ^  i 

^n fsrarfa i^pr: i <=io i  ^ ^ttt.  i  <rt i  w*  ttrt  ^fai i <k i 
7n  ^%  *R<!:  I  ^  i  *pN  ^Mifa  ^tf^fT  •pn:  II  <*8  n 

15.  The  man1  drinks3  milk2.  16.  The  king3  leads2  the  elephant1. 
17.  Two  houses1  fall2.  18.  The  god3  gives2  water1.  19.  Ye  both 
think2  on  (?U)  the  two  gods1  (accus.).  20.  The  king3  wins2  the 
village1.  21.  The  two  elephants1  smell3  the  perfume2.  22.  They 
cook2  fruits1.  23.  The  man3  reverences"  the  gods1.  24.  The  two 
elephants1  live2.     25.  The  gods"'  give1  rain  C^T). 

*  Final    ?^   m    is    commonly   written   as    anusvdra  if  the  fol- 
lowing word  begins  with  a  consonant;   but  the  Hindus  pronounce 
it  as  <R[  m  in  such  cases.    At  the  end  of  a  sentence  anusvdra  should 
at  be  written  for  ?^  m,  though  this  is  a  habit  common  in  the  MSS. 
Final  radical  ?^  m,  in  internal  combination,  is  assimilated  to   a 
following  mute  or  spirant.    In  the  former  case  it  becomes  the  nasal 
•n  jime  class  with  the  mute;  in  the  latter  it  becomes  anusvdra. — 
tneidical  «^  n,   in  internal  combination,  becomes  anusvdra  be- 
mS6ibilant. 

hav 


30  Lesson  III. 

Lesson  III. 

107.  Yerbs.  Accented  a'-class.  Roots  of  this  class  form  their 
present-stem  by  adding  an  accented  H  d  to  the  root,  which  is  not 
gunated.  The  inflection  of  these  stems  is  precisely  like  that  of 
stems  belonging  to  the  preceding  class,  except  as  to  the  position 
of  the  accent ;  thus,  f^p?  ksip,  present-stem  fcjlj  ksipd,  pres.  ind. 
f^prrf*T  ksipdmi,  f^PTftl  ksipdsi,  f^trffT  ksipdti,  etc. 

108.  Several  roots  in  ^J  r  of  this  class  (by  the  Hindus  written 
with  "3f£  f)  form  stems  in  ^X[  ?ra>  e.  g.,  oR  kr,  'strew',  f^RTTfiT  kirdti. 
The  roots  in  ^  i  and  ^  u  and  ^J  u  change  those  vowels  into 
fit  iy  and  ^t  uv,  respectively,  before  the  class-sign ;  thus,  f^J  ksi, 
f^j^rfTJ  ksiydti;  Jf  su,  *raf?f  suvdti :  \J  dhu,  \sT^HT  dhuvdti. 

109.  For  the  root  ^[^  ?.s,  'desire',  «j[^  ich  is  regarded  as  a 
substitute  in  the  present-stem;  thus,  ^$frT  icchdti  (§  100,  note). 
Likewise,  ^J  r  makes  its  present  -sfj-^frf  rcchdti ;  and  T(T§  prach, 
sometimes  given  as  XJ^  prch,  makes  H^fa  prcchdti. 

HO.    A  number  of  roots  following  this  class   are  strengthened 
in  the  present  by  a  penultimate  nasal;  thus,  f^ra  sic,  present  ind. 
f^fijffTT  siiicdti.    The  nasal  is  always    assimilated   in  class  to  the 
following  consonant;  thus  "31   n  is  used  before  palatals,  «^  n  before 
dentals,  ?^  m  before  labials ;  and  _L  n  before  sibilants  and  jf  h. 
III.    Masculines  and  Neuters  in  ^  a,  cont'd, 
a.  Masculines : 
Singular.  Dual.  Plural. 

L       ^^•T  devena     rf^l^jJ^  devdbhydm     ^q^  devais 
D.     ?<(|{{  devdya  »  »  ?c(M]^  devebhyas 

Ab.    d«!T<i.  devdt  »  „  »  » 

G.      2T*3  devasya  d^M\{{^    devayos  %«U"I|J^  devdndm 

L.      %%  deve  »  »  %%^  devesu 

b.  Neuters  follow  exactly  the  declension  of  masculines  in  the 
above  cases ;  thus,  Xfi%«T  phalena,  QtWTtl  pbaldya,  etc. 


Lesson  III. 


31 


112.    Force  of  cases.    1.  The  instrumental  answers  the  questions  i>*^ 
wherewith?   and   whereby?    and  expresses   accompaniment,   agent, 
or  means.     2.  The  dative  denotes  the  remoter  object,  and  direction.  D"?- 
It  is  also  used  as  dativus  commodi ;   very  frequently  also  to  denote 
end   or  purpose.      Sometimes   (and   oftenest  with  copula  omitted) 
it  is  predicative,  in  the  sense  of  'makes  for,  tends  toward'.    3.  The  fll>i. 
ablative  answers  the  question  whence  ?^  and  very  frequently  denotes 
cause.    4.  The  genitive  is  casus  adjectivus,   denoting  all   kinds  of  $*"• 
belonging  (e.  g.  gen.  subjectivus,   objectivus,  partitivus).     5.    The  lo-  *<><.• 
cative  denotes  the  place  where,  or  the  time  when,  an  action  occurs. 
It  is  often  used  absolutely,  in  agreement  with  a  participle  expressed 
or  understood,    as  the  ablative  is   used  in  Latin  and  the  genitive 
in  Greek.     '  (?*"£?£. 


■  e  i  >  r> 


i nus    siH 


*  t,i  c-0*>r\. 


Verbs,  a-class: 
^TO   is  (icchdti)  wish,  desire. 
^Jff  krs  (krsdti)  plough. 
f%pj    ksip    (ksipdti)    hurl,    cast, 

throw. 
fTT\   die  (diedti)  show,  point  out. 
Tf^prach  (prcchdti)  ask,  ask  about. 
f^TT   vie  (viedti)  enter. 


Vocabulary  III. 

ffjT^    sic    (sinedti)    drip,    drop 


Subst.  Masc: 

efi'J  kata  mat. 

^*ft  kunta  spear. 

"^T^f  bala>  child,  boy. 

^"PT  marga  road,  way,  street. 

%^f  megha  cloud. 

IJ"^  cava  arrow. 


moisten. 

^T5f    srj  (srjdti)   let    go;    create, 
Sjpr  (sprcAli)  touch;  (in   certain 

connections)  wash, 
a-class: 
1[%guh  (guhati,  §  10I)  hide,  conceal. 
T$Z  sad  (sidati,  §  I0I)  sit. 


^TsT  hasta  hand. 

Nent.: 

%"^  ksetra  field. 

\J«T  dhuna  money,  riches. 
^fT^H  langala  plough. 
f^TO  visa  poison.       .,„«.*/ 
T^sukha  fortune  ' 


H 


csf* 


.**»"• 


32 


Lesson  III.  IV. 


Exercise  III. 

it*  i  m  srer  f^rfTT  ^  i  i  i  ^t  iprf*r^fnT  itt:  i  ^  i  I- 
^nft:  ^ir  fire<r:  I "« \*m  i%t  *prfa  i  e  i  *nft  ^z  #^r:  i  w  \ 
wftr  ^rrft:  f^rfar  i <w i  T*re;  -pt  frar*:  i  «R  i  it:  g^W 
*n3f  *n^fa  i  <^  i  iTT**[wf7r  ^r:  n  <*8  n 

15.  The  boy4  asks3  the  men1  about  the  road2  (ace).  16.  The 
clouds1  drop4  water3  on  the  fields2  (loc).  17.  The  two  men1  go4 
%  fa;o  roads2  (instr.)  into  the  city3.  18.  The  king4  gives3  the  two 
men1  money2.  19.  The  man's1  sons2  sit4  on  mats3.  20.  The  gods4 
give3  the  water2  of  the  clouds1.  21.  We  wash3  (use  ^JJ\)  both 
hands2  with  water1.  22.  Both  men1  lead4  their  sons2  (dual)  home3 
(TO).     23.  The  taw  boys3  point  out4  the  road2  to  the  city1  (gen.). 


Lesson  IV. 

113.    Masculines  in  ^  i.    "3Tfa  «</«*>  'fire'. 


N. 

A. 
I. 


Singular. 

■^rftreL  a9nis 

D.    -4IM'4|  agnaye 
Ah^C^  agues 

L.    ^|M1  agnau 


Dual. 

^TfrWR^  agnibhydm 
•n  n 


Plural. 
■^T^  agnayas 

^^rfqf^^  agnibhis 
^rfq«I^  agnibhyas 

r  1) 

^'•fHlH  agnlnam 
^jf^J  agnisu* 


** 


*  See  note  to  §    102. 
The  dental  nasal  ^  n,  when  immediately  followed  by  a  vowel, 
or  bv    «l  n  or  Jf  in   or  ^f    w   or  ^    v.    is   turned  into   the  lingual         >v 
""»  n  if  preceded  in  the  same  word  by  the  lingual  sibilant  or  semi-     0r  v»*i 
abo»s  _  J,  [  Dy  xf  ?)  y  r,  ^J  f,  or  ^[  r:  and  this,  not 


Lesson  IV.  33 

114.    Neoters  in  ^  ?'.      ^TTT  vari,  'water'. 

Singular.  Dual.  Plural. 

N.   ^ifT  v<^n  cUf^uH  vdrini  ^lOHU  vdrini 

A.  n  d  w  »  »  r» 

I-     «1  I  f\<l!  I  vdrind*  «TTf^^Tf^  vdribhydm  cUf^f^^  vdribhis 

D.     «|  1  f\^!  vdrine  »                  »  cflPl^H.  vdribhyas 

Ab.  cUfiUlH.  carinas  r>                   „                       n               » 

G.            »              «  TTfTTlft^  vdrinos  <<  1 0^1*1  warffmm 

L.    «dfXfUj   vdrini  »                »  <||P^li  vdrim 

v.  ^nry<5re  or  ^rfr  y<^n 

115.  Masculine  and  neuter  adjectives  in  T  i  are  declined  like   t-~*dS' 
the  substantives  above.     But  neuter  adjectives  (never  substantives) 

may,  in  the  dat.,  abl.,  gen.,  and  loc.   sing.,  and  the  gen.   and  loc. 
dual,  substitute  the  corresponding  forms  of  masculines. 

116.  Euphonic  changes  of  ^  s  and  "^  r.  These  two  sounds 
stand  to  each  other  in  the  practical  relation,  in  external  combination, 
of  corresponding  surd  and  sonant:  in  countless  cases  ^  s  becomes 
"^  r  in  situations  requiring  or  favoring  the  occurrence  of  a  sonant; 
and,  less  often,  "^  r  becomes  ^  s  where  a  surd  is  required.  In 
internal  combination  the  two  are  far  less  interchangeable.  The  s 
is  extremely  common  as  an  etymological  final,    the  r  not  common. 

117.  A.  Final  ^C.  s.    1.  Before  a  sonant,  either  vowel  or  conso-  $•** 
nant  (except  f  r  —  see  below),  ^  s  is  changed  to  the  sonant  T  r 

—  unless,   indeed,  it  be  preceded  by  ^S(  a  or  ^STT  d;  thus,   41  fa^ 


only  if  the  altering  letter  stands  immediately  before,  the  nasal,  but 
at  whatever  distance  before  the  latter  it  may  be  found:  unless,  in- 
deed, there  intervene  a  palatal  (except  If  y),  a  lingual,  or  a  dental. 
Thus,  •fJfl'^TJJ'  nagareua,  f{\J^  mdrgena,  TjT,q"jfx?r  puspani. 

*  See  preceding  note.      c   ch    j     fh     .V 

Perry,    Sanskrit  Primer.  '      fjt     >j    jt       /V     ■  I*  o 

t     m   a    <h     n     J 


34  Lesson  IV. 


agnis  atra  becomes  -^jfai^  agnir  atra;  -4jfaf^  '^f^T  ognis 
dahati  becomes  TMfi^c^f^f  agnir  dahati.     See  also  §  95. 

118.  2.  Final  ^J^  as,  before  any  sonant  consonant  or  before 
initial  short  ^  a,  is  changed  to  ^ft  o  —  and  the  initial  ^  a  is 
dropped  ;  thus,  •P?^  W?rf?T  nrpas  jayati  becomes  «pft  WTfTT  nrpo 
jayati ;  «PTC  ^T^  nrpas  atra  =  •pft  <S^  nrpo  Hra. 

119.  It  is  the  practice  in  our  system  of  transliteration  to  render 
the  sign  4,  which  denotes  this  dropping  of  an  initial  ^  a,  by  an 
inverted  comma. 

120.  3.  Before  any  initial  vowel  other  than  short  nR  a,  final 
"^^  as  loses  its  ^  s,  becoming  simple  ^JJ  a;  and  the  hiatus  thus 
occasioned  remains;  thus,  «(lfH  T^f^T  «/y<M  icchati  becomes  «TH 
^^fff  nrpa  icchati;  <TrT^  vd<^<*fls  tatos  udakam  =  <fff  3?<fi7^  tata 
ucfaknt. 

121.  4.  Final  ^H^  as  before  any  sonant,  whether  vowel  or 
consonant,  loses  its  ^  s,  becoming  simply  ^JT  «;  ana<  tne  hiatus 
thus  occasioned  remains;  thus,  •nTT^T  S^f^T  nrpas  icchanti  =  •pn 
X^$ftH  nrpa  icchanti ;  •JUTO  W^ff^T  nrpas  jayanti  =  •fXTT  -alilfWl 
nrpa  jayanti. 

ar-  122.    B.  Final  ^  r.    1.   Final  ^  r  in  general  shows  the  same 

form  which  ^  s  would  exhibit  under  the  same  conditions:  thus 
TFTK,  punar  standing  at  the  end  of  a  sentence  becomes  TT*T  punah ; 

p*£kyj  ift^  <7«S  'JV.  gih-  But  original  final  "^  r,  after  ^J  a  or  ^(7  «5 
maintains  itself  before  vowels  and  sonant  consonants ;  thus,  JpTC^ 
punar  atra,  iH^^fd  punar  jayati. 

m  ht,  123.    2.    A   double  "^  r  is   nowhere  admitted:  if  such   would 

occur,  either  by  retention  of  an  original  "^  r  or  by  conversion  of  ^  s 
to  T  r,  the  first  ^  r  is  omitted,  and  the  preceding  vowel,  if  short, 
is  made  long  by  compensation;  thus,  y\^\  TJW.  punar  rdmah  = 
JTT  7T*J*  puna  rdmah;  ■%rf*T^  Tt^%  a9nis  rocate  -  ^pcft  Tfa<T 
agnl  rocate ;     ^^  OWd  dhenus  rocate  =  $»T  <H*<*  dhenu  rocate. 


\ 


Lesson  IV. 


35 


Verbs: 

^f^  krt  (krntdti)  cut,  cut  off. 
?Jx£  muc  (muncdti)  free,  deliver, 
release. 
Subst.: 
HUfq  agni,  m.,    fire;    (as   proper 

name)  Agni,  the  god  of  fire. 
^S(fX  c.ri,  m.,  enemy. 
^Hf|f  asi,  m.,  sword. 
tHftf  rsi,  m.,  seer. 
efifcj  &ari,  m.,  poet. 

fjrf'C  S"'n'i  m,i  mountain. 
oprf  7«na,  m.,  man;   (pi.)  people. 
^*3    duhkha,    n.,    misery,    mis- 
fortune. 


Vocabulary  IV. 

"^t?  ruh  (rdhati)  grow, 
f^TR^  Up  (Umpdti)  smear. 
^i^  lup  (lumpdti)  break  to  pieces, 
devastate,  plunder. 


TJTfW  pant,  m.,  hand. 

Trrq  papa,  n.,  sin. 

^\H  rdma,  m.,  nom.  pr.,  name  of 

a  hero. 
^J  vrksa,  m.,  tree. 
ffT^  pie  a,  m.,  now.  pr.  name  of 

a  god. 
~m$satya,  n.,  truth,  righteousness. 
^f^  Aon,  m.,  nom.  /w.,  name  of 

a  god. 


Exercise  IV. 


^^rfaf^lr^  T^fa  I  ?  I  f«ft  itlRTT:*  TTTCft  |inTf?T  I  8  I  ^*ft 
flT  Ui^fni  |  M  |  H{M\  «MMI  VT  H^fni  1^1^  TOT:  (abl.) 

^ttHt  i  ^  i  irrrf^f^  f*r*m  i c  i  y^t  t^-  ftff%  i  <£.  i  ^nsfr: 
irsft  <hj  *rrc  fire*:  i  qo  i  ffc:  ^Rfwt  <Hlfa  *n^fa  I  99  I 

^fcRft  (§  123)   XWt    ^RTfTT   I  9*  I     ^fiHlOWT    pTfll    *pT! 

^ft%  i  93  i  fir  ^flTW  ^nr:  n  98  n 

15.  Qiva1  dwells3  in  the  mountains2.  16.  Both  enemies1  hurl4 
spears2  at  the  king3  (dat.)  17.  Rama1  touches4  his  two  sons3  with 
his  hands2.  18.  Fire1  burns3  the  trees2.  19.  Seers1  speak2  the 
truth3.     20.  Through  righteousness1  happiness3  arises4  (^)  for  man- 


*  Modifiers  generally  precede  the  word  which  is  modified. 

3* 


36 


Lesson  IV.  V. 


kind2  (^T,  gen.  pi.).  21.  The  seer's1  two  hands2  touch4  water3. 
22.  Fruits1  are3  {use  ^J)  on  the  trees2.  23.  People1  remember2 
Hari2.     24.    Rama1  hurls4  the  sword3  from  his  hand2  (abl.). 


Lesson  V. 

124.  Verbs.  Unaccented  ya-  class.  Roots  of  this  class  form 
their  present-stem  by  adding  ^f  ya  to  the  root,  which  bears  tbe 
accent.  Thus  from  «fij?  nah  is  made  the  present-stem  «TfT  ndhya; 
from  <5p|   lubh,  <5THT  lubhya. 

125.  The  inflection  of  stems  of  this  class  follows  the  model  of 
g(&  vad. 

126.  Certain  ^rr  a-roots,  because  of  their  peculiar  exchanges 
with  <f  i  and  f^  2-forms,  especially  in  the  formation  of  the  present- 
stem,  are  given  by  the  Hindu  grammarians  as  ending  in  TJ  e  or 
l|  di  or  ^ft  o  (cf.  §  132),  and  by  them  assigned  to  the  V  bhu,  or 
a-class.  Thus ^sTT rfAa,  'suck'  (Hindu  ^  dhe),  forms  ^T^ffa  dhdyati ; 
the  root  ^  hu  or  gT  hvd  (Hindu  ^  hve)  forms  ,£<6(ffT  hvdyati; 
^TT  gd  (Hindu  3f  gdi)  makes  J||4(f?T  gdyati. 

-127.    For  the  root  ^TFT  drg,  'see',  is  substituted  in  the  present- 
system  another  root  VfiX  Va9i  which  makes   M^frT  pdgyati. 
128.    Masculines  in  ^3  u.      *ff«j  bhdnu,  'sun'. 


N. 

Singular. 
HT*TO  bhdnus 

Dual. 
3JTT  bhdnu 

Plural. 

^H«f^  bhdnavas 

A. 

r 

M\*\*{  bhdnum 

n          » 

*4M»i   bhdnun 

1. 

*il«1«tT  bhanund 

*Tr«n5TR^  bhdnubhydm 

^T"Tf*R^  bhdnubhis 

D. 

M\*\^  bhdnave 

r>                       n 

WW^M  an?<6  %as 

Ab 

•  WTt^  bhdnos 

n                       r> 

W                               fl 

G. 

y>               » 

HT^t^C.  bhdnvos 

*tt"«MIH.  bhdnundm 

L. 

M\*\\  bhdndu 

n                    » 

<HT*T3  bhdnum 

V. 

*n^ft  bhdno 

I 


Lesson  V. 


37 


Masculine  adjectives  in  ^  u  are  similarly  declined. 

129.  Euphonic  Changes  of  ^  s,  cont'd.  1.  Final  ^  s,  the  dental 
sibilant,  whether  original  or  representing  final  "^  rt  before  the  palatal 
surd  mutes  [^  c,  1§  ch],  is  assimilated,  becoming  palatal  ^T  g.  Thus 
•TT^  tj^firl  naras  carati  becomes  •T^rfTf'T  narag  carati;  T^ 
3j^«f  naras  chalena  becomes  «T^3C^%*f  narag  chalena.  2.  Before 
a  lingual  surd  mute  [Z  U  ~&  $]>  in  'ike  manner,  it  would  become 
lingual  H  s,  but  the  case  almost  never  occurs.  3.  Before  the  dental 
surd  mutes  [?^  t,  W  th],  since  it  is  already  of  the  same  class  with 
them,  it  of  course  remains  unchanged;  thus,  ^HTOt  f*i»fa  rdmas 
tisthati. 


S-*S 


130.  The  preposition  ^STT  «  is  sometimes  used  with  the  ablative 
(much  less  often  with  the  accusative),  in  the  sense  of 'hither  from', 
'all  the  way  from';  but  far  more  usually  to  signify  'all  the  way 
to',  'until'.     As  a  prefix  to  verbs,  ^TT  «  means  'to',  'unto',  'at'. 


Vocabulary  V. 


Verbs: 
■^T^  as  (dsyati)  throw,  hurl. 
^|T^  kup  (kupyati  —   w.  gen.  or 

dat.)  be  angry. 
W^jJ   krudh  (kriidhyati  —  w.  gen. 

or  dat.)  be  angry. 

1(J{  gam  -f  ^STT  a  (dgdcchati)  come. 

7T  tr  (tdrati)  cross  over. 

*  *)■**}-! 

TT1   rcap  (ndgyati)  perish. 

XHT  Vac  (pdfyati)  see. 


^|  ruh  (rdhati)  rise,  spring  up, 

grow. 
+  "Vl  «  (drdhati)  climb,  mount, 

ascend. 
fay  Mich  (likhdti)  scratch;  write, 
gpi  lubh  (lubhyati  —  w.   dat.  or 

loc.)  desire,  covet. 
in   gus  (gusyati)  dry  up. 
fj^m  snih  (mihyati  —  w.  gen.  or 

loc.)  feel  inclined  to,  love. 
f[  hu  or  JT  hva  (hvdyati)  call. 


^fTO  vayu,  m.,  wind. 

f^XJjr  visnu,  m.,  nom.  pr.  name  of 


a  god. 


38  Lesson  V. 

Subst.:  |f^[  fetou,  m.,  sun. 

^r^j  anna,  n.,  food,  fodder.  Tfl!!'  raani,  m.,  jewel 

i 
^pg  apya,  m.,  horse.  "^^  ratna,  n.,  jewel. 

^rffVsJ  udadhi,  m.,  oeean.  TTT3T  r<M?  m-5  heap. 

3T^  guru,  m.,  teacher. 

in^  pattra,  n.,  leaf,  letter. 

TT^J  parapu,  m.,  axe. 

TJ"P?  pada^    m. ,    foot;    quarter ;  j  1T3  fa^",  m?  enemy 

ray,  beam.  f^PUT  pikhara,  m.,  summit. 

^TC  6aAu,  m.,  arm.  \  f^H  gisya,  m.,  pupil,   scholar. 

fcj'rf  bindu,  m.,  drop.  ^^}  sukta,  n.,  Vedic  hymn. 

Exercise  V. 

cRcf^ft  \pi  *j«rfnT  i  <*  i  ^^1^:  fwrfa  wf?f  m  ^  fij- 
tq^t:  ^rerrr:  i  $  i  •pnr  'srfw  fswf^r  1 8 1  ^fat^vf*  firef*  i  m  i 

*jtt.  ftr^Tnrf  fwf^r  i  <w  i  ^rrcrr  ipnfr  sfarr  ^rOer  i  <k  i 
*rrat  ^r%  tnt  Rj^fd  i  <*$  i  wrr  nm\*ri  Tnftff^fnT  i  <w  i 

^jf  £*rfa  tt:  i  «^>  i  3i%:  ipfr  ^nr^r  *rr*f  T*i  xnsra:  ii  qc  n 

19.  Now4  the  sun's1  rays2  climb5  the  mountains3.    20.  A  drop2 

of  water1  falls4    down  from    the    cloud3.    21.    O1    men8,  we    see4 

the    city3.     22.    Both  kings1    love3  poets2  (gen.  or  loc).     23.  The 

wind1  blows4  (^W)  from  the  summits3  of  the  'mountains'.     24.  The 

Icing1  hurls4  spears3  at  his  enemies2  (dat.  or  loc).   25.  The  scholar1 

bows3  before  his   teacher2  (ace).     26.    Tiro    men1   come    with  their 

sons"    (instr.).     27.  The  two  kings1  desire4  the  poet's2  jewels3  (dat. 

or  loc).   28.  O1  seer,2  we  sacrifice4  to  Visnu3   {ace).    29.   The  two 

*  Orthodox  Hindus  maintain  that  the  Vedic  hymns,  etc.,  were 
revealed  to  their  reputed  authors,  who  thus  'saw'  them. 


K 


Lesson  V.  VI.  39. 

cook3  food1  with  fire2.    30.  The  seers1  praise4  Visnu2  with  hymns3. 
31.  In  the  city1  the  king2  calls4  his  enemies3. 

Lesson  VI. 

131.  Verbs,  //a-class,  cont'd.  The  roots  of  this  class  which  end 
in  ^S[^  am  lengthen  their  ^J  a  in  forming  their  present-stem ;  thus, 
"retain,  rll*4jfd  tdmyati;  Vf^  bhram,  ?JTRrf?T  bhrdmyati — but  this 
last  makes  ,some  forms  with  short  ^  a.  The  root  UW  mad  has 
the  same  lengthening:  *n««jf?T  mddyati. 

132.  Certain  a-roots  (five  —  by  the  Hindus  written  with  final  6) 

make  present-stems  with  an  accented  yd;  thus,  ^T  das  '<Hf7{  dydti.  ketJ-o.S'*- 

133.  The  root  cjra  vi/adh  is  abbreviated  to  fzm  vidh  in  the 
present-system :  fclvyfTT  vidhyati. 

134.  The  root  sfij^  kram,  said  by  the  natives  to  form  its 
present-stem  according  to  this  class,  really  forms  it  only  according 
to  the  a-class,  and  the  root-vowel  is  lengthened  in  the  active  voice, 
but  not  in  the  middle;  thus,  $THf?l  krdmati,  but  middle  ^fJR% 
krdmate. 

135.  The  root  xpi^  cam,  used  only  with  the  preposition  ^rr  «> 
forms  ^rT^TTWin  acdmati. 

136.  Neuters  in  ^  u.      ?ffc|  madhu,  'honey'. 

Singular.  Dual.  Plural. 

$T.      ?TO  madhu  Ttpf)  madhuni  ^TOf'T  madhuni 

A 

I.      ^VTT  madhuna      ?T\WI7^  madhubhydm  ^TOTH^  madhubhis 

D.     *?*J«J  madhune  B  „  TT^R^T  madhubbyas   • 

Ab.  ?TO«T^  madhunas  „  „  „  „ 

G.         „  „  T^ft^  madhvnos  fT%PTTI(  madhundm 

L.     ^r^ffvf    madhuni  „  M  ***J9  madhi<?u 

V.   *T\j  or  3J\Tt 


40  Lesson  VI. 

137.  Neuter  adjectives  (but  not  substantives)  in  xf  u  may  take 
the  forms  proper  to  the  masculine  in  the  dat.,  abl.-gen.,  loc.  sing., 
and  gen. -loc.  dual. 

138.  Changes  of  final  «^  n.  Before  initial  91  j  and  ^  f, 
•^  n  becomes  "5J  n;  thus,  TfTt.  44«f  I  *V.  tan  jandn  becomes  <n- 
%HI"t.  tdnjandn ;  7f[%  ^T^l.  ^n  P°^n  =  dl»^I'^,ls  tan  gatrun.    In 

th»  last  case,  however,  ^ch  is  almost  always  substituted  for  the  initial 
TTT   p;  thus,  fM'b^»4V  ^  chatrun. 

139.  Final  «^  n,  before  an  initial  «J  /,  is  assimilated  and  becomes 
nasalized  /,  which  is  written  ^f  nl,  or  (what  is  the  same  thing) 
—  n}  thus  <fT^  ^t^TTt  tan  lokdn  becomes  TfT^T    *"Tl<*l«l  tdnl  lokdn 

or  Tfi  Wt5BFTTs  tan  lokdn. 

c  f  * 

140.   Before  the  surd  palatal,  lingual,  and  dental  mutes  there  is 

inserted  after  final  i^  n  a  sibilant  of  each  of  those  classes  re- 
spectively, before  which  if^  n  becomes  anusvara;  thus  for  cfT5^  ^T 
tan  ca  we  find  7TP5T  tdnc  ca;  for  TTTt.  WG\  tan  talhd,  <rNRTT  *aw« 
tathd* 


ni 


,K' 


Verbs: 

^f  r  (rcchdti  —  §  109)  go  to;  fall 

to  one's  lot,  fall  upon. 
Hf*^    Arra?n  +   ^TT    a    (dkrdmati) 

stride  up  to,  attack. 


Vocabulary  VI. 

tJJ^  cam  +  ^Tf  d  (dcdmati)  sip, 
drink,  rinse  the  mouth. 

<f^  tarn  (tamyati)  be  sad. 

7TO  £us  (tusyati)  rejoice,  take 
pleasure  in  (w.  instr.). 

yfa^  dlv  (divyatij  play. 


*  This  rule  really  involves  an  historic  survival,  the  large  ma- 
jority of  cases  of  final  ^  n  in  the  language  being  for  original  ns. 
Practically,  the  rule  applies  only  to  ^  n  before  ^  c  and  c^  t,  since 
cases  involving  the  other  initials  are  excessively  rare. 


Lesson  VI. 


41 


1SCH   bhram  (bhrdmyati  —  §  131) 

wander  about. 
*f^  mad  (mkdyati)  get  drunk, 
ejra  vyadh  (vidhyati)  hit,  pierce, 
^i^  gam  (gamyati)  become  quiet, 

be  extinguished,  go  out,  cease.. 


■ 


TSfT^     gram    (gramyati)     become 

weary. 
^  hr   (hdrati)   take  away,    steal, 

plunder. 


Subst.: 

^f^  aksa,  m.,  die,  dice. 

-4|VJ<$    adharma,     m.,     injustice, 

wrong. 
•*lfrjf  all,  m.,  bee. 
^ra  agru,  n.,  tear. 
-fj^  r£.?a,  m.,  bear. 
,     TajftT?  %>a,  m.,  anger. 


<fat|  ksatriya,  m.,  warrior,  man 

of  the  second  caste. 
•mfif  nrpati,  m.,  king. 
•T^  rcefra,  n.,  eye. 
Jf\%  madhu,  n.,  honey. 
JT?5  mukha,  n.,  mouth,  face. 
??|n  mrtyu,  m.,  death. 
^W  rasu,  n.,  wealth,  money. 


Exercise  VI. 

^n  ^^  ^Nrfar  i  3  i  ^ifatfy-ii  Jrrerra  1 8 1  *rcr  f^wrirf 
f^rf^r  i  m  i  tjtc  ^f^n^n:^rr?irRf7f  i  $  i  ^  P>tt!miq  if- 
*tpr:  i  ^>  i  ^r^ft  ^trt  ^gf*r  frt^T  i c  i  *nft  ^5*^<s  i  e  i 

T^t  m*!W.  i  <k  i  ^:  ftpsra  mimmi«iEt i  ^  \  wr  *hit *rr- 
^rf^r  i  qg  i  *wr  ^frrw  ^  $<*f^  *rran:  it  <m  11 

16.  The  warriors1  play3  for  money2  (instr.).  17.  The  king's2 
horses3  become  weary5  on  the  road4  to-day1.  18.  The  warrior1 
pierces4  his  enemy3  with  the  spear2.  19.  Bees1  are  fond  of3  (Tf^  ) 
honey2.  20.  The  water2  of  his  tears1  moistens4  (1^Q  his  feet3. 
21.  There2  bees1  are  flitting  about3  (*J*0-  22-  ^w0  meQl  are  cook- 
ing5 honey2  and4  fruits3.  23.  When1  the  teacher's2  anger3  ceases4, 
then5    the    scholars7  rejoice6.     24.  Tears1  stand4  in  the  warriors'2 


42  Lesson  VI.  VII. 

eyes  .     25.  The  enemies1  overwhelm4  (cfTf)  the  king2  with  arrows 


i 


A    V 


26.  A  quarter3  of  the  injustice1  falls  upon4  ("^g)  the  king3  (ace). 

Lesson  VII. 

141.  Causative  Verbs  (native  -'cur-class ").  The  Hindu  gram- 
marians describe  a  certain  present-system  which  they  assign  to  a 
so-called  "cwr-class".  This  is,  however,  in  fact  no  present-class 
at  all,  but  a  causative  or  secondary  conjugation,  which  is  not  con- 
fined to  tke  present-system.  But  many  formations  of  this  sort  have 
no  causative  value;  and  it  is  chiefly  these  that  are  grouped  by  the 
Hindus  in  their  cur-class,  which  also  includes  some  denominative- 
stems  in  dya,  with  causative  accent.  For  practical  purposes  it  is 
well  enough  to  consider  these  verbs  here. 

142.  The  causative-stem  is  formed  by  adding  "^f^f  dya  to  the 
root,  which  is  usually  strengthened;  and  the  strengthening  process 
is  in  the  main  as  follows: 

143.  1.  Medial  or  initial  ^[  i,  ^  u,  and  ^g  r  have  the  guna- 
strengthening,  if  capable  of  it;  thus,  ^"^  cur,  ^tTTfa  cordyati ; 
f^fi?  vid>   c(^ij(7f  veddyati ;  but  iffe  pld,  lfl\gtjfrT  piddyati. 

144.  2.  A  final  vowel  has  the  rreWfa'-strengthening ;  thus, 
\jj  dhr,  \nTTfH  dhdrdyati.  Before  "^S^aya,  T£di  and  njn"  au  become 
VJIT*!  ay  and  ^TTW  dv  respectively;  thus,  *ft  bin,  HfmZfflf  bhaydyati ; 
V  bhu,  ^TT^SlfTT  bhavdyati. 

145.  3.  Medial  or  initial  ^!J  a  in  a  metrically  light  syllable  is 
sometimes  lengthened,  and  sometimes  remains  unchanged;  thus, 
^J^  ksal,  caus.  ^M"*lffT  Jcsdldyati;  but  ^T^  jan,  caus.  WRjfrf 
jandyati. 

146.  The  inflection  is  the  usual  one  of  a-stems. 

147.  Rales  of  euphonic  combination.  In  external  combination 
an  initial  sonant  of  whatever  class  (even  a  vowel  or  semivowel  or 
nasal)  requires  the  conversion  of  a  preceding  final  surd  to  a  sonant. 


Lesson  VII. 


43 


148.  Final  <^  r.     1.  Final  ^  t  becomes  W  d,  before  any  initial    £~-><x- 
sonant,  except  the  palatals,  the  nasals,  and  *f  /:   thus,  4^1^  "^T^ 
meghat   atra  becomes   5R^T7^  meghdd  atra;    M I M 1  cf^   T^f^T  pdpdt 
raksati  or  >J753|'f?r  bhramyati  or  ^ftHl^fTT  gopdyati  becomes  trrqT- 

gT^fffT pdpdd  raksati or  MIlfl^T+trfrT  pdpdd  bhramyati  or  M I M IsTt MT~ 
Vffl  pdpdd  gopdyati. 

149.  2.  Final  c^  t  is  assimilated  to  an   initial    palatal,   lingual,  y-  v  ^SSl 
or  *f  I  in    the  next  word ;  thus   it  becomes   tE^  c   before   x^  c  and 

H?  ch,  ^  j  before  ^  j,  and  W  I  before  ^T  I:  e.  g.,  *mids  ^  meghdt  ca 
becomes  +(V1|^f  meghdc  ca;  "i\i%\<\^  5f^f*^  meghat  jalam  becomes 
*jy |T3JHH  meghdj  jalam;  XJTXn?^  ^tefc|<^  papdt  lokdt  becomes 
papal  lokdt. 


150     3.   Before  initial  ^T  c,    final   <^  t  becomes  ^  c,   and  the 


t*  c 


<*  C-¥ch 
T\  c  then  becomes  ^  ch;  thus,  HMIc^  !£%  nrpat    catruh  becomes        ,rch 

^1||t^^;  nrpdc  chatruh. 

151.    4.  Before  initial  nasals  ?(_  t  becomes   «^n:    thus,  *J^T?^     ^"^^L 

"Rlf?f  gvhat  nayati  becomes  OTTT?Rlf?V  gfhan  nuyati.    But  the  change 

into  7d  is  also  permitted,   though  hardly   used;   thus,  J|^|<j<|fH 

grhdd  nayati. 


Verbs : 

^\"HH  kathaya  (denom.    stem   — 

kathdyati)  relate,  tell, 
"^f  ksal  (ksdldyati)  wash. 
Tp^jf  ganaya  (denom.  —  gandyati) 

number,   count. 
^1^  cur  (cordyati)  steal. 
(l^tad  (tdddyati)  strike,  beat. 


Vocabulary  VII. 

rT^T  tul  (toldyati)  weigh. 

f*  l^Zf  dandaya   (denom.    —    da- 

nddyati)  punish. 

•ft  +  ^HT  ni  +  a  (andyati)  bring.  . 

Trfe  ptd  (plddyati)  torment,  vex. 

Till  puj   (pujdyati)  honor. 

,  devils) 

JJpr  (pdrdyati)  overcome.;  prevail. 


V 


44  Lesson  VII.  VIII. 


Subst.: 
bH3t  janaka,  m.,  father. 
^Tf5  danda,m.,  stick ;  punishment. 
trail  punya,  n.,  merit. 
T5^f  phala,  n.,  fruit;  reward. 
ra]^|  rdmdyana,  n.,  a  noted 
poem. 


^Xn  rupaka,  n.,  gold-piece. 
«f|cfi    loka,    m. ,    world,    people 

(sing,  and  pi.). 
TSV$  sddhu,  m..  holy  man,  saint. 
3Rn$  swyarna,  n.,  gold. 

~^r\  suta,  m.,  driver,  charioteer. 

©•> 

%5f  stena,  m.,  thief. 


Adverb:  ^  iva  as,  like  (postpos.). 
Exercise  VII. 

* 

%?r.  ^t|  w^t  prqfrcqfftiqi  ^^  flrqtqrnwrfmi 

wrt  Tqf^  1  m  1  «nft  ^mifui  ww  i$  1  yrrowri  ^^ 
^^rf^i^iTW^^^^TTJrRiw^Rm:  ici  f^if  iirfor- 

^qrff  ^far:  winfd  11 9?  11 

14.  Thieves1  steal4  the  people's2  money3.  15.  The  two  boys 
wash3  their  mouths2.  16.  The  father1  tells5  his  sons2  (dat.)  the 
reward4  of  sin3.  17.  The  scholars1  honor3  and5  reverence4  their 
teacher2.  18.  Ye  both  bring3  fruits1  in  your  hands2  and5  count4 
them.  19.  Merit1  protects3  from  misfortune2  (abl).  20.  The  char- 
ioteers1 strike4  the  horses2  with  sticks3.  21.  In  anger1  (abl)  the 
king2  pierces5  the  thief3  with  a  spear4. 

Lesson  VIII. 

152.    Verbs,  a- conjugation.    Present  Indicative  Middle.     The 

present  indicative  middle  of  verbs  whose  stems  end  in  a  is  inflected 
as  follows: 


Lesson  VIII.  45 

Singular.  Dual.  Plural. 

1.  ^£  vdde  rcFV^  vdddvahe  1^TO%  vdddmahe 

2.  ^ST%  vddase  ^179  vddethe  33^q  vddadhve 

3.  <Jd"rl  vddate  ^^n  vddete  ^rf^  vddante 

153.  The  ending  of  the  3rd  pi.  is  properly  ^r%  ante  (cf.  f^T 
n#  for  Tlrf^fT  aw^'  in  t|J  B):  before  the  TJ  *>  of  the  1st  sing,  the 
.stem-final  is  dropped.  ^^^ ethe  and  XJTf  ete  are  hard  to  explain. 

154.  With  verbs  inflected  in  both  voices,  the  chief  force  of  the 
middle  is  this,  that  the  action  is  performed  for  the  benefit  of  the 
actor  himself;  thus,  ^JWfjf  ydjati  'he  sacrifices'  (for  some  one  else); 
^J^%  ydjate  'he  sacrifices  for  himself.  But  many  verbs  are 
conjugated  only  in  the  middle,  like  the  Latin  and  Greek  deponents. 

155.  The  verb  J{  mr,  'die',  makes  fjytjd  mriydte  in  the  pres- 
ent;  and  5T«^  jan,  'give  birth',  substitutes  as  present  mid.  9TRra 
jayate,  'be  born'. 

156.  Combination  of  final  and  initial  vowels.    Two  simple  i*~i  ■ 
vowels,  either  or  both  of  them  short  or  long,  coalesce  and  form  ?< 
the  corresponding  long  vowel.    For  the  a-vowels,  see  above,  §  105. 
Thus :  1.  ^  %  or  \%  +  ^ %  or  \%  —  \ ?;    e.  g.  ^T^f^T  ^f?T  gacchati 

iti  becomes  ?T^£r?Vf?T  gacchati  'ti.  2.  ^Mor^M+^Mor^fM 
=  ^i  u;  e.  g.  ^TTV  ^HHWC  sddhu  uktam  becomes  Q | y JRIf^  sadhu 
''ktam*. 

157.  The  /-vowels,  the  u- vowels,  and  ^Jr,  before  a  dissimilar  y^^^y 
vowel   or  diphthong,   are    regularly   converted  each  into  its  own   &*-•* 
corresponding  semivowel,  Jly  or  ^  v  or  \r.     Thus,  KlTTm  ^S(%   ' 
tisthati  atra  becomes  ffRTftPI  tisthaty  atra  (four  syllables);  •fiJT'^r^ 

nadl  atra  becomes  «RI^  nady  atra;  *ra  ^SC^  rnadhu  atra  becomes 
Hl^l  madhv  atra;   ^JTT  ^^  kartr  iha  becomes  Zfff^ug  kartr  iha. 


*  And  theoretically  3.  ^S  r  +  ^gr=  "^f.  but  probably  this  has 
no  occurrence. 


/  I 


46  Lesson  VIII. 

*a.''  &oe-z,  158.    Final  TJ  e  and  "^ft  o   remain   unchanged    before  an  initial 

short  "^  a,  but  the  "%  a  disappears.     Thus,   ^T  ^J^  ^cme   otfra  be- 
comes ^?f  $^  wane  'fra;  ){|«ft  ^5^  Marco  afra   becomes   WTt  S^f 
6/fdno  'Jra.     By  far  the  commonest  case   of  final  ^ft  o  is  where  it 
,"7>"W  Represents  final  ^  a*  (see  §118). 
^*-*ay  159.    The  final  ^  <  or  ^  w-element    of  a    diphthong  is    changed 

+  h-0  to  its  corresponding  semivowel  T(  y  orrHp,    before  any  vowel  or 

diphthong,  except  when  the  rule  of  §  158  would  apply.     Thus,  TJ  e 
becomes  ^1  ay,  an^  \  di,   ^SIT?!  ay;   ^SCt  o  becomes  tJT^  av->  aQd 
■^  aw,  ^1«|   dv.    Thus,  in  internal  combination,  ^-"^f  ne-a  becomes 
•f^J«ay/a;  ^fif--^  bho-a  becomes  ^^  bhava ;  so  •T-^r^I  nai-aya  yields 
STRT3  ndy-ayay  and  ^ft-^^pjr  bhdu-aya  yields  VTT^!?   bhdv-aya. 
cxtcrnd  owi).    |60.    In  external  combination,  the  resulting  semivowel  is  in  gen- 
*+/<->>A.+i     eral  dropped;   and    the  resulting  hiatus   remains.     Thus,   ^%  ^m 
-    ,    ^^.^J    vflrne  ift'  becomes  ^*T  ^fTT  *?«««  to'  (through  the  intermediate   stage 
<t«rfqf7T  vanay  iti);  *TT«ft  Tf^  bhdno  iti  becomes  3JTT  Tf?f  bhdna 
iti  (through  *TT«rfaf7T  bhdnav  iti).      The  case  of  final  T£  e  is  by  far 
the  more  frequent.    See  also  §  164. 
j  sM/=         161.    Certain  final  vowels  maintain  themselves   unchanged  be- 
fore any  following  vowel.     Such  are  1.  ^l,  ^f  u,  and  T£  e  as  dual 
endings,  both  of  declension  and  of  conjugation;  thus,  f^T^"  ^  <7*'r* 
iha,  WTW  W3  sddhu  atra;  Xfi%  ^1  phale  atra.     2.   The  final,    or 
only,  vowel  of  an  interjection ;  thus,  f  \*%  he  indra,  *%  ^t  he  ague. 

Vocabulary  VIII. 
Verbs  (deponents) :  spring  up  (mother  in  loc). 

"^HN  arthaya  (denom.  —  art/id-     J^f  bhas  (bhdsate)  speak. 

frjrucT) 
yate)  ask  for  (w.  two  accus.).      T(  mr  (mriyate)  die. 

^  Iks  (iksate)  see,  behold.  Ttf{yat(ydtate)  strive  for  (w.  dat.). 

W*{  kamp  (kdmpate)  tremble.         ^V   yudh    (yudhyate)    fight     (w. 

^T5^  jan  (J  ay  ate)  be   born,   arise,       instr.  of  accompaniment). 


Lesson  VIII. 


47 


^W  rabh  +  ^JJ  a  (drdbliote)  take 

hold  on,  begin. 
■5^^  ruc(rocate)  please  (dat.,  gen.). 


^•^  vand  (vdndate)  greet,  honor. 
■fjr^T  piles  (ciksate)  learn. 
T£%  sah  (sdhate)  endure. 


wfH    fabh  (Jdbhate)  receive,  take.  |  ^f^   sev  (senate)  serve,  honor. 


Subst.: 
H*\tl   anartha,  m.,  misfortune. 
^f^f^l  udyoga,  m.,  diligence. 
<4i^||(!j  kalydna,    n.,   advantage ; 

salvation. 
tf^  taru,  m.,  tree, 
f^f  dvija,  m.,  Aryan. 
f^^TTf^  dcijati,  m.,  Aryan. 
VJlf  dharma,  m.,  righ' ;  law ;  virtue. 
^p$  dhdirya,  n.,  steadfastness. 
ip*J  />apw,  m.,  beast, 
^f  bala,  n.,  strength,  might. 


¥Mm  manusya,  in.,   man  (homo). 

^JyT  yajna,  m.,  sacrifice. 

^TT  uana,  n.,  woods,  forest. 

fc|«Jif  vinaya,  m.,  obedience. 

cfVf^"  vici,  m.,  wave. 

IJf^f  pos£ra,n.,  science;  text-book. 

Tjj^  pudra,  m.,  man  of  the  fourth 


caste. 


f^TT  Aito,  n.,  advantage. 
Adverb:  «T  na,  not. 


Exercise  VIII. 

^rt  *rnre  i  *  i  ^n  Tnf^f  wt^R^fr  &fcrfi  i  3  i  ht#  (§  iei) 

^tto  i  ^  i  t^wt:  (abi.)  ^%  ^ft  *wi  i  ^  i  ^fWi«f  ^^  i  q  i 
wtft  t^  ^t*t:  i  qo  i  vfci  v*l  *m^  ^t?i  i  w  I  ¥^r  «nrt: 
Tjr^t  ^tpsit:  %*r#t  i  <r  i  xr%  ^  TT^n^r^r  *nwtf%scT:  i  ^  , 
W?r  w$  *rra  i  <te  i  ^#  wf%  i  <w  i  ^fw  w$t 
%*r%  II  9$  II 

17.  The  two   houses4  yonder0   tremble6  by   the  power3  (instr.) 

^frf,  -thus',  is  very  commonly  used  as  a  particle  of  quotation, 
following  the  words  quoted. 


48 


Lesson  VIII.  IX. 


of  the  ocean's1  waves2.  18.  The  father3  beholds4  his  son's1  face.' 
19.  "We  strive3  after  the  advantage2  of  the  scholars1;"  thus4 
(Xf^)  speak6  the  teachers5.  20.  The  children2  ask4  their  father1 
for  food3  (accus.).  21.  In  the  forest1  yonder2  elephants3  are 
fighting5  with  bears4.  22.  The  two  Qudras3  serve4  the  two  Aryans1 
here2.  23.  Fruits1  please3  the  children2.  24.  Whence1  do  ye  receive3 
money2?  25.  Now1  the  two  seers2  begin4  the  sacrifice8. 


Lesson  IX. 


162.    Feminines  in  ^n"  a,  declined  like  %TT  send,  'army. 


Singular.                                Dual. 

Plural. 

N. 

%ifT  send               %%  sene  (a  4-  ») 

%1l«^  sends 

A. 

%*TR^  sendm           »         « 

»           » 

I. 

%5Rn  senayd         %*TTOT7{.  sendbhydm 

^'Trf'TO  sendbhis 

T\ 

«^      *^ 

^Tnmr  sendbhyas 

D. 

*H|4|   senayai                »                „ 

Ab 

•  *l4\M\^senayds            »                 » 

r>                   -n 

G. 

j>              »       %T^t^  senayos 
%*fl*IIH.  sendydm       »               » 

%TT*ITH  sendndm 

L. 

4MI4J  sendsu 

V.    %%  sene 

163.    Adjectives  in  ^Sf  a  are  declined  in  the  raasc.  like  flT^,  in 

the  fern,  like   <M|,    in  the  neuter  like  HRf.     But  often    the  fem. 

stem  ends  in  %  I,  and  is  declined  like  •T^'  (in  Less.  XI). 
..•  -  164.    Final  ^  m  and  ^h"  «^,  according  §  159,  become  ^TRf  % 

-    .  ^^  s    and  ^TTf   «w  respectively  before  any  following  vowel  or  diphthong. 

The  II   or  3   may  then  be  dropped,   leaving  a  hiatus.    The  II  is 

in  fact  always  dropped,  but  the  ^   not  often.     Thus,  %TRT   ^SHI 

becomes,  through    the   medium    of    4f«f|«J|4|    ^T^,   %STRIT  ^HT; 

^cft  tSH|  becomes  ^TR"^- 

165.    Initial  *§,  after  short  vowels,  the  preposition  ^TT,  and  the 


ch-^<rcH 


Lesson  IX. 


49 


prohibitive  particle  TOT,  becomes  ^g":  thus,  TO^l  $|<||  becomes  TO^ 

166.    An    initial   ^  of   a  root  generally  becomes  TO    after  a    TL^y  ">> 
verbal  prefix  containing  ^,  either  original  or  representing  ^;  such 
as  ^RT?C  'between',  f^,  l?TX  etc.    Thus,  jpprf*>  f*n!!TOfiT. 

167.  The  following  prefixes  are  often  used  before  verbs:  TOT 
'after,  along,  toward';  TO^I  'down,  off';  ^3^  'up,  up  forth  or  out'; 
TO^J  'to,  toward';  fsf'down;  in,  into';  f^TTO.  'out,  forth';  HXj  'to 
a  distance,  away';  tJTT  'round  about,  around';  TJ  'forward,  forth'; 
TOTO  'along  with,  completely.' 


rVefue 


Vocabulary  IX. 


icef  - 

,r.S  - 
pari' 

pro.  - 


Actire  Verbs: 

3JTO  +  TO^"    (avagdcchati)    under- 
stand. 

H  +  TOTO  (avatdrati)  descend. 

*ft  +  ^f  (upandyati)    introduce, 
consecrate.  *->       ~ 

+  Tff^(parindyati)  lead  about; 
marry. 

^<^  +  ^^  (utpdtati)  fly  up. 

TO^  +  TO?T  (avardhati)  descend. 


Hl'sw«0Myd' 


Deponents: 

3TTO.  +  ^C    (saingdcchate)    come 
together,  meet.  (•*•  **a^rMj 


Subst. : 

X^  m.,  arrow.     t-SU. 
TOTOT  t't  daughter,  maiden. 

Perry,  Sanskrit  Primer. 


f^J  t  T^CT  (pardjdyate)  be  con- 
quered (rarely  w.  act.  sense: 
conquer). 

Xf%  +  J(  (prapddyate)  flee  for  re- 
fuge (ace.)  to  (ace.  of  person). 

f*?q(bhiksate)  beg,  get  by  begging. 

Sra|l|  (denom.  —  mrgdyate)  hunt 
for,  seek. 

W<^  (vdrtate)  exist,  subsist,  be, 
become. 

"mi  (cdbhate)  be  brilliant,  shinej 
be  eminent. 


ipfj  gaiigd  {.,  n.pr.,  the  Ganges. 
n^TOT  m-i  householder,    head  of 
family.        ffdt&ffi&S 


50 


Lesson  IX. 


^"PETT  f.,  shade. 

1HTP1  m«?   nom.  pr.,  Prayaga  (a 

city,  Allahabad). 
^T?T  n.,  fear. 
ifj^T  f.,  wife,  woman. 
*fTGrj  f.,  speech,  language. 
■fir^T  f.,  alms. 
^rjTTT  f-)  n.pr.,  Yamuna  (a  river, 

the  Jumna). 
"^TJf  m.,  n.,  battle. 
<*HJ  f.,  street. 

f^ETT  f-j  knowledge,  learning. 
■fa^J  m.,  bird. 
^TTO  m-5  hunter. 


t-* 


^"^T![  n.,  protection. 
WW[  f.,  twilight.       tj£» 
*cf3J  m.,  heaven. 
^*{  n.,  heart.     hrda.y«- 

Adj.: 
"spm,  f.  ©tSTT,  black. 
UTTj,  f.  ©^jt>  bad,  wicked. 
TRTfT-   f-    0^TT,    much,  abundant; 

Os.  ' 

pl.  many. 

Adv.: 

^f^  together  with   (postpos. ,    w. 

insir.). 
■HlfSrT  suddenly,  quickly. 


Exercise  IX. 
rqTff^T  I  *  I  *raf  f^J  JpTCTnT  ^^?:  I  $  I  fT^  ^TT  TW  *rft- 

■ag^  <«ii»ui<ul  inre^  i  $  i  f**w*n  ttt^t  fsr^ft  ^^  i  ^  i 

^T  WW[  Trref  t^T^  fT^T  ^Pl  *TH^  I  «=  I  5*^1^1  (§«64)  ^ 

f^irh-ti  wrf  ^t  Tr^T^faT  t  <^*=i  i  *%  fwr  *ptw  Twng 

15.  The  two  scholars1  beg6  much2  alms3  from  the  wives5  of 
the  householders4.  16.  At  Prayaga1  the  Ganges2  unites4  with  the 
Yamuna3.  17.  Bad1  men2  do  not4  reach5  (*T*I )  heaven3.  18.  O 
Visnu1,  to-day3  Civa2  marries7  Gaiiga6,  Harps4  daughter5.  19.  In  the 
battle1  the  kings3  fight4  with  arrows2  and6  conquer7  their  enemies5. 

*  "Birds  of  a  feather  flock  together". 


Lesson  IX.  X.  51 

'20.  Here2  in  the  street3  the  two  kings1  dismount6  from  their  black 
horses5.    21.  The  seer's2  two  sons3  are  eminent4  in  learning1  (instr.). 

22.  From   fear3   of  the  wicked1  hunters2   (abl.)  two   birds4   fly  up5. 

23.  At  twilight1   (loc.  du.)   the  seers2  (§  13,  3)   reverence4  the  gods3. 

24.  In  the  street2  of  the  village1  the  teacher3  and5  the  scholar4  meet6. 

25.  We  two  sacrifice2  to  the  gods1  for  ourselves;  we  do  not4  sacri- 
fice5 for  Hari3. 


Lesson  X. 

168.  Verbs.  Passive  Inflection.  A  certain  form  of  present- 
stem,  inflected  with  middle  endings,  is  used  only  with  a  passive 
meaning,  and  is  formed  from  all  roots  for  which  there  is  occasion 
to  make  a  passive  conjugation.  Its  sign  is  an  accented  Jf  yd  added 
to  the  root,  without  any  reference  to  the  classes  according  to  which 
the  active  and  middle  forms  are  made.     The  inflection  is  precisely 

•v  *v  *""- 

like  that  of  other  a-stems.    Thus,  7FQ  tanye,  r\m^(  tanydse,    rRTrT 
tanydte,  etc. 

169.  Outside  the  present-system  middle  forms  may  be  used  in 
a  passive  sense;  but  there  is  a  special  form  for  the  aor.  pass,  in 
the  3rd   sing. 

170.  The  form  of  root  to  which  the  passive-sign  is  appended 
is  usually  a  weak  one.  Thus  a  penultimate  nasal  is  dropped;  and 
certain  abbreviations  which  are  made  in  the  weak  forms  of  the 
perfect,  or  in  the  past  passive  participle,  are  found  also  in  the 
passive  present-system.     E.  g.  from  ^f^  ,  pass.  tR^TT;  from  ^*J, 

171.  In  the  roots  ^W.  «^.  ^t^,  q^,  ^"^,  and  ^1^,  the  ^  va 
becomes  ^  u  in  the  pres. ;    thus,  "^^fl,  >4U|ri;    ^tild   (see  note  to 

§  102),  ^pSHJ.    Similarly,  ^J^T   makes  ^stjfl,  and  1X\  and  TJ^  make    ya,  ^  u 
*TU^  and  ^Pffi;  TTCI:  makes  f^ffi.  TtV^  ¥• 


52  Lesson  X. 

\Oo+  channel  -tot-  p*~ts/ve   CenJ. 


h-^n 


172.     Final  ^  and  ^  of  roots  are  generally  lengthened;  thus, 

173.     Final  ^B  is  in  general  changed  to  fT>  thus,  ^,  f?Rint; 

h  -*>Zr  but  if  preceded  by  two  consonants  it  takes  guna;  thus,  ^H,  4£J«H- 
The  roots  in  "variable  r",  which  the  natives  write  with  "^  f, 
change  ^J  to  %"^,  or,  if  a  labial  letter  precede,  to  ^TT;  thus,  H, 
iftftfi;  $,  '  strew',  ^t$ft;  but  9,  xHjft. 

fi^Z  '74.     Final  "^n"  of  roots  is  usually  changed  to  ^;    thus,    «?T, 

^JfajTT;  TT>  wWf ;  VT,  VW^-  But  MR  makes  WT*Rh  and  so  some 
other  roots  in  ^.  '    ' 

175.  The  roots  <f^  and  Hiari^  usually  form  their  passives  from 
parallel  roots  in  ^n";  thus,  dl*H-     But  rTHJd  and  1&&1  occur. 

176.  Verbs  of  causative  inflection,  and  denominatives  in  "^J, 
form  their  passive  by  adding  H  to  the  causative  or  denominative 
stem  after  "^Jf  has  been  dropped;  thus,  '-c^ifr)  'is  stolen';  IfWTl 
'  is  counted '. 

177.  The  personal  passive  construction,  with  the  logical  subject 
in  the  instrumental,  is  particularly  common  with  transitive  verbs ; 
and  not  less  so  the  impersonal  passive  construction,  both  with 
transitive  and  intransitive  verbs.  Thus,  •f^lJJ'  (tpff  ^W%  '  Heaven 
is  reached  by  the  man';  -4||J|44|?(  'one  comes  hither';  WQfQ  'one 
sleeps';  VVTO  'it  is  heard',  i.  e.  'they  say'.  The  predicate  to  the 
instrumental  subject  of  such  a  construction  is  of  course  also  in- 
strumental; thus,  {Jtjqjfi^QJI  ^31%  'Rama  lives  as  a  seer'. 

Vocabulary  X. 


Verbs,  with  passives: 

W  (p.  kriydte)  make,  do,  perform. 
*sSH[khdnati;  p.  khaydte,khanydte) 

dig. 
lfl(gdyati;  p.  giydte)  sing. 


TfW(p.grhydte)take,  receive,  seize. 
TTT  (ddgati;  p.  dagydte)  bite. 
2Z"T  (dydti;  p.  dlydte)  cut. 
£\<4    (dlvyati;  p.  dlvydte)  play. 
l^ff  (p.  dhiydte)  put,  place. 


Lesson  X. 


53 


2\sTT  (dhdyati;  p.  dhlydte)  suck. 
YE[\  (dhyayati ;  p.  dhydydte)  think, 

ponder. 
1TJT  (p.  plydle)  drink. 
Ill  (Hindu  TJ;  p.  purydte)  fill. 
^**J  (p.  badhydte)  bind ;  entangle ; 

catch. 
ITT  (p-  mly ate)  measure. 
^^  (p.  ucydte)  speak. 


Subst. : 
■3 It] |  f.,  command.  &\^&J 

TffTUT  f-,  hope. 

efiTH  n.,  fagot ;  wood.    TilS  ifou- 

*  * 

^ftrT  n.,  song. 

^J  m.,  pot,  vessel. 

^HT  n.,  melted  butter;  ghee. 

^TRT  n-,  grain. 

XTnj  m.,  noose,  cord,  snare. 


<^  (vdpati;  p.  upydte)  sow,  scatter. 

SJHJ1  (p.  fisydte)  rule;  punish. 

?T  (p.  qruydte)  hear. 

^f  (p.  stuydte)  praise. 

^T^  (p.  supydte)  sleep. 

l^T  (p.  hlydte)  abandon,  give  up; 

neglect. 
*T  or  57  (hvdyati;  p.  huydte)  call. 

+  ^TT  call,  summon. 


HTT  m-5  burden.  */&* 
f*f^  m.,  beggar,  ascetic. 
IffOH  m.,  servant. 
TT^rr  f-,  garland. 
<Ja*J  n.,  kingdom. 
flTT  m.,  child. 
^JH  m-,  snake. 

Adj.: 
f%^fa,  f.  0,?rT,  obedient. 


Exercise  X. 

V 

^^  ^T  ^Effi  |  $  |  fafTR  Ml^4w(ni  |  8  I  ^I^TT  T«T%  |  M  I 

^t  ^5^  i c  i  *n|<rr  f^i  ijjf^rer  *rHNr  f*r^ft  ^to%  i  o.  i 

^t§t  ^wt:  fijsRf  i  <te  i  hhji:  ^T^rri  *nft  ^TgftgH  i  ^m  i 
^?r%f  *rer  *fftnt  i  <\§  i  **5fiir  tt^t  f^m  ^xjj-  i  q^>  i  ^w 


54  Lesson  X.  XL 

(Use  passive  constructions  throughout.) 
20.  Grain2  is  scattered3  for  the  birds1.  21.  Garlands1  are  twi- 
ned3 (use  ^5tj )  by  the  maidens2.  22.  Again2  Hari1  is  praised4 
by  Rama3.  23.  Visnu1  drinks4  water3  from  his  hand2.  24.  'Pleas- 
antly1 («^j*t)  one  sleeps  in  the  shade2';  so4  say5  the  people". 
25.  Both  seers1  sacrifice2.  26.  The  father1  sets4  hopes2  on  his  child3 
(loc).  27.  The  scholar3  neglects4  the  teacher's1  command2.  28.  The 
two  scholars1  think3  about  their  text-book2  (nom.).  29.  Grain2  is 
sown3    in    the   fields1.      30.   They  play2  with  dice1  (impers.  pass.). 

31.  The  king's1  commands2  are  received5  by  the  obedient3  servants4. 

32.  The  man1  digs3  in  the  field2. 


Lesson  XI. 

178.  Verbs.  Imperfect  Active,  a- con j ligation.  The  imperfect  is 
formed  from  the  pre^nt-stem  by  prefixing  the  augment  ^f,  and  adding 
a  set  of  secondary  endings. 

179.  If  the  present-stem  begin  with  a  vowel,  the  augment  unites 
_    with  it  to  form  always  the  crddhi-vowe\,  not  the  guna:  thus^-r^ 

or  X  or  TI  =  "5;  ^  +  ^  or  ^f  =  ^jt;  ^  +  ^  -  ^TTT- 

180.  If  a  preposition  be  prefixed,  the  augment  comes  between 
preposition  and  verb,  as  in  Greek ;  thus,  from  ^JT?-«ft,  impf.-stem 
jgMH,  i.  e.  ^T?  +  ^  +  «W5  f^Mfc  impf.-stem  ^JVf^r.     is? 

181.  The  inflection  in  the  active  is  as  follows: 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

1.  -*H^*i  tivacpm  ^SR^T^  dfackjm.  *RR[T*T  dvadp,ma__ 

2.  ^R^.  dvadhs  ^STW^fTt  dvadLtam  ^R«£cl  dvadfita 
3-      "SR^  dvadtrt.            ^R^WTH  dvadatam        "^R^t  dvadjhn^ 

182.  The  imperfect  is  the  tense  of  narration ;  it  expresses  past 
time  simply,  without  any  further  implication. 

183.  Polysyllabic  Feminines  in  $"  i.  declined  like  ?T^L  'river.' 


!c(ysy  \\a\tic    Y*VAiv\yy\es 

Sing. 
•T?\  nadi 
*\d\l{  nadtm 
«f<j  (  nadijd 
•T^f  nadydi 
•T^n^C  nadyas 


Lesson  XL     ^^   ,rJwCr, 


55 


N. 

A. 

I. 

D. 

Ab 

O. 

L. 

V. 


Dual.  Plural. 

Iran  nadydu  •RJ?^  nadyas 

•T^l^l  1*1.  nadlbhydm'      •f3lf^^  nadibhis 

•Tcffaf^  nadibhyat 


T) 
•ft 


•1^1*1IH  nadlndm 
•fi^Cf  nadisi 


l.SU 


•T^JTt  n^dydm  r>  » 

184.  Final  nasals.  The  nasals  ^.  HI ,  and  «^,  occurring  as  finals 
q/Yer  a  sfor£  vowel,  are  doubled  before  any  initial  vowel:  thus,  t£- 
"firet  ^5R  becomes  ^rf?r?9% 


7r  }  *m 

n.  )  nn 


Verbs: 
qjf^  +  TJI^f  (avakrntdti)  cut  off  or 

down. 

TfS  (pdthati)  recite,  read. 


Vocabulary  XI. 

fsfTl  +  T[  (pravi^dti)  enter. 

+  ^XJ  seat  oneself. 
H  +  "^TT  (dhdrati,  -te)  fetch,  bring. 


Snbst.: 

^TSjm.,  purpose;  meaning;  wealth. 

^«£  m.,  worn,  pr.,  the  god  Indra. 
^•j^JUfj  f.,  7*om.  j?r.,  the  goddess 

Indranl. 
^iT^  n.,  poem. 
^J«SI  m.,  literary  work,  book. 
Ql^ln)  f-i  mother. 
^|+J|  f-?  female  slave,  servant, 
rfcft  f,  goddess,  queen. 
^TTt  f-,  city. 
ITT^  £j  woman,  wife. 


xjj^7  f.,  wife,  consort. 
I  XT^t  f.,  daughter. 
TT^^j  n..  book  (manuscript). 
TJ^  m.,  flood,  high  water. 
mH!|41  f-j  earth ;  ground. 
^TI|JW  na.,  priest,  Brahman, 
♦irtjsj  m-j  fish. 
«| IMl  f,  cistern. 
^T^JT  f,  council,  meeting. 
%«n  f-,  army. 
^jft^T  n.,  song  of  praise. 


56  Lesson  XI.  XII. 

Exercise  XI. 
HMfd^JlO  *H<JI^«J<t  I  S  I  liTC  WRIT  ^i7^H«MM4«l  I  ^  I 

^q^fguu:  i  ^  i  ^tot  TWTf  wrtoi«mih  i  c  i  ^rar 
itt  4ihi^^  i  <n  i  ^r  far^t  f^^  ^TOJnram  <t^t§  tt^t- 

14.  When1  ye  besought  (ITRT)  the  kingf  for  protection**  (ace), 
then5  ye  were7  (*HT)  in  misfortune6.  15.  In  the  two  rivers1  Ganga* 
and*  Yamuna3  it  is6  (^effi)  high- water5.  16.  The  two  women1  sang* 
a  song  of  praise3  about  Rama2  (gen.).  17.  O1  seers2,  why3  do  ye 
both  sacrifice6  to  the  goddesses4  with  melted  butter5  ?  18.  The  q  ueen's1 
women-servants2  brought6  jewels3  and5  precious  stones*.  19.  In 
anger1    (abl.)    the   teacher2  struck*  the    scholar5  with    his    hand3. 

20.  The  two  servants1  brought5  water*  from  the  cistern3  in  pots2. 

21.  Ye  cut  off*  (imp/.)  wood3  from  the  trees2  with  the  axe1.    22.  The 
seer1  praised6  IndranI*,  Indra's2  consort3,  with  hymns5. 


Lesson  XII. 

185.  Feminine  Substantives  in  ^  i  and  ^3  u  are  declined  as  in 
the  paradigms  on  the  next  page.  The  two  series  of  forms  exhibit 
complete  parallelism:  where  the  one  shows  t,  y,  e,  or  ay,  the  other 
shows  respectively  u,  v,  o,  or  av ;  cf.  §§  50,  51.  In  the  D.,  Ab.- 
G.,  and  L.  sing.,  these  stems  sometimes  follow  •<<£) ;  thus  matydi, 
-yds,  -yam;  dhenvdi,  -vds,  -vdm. 

186.  Feminities  in  ^[  i  and  ^  u :  ?rf7T  'opinion';  \I|«T  'cow'. 


Lesson  XII. 


57 


Sing.  Dual. 

N.  ^TfcRi;  matte         ?Tfft  matt 

A.  JTftm.  matim  „        „ 

I.  TOT  fflfl'F  if^lHTRt  matibhydm 

D.  f?nt  mataye  (<«<*ty««')„  „ 

Ab.  VT^^  mates  i-/*s  )   „  „ 

L.  ^fft-  wwtfaw  ty**")  s  s 

V.  jfr[  mate 


Plural. 
TrT^R^  matayas 

*Tf7W?^  matibhyas 

»  » 

HlffaTt  matlnam 
JjfrTM  matim 


VT  dhenu 


N.  V*!^.  Menus 

A.  ^1  jl  dhenum 

I.  ^J^TT  dhenva 

D.  VT%  dhenave  C-\fti]     „  „ 

Ab.  V*fftt  dfonos  (-v^s)    „  „ 

G.  »         »  "  ^NfaC.  Menvos 

L.  ^fM^flau      (-v*"}  „ 

V.  ^f^t   rf/<«MO 

187.  Adjectives  in  ^[  i  and  "^  «  are  often  inflected  in  the  fe- 
minine like  3Tf?f  and  \j«T.  But  adjectives  in  ^  u  preceded  by  one 
consonant  often  form  a  derivative  feminine  stem  by  adding  ^  7. 
Thus,  ^p"  'much',  N.  masc.  «nn^,  f.  ^jft,  n.  ^^;  *J?X  'heavy', 
m.  5\H.   £  T^T,  u-  T5-    This  fem.  is  then  declined  like  «T«^- 


\[«fe(f(  dhenavas 
VT^  dhenus 
\piTOn^  dhenubhydm  T$*ffi&{^  dhenubhis 

\f«pjF^  dhenubhyas 

n  n 

%j<l*IIH  dhenunam 
VHJ  dhenum 


Verbs: 

m  (kdlpate)   be  in   order;  tend 

or  conduce  to  (10.  tfa£.). 


Vocabulary  XII. 

f^TTT  +  ~*&Q  (upadicdti)  teach,  in- 
struct. 
2fcH*  (vinddti,  vinddte)  acquire. 


58 


%dfi 


^ 


«■ 


Subst. : 

cfiT^T  n.,  poem. 
^f?f  f-,  glory. 
aftTj    m.,     cowherd,     shepherd; 

guardian. 
inffT  f--  birth;  caste;  kind. 
VfrT   f«)    decision    of   character; 

courage. 
tTTf^N'  na„  prince. 
^fjT  f.,  prudence,  intelligence. 
*Tf^f  f.,  devotion,  honor. 
*TTT  m.,  part,  piece. 
*T"f7T  f.,  prosperity,  blessing. 
9jf7T  f.,  earth,  ground,  land. 


Lesson  XII. 

I^f^iT  f-,  fty,  gnat-     MiLKUKd. 
Jjfrti  t".,  salvation,  deliverance. 
zrfg  f.,  stick,  staff,  t,^*  ^ 
^f^Ff  m.,  ray;  rein. 
TTN  f-,  night. 
sRT  m.,  wound.  tfrA***' 
^fTT%  f-,  repose. 
^rf?T  f>  hearing ;  holy  writ. 
CTfrT  f.,  tradition;  law  book. 
^?T  m.,  sleep;  dream. 
f^J  f.,  jaw. 


Adj.: 
«ffa,  f.  o^TT,  low. 
gigr,  f.  o^rr,  principal,  first,  mukhu^ 
v%&  m.,  f.,  n.,  or  f.  °^^,  light.  ~" ( 


M  *1    £"      C  ov4 

1^  c{  £      OpiA^ov- 


Exercise  XII. 


^TT:  ^^Tff»?^f^rT  ITTf*rTf*r^f*rT  OTTO  II  S  II 

^%  i  r  i  Tnsn  ^rcr  t  ^wrf  i  $  i  srifT  ^VfS  ^srrfa^w^- 
frr:  1 8 1  3^  Tffm  *nra  i  m  i  ^^f^T%  ^XmNm^cjHt:  i  $  i 
? ^T^rgt  *rf  t  irsrMi^<iH.  i  ^  i  ^^^srr  ^f^^rrwr  <*h^> 
mwFl  f«=  i  y^ri  *nn*n  *fhn  *pti?r%  i  o.  i  fswnffai  wrf<p$ 
srr^pjn *j*3rr:  noi  iwi'^  ^raiB  i«n i  wran  ^f^reft"  Wrf%  i <r i 
*$*Am  wt^wt^  i  *i  ^r*nf«N:  i  «i$  i  ^c^r  ^ot«pwr^- 
<rg  n  <*8  ii 

15.  Visnu3  rejoices4  at  the  devotion2  (instr.)  of  the  pious1  (pi), 
and6  gives7  deliverance5.  16.  Men3  of  many1  castes2  dwelt5  in  the 
city4.  17.  The  birds1  see3  the  hunter2,  and5  fly  up6  from  the 
ground*.     18.  By  the  power2  of  intelligence1   we  overcame*  advers- 


Lesson  XII.  XIII.  59 

ity3.  19.  The  cowherd1  guards4  the  cows3  in  the  wood2.  20.  By 
intelligence1  and3  diligence2  ye  acquire6  much*  glory5.  21.  The 
poem1  tends4  to  the  poet's2  glory3  (two  datives).  22.  For  prosperity1 
we  bow  before3  Civa2  (ace).  23.  The  reins1  are  being  fastened* 
(^W )  to  the  horse's2  jaws3  (loc).  24.  In  the  night1  we  both  read3 
(imp/.)  holy  writ2.  -iN 


Lesson  XIII.  <>( 


-./  f 


•" 


HP 

188.  Verbs,  (/-conjugation.  Imperfect  Middle.  The  imperfect 
middle  of  verbs  in  a  is  as  follows:  ^  r~ff  ."?•-•«.  »*&  *iw.:wV|  *»*{    *«■*■  • 

aiijVv    Clftt^Att'  receive-  tta.ke^  rjeT 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

•**"    1.  ^R  dlabhe  (a  +  i)     °^T^ff  dlabhavahi    °*TFflf%  dlabhamahi 
i.    d     2.  TOPTOTTOC  dlabhathds   05fsn$^  dlabhetham  °lf^R^  dlabhadhvam 
ff^    3.  <4H+(r|  dlabhata  °5^<n^  dlabhetam      °H«fl  dlabhantg. 

With  Q^TP^  and    UrilH  °f  tne  dual,  c*-  U^f  ana"  THT  or>  the 

pres.  ind.  mid. 

ft<?V\0<ylM»fc  ,  aU  q* ^ac^rs} 

189.  Boot -words  in  f"  /  are  declined  as  follows:      4hl   wvi«ie«rst'<^<^\> 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

N.  V.  tsTftC  «*^Js  f^Rft  dhiyau  f^RC.  dhiyas 

A.  fSRHl  c?%ow?  „        „  „  „ 

I.  f^RIT  dhiyd  TSftWYf^  dhlbhydm  MTf^EI.  dhlbhis 

D.  f\J%  d%e   (~y5i)  „  „  ^^T^.  dhlbhyas 

Abl.  ftPTSt  d%«*   0«3)         »  »  »  » 

G.  «  ft        J.y»  ftRfftt  d%os  t^raTR:  d%aw  f-r«s»i) 

L.  f^rf^T  aVu'^'       -yi*        ft  «  ^jfal  ^ifM 

In  the  D.,  Ab. -Gen.,  and  L.  sing.,  and  G.  pi.,  these  stems 
sometimes  follow  •frf7|  ;  thus,  dhiyai,  dhiyas,  dhiydm,  dhlnam.  Cf. 
§  185.  Observe  that  where  the  case- ending  begins  with  a  vowel 
the  stem -final  i  is  split  into  iy. 


60 


Lesson  XIII. 


<X^V\t  _- 

a.pf- 

<Kv\r\t  - 

ni 

pro 


r«.4"i  — 


?o~t   initial: 


190.  The  following  additional  prefixes  are  used  with  verbs: 
^Tfa  'over,  above,  on';  ^rfq  'unto,  close  upon'*;  ^rf*l  'to,  unto', 
'against'  (often  with  implied  violence) ;  f^f  'down,  into,  in';  nf^ 
'back  to,  against,  in  return  ' ;  f%  'apart,  away,  out'. 

191.  Both  in  verbal  forms  and  in  derivatives,  the  final  ^[  or  ^ 
of  a  prefix  ordinarily  lingualizes  the  initial  ^  of  a  root  to  which 
it  is  prefixed;  and,  in  a  few  cases,  the  T|  remains  even  after  an 
interposed  ^J  of  augment  or  reduplication;  thus,  from  ^J?  +  fsj, 
faMl^fd;  ^TT  +  "^rfa,    pres.  pass.   ^rfasfaffi,  impf.   pass.  ^paj- 

192.  The  final  ^  of  prefixes  in  ^^  and  ^g^  becomes  II  be- 
fore initial  ^j,  Tj^,  T^,  TJj;  thus,  from  V^+  f*TCj;,  fatM'ifrt 

Vocabulary  XIII. 


Verbs: 
lim.  +  ^jfrT  (atikr&mati,  -krdmate) 

pass  beyond  or  by,  transgress. 
«P^  +  ^33   (ujjdyate)    be    born, 

arise  from  (abl.). 
+  U  arise,  come  into  existence. 
VT  +  ^jflf  cover,  keep  shut. 
•TOT  +  fW  (vindcyati)    disappear, 

perish. 
•Tf  +  ^H^.     ( samndhyati)    gird; 

equip. 
^  +  f^    (nispddyate)    grow; 

arise  from  (abl.). 


WJ  +  Tf^T  (pratibhdsate)  answer 

(w.  ace.  of  pers.). 
m+J(  arise;  rule.    -  »*  'chi^T*') 
^ff  (racdyati)  arrange,  compose 

(a  literary  work). 
f^TO  +T(fr{(pratisedati)hold  back; 

forbid. 
%«T  +  f*f  (nisev  ate)  dwell;  devote 

oneself  to;  attend. 
^TT  +  ^Tfa  mount,  stand  above 

or  over;  rule,  govern. 
^«^  +  JTf?T  hinder ;  injure;  offend. 


Sometimes,  with  the  verbs  *T^  and  \rr,  abbreviated  to  "fa; 
but  in  classical  Skt.  most  commonly  used  as  a  conjunction:  'also', 
'  too '. 


A*"; 


pal 


M't*c*le 


Lesson  XIII. 


61 


Subst.: 
tSTT^T  f-i  permission,  anujrv 
t^T  m.,  god;  lord. 
<*Mt^  m.,  dove. 

qiiH  m.,  love,  desire. 

cft|  ^jf  n.,  reason,  cause. 

^tWT  m.,  anger. 

9TTCV  n.,  net. 

^  f.,  understanding,  insight. 

•TTir  m.,  destruction. 

Tj^f  in.,  n.,  lotus. 

Q^Q  rn.,  man  (homo). 

JTfTTTST  m->  great  king- 
^f^f  m.,  sage;  ascetic. 


^T^TT  f-,  girdle. 

*ft^  m.,  infatuation. 

T^l  ni.,  wagon^  c  k<xv-<i  o~fc 

^"^T  m.,  desire,  avarice. 

^qfTI  f.,  dwelling. 

^ft  f.,  luck,  fortune,  riches;   as 

nom.  pr.,  goddess  of  fortune. 
3RT3  rn.,  ocean. 
^jf5  f-j  creation. 
j^"  f.,  modesty,  bashfulness. 

Adj.: 
^<^,  f.  o-^rr,  whole. 

^T?[,  f.  °"^, beautiful. 

^T'  f-  °^TT5  steadfast,  brave. 

%<7,  f.  o;?rr,  white. 


Exercise  XIII. 

wt^tt  i  *  i  *ftr  g^t  f%ro  ^r  f*f^f#r  i  $  i  Tnt^^rrwt  ir% 

^IcM^dl+i  I  8  I  TO  fW  &«*•)  ^RTfa:  |  M  |  f^Rft  ^%*T  *JW 

15.   *The  goddess  of  fortune  was  born  from  the  ocean.    16.  Why 
did  ye  hold  your  ears  shut?  (j)ass.  constr.)    17.  "The  Qudras  spoke 


SN  WtCT.il  •. 


As  the  principal  euphonic  rules  have  now  been  stated  and 


62  Lesson  XIII.  XIV. 

the  language  of  the   Aryans":    thus   answered   (impers.   pass.)  the 

Brahmans.     18.   By    its   cleverness    the    dove  was    freed   from    the 

•4  1  4  i  t~  } 

net.     19.  The  teacher  girded"M>oth  hoys  with  the  girdle.    20.  When 

the  scholar's  modesty  disappeared,  then  the  law  was  offended  against. 

I  ±  ^3  > 

21.  Whence   did   ye   get   (<5W  )    the   white  cows?    22.   The   whole 

earth  was  ruled  by  the  greafking.    23.    For  prosperity  (dat.)   we 

%  1-  *.  ' 

took  refuge  with  the  king  (JT-T*«f).    24.  Two  law-books  were  com- 

posed  by  Visnu.    25.  The  milk  of  the  black  cow  is  drunk  by  both 
children. 


Lesson  XIV. 

193.  Verbs,  a- conjugation.    Present  Imperative  Active.    The 

inflection  of  this  mode  is  as  follows: 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

1>      ^d'lfa  vdddni  SRTTO  vdddva  ~^d\*\  vddama 

2.  ^»"  vdda  c|ddH.  vddatam        e|«^r1  vddata 

3.  cj^'fi  vddatu  <4<2dlH.  vddatdm       ej<J«ri  vddantu 

194.  The  three  first  persons  are  properly  subjunctive  forms, 
and  accordingly  often  express  a  wish  or  future  action. 

195.  The  second  and  third  persons  of  the  imperative  express 
oftenest  a  command;  sometimes  a  wish  or  future  action.  The 
negative  used  with  the  imv.  is  J{J-   \*  *1 

196.  A  rare  imv.  form,  either  2nd  or  3rd  pers.  sing,  (or  plur.), 
is  made  with  the  ending  rfHT.;  thus,  VMdlcl-  Its  value  is  that  of 
a  posterior  or  future  imv.  (like  the  Latin  forms  in  to  and  tote). 

197.  Root-words  in  ^3?  S,  inflected  like  Mf.,  'earth1. 

exemplified  in*  the  exercises,  no  further  .indication  need  be  made, 
except  in  special  instances,  of  the  position  of  the  words  in  the 
Sanskrit. 


\ 


„  .        r       ■  Lesson  XIV. 


63 


u 

Dual. 
^^  bhuvdu 


Sing. 

NV.  ^;  6Afis 

A.  }pm.  bhuvam  „        „ 

I.  M^T  Mwwa  9^n^  bhubhyam 

D.  *T%  JAttwe  b>*iA<sX;      „  „ 

Ab.  ^^^(.  bhuvas  „  „ 

g.        r>       »   •>   ^cm. hhuvos 

L.  *rf*T  6Aut7     bhltvXrn   fl  „ 


Plural. 
*T^TT  bhuvas 

n  n 

*TfHTT  bhubkis 
*p?r^  bhubhyas 


TOTTOt  bhuvam    hhunZ.™ 
are  &M.vu 

In  the  D.,  Ab.-G.,  and  L.  sing.,  and  G.  pi.,  these  stems  some- 
times follow  «T<J^;  thus,  bhuvdi,  bhuvas,  bhuvam,  bhunam.  Cf. 
§§  185,  189. 

198.  Polysyllabic  Feminines  in  ^3T  «*,  inflected  like  ^|  f., 
4  woman '. 


Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

N. 

cnjnr  vadhus 

^*^  vadhvdu 

■^eT^  vadhvas 

A. 

cJVJM   vadhum 

n               n 

^"tj^  vadhus 

I. 

^3T  vadhvd 

^TOT*^  radhubhyam  ^Hlf*^  radhubhis 

D. 

cT^  vadhvai 

r>                      7) 

^333^  vadhubkyas 

Ab. 

^cTPEC.  vadhv>ds 

n                     r> 

r>                      n 

G. 

•n            i) 

^\£ftj^  vadhvos 

srejTTFt  vadhunam 

L. 

^fe^TH.  vadhvam 

n               n 

d\re  vadhwu 

V. 

^TV  vadhu 

Vocabulary  XIV. 

Verbs:  ?^T  in  pass.  (dr<;ydte)  seem,  look. 

^TO^  +  ^STfa   (abhydsyati)  repeat,    ^^+  f*\ (nivdsati)  inhabit ;  dwell, 
study,  learn.  ^R^  +  "R  (pravdrtate)  get  a-going, 

+  H  (prasyati)  throw  forward  or  |     break  out,  arise.   ' 
into.  *pT  (j,6cati)  sorrow,  grieve. 

Rjm  +  ^JT  (adigdti)  command.       *T^  +  f*T  (nisidati)  seat  oneself. 


64 


Lesson  XIV. 


on. 


Subst.: 
"^rf?Tf^T  m.,  guest. 
■^•HT  n.,  untruth. 
3PSTTO  Q1m  study;  recitation 
^T^ST  m-->  command,  prescript i 
-4(1 4H  n.,  seat,  chair. 
5fgf    f. ,    spoon,    esp.    sacrificial 

spoon. 
VTS  Q3-5  lecture,  lesson. 
TTWT  f->  creature;  subject. 
W  f.,  earth,  ground. 
9TC1Q  n.,  ornament. 
?J  f.,  eyebrow. 
^U  f.,  woman,  wife. 
%f?  f.,  altar. 
's3^r  f.,  mother-in-law. 


■^ffH  f.,  song  of  praise;  praise. 
^jj^T  f->  daughter-in-law. 

Adj.: 
^?R^,  f.  o^SIT,  lower;  other. 
TJX\  f.  °tSTT,  highest;  other, 
^sjf,  f.  °"^rT,  crooked,  bent. 
^•^  <,  f.  %,  beautiful. 

Adv.: 

~Mm$  I  founder,  underneath  (gen.). 

^T*{  l°ng  (°f  time). 

^1*1*^  far,  afar. 

?JT  prohibitive  particle,  like  Greek 

^t>j,  Latin  ne. 
^T  (postpos.)  or. 
£MH  near  by. 


Exercise  XIV. 
%?|   'q   cf?  fr<HMH   I   R  I    *p^tf  (gen.)  ifeft  ^%   ^7*  I  3  I 

f*T  I  SS  1  %  ^V  TRU  ^HTPRI  I  «R  I  Wgj  ^ct  f?TCf?T  I  S3.  I 
wftTWlW  ^WTT  II  S8  II 

15.  The   women  sing  the  praises  (singular)   of  Indrani  (pass, 
constr.).    16.    "Study  ye  holy    writ    and  the  sciences,    speak   the 


Lesson  XIV.  XV.  65 

rite  truth,  honor  your  teachers":  thus1  is  the  prescription3  of  the 
text-books2  for  scholars4  (gen.).  17.  Let  kings  protect  their  sub- 
jects and  punish  the  wicked:  thus  is  the  law  not  offended  (fTT pass.).  t 
18.  O  women ,  reverence  your  mothers-in-law.  19.  Let  not  the 
coachman  strike  or  torment  the  horses.  20.  "Bring  the  jewels": 
thus  the  two  maid-servants  were  commanded  by  the  queen.  21.  Let 
us  with  two  spoons  drop  water  on  the  altar.  22.  "Let  us  play  with 
dice  for  money"  (instr.):  thus  spoke  the  two  warriors  (pass.). 
23.  "To-day  let  me  initiate  (imv.)  my  two  sons":  thus  says  the 
Brahman.    24.  Let  the  men  dig  a  cistern. 

Lesson  XV. 

199.  Verbs,  a- conjugation.     Present  Imperative  Middle.    The 

present  imperative  middle  is  inflected  thus: 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural.  '  c  '    -' 

1.  *W  labhdi  <^*|  1 4^  Idbhavahai    "5WTT%  labhamahai 

2.  *W^  labhasva         *RT^TPF^  Idbhetham     vPfh3(1{  Idbhadhvam 

3.  H+4dl*i  labhatdm     ^RtffTIT  Idbhetdm        ^WrTTt.  Idbhantam 

200.  The  first  persons  are  really  subjunctive  forms.    The  in- 
flection of  the  passive  imv.  is  precisely  similar;  thus,  ftfiq,  fsfc*|^, 

f^fi^rllH'  etc- 

201.  Nouns  in  ^J  r.    These  stems,  like  many  belonging  to  the 

consonant-declension,  exhibit  in  their  inflection  a  difference  of 
stem-form:  strong,  middle,  and  weak.  (For  the  cases  called  strong, 
etc.,  see  Introd.,  §  87).  In  the  weak  cases  (except  loc.  sing.)  the 
stem-final  is  ^J  r,  which  in  the  weakest  cases  is  changed  naturally 
to  Tr.  But  as  regards  the  strong  cases,  the  stems  of  this  declension 
fall  into  two  classes:  in  the  one  —  which  is  much  the  larger, 
comprising  all  the  nomina  agentis,  and  a  few  others  —  the  ^£  is 
vriddhied,   becoming  ^STf"^  dr;   while  in   the  other  class,  containing 

Perry,  Sanskrit  Primer.  5 


66 


Lesson  XV. 


most  nouns  of  relationship,  the  ^|  is  gunated,  becoming  ^r^  **r. 
In  both  classes,  the  loc.  sing,  has  ^T^  ox  as  stem-final.  The  abl.- 
gen.  sing,  is  of  peculiar  formation ;  and  the  final  ^  r  is  dropped 
in  the  nominative  singular. 

202.   Nomina  agentis  in  ^J  r,  like  cRrl  m.,  '  doer '. 


Sing. 

N.  "^RcTT  karta 

A.  eficfn^  kartaram 

I.  cfi^lT  kartra 

D.  m^f  kartre 

Ab.  cR<T^  kartur  (or  -us) 

L.  ^ifTf^  kartari 
V. 


Dual.  Plural. 

"«*<$  TVl  kartarau     «ftnl<^  kartdras 

„  „  ^R*^  £ar£fn 

cfi«i^ITH  -trbhyam  efirTf*W  kartrbhis 

„  „        1H)^  kartrbhyas 


ejnrn^  kartros 


^idUJ}*^  kartrndm 
^5fT^  kartrsu 


eft<i^  kariar 

203.  Two  nouns  of  relationship,  ^^f  f'.,  "sister",  and  •ffT  m., 
'grandson',  follow  this  declension:  but  ^^f  makes  the  ace.  pi. 
*cj^<^  svasf-s.  > 

204.  The  nouns  of  agency  are  sometimes  used  participially, 
or  with  adjective  value.  The  corresponding  feminine-stem  is  made 
in  ^t,  and  declined  like  «nft;  thus,  cR^fif  kartri. 

205.  The  grammarians  prescribe  a  complete  neuter  declension 
also  for  bases  in  ?T,  precisely  analogous  with  that  of  cfrfT  or  Ttjs 
but  such  forms  are  rare. 


Vocabulary  XV. 


Verbs: 


TF^  +  ~W*\  (ami(jdcchati)  follow. 
^"^+^^-■^7  (samdcdrati)commh, 
perform,  do. 


"SfZ  +  f^  (viv  ddate)  dispute,  argue. 

t^T  +  ^TT  (dcrdyate)  go  for  pro- 
tection to.  take  refuge  with 
(ace). 


Lesson  XV. 


Snbst.: 

•4JMl4  m.,  teacher. 

oficT  m  ,  doer,  maker,   author:  as 

d 

adj.,  doing,  making. 
chM  m.,  time. 


XJ?  n.,  step. 

UTZrf^TT  n.,  penance,  expiation.  pvvi«j*Mj**1fc 

}f?T  m.,  supporter,  preserver ;  lord,  '^fy-fcjjtt*. 

husband ;  master. 
"^f^TH  m.,  protector. 


SPTOT  n.,   honor,   glory   (o/ten  as 


cfitrr  f-.  graciousness,  pity.  fc^f>*ejr^|T^  m.,  trial,  law-suit.  Vua^ cxhckVO^ 
3TTT  m.,  giver;  as  aa}'.,  generous.    9J[*rl  ra.,  punisher.  governor.     ^^    « 
S^«f  m.,  scamp,  rogue.  <5fu*jaVm^5n|  m.,  creator.   JrASf/' 
5*"g  m.,   seer,   author  (of  Vedic 

books);  as  adj.,  seeing. 
"VTTf  m-,  creator.    <*"«*'•. 
VH^Q  m.,  decision^  certainty. 
%ff  m-j  leader.  frie-XTir 
MfU^<T  m-5   learned  man ;  panditd^  betterfw.  foWg  abL). 

Exercise  XV. 


indecl.,  w.  folVg  dat.\. 
Adj.: 

^fK^> f-  °^rr>  poor.  &**'<<Lk&-' 

cp^,  f.  0^TT,  best,  most  excellent :  si/vsta^1 


w  ^irfrT  ^rr%^  1^1^  ^  ^::  ii  8  n 

rTft**  f%T  TT^T  ^^f^rT  I  8  I  >^R  ^TRTSTRfT  WRJ  ^T^ 

*pro  (da«.)  3^:  ^%:  ^T  ^^^|^rr  l^rar**  i  %  i  «p«TC: 
wrt  Tfwrft  ^trt  ^  Trwrft  ^tfnrro;  i  ^  i  m^rer  3F%n 
mfiin*!  t5r:  i  ^  i  ^rar^r  ^wt  ^*p*f  ^Tm^r  ^^ft  *r*ft 
*m:  ii  e  ii 


*  Words  are  often  repeated,  to  give  an  intensive,  a  distributive, 
or  a  repetitional  meaning.  So  here:  "at  every  step".  The  po- 
sition  of  ^  is  very  unusual;  it  would  naturally  follow  4ll|4g. 

**  Loc.  absol.  —  supply  "  being''. 


68  Lesson  XV.  XVI. 

10.  Let  the  wife  love  her  husband.  11.  Let  the  warriors  follow 
their  leaders  and  fight  with  the  enemy  (pi).  12.  At  the  river  the  boy 
is  to  meet  his  two  sisters  (instr.).  13.  The  world  was  created  by 
the  creator.  14.  In  the  houses  of  pious  givers  alms  is  given  to 
ascetics.  15.  King  Bhoja  was  (^J^cT)  generous  toward  the  author 
(loc.)  of  the  eulogies.  16.  Let  servants  always  be  useful  to  (%cTj 
their  masters  (ace).  17.  For  protection4  (ace.)  betake  yourselves5 
to  the  gods3,  the  protectors2  of  the  pious1.  18.  Men  live  by  the 
graciousness  of  the  creator.  19.  O  generous  one,  the  poor  bend 
before  thee\  20.  The  man  leads  his  sisters  to  the  city  (pass, 
constr.). 


Lesson  XVI. 

206.    Verbs,   a-conjugation.     Present  Optative  Active.     The 

present  optative  is  formed  from  the  general  present-stem  by  the 
addition  of  a  mode-sign,  after  which  are  used  secondary  end- 
ings (in  3rd  pi.  act.  ^^  us,  in  1st  sing.  mid.  ^  a,  in  3rd  pi.  mid. 
^•^  ran).  After  an  a-stem,  this  mode-sign,  in  all  voices,  is  %  t, 
unaccented,  which  blends  with  the  final  a  to  XT  e  (accented,  or 
not,  according  to  the  accent  of  the  a) :  and  the  TJ  is  maintained 
unchanged  before  a  vowel-ending  (^(^,  ^^,  "411^1*^,  -*IMIH)  by 
means  of  an  interposed  euphonic  T(  y.  The  inflection  in  the  active 
voice  is  as  follows: 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

1.  «=(^^H  vddeyam  cf^  vddeva  "3%*f  vddema 

2.  ^^C  vddes  ^HH  vddetam  ^rf  vddeta 

3-      «T<|f(,  vddet  ^dl*t  vddetam  ^T^C  vddeyus 

Similarly,    fallt^  vigeyam,    Sfffc?{   ndhyeyam,    ^\{^\m^ 
cordyeyam,  etc. 


Lesson  XVI. 


69 


207.  The  optative  expresses:  1.  wish  or  desire;  2.  request  or 
entreaty;  3.  what  is  desirable  or  proper;  4.  what  may  or  might, 
can  or  could  be.  It  is  also  largely  used  in  conditional  sentences. 
The  subject  is  often  indefinite  and  unexpressed.  The  negative  used 
with  the  opt.  is  «T  na.  Both  the  prescriptive  and  the  prohibitive 
optative  are  very  common. 

208.  The  nouns  of  relationship  in  ^J  (except  ^*?  and  •TJf  — 
see  §  203)  gunate  ^J  in  the  strong  cases;  thus,  fxjTT  m.,  'father', 
4-f Tr|     f.,  'mother',  declined  as  follows: 


Dual. 


twf(  *rnrft 


Plural. 


Sing. 

n.  frjTrr  Tmrrr 

A.     (MHT*i  *IHKH 
I.      1W  W[WI 

etc. 

V.    ftr^^TfT^ 

209.   The  stem  Jf\  m.,  f.,  'bull'  or  'cow',  is  declined  thus: 


etc.  etc. 


Sing. 
NV.  ^ft^  gaus 
A.      JJ|4^  yam 
I.       TTT  oawa 
D.      ife  gave 
Ab.    ^ft^  gos 

G"-        »     » 
L.      *rf^  aar< 


Dual. 
iftHTPH  gobhydm 


T*faj.  0flwo« 


Plural. 
jfl^H.  gobhyas 


*PFPH  gavam 
T^gosu 


Verbs: 
JT"^  (mdnyate)  think,  suppose. 
?T7  (modate)  rejoice. 
lf^  (pdnsati)   proclaim  (see  also 
in  Vocab.  I.). 


Vocabulary  XVI. 

B  (smdrati;  p.  smarydte)  re- 
member; think  of;  teach,  asp.  t'n 
pass,  'it  is  taught',  i.e.  'tra- 
ditional'. 


70 


Lesson  XVI. 


Sabst.: 

ift  m.,    f->   bull,  steer,  cow  ;   f., 

speech. 
4\\^  n.,  ox-nature;  stupidity. 
VJT4J  ™.,  fodder,  hay. 
STTTTC  "i-j  son-in-law. 
<|fl£<J  f.,  daughter. 
~9G.»X«,T[^F  n.,  mud,  bog. 

fXT?T  m.,  father;  du.,  parents;  pi., 

manes. 
inftW  m.,  user,  arranger. 
^\f  m.,  wise  man,  sage. 
^TRI  uiv  brother. 
^TTff  f.,  mother. 
7TTO  m.,  month. 
<H**i  n.,  pair. 
"?T^P![  n.,  protection. 
'-H\$  n.,  an  oblation  to  the  manes, 

accomplanied    by    a    sacrificial 


meal    and    gifts    to    the    Brah- 
maus. 

Adj.: 

^rfcra?,  f-  0:?fT,  more,  greater, 
greatest. 

«*m^V|,  f-0155rT,  granting  wishes; 
as  f.,  sc.  VT>  the  fabulous  Won- 
der-cow. 

^U^rfti  f.  °^TT,  badly  arranged 
or  used. 

TTmS-  f.  °^T,  arranged,  used. 

%¥,  f-  ^TT,  best. 
Pron.: 

OT  f-,  she,  it. 

Adv.  and  Conj.: 

%<^  if. 

f«lrt|*^  always,  daily. 

^  if. 

^4^'cfi  well,  properly. 


Exercise  XVI. 
*ft*ff:  chi^^yi*  ^tr^r  wmT  ^rat  ^v:  I 

^rgirr  u«iiit^  iRfr^:  ffa  ^rfn  11  m  ii 

*ffiTt  **<H  fwt  *TRT  ^  Wt  ^Tf^  ^5^  n  I TT  T%S"- 

^N  ri^T  fti%  w  f%r%^r  i  $  i  fxm^t  *n%  tt%  ^rre  *rf|^:  1 8 1 


*  Predicate.    Play  upon  words  throughout  the  verse. 


Lesson  XVI.  XVII.  71 

rit  f*mft  T%*ri  ^^TTt  vmit\  *tt*:  y^na  T%*j:  i  «  i  ^ 
wi  ii  ^  ii 

13.  By  Rsabhadatta,  son-in-law  of  Nabapana,  many  cattle  and 
villages  and  much  money  were  given  to  the  Brahmans.  14.  Thou 
shalt  give  the  mother's  jewels  to  the  sisters  (opt.  or  imv.).  15.  Let 
the  coachman  bring  (^T*W)  fodder  for  the  horses ;  let  him  not  tor- 
ment the  horses.  16.  Of  the  father's  property  a  greater  part  is  to 
be  given  (imv.)  to  the  eldest  of  the  brothers.  17.  "Children,  bring 
wood  and  water  into  the  house  daily";  thus  was  the  father's  com- 
mand. 18.  Let  the  cows  graze  in  the  forest.  19.  Let  both  live  on 
the  milk  (instr.)  of  the  black  cow.  20.  The  wagon  is  drawn  by 
two  steers.  21.  The  seer  rejoices  over  the  pair  (instr.)  of  white 
steers.    22.Hari  andCiva  marry  two  sisters,  the  daughters  of  Rama. 


Lesson  XVII. 

210.  Verbs,   a- conjugation.     Present  Optative   Middle.     The 

optative  middle  (and  passive)  of  «-stems ,   formed  as  shown  in  the 
preceding  lesson,  is  inflected  as  follows : 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

1.  *Rf*T  Idbheya  ^nTcrf%  Idbhevahi  *W*lf^  labhemahi 

2.  ^Rfarret   Idbhethas  t^ij<J|V2J|j^  lubheyatham  ^pf*^  Idbhedhvam 

3.  *RTrT  Idbheta  <«H4*Jldl*i  Idbheyatdm     ^WTI  Idbheran 

Similarly  ^T*HT  coryeya.  ^j^T^I^T  samgaccheya,  etc. 

211.  Declension.  The  stem  ^T  f.,  'ship,  boat',  is  entirely  reg- 
ular, taking  throughout  the  normal  endings,  as  given  in  §  90. 
Thus:  *fpE(,  TTfH,  TRT,  etc;  ^TWT,  •H*illH'  etc-?  TH^, 
^f»^,  etc. 


72  Lesson  XVII. 

212.  The  stems  ending  in  long  vowels  (^STT,  f^,  ^)  fall  into 
iwo  well-marked  classes:  A.  root-stems  —  mostly  monosyllabic  — 
and  their  compounds)  with  a  comparatively  small  number  of  others 
inflected  like  them ;  B.  derivative  feminine  stems  in  ^jrr  and  ^, 
with  a  few  in  ^f,  inflected  like  5TPTT,  *T<?^  and  ^J.  The  stems 
of  class  A  take  the  normal  endings  throughout,  with  optional  ex- 
ceptions in  dat.,  abl.-gen.,  and  loc.  sing,  fern.,  and  with  «^  inserted 
before  "411*^  of  the  gen.  pi.  The  simple  words  are  as  nouns  with 
few  exceptions  fern. ;  as  adjectives  (rare),  and  in  adjective  com- 
pounds, they  coincide  in  masc.  and  fem.  forms.  The  declension  of 
the  simple  words  in  f^  and  ^f  has  been  given  (in  §§  189,  197); 
those  in  "^  are  so  rare  that  it  is  not  possible  to  make  up  a  whole 
scheme  of  forms  in  actual  use. 

213.  When  any  root  in  ^JTT  or  %  or  ^fi"  is  found  as  final  member 
of  a  compound  word,  these  root -finals  are  treated  as  follows: 
1.  Roots  in  ngfT  lose  that  vowel  before  vowel-endings,  except  in 
the  strong  cases  and  in  the  ace.  pi.,  which  is  like  the  nominative. 
Thus,  f^T-tn  hi.,  f.,  'all- protecting': 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

N.V.  fcjjyun^  -pas      f^^ft  -pau  f^THEC.  -pas 

a.    fqi^m^  -pam    fH^m\m\*{  „      „ 

I.        f^rePTT  vigvap-a   fapjJTJfat  vifvap-os        f^RTTrf'WC  etc. 

214.  2.  Roots  in  %  and  ^J  change  their  final  vowel,  before 
vowel-endings,  into  Jf  and  ^,  if  but  one  consonant  precede  the  final 
vowel;  but  if  two  or  more  consonants  precede,  the  change  is  into 
^[IJ  and  ^R .  Thus,  ^J^-9|ft  m.,  f.,  'corn-buying':  nom.-voc.  JfS[- 
s£j{^,  ace.  TJ^f^W;  ^5f-^  m.,  f.,  'street-sweeper':  nom.  sing. 
^HM^,  ace.  *sJHM*i- 


Lesson  XVII. 


73 


Verbs: 
f^T  4-  TTfrT  (praUkmte)  expect. 
«p?  -f  ^S(fV[  (abhindndati ,    poet. 

-tej  rejoice  in,   greet   with  joy 

(ace). 


Vocabulary  XVII. 

"^^  (rdmate)  amuse  oneself. 

+  f^f  (virdmati)  cease  from  (abl.)', 

cease. 
■JUT  + '^•T  (anutisthati)  follow  out, 

accomplish. 


Subst.: 
d<^H  n.,  garden. 
cftfty  f.,  agriculture. 
sftfarT  n.,  life. 
fsfglj  m.,  command, 
qpflj^l  n.,  cattle-raising. 
tr^tf^TTm.,  domestic  priest,  chap- 
lain. 
^f^pJJ'  n.,  eating. 
^7T3R  ni.,  servant. 
^T^JI  nM  death. 


f*T^  n.,  friend. 

lf%  n.,  battle. 

^Tfarai  n.,  trade. 

f^ffV  m.,  rule;  fate. 

^J"*TT  m.,  father-in-law. 
Adj.: 

"WZ,  f.  °^Tf>  good,  pleasant,  dear; 
as  n.  subst.,  fortune. 

^Tf^rej,    f.    o^TT,    doubtful;     un- 
steady. 


Exercise  XVII. 
^^  ITrft^rT  f^t  ^^t  ^T*  II  $  II 

vn  rif  t  fNn:  irrprawu  *  i  ^  *TO  ^  ^"^  twN^frft- 
$<d<i  *nvfa:  p^  i  *  i  Star  frerr  ^ifti^w  ^rgm^r  ^t 
^f?^  i  ^  i  *f^ nri  ire  Trffl^  1 8  i  ^  tiftct  ^Tfrftr  fa- 
%«4  rT^T  ^rf  *w«to:  i  m  i  srurrrTT:  ^ii-^Mi:  ^<£n?*n^ 
Yms  fwr  %^Tn  i  $  i  ^rww^T^t^^  *W*i  i  ^  i  *r*fM 

m\<WWt  tf^T  ^itrT  WT  ^t^rT  I  *=  I    ^fift   ^TftfHgWSTT- 
WTH  I  0. 1  ifa  gwn^rt;  I  «i0  I  ^T^TR^TI  <*I^MI*i  II  <W  II 

*  Rule  for  an  ascetic,  who  is  to  put  aside  all  earthly  desires 
and  passions. 


74  Lesson  XVII.   XVIII. 

12.  Let  fodder  be  brought  (^TT-i|)  (opt.,  imv.)  by  the  brother 
for  the  horses  of  the  all-protecting  king.  13.  May  ye  see  good 
fortune  (pi.)',  may  ye  acquire  (^mj  glory.  14.  The  king  with 
his  warriors  crossed  the  sea  in  a  ship.  15.  Tell  (opt.,  imv.)  where 
our  friends  may  meet  with  their  brothers.  16.  You  may  amuse 
yourselves  in  the  garden,  but  cease  eating  (abl.  of  MMW)  the  fruits 
(gen.).  17.  Mayest  thou  be  saved  by  the  all-protector  from  thy 
misfortune.  18.  To-day  let  the  king's  two  sons  be  consecrated 
(opt.,  imv.)  by  the  house -priest.  19.  Ye  both  shall  greet  (opt., 
imv.)  your  parents.  20.  It  we  two  should  speak  untruth,  then  we 
should  be  punished  by  the  king.  21.  May  I  conquer  the  enemies 
with  my  brave  warriors:  thus  is  the  king's  wish  (use  ^TJ  pass.). 
22.  May  we  receive  the  reward  of  virtue. 


Lesson  XVIII. 

215.  Causative.  The  chief  points  to  be  noticed  in  the  form- 
ation of  causative- stems  have  been  given  already  (in  Less.  VII); 
some  additional  ones  follow. 

216.  Most  roots  in  ^T  and  "^|  add  T^  before  the  conjugation- 
sign ;  thus,  ^"PTOfc!  from  l^T;  T^P^fa;  1TM*lfil;  vfarfa  from 
^J.  ?n  makes  3MM4|(dj  "^Tand^T*  sometimes  UW^jf^  etc.,  some- 
times IJTTOffT,  etc.  1XJT,  'drink',  makes  M'itfilfrl  (as  though  from 
X(\).  A  few  roots  in  ^  and  ^  take  the  same  T^,  with  various 
irregularities  ;  thus.  ^T^TT^Tf?!  from  ^Tf\J-^[. 

217.  Medial  or  initial  ^f  in  a  light  syllable  is  commonly  length- 
ened, but  sometimes  remains  unchanged.  Thus,  TJc^,  TJ i <i q  fcT ; 
«K*t,  ofiliHiJd;  ^FC,  -m 41^(71.  But  most  roots  in  ^JJ^,  and  ^, 
^■^,  TP5  j  ^T  ,  with  other  rarer  ones,  generally  keep  the  tST  short ; 

thus,  *nn;,  *r*ref<r 


Lesson  XVIII.  75 

218.  Final  vowels  take  vrddhi  before  ^^',  thus,  W,  *TM*lfd; 

219.  Some  verbs  of  causative  meaning  are  by  formation  de- 
nominatives;  thus  lJMtlf?T,  'protect',  called  causative  to  2TJT;  fit- 
iprfTT,  to  fit;  M^RrfTT,  to  *JT;  ^TrHrfa,  to  f^. 

220.  For  the  passive  of  causatives,  see  Less.  X. 

221.  The  causatives  of  intransitive  verbs  are  transitive.  The 
causatives  of  transitive  verbs  are  construed  sometimes  (a)  with  two 
accusatives,  sometimes  (b)  with  an  ace.  of  the  object  and  an  in- 
strumental of  the  agent.  Thus,  "he  causes  the  birds  to  eat  the 
cakes"  may  be  rendered  either  (a):  fq^n^  fMU^I«V,  H^'*J Id, 
or  (b)  fcffffc  fqo  1T<>. 

222.  Participles.  The  general  participial  endings  are  ^f«rl 
(weak  form  ^fT)  for  the  active,  and  "il^Vf  for  the  middle.  But 
after  a  tense -stem  in  ^ST,  the  active  suffix  is  virtually  «fT,  one 
of  the  two  "^T's  being  lost;  and  the  middle  suffix  is  fTVH  (ex- 
cept ^rrT  sometimes  in  causative  forms).  Thus,  ^q«rl  bhdvant, 
Tl^nT  tuddnt,  <^"3|«fr  dlvyant,  y^\  <*J«rT^  cordyant;  \{d(i\\*[  bhdva- 
mdna,  etc.  For  the  declension  of  the  participles  in  ^fT  see  below, 
Less.  XXIII. 

223.  Pronoun  of  the  First  Person.  The  pronominal  declension 
exhibits  some  striking  peculiarities  which  are  not  easily  explained. 
The  pronoun  of  the  first  person  is  declined  thus: 


Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

N. 

c|*l*i 

A. 

*n«K,  ^ 

I. 

*r?n 

^jttwtr; 

^^nf^c 

D. 

^H^,  * 

r>       .       *ft 

^W*>  T*C 

Ab. 

^ 

n 

vws* 

G. 

^XX^Btt^  'ft 

^r^i«**i,  *rcr_ 

L. 

•n 

^<ai« 

76 


Lesson  XVIII. 


224.  The  forms  *TT,  *?,  «ft,  •TCC.  are  enclitic,  and  are  never 
used  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,    or   before   the   particles  ^, 

225.  In  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons  the  plural  is 
often  used  for  the  singular.  Pronouns  (and  other  words  as  well) 
show  in  Sanskrit  a  curious  tendency  to  agree  in  form  with  the 
predicate  rather  than  with  the  subject  to  which  they  refer. 


Verbs,  with  causatives: 
tJP^  eat;    caus.  (dcdyati)    make 

eat;  give  to  eat. 
^[  +  ^SlTSl  study,  read ;  caus.  (<z- 

dhydpdyati)  teach, 
cfiain  caus.  (kalpdyati,-te)  make; 

ordain,  appoint. 
5f5^  in  caus.  (jandyati)  beget. 
fff  +  ^n   in    caus.  (ajndpdyati) 

command. 


Vocabulary  XVIII. 

ff  die;  caus.  (mdrdyati)  kill. 

Tf&  sacrifice;  caus.  (ydjdyati) 
make  to  sacrifice;  offer  sacrifice 
for  {ace.*). 

^T+  ^rfH  in  caus.  (abhivadayati) 
greet. 

f^7  know;  caus.  (veddyati)  in- 
form (dat.). 

+  f?f  in  caus.  inform  (dat.). 
I  H\J  (vdrdhate)  grow ;  caus.  (var- 


l^T  give;  caus.  (dapdyati)  make 

give  or  pay. 
~%*{  see ;  in  caus.  (darcdyati)  show. 
l^TT  +  *TfT>  i°  caus.  (-dhdpdyati) 

Jmake  put  on,  clothe  in(two  ace). 
•ft  +  ^SR  load  away  (caus.  apa- 

ndydyati). 
WS[  in  caus.  (prathdyati)  spread, 

proclaim. 


dhaydti,  -te)  make  grow;  bring  up. 
qEPZT  in  caus.  (vyathdyati)  torment. 
i&  hear  ;  in  caus.  (cravdyati)  make 

hear,  i.  e.  recite,  proclaim  (ace. 

of  pers.). 
TUT  stand;   in   caus.  (sthapdyati) 

put,  place;  appoint;  stop. 

+  IT  (pratisthate)  start  off;  in 

caus.  (prasthapdyati)  send. 


*  The  priest  who  performs  sacrifice  for  the  benefit  of  another 
person  is  said  to  "make  that  person  sacrifice",  as  though  the 
latter  (who  is  called  <Ja|44M)  were  celebrating  the  sacrifice  for 
himself. 


Lesson  XVIII. 


77 


Subst.: 

W^RV  n.,  nectar. 

^L|«f  «j«f  n.,  initiation,  investiture. 

eff^  m.,  hand;  trunk  ('of  ele- 
phant) ;  ray ;  toll,  tax. 

BRTfcfirra  m->  nom-  Pr~>  a  noted 
poet. 

«M3fl  f.,  nom.  pr.,  the  city  of 
Benares. 

TTOr  m.,  quality ;  excellent  quality, 
excellence. 

^IJTTf  m.,  nom.  pr.  (Rama's 
father). 


dm  m.,  slave,  groom. 
^1[  m.,  messenger,  envoy. 
HTZtiPni  n.,  nom.  pr.,  the  city 
of  Patna. 

^<3  n.,  garment. 
f^f\J  m.,  Brahman  (the  deity). 
^efi  m.,  wolf. 

ife  m.,  science,  knowledge ;  esp. 
sacred  knowledge,  holy  writ. 

Adj.: 
«n?H  f.  o^JT,  new. 
^,  f.  °^rT,  own,  one's  own. 


Exercise  XVIII. 

*ra  i  ^t^rt  mw  T?m  i  9  i  ^«niiiM*«f5T  %^:  n  *  ii  *ti- 

w^TT^prcf^:  i  m  i  ^m*H  ^TFrraffaTfa  «^ifin  qtrvT- 
ti^g:  i  $  i  >rr?rfr  TOiwrt  irrcgntr*r^  i  vo  i  ^?*rn:  ^n»i^«n> 

fa  IT®  «*M<*Jd  I  *=  I  ^l*fl4*R  fTTTt  S^T^nf  i  a  i  ^fwr  *j% 
^O^K^^T  I  90  I  ^5^ft  S^?T3i  Jj(lllrH^^:  W\f%  ^  ^RPJ- 

frfa  ^rrf^tfr^m  i  99  i  ^i  wr*r  fawrfa  ttt:  ^rwt  fra- 

f<TI  9^  I  ^ft  ^TWt  T31%  *F^  TWW  %^^TR:  II  93  II 

14.  I  cause  a  mat  to  be  made  (caus.  pass.).  15.  Show  me 
(dat.)  the  books.  16.  Let  Brahmans  teach  us  both  and  offer  sacrifice 
for  us.  17.  The  king  determined  (ordained)  the  taxes  in  his  kingdom. 
18.  I  have  my  field  ploughed  by  slaves.  19.  Give  me  water  and 
food.  20.  They  had  the  boy  taken  (led)  away  from  me  (abl.). 
21.  The  kings  sent  envoys  to  Pataliputra.  22.  Thieves  stole  our 
(gen.)  cows,  and  wolves  killed  our*  flocks.  23.  The  king  made  the 
*  The  expression  of  possession,  etc.,  on  the  part  of  pronouns 


78 


Lesson  XVIII.  XIX. 


poet  recite  (use  cfciqeiHr)  a  eulogy  of  Visnu.    24.  We  torment  our 
hearts  with  wishes.     25.  Both  scholars  greet   the  teacher. 

Lesson  XIX. 

226.  Pronoun  of  the  Second  Person.    This  pronoun  (for  which 
the  natives  assume  T^^  and  ^T^  as  bases)  is  declined  thus: 

Dual. 


Singular. 

N. 

*ro: 

A. 

wr*c,  ^rr 

I. 

wen 

D. 

<p^,  % 

Ab. 

^<t 

G. 

to  fT 

L. 

**fa 

^*fta;,  tr: 


Plural. 


227.  The  forms  ^T,  ^  TT*{.  ^t.  are  enclitics,  subject,  to  the 
same  rules  as  TR,  5^,  etc.  (§  224). 

228.  The  Pronoun  of  the  Third  Person  (for  which  the  natives 
assume  rf^f  as  base  —  the  base  is  really  <T)  is  declined  as  follows 
(note  uom.  sing.,  m.  and  f.): 


Masculine : 

Feminine: 

Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

N. 

**. 

eft 

m 

mn 

A. 

*ro; 

n 

cTT^ 

ctw: 

» 

n 

I. 

TO 

m^rra; 

TO 

cf^TT 

rn^rn^ 

ffTf^ 

D. 

4      1 

tot 

n 

%*ro 

«9k 

TO 

n 

^mro 

Ab. 

fl^T"^ 

T) 

T) 

toh^ 

V 

r> 

G. 

T 

<H3 

to^c 

n 

TT^fr^ 

L. 

dH?K 

n 

*S 

totr; 

V 

cfTO 

is  made  almost  entirely   by  the  genitive  case,  not  by  a  derivative 
possessive  adjective.    But  often  the  unemphatic  possessive  pronoun 


of  the  English  is  omitted  in  Sanskrit. 


Lesson  XIX.  79 


Neuter : 

Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

N. 

*f 

rTTfl 

A. 

n 

» 

n 

I. 

ni«n*i 

TO;  e 

<f^[  etc.,  as  in  the  masculine. 

229.  The  nom.  sing,  rnasc.  ^p^,  and  its  compound  OTER^,  lose 
their  final  ^  before  any  consonant;  before  vowels,  and  at  the  end 
of  a  sentence,  they  follow  the  usual   euphonic  rules.    Thus,  ^J  T\- 

230.  The  third  personal  pronoun  is  used  oftenest  as  a  weak 
or  indefinite  demonstrative,  especially  as  antecedent  to  a  relative; 
and  often  like  the  English  "definite  article." 

231.  Like  cf  are  declined:  (a)  TJcf,  'this',  formed  by  prefixing 
TJ  to  the  forms  of  7f,  throughout;  thus,  nom.  sing.  m.  TJ*l^,  f.  TPErr, 
n.  T£rTC;  (^)  tae  relative  pronoun  (and  adj.)  Jf,  'which,  who'; 
(c)  comparatives  and  superlatives  from  pronominal  roots,  such 
as  ^rfTS  which  (of  the  two)?'  and  3ffiffl  'which  (of  the  many)?' 
So  JfWK.  and  ^RWj  TT^kTH  'one  of  many';  tJRT  other',  with  its 
comparative  -4|*t|rT<j  and  ^cfi,  'different'.  —  Yet  other  words  are 
so  inflected,  but  with  ^rj^  instead  of  ^JT  in  nom.-acc.-voc.  sing. 
neut. :  as,  ^rgf,  f^f,  w  all ' ;  TJeJf  'one',  in  pi.  'some';  \d*j"SJ,  f.  °^ft 
(only  sing,  and  pi.),  'both'. 

232.  The  interrogative  pronoun  ^}  (for  which  the  Hindus  give 
the  base  as  f^R^)  follows  precisely  the  declension  of  7f,  except 
nom. -ace.  sing.  neut.  f?R?^;  nom.  sing.  in.  ^j^,  f.  ^TT. 

233.  A  number  of  words  follow  the  pronominal  declension  in 
some  of  their  significations,  or  optionally ;  but  in  other  senses,  or 
without  known  rule,  lapse  into  the  adjective  inflection.  Such  are 
comparatives  and  superlatives  from  prepositional  stems,  as  tST^TT 
'lower',    H^m  'lowest';   tf^  : chief,  tf^  'earlier',   ^5tTT  'upper', 


80  Lesson  XIX. 

'northern',  Tf^fW  'southern',  etc.  Occasional  forms  of  the  pro- 
nominal declension  are  met  with  from  numeral  adjectives,  and  from 
other  words  having  somewhat  of  a  numeral  character,  as  ^q 
'few',  ^9Sn|  'half,  etc. 

234.  Peculiarities  in  the  use  of  relative  pronouns,  etc.  The 
Sanskrit  often  puts  the  relative  clause  before  the  antecedent  clause, 
and  inserts  the  substantive  to  which  the  relative  refers  into  the 
same  clause  with  the  relative,  instead  of  leaving  it  in  the  antecedent 
clause.  In  translating  into  Sanskrit,  a  relative  clause  is  to  be 
placed  either  before  or  after  the  whole  antecedent  clause; 
but  not  inserted  into  the  antecedent  clause,  as  is  done  in 
English.  Thus,  "the  mountain  which  we  saw  yesterday  is  very 
high "  would  be  in  Sanskrit  either :  *j  T($Q  ^f  ift  SWPR  *Tt 
tfffa  rff:,  or:  *  T^rft  tfffa  «T#T  V  ift  SWT*;  but  not  * 
*T^rTt  ^  ^*T  lift  CTWW)  etc->  according  to  the  English  idiom. 

235.  The  relative  word  may  stand  anywhere  in  its  clause; 
thus,  f*Jcf  MUfifflMT  %  ^Tr:  "the  gods  whose  chief  is  Qiva". 
Sometimes  relative  or  demonstrative  adverbs  are  used  as  equivalents 
of  certain  case-forms  of  relative  or  demonstrative  pronouns;  thus, 

236.  The  repetition  of  the  relative  gives  an  indefinite  meaning: 
'whosoever,  whatever'.  The  same  result  is  much  more  commonly 
attained  by  adding  to  the  relative  the  interrogative  pronoun,  with 
(or,  less  usually,  without)  one  of  the  particles  %  ^«T,  f^[,  ^"fa 
■^T-  Sometimes  the  interrogative  alone  is  used  with  these  particles 
in  a  similar  sense.  Thus ;  ^T^T  ^T^fa  ''  whatever  this  woman 
relates'';  ^ff  ZJ^f  Vfm:  ^TR^  "whatever  any  one's  disposition  may 
be";  ^TO  ^i^  fxf^^fd  "he gives  to  some  one  or  other";  <<<ain*- 
^fHfejfl  «3T»ffi  "he  takes  from  no  one  whatever". 


Lesson  XIX. 


81 


Vocabulary  XIX. 

Verbs:  !  ^^  say,  speak;   name;   in  caus. 

I 
^T^  sit;  in  cau9.  (asdyati)  place,      (vdcdyati)  make  (a  written  leaf) 


ltrr   drink;    in    caus.    (pdydyati) 

give  to  drink,  water. 
2TTT  protect;   in   caus.  (pdldyati) 

protect. 


speak,  i.  e.  read. 
^T^  (sdhate)  endure. 
f^TW   (sidhyati)  succeed;  in  caus. 

(sadhdyati)  perform,  acquire. 


jft  rejoice;    in  caus.  (jprlndyati)\^\   kill;  caus.  (ghatdyati)  have 
make  rejoice,  please.  killed. 


}ft  fear;  in  caus.  (bhisdyate,  bhayd- 
yate)  terrify,  frighten. 


57  call;  in  caus.  (Jwaydyati)  have 
called. 


Subst.: 
«4)|tj  n.,  business,  concern. 

^TSJF  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  god. 

^ftaPST  f.,  n.  pr. 

irfTf  f.,  gait;  refuge. 

^TTTCjr  m.,  n.,  foot,  leg. 

gng"  n.,  umbrella. 

73^  n.,  milk. 

%^ejft  f.,  n.  pr.,  Krsna's  mother. 

qn4^k  f',  earth. 

TS(\,  as  prefix  to  proper  names, 
has  the  meaning  'famous',  'ho- 
norable '. 


*inrr?r  m.,  companion,  helper. 

Adj.: 
"3Rf  other. 

TrTT  other. 
f^^  all  (Vedic).. 
*$  all. 
^  14  sweet. 

Indecl. : 

tJ|04  also,  even. 

f^a\\  without  (w.  instr.  or  ace; 
often  postpos.). 


Exercise  XIX. 

*rfa  ^fa ^ ftraft fw?r:  ni^:  ffM¥  mh^Ph  * ht- 
f*fcr^fti*nrt^%*PftT^*n*i  jJ^"^hi^i*i^i8i 

Perry,  Sanskrit  Primar.  c 


82  Lesson  XIX.  XX. 

ir^r  ^rf>:  cfimf^Rmr^  11  qg  11 

15.  The  husband6  of  that5  (gen.)  Kausalya2  (loc),  of  whom1 
(loc.ftm.)  Rama3  was  born4,  is  called8  Dacaratha7.  16.  The  teacher4 
rejoices3  at  thy1  diligence2  (abl).  17.  Why  (cft^|<^)  speakest  thou 
so?  18.  Others  than  we  could  not  endure  this  suffering.  19.  The 
teacher  teaches**  us  holy- writ  and  the  law-books.  20.  May  all8 
those7  kings2  who1  protect6  their  subjects5  according  to4  (^rw,  post- 
pos.)  the  law3  {ace.)  be  victorious9.  21.  The  fruits  of  all  these 
trees  are  sweet.  22.  May  the  glory  of  all  women,  who  honor  their 
husbands,  increase  (imv.).  23.  In  this  kingdom  the  king's  punishment 
terrifies  the  wicked.  24.  Which  of  the  two  fruits  do  ye  wish?  25.  My 
father  had  gold  given  to  me,  cows  to  thee,  to  the  other  brother 
nothing. 

Lesson  XX. 

237.  Declension  of  Stems  iu  Consonants.  All  noun -stems  in 
consonants  may  well  be  classed  together,  since  the  peculiarities 
shown  by  some  concern  only  the  stems  themselves,  and  not  the 
endings.  Masculines  and  feminines  of  the  same  final  are  inflected 
precisely  alike;   and  neuters  are  peculiar  (as  usually  in   the   other 


1  "Other  than  thou".    With  ^pjj,  as  with  comparatives,   the 
ablative  is  used. 

**  "Makes  us  read"  (^rf^Ho  caus.). 


Lesson  XX.  83 

declensions)  only  in  the  nom.-acc.-voc.  of  all  numbers.  But  the 
majority  of  consonantal  stems  form  a  special  feminine  stem  by 
adding  %  (never  tSTT)  to  the  weak  form  of  the  masculine. 

238.  Variations,  as  between  stronger  and  weaker  forms,  are 
very  general  in  consonantal  steins:  either  of  strong  and  weak  stems, 
or  of  strong,  middle,  and  weakest.  The  endings  are  throughout  the 
normal  ones  (Introd.,  §  90). 

239.  The  general  law  concerning  final  consonants  is  as  follows: 

1.  The  more  usual  etymological  finals  are  ^,  X!?  1>  "l,*  <T,5 
^i,  K.5  Z;    sporadic  are  ^,  tjJ  ,  OT   as  finals. 

2.  In  general,  only  one  consonant,  of  whatever  kind,  is  allow- 
ed to  stand  at  the  end  of  a  word ;  if  two  or  more  would  etymo- 
logically  occur  there ,  the  last  is  dropped ,  and  again  the  last, 
until   but   one    remains. 

3.  Of  the  non-nasal  mutes,  only  the  first  in  each  series,  the 
non-aspirate  surd,  is  allowed  as  final;  the  others  —  surd  asp.,  and 
both  sonants  —  are  regularly  converted  into  this ,  wherever  they 
would  etymologically  occur. 

4.  A  final  palatal,  or  ^,  becomes  either  ?R ,  or  (less  often)  ^; 
but  ^  in  a  very  fewr  cases  (where  it  represents  original  \J)  be- 
comes c^. 

240.  According  to  239.  2,  the  ^  of  the  nom.  sing.,  m.  and 
{.,  is  always  lost;  and  irregularities  of  treatment  of  the  stem-final, 
in  this  case,  are  not  infrequent. 

241.  Before  the  pada-vn dings,  WTP^.,  f*J^  ^^  a"d  ^  a  stem- 
final  is  treated  as  in  external  combination. 

242.  An  aspirate  mute  is  changed  to  its  corresponding  non- 
aspirate  before  another  non- nasal  mute  or  a  sibilant;  it  stands 
unaltered  only  before  a  vowel  or  semivowel  or  nasal.  Hence  such 
a  mute  is  doubled  by  prefixing  its  own  corresponding  non-aspirate. 

243.  Consonant-stems  of  one  form  in  c^,  ^,   \J   and   H  .     Be- 


84  Lesson  XX. 

fore  suffixal  If ,  both  <T  and  \J  as  stem-finals  become  ~Z;  1/t  as 
stem -final  becomes^.  Examples:  i\\c^  m. ,  lwind';  ^SIT^  £» 
'misfortune';   ^*R^  n.,  'the  world'. 

Sing.  Plural. 

n.v.  *^  i  ^rre^  i  snra;  11  t^to:  i  w\v^  i  surfer  u 

a.    *twc  i  ^iim^h  i  ^nm;  n       „ 

i.     insm  i  -4im<i  1 srhtt  n  *^flrct  i  ^mHsfi  i  oHiffiu.  11 

d.    *ro  i  ^rn^  i  spnr  ii  tws:  i  ^rnrsra:  i  wrsra;  11 

Ab.  *4M^  i  ^rro^i:  i  *hm*ui 

g.       „  „         „  *<vii*i  i  ^im<ih  i  si'nrro;  n 

l.    *^f?r  i  ^rnrf^  i  ^RTfa  n  jt^j  i  ^rrw  i  sprraj  n 

Dual. 
N.A.V.  ^^rfr  |  *MH<fl  |  ^f^TTft  II 

i.D.Ab.  jt^wt^  i  w^rm;  i  snnwr^  u 
g.l.    «vft<i  i  4iih<{1h.  i  annfrtc  ii 

For  the  «^  inserted  in  nom.-acc.  pi.  neuter,  cf.  phaldni,  ma- 
dhuni,  etc. 

244.  In  a  few  roots,  when  a  final  sonant  aspirate  (TET ,  V ,  W ; 
also  ^,  representing  T21 )  loses  its  aspiration  according  to  §§  239.  3, 
242,  the  initial  sonant  consonant  (JI  ,  ^,  or  h)  becomes  aspirate; 
thus,  TJ\J,  nom.-voc.  sing.  *jt^;  3T5PE0  ^**J' 

245.  Agreement  of  adjectives.  If  the  same  adjective  qualify 
two  or  more  substantives,  it  will  be  used  in  their  combined  number; 
if  the  substantives  are  masculine  and  feminine ,  the  adj.  will  be 
masc. ;  but  in  a  combination  of  masc.  or  fern,  subjects  with  neuter, 
the  adjective  will  be  neuter. 


Lesson  XX. 


85 


Verbs: 

■^i?  grow;  caus.  (rohdyati  or  ro- 
pdyati)  make  rise  or  grow; 
plant. 


Vocabulary  XX. 

^fW  ,  in  caus.  (lambkdyati*)  make 
receive  or  take ;  give. 


,.*, 


Subst. : 
^MHlMi  f-,  name  of  certain  Vedic 

writings. 
■^XT^TT  n->  sacred  cord  (worn  by 

the  three  higher  castes). 

BTCFZ  f.,  stone. 

firafTTf.,  contentment,  happiness. 
T^ERi  ni.,  supporter,  maintainer. 
VTO<T  m.,  king;  mountain. 
*<f^  m.,   wind;   as   pi.,  n.  pr., 

the  Storm-gods. 
■^"TfT  m.,  wind. 

fcJJJjm  m.,  trust,  confidence. 
^f  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  demon,  Vrtra. 


IJTf  n.,  a  hundred. 
^"^7  f.,  autumn;  year. 
^rf^T^  f.,  fagot. 
^Rfi.  f-5  river. 
41^7  m.,  friend. 

Adj.: 

^TSJ^r,  f-  °^TT>  skilled,  learned. 
f^raW  m.,  f.,  n.,  threefold,  triple. 
cpfo,  f.  °^S(J,  hard   to   find   or 

reach;  difficult. 
*T3f,  f.  otSTT,  devoted,  true. 

Indecl. : 
<4|(t|  also;  even. 

Xjjy  |f^  behind  (w.  gen.). 


Exercise  XX. 

f  ftps  *rf*ret  ^TT^Tfr  i  ^  i  ^rf«ra<s  *j^h!  ^qrf^- 


*  If  a  nasal  is  ever   taken  in  any   uf  the  strong  forui8  of  a 
root,  it  usually  appears  in  the  causal. 

See  §  225 ;  ZHT  =  tffm^l  and  ^^T^;  see  §  235.  end. 


** 


86  Lesson  XX.  XXI. 

^:  I  $  I  ?*  sfta  t^:   Wt  |  *S  I  WrT:  (gen.)  fajT§t  cRI- 

*nf*i:  ^frf^-:  *rr^r  i  o.  i  Tnft  <if^f^ra  i  qo  i  wm: 

14.   Indra,  with  the  Maruts  as  his  companions,   killed  Vrtra. 

15.  Without  a  companion  no  one  can  perform  a   difficult  business. 

16.  One  (express  in  pi.)  should  plant  trees  on  all  the  roads,  for  the 
sake  of  the  shade.  17.  Those  friends  who  are  true  in  misfortune 
are  hard  to  find  in  the  three  worlds.  18.  The  girdle  and  the  sacred 
cord  of  Aryans  are  to  be  made  threefold  (neut.  dual).  19.  Put 
(JUT  caus.)  this  stone  behind  the  fire.  20.  The  ocean  is  called  by 
the  poets  the  husband  of  rivers.  21.  All  subjects  must  be  protected 
(imv.)  by  their  kings.  22.  Some  of  these  Brahmans  are  learned  in 
the  Upanisads,  others  in  the  law-books. 


Lesson  XXI. 

246.  Declension  of  Consonant-stems,  cont'd.  Stems  in  pala- 
tals, etc.  1.  Final  ^  of  a  stem  reverts  to  the  original  guttural 
when  it  conies  to  stand  as  word-final,  and  before  the  /wda-endings. 
becoming  ^j  when  final,  and  before,  ^T,  and  If  before  3? .  2.  Final 
«f  is  oftenest  treated  exactly  like  ^  —  for  cases  of  other  treat- 
ment, see  below.  3.  In  the  roots*  fZTT»  ^TT  a"d  ^JTCT\  the  ^T  is 
treated  in  the   same   way.    4.  The  ff    of   ^  becomes  "Ef    after   efi  . 

*  In  classical  Sanskrit  not  many  root-stems  are  used  as  inde- 
pendent substantives;  but  they  are  frequently  employed,  with 
adjective  or  (present)  participial  value,  as  final  element  of  a  com- 
pound word. 


Lesson  XXI.  87 

thus.  °^.    E.g.  TF^  f-,  'speech,  word';  *Jf"3  f.,   'illness';  f^"*^  f., 
'direction,  point  of  the  compass': 

Sing.  Plural. 

n.v.  <tto  i  ^  i  f%*  ii  ^rr^  i  ^^ro:  i  f^c  ii 

A.       «TN?l  I  ^R  I  f^lR  II  »  „ 

i.     ^-rt  i  wr  i  f^tn  ii       ^tTt^b:  i  ^f^ro:  i  f^frwi;  u 

L.       wrf^f  I  ^fw  I  t^ftr  ||  TTf  I  ^f  I  f^J  II 

Dual. 

Tnft  i  ^ft  i  f^fr  ii 
ciN«ii*i  i  ^rarm;  i  f^ron^  n 
Tnfr*;  i  ^Fr*t  i  f^afm:  11 

247.  1.  Final  ft  of  a  stem  regularly  becomes  the  lingual  mute 
(^3  or  "£)  before  3"f  an^  "H,  and  when  word-final.  For  exceptions, 
see  §  246,  3.  2.  The  final  "5T  of  the  root-stems  T"T"^ ,  'rule',  "?|<3 , 
'sacrifice',  and  "IT"5r ,  with  others;  and  3.  the  final  f  of  a  number 
of  roots ,  are  treated  like  1\  above.  Thus,  f%$  m.,  'enemy'; 
"fat,  m.  pi.,  'people',  the  '  Vaicya- caste';  f%fi^  m.,  f . ,  (adj.) 
'licking'. 

Sing.  Plural. 

N.V.  f^z  I  fWZ  II  f^TO  I  f^TO  I  I  f^Tf^  II 

A.       f"^"**.  I  fa^H  II  -n  j>  r> 

i.      f^n  i  f^rfT  ii      fwfftm  i  f^ffa*  i  t^f^:  ii 
l.     f^-fa  I  fsrff  ii       ftg*  i  fwz*  i  fa^J  II 

Dual. 

ff^ft  i  "f%#t  ii 

fl^lT^  I  f^l^TR:  II 

f^fta  i  f^rf-ra:  ii 

248.  But  '"gf^Jt    ni.,    priest*,  though  containing  the  root  H^  , 


88 


Lesson  XXI. 


makes    3gf^R   etc.;    and    ^5T   f.,   'garland',    though   containing 
i/*!U ,  makes  ^^  etc. 

249.  1.  Nouns  having  the  roots  Y^,  'burn',  and  T^,  'milk', 
5^  'be  hostile',  with  others,  as  final  element,  and  also  ^fuil^'  f. 
(name  of  a  certain  metre),  change  the  final  ^  into  ^{  and  It. 
Thus,  <#iy<?tf,  'wood -burning',  makes  nom.-voc.  sing.  ^TTT^RR; 
^TPTCf  £j  '  granting  wishes ',  nom.-voc.  sing.  ^TW^cti,  ace.  °^*^, 
loc.  pi.  °\T^;  f*H^  'friend-betraying,'  nom.-voc.-sing.  f?Hh 
Ijf^  etc.  2.  In  words  with  •fi?,  'bind,'  as  final  element,  where  ^g 
represents  original  ^T ,  the  ^  becomes  ^  and  <^ ;  thus,  ^MH^  f-, 
'shoe,  sandal,'  nom.-voc.  sing.  \dMMr^,  ace.  °«T^*^>  instr.  du. 
"TgTR,  loc.  pi.  ©•fig. 


Verbs: 

<*T{  in    caus.    (damdyati)    tame; 

compel. 
5^  (druhyati)  be  hostile;  offend. 
>J  in  caus.  (dhdrdyati)  bear. 
V{  (bhdrati,  -te)  bear,  support  (lit. 

and  Jig.). 


Vocabulary  XXI. 

*TW  +  ^?  (utsrjdti)  let  loose  or 
out;  raise  (the  voice). 

^T^  +lTfT(Pan^4/a*e*)embrace. 

tf  +  3?  (prahdrati)  strike  out ; 
smite. 


Subst.: 
■^Ti^J  m.  pi.,  n.  pr.,  a  people  in 

India. 
-^£-e^  f.,  verse  of  the  Rigveda ;  in 

pi.,  the  Rigveda. 
-slflMViJ  n.,  medicine. 
<^Tt  «r|«|  m.,  nom.  pr. 


^TJ  f.,  look,  glance;  eye. 

f^TO   m.,  enemy. 

^T^q  m.,  tears. 

Jreflre  m.,  bee. 

VTTOqf  n.,  sweetness. 

"^51    f.,  sickness,  disease. 

GHETTO    ™.,  great  king,  emperor. 


^!3"   and  a  few  other  roots,    whose  nasal  is  not  constant 
throughout  their  inflection,  lose  it  in  the  present-system. 


Les9on  XXI. 


89 


CTTTnT  m.,  vassal. 

<HM<fi  in.,  one  who  has  taken  a 

certain  ceremonial  bath. 
*37WTT  "!•?  private  recitation  (of 

sacred  texts). 

Adj.: 
^TrsfiTnT,   t  °^n  (pass.   part,   of 
«FT.+  "^TT)?  attacked,  smitten. 

i^r, f-  °^n5  rich- 

oRT'fr?^  m.  f.  n.,  granting  wishes  ; 

as  f.  subst.,  the  Wonder-cow. 
?f^T!J,f.0'^n',rigbt  hand;  southern. 


healthy,  well. 
xnaf,  f.  °^TT,  wholesome  (gen.). 
^t^re,  f-  ^STT,  strongest. 
^-,  f.  o^TT  (pass.  part,  of  ^J  ), 

besieged,  surrounded ;  suffused. 
f^f^S,   f-    0^ST[    (pass.    part,    of 

f%%  +  f^),  hated,  detested. 
*Tf,  f.  o^jt  (part,  of  ^\*  ),  old. 

^Tftra,  f.  °^rr,  sick,  in. 

H*TfT,  f.  ^TT,  provided  with. 

Ad?.: 

3i^T*H.  ^Tt^ffT:,  ^i^Tfa,  ever. 


Exercise  XXI. 
*T^ri:  *piwt  f^raft  (abl.)    cfff^  I  «*  I    TOTWt   $fo  Tim 

f^ffM«Ns*m  1  ^i  ere  *rr^  <*iIh<i*  *rrv3  ^<T7r  i  3  i  ^r 

^tr^%r:  i  ^  i  f^TT^  wri  faftrs:  i  o.  i  ^rftwrrrsri  *wn: 
^t  $^?ra  ii  <^  ii 

14.   In    the    private    recitation  of    the    Veda  an    ascetic    must 


*  f^RJ^  (interrog.),  with  some  other  words  expressing  u9e  or 
need,  take9  with  it  an  instrumental  of  what  is  used  or  needed,  and 
a  genitive  of  the  user.  So  here:  "of  what  use  to  a  well  man  are 
medicines"? 


90  Lesson  XXI.  XXII. 

raise  (opt.  or  imv.)  his  voice.  15.  That  one  among  the  priests  is 
called  hotr,  who  recites  the  Rigveda.  16.  A  snataka  must  wear 
shoes  and  a  garland,  and  carry  an  umbrella.  17.  "Among  my 
friends  Rama  is  the  strongest":  thus  spoke  Ravana.  18.  Let  an 
emperor  keep  his  vassals  in  check  C?J^  caus.),  and  protect  (TJT 
cans.)  the  people  in  all  the  earth.  19.  In  the  Rigveda  occurs  (^TT 
pass.)  the  Usnih.  20.  The  father's  glance  fell  upon  me  (loc). 
21.  Among  the  betrayers  -  of  -  friends  is  named  (^nSf^T  pass.) 
Vibhisana.  22.  The  seer  praises  Indranl  with  verses  of  the  Rig- 
veda. 23.  The  emperor  smote  his  enemies  (ace,  dat.,  or  loc.) 
with  the  sword.  24.  In  the  battle  Krsna  was  killed  by  his  en- 
emies. 25.  "  May  our  enemies  be  tormented  by  diseases " :  thus 
spoke  the  Brahman  in  anger  (abl .). 

Lesson  XXII. 

250.  Declension  of  Stems  in  "J.  The  stems  in  ^  and  ^ 
lengthen  the  vowel  before  consonant- endings,  and  in  nom.-sing., 
and  the  ^  of  the  nom.  is  lost.  In  the  nom.-sing.  the  final  X 
then  becomes  ^  (or  visarga)  under  conditions  requiring  a  surd 
as  final  (see  §  95.  116).     Thus,  farj  f-,  '  voice ' ;  J^  f.,  '  city'. 

Singular.  Dual.  Plural. 

N.v.     iftx  i  tjt;  ii       f*nft  i  *nft  h  far*;  i  gr*C  h 

A.  f*TT*l  I  ST**  II       »  »  »  » 

i.  fanj  i  tjtt  ii  ifM'R  i  ^R  ii  *ftf*rarjtf*fci:  ii 
l        nrfn  i  jft  ii     farta:  i  yfrs:  h       ^tH  i  ^5 

251.  Stems  in  ^tf^  [and  in  f?T«^  and  f^(J.  These  are  masc. 
and  neut.  only;  the  corresponding  feminine  is  made  by  adding  ^; 
thus,  \|f*1*fl*     They  lose  their  final  «^  before  consonant- endings; 

Almost  any  noun  in  ^H  may  form  a  possessive  derivative  with. 


Lesson  XXII.  9  1 

and  also  in   the  nom.  sing.,    where  the   masc.   lengthens  the  ^[  in 
compensation.     Thus,  ^Tf^nt.  m->  n->  'rich'. 

Masculine.  Neuter. 

Singular.  Dual.  Plural.        Singular.    Dual.        Plural. 

A.      Vfii«t*i  „  »  „  „  y, 

I.       Vf*Ml       ^rf^WT^     ^f*rf*TCC  as  in  the  masculine 

l.    \rf^t*i     ^nffa;     ^fsre 
v.    ^rfat 

252.  Derivative  stems  in  tJT^-  T^t>  ^^C.-  The  stems  of  this 
division  are  mostly  neuter;  hut  there  are  a  few  masculines  and 
feminines.  Their  inflection  is  nearly  regular  (for  ^t,  ^"^,  ^T  be- 
fore Vf  see  §  241 ;  for  the  loc.  pi. ,  p.  27,  bottom  of  page).  Masc. 
[and  fern.]  stems  in  ^R^  lengthen  the  ^f  in  nom.  sing.;  and  the 
nom.-acc.  pi.  neut.  also  lengthen  ^  or  ^[  or  ^  before  the  inserted 
nasal  (anusvdra).  Thus,  Jf*RT  n.,  'mind';  ^fa^  n«,  'oblation'; 
VT^  n.,  'bow'. 

Singular.  Dual. 

N.A.V.  *t-to;  i   ^f^  |   ^r^  ||    jt^  \        ^fcpft  \      \*«pft  II 

i.        *wr  i  f f^Ti  i  ^R^r  u  *Rt«rro;  i  ffwro  i  v^t^  ii 
l.       *r*rfs  i  ffafa  i  \i*rfa  n  *wfa;  i  ifafrtc  i  ^*jtTt^  ii 

Plural. 

n.a.       jnrifa  i     f^-rq  i     vrfcr  ii 

i.         T^tt^:  i  ff^ra:  i  ^fn^  ii 

L  *w  i      ff^f  i     v^*3  n 

<>r  *nr:g  I  or  ffeng  I  or  ^«j:j  || 

253.  ^^rf^f"^^  m.  (name  of  certain  mythical  characters):  nom. 
sing-  VftHTO,  ace.  ^rf^^H,,  instr.  ^f^^T,  voc.  ^P^<^; 
nom.-acc.  pi.  ^STf^fT^^.- 

the    suffix    ^•Tj     thus,    from  ^f   n.,   'strength',    «jf^«^,    'having 
strength,  strong'.     Stems  in  fa^  and  fc|«^  are  very  rare. 


92 


Lesson  XXII. 


254.  Adjective  compounds  having  nouns  of  this  class  as  final 
member  are  very  common.    Thus,  4J*H^  'favorably-minded.' 

Singular.  Dual, 

m.  f.  n.  m.  f.  n. 

N.  «*HI*t      °T^  3*M*H       °# 

a.  ^^rr:    °*to;  , 

^IVJI^y   'long-lived': 

Singular.  Dual. 

A.    <f|vh*JMH    °*ra: 

I.     ^NlTW  etc.  ^Kh^R  etc. 


Plural, 
m.  f.  n. 

n  n 

Plural. 


<{jv||^f^ 


V 

etc. 


Verb: 

^J^  (sdjati;  but  often  pass. :  sajjdte 


Vocabulary  XXII. 

for  sajydte)  hang  on,  be  fastened 
on  (as  thoughts  —  w.  loc. ). 


Subst. : 

^WT^C  f-i  heavenly  nymph. 
i^lft  f*j  n-  Pr-i  an  Apsaras,  Ur- 
vaci. 
f^f^TT  m.,  king. 
f^T^  f.,  voice;  song. 
^^C  n.,  eye. 
^Tf^WC  m->  moon. 

^tt  m->  spy- 

W\  f-,  bowstring. 

sii^fim.  n.,  light;  star;  heavenly 

body. 
rf^T^I  m.,  pond. 
^["IT  f.,  door,  gate. 


\sl«r^  n.,  bow. 

«J|<4J  f.,  pipe,  conduit. 


H^J^  n.,  milk. 

Y^  f.,  city. 

TO»^Rc(,  m.,  n.  pr.,  Pururavas. 

Snf^PC  ni.,  (living)  creature. 

H<d*slU^  m.,  n.,  pr.,  India. 

*H^  n.,  mind. 

Iffs^*^  m.,  minister  (of  state). 

3fCTT  n.,  sacrificial  formula,  text. 

^Wl  n->  glory» fame- 

^fllRT    m.,  merchant. 
^"^T^  n.,  age. 
HH*\H   {.,  flower. 


Lesson  XXII.  i)3 

^pf  in.,  sun.  asceticism;  asm.  subst.,  ascetic. 

Cs 

^(M    n.,    place,    spot,    locality;   TTSff^^  courageous. 


stead. 
JOTftVT,  m-?  possessor,  lord. 
^f%^  n.,  oblation. 

Adj.: 

■^n^re,  f-  °^rr  (part,  of  ot  +^n)- 

drawn,  bent  (as  a  bow). 


inaw,  f.  o-^,  first. 

f{rf,    f.   °^rT  (part,   of  *?),   dead, 

fallen. 
f^pT,    f.    o^jj    (part,    of    ^JT), 

standing. 

Indecl.: 


w*'' 


TPTf^pr  suffering,  doing  acts  of!  cf  to  be  sure,  in  sooth. 

Exercise  XXII. 

r  ^    ^  smmri  i  m  i  ifnwm  v-rft  wrjt:  wt  s*rt:  htwt 
-5nr%  q+nqfamfrd  i  $  i  infxprr  +nifa  wtf^m  *r*rf%  i  ^  i 

<rra;  1  w  1 

11.  Raise  ye  the  voice  in  praise  (dat.)  of  Hari.  12.  In  the 
cities  of  India  dwell  rich  merchants  and  courageous  warriors. 
13.  The  praise  of  Pururavas  was  sung  by  Kalidasa.  14.  The  king 
gave  orders  (^T-IJT  cans.)  to  have  his  minister  called  (use  or.  recta). 
15.  The  minds  of  ascetics  must  not  dwell  (*JW  )  on  riches  (^",  loc. 
sing.).  16.  At  night  the  moon  gives  light  to  all  creatures.  17.  One 
should  sacrifice  to  the  gods  (cf.  Tf&  in  Voc.  I)  flowers,  fruits,  and 
milk,  not  living  creatures.  18.  The  Apsarases  lead  into  Heaven 
warriors    fallen   in   battle.     19.  In   age   (instr.),  not  in  knowledge, 


94  Lesson  XXII.  XXIIL 

Civa  is  the  eldest  among  his  brothers  (loc,  gen.).  20.  The  gods  live 
by  the  oblation.  21.  A  merchant  wishes  wealth  (^ft%  a  warrior 
fame,  an  ascetic  deliverance.  22.  The  woman's  eyes  are  suffused 
with  tears. 


Lesson  XXIIL 

255.  Declension.  Comparative  Adjectives.  Comparative  ad- 
jectives of  primary  formation  have  a  double  form  of  stem  for  mas- 
culine and  neuter:  a  stronger  in  Tart^  (usually  %SjftO'  in  the  strong 
cases,  and  a  weaker  in  ZR^  (usually  |^4|^),  there  being  no 
distinction  of  middle  and  weakest  cases.  The  voc.  sing.  masc. 
ends  in  ^«l.  The  feminine-stem  is  made  with  %■  from  the  weak 
stem-form.     Thus,  %STTO\  'better1: 

Masculine.  Neuter. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural.  Sing.     Dual.     Plural. 

n.  %*ttt;     51  h\h\      %^t*ra:      n.v.  %^^  %wt  3<j'ifa 

A.  ^fa-RHP*  v  *i*mtl  n  v  r, 

I.    %?TOT       ^ft^rrn;    ^frf^C  like  the  masculine. 

l.  ^rfa     '^refa:    %*m  °*i:*r 

Fem.  stem    %inft  declined  like  *\d\. 

256.  Stems  in  ^«tT  (or  nJR^)  fall  into  two  divisions:  A.  those 
made  with  the  suffix  ^f«rT  (^SHO^  being,  with  few  exceptions,  active 
participles,  present  and  future;  and  B.  those  made  with  the  pos- 
sessive suffixes  *TnT  (or  t{c[J  and  ^IfT  (or  ^cQ.  They  are  masc. 
and  neuter  only,  the  fem.  being  formed  with  $\ 

257.  A.  Participles  in  ^sprf  (or  ^ffi).  E.  g.  sJfanT^  m.,  nM 
'living. ' 


Lesson  XXIII.  95 

U 
Masculine.  Neuter. 

Sing.  Dnal.           Plural.  Sing.            Dual.  Plural. 

N.V.^e^  aforeft      ^fanT^  ^T^        Wfanft  sft^f^T 

A.      ^m  „             ^\qci«,             v                 r.  n 

I.       wfa*TT  sfhntTTH   Whrf^           as  in  masculine. 

l.    ^fafw    ^t^rffa;  afcng 

258.  The  strong  form  of  these  participles  is  obtained,  me- 
chanically, by  cutting  off  the  final  ^  from  the  3rd.  pi.  pres.  (or 
fut.)  ind.  act. ;  thus ,  «T^f^rT  gives  strong  form  of  pres.  act.  part. 
•PJnT,  weak  ?Rl^;  fasfnT.  frTC^  and  ftBc^J—  ffjf^  TIT** 
and  ^HH^;  —  ^T!^srf«tT,  ^H^i|«d  and  <^l!^^c^;  —  *Tf%^jf?tT 
(fut.),  ^f^UJ«r1N  and  ^ff^T^. 

259.  But  those  verbs  which  in  the  3rd.  pi.  act.  lose  the  «^  of 
the  usual  fJ?T  (as  e.  g.  the  verbs  following  the  reduplicating  class 
in  the  present-system),  lose  it  also  in  the  present  participle,  and 
have  no  distinction  of  strong  and  weak  stem.  Thus,  from  j/^", 
3rd  pi.  pres.  ind.  act.  5TJTf?T5  part,  (only  stem -form)  ^T^Tr^:  nom.- 
voc.  sing.  masc.  Wgc^,  ace.  Sl^rJH ;  nom.-voc.-acc.  du.  ^,$[ cTt, 
pl-  «TS7T^.;  nom.-voc.-acc.  sing.  neut.  -aj£^,  du.  ^|[<ft  pi.  ^JSffa-  * 

260.  Only  the  present  participles  of  verbs  of  the  a -class,  the 
ya-class,  and  causatives,  invariably  insert  «^  in  nom.-voc.-acc.  du. 
neut.  Present  participles  of  the  a'-class,  of  the  root-class  when  the 
root  ends  in  tSTT,  and  all  future  participles,  may  either  take  or 
reject  it;  thus,  neut. -sing.  f^?7T.>  du.  fsfr^cfT  or  fi*<«<ft;  <*{\ **!<!. 
(fut.),  du.  ^fX^J «ft  or  wf^nft ;  ^Tc^  (pres.  part,  from  IfJ,  'go'), 
du.  m£\  <>r  H | wrO .  Participles  of  all  other  verbs,  and  all  other 
stems  in  ^HT.?  leave  out  the  «^  in  the  du.  neut.;  thus,  ^JfiJ<^  (^R^ 
'eat',  root-class),  du.  t5T<^  cT^. 

261.  The  adj.  ?T^«fT ,  'great',  takes  in  strong  cases  the  stem- 

The  grammarians,  however,    allow  these  verbs  to  insert  the 
■^  in  the  nom.-voc.-acc.  pl.  neuter  of  the  present  participle. 


96  Lesson  XXIII. 

form  *i^i«n:  nom.-sing.  masc.  *Tf  "R;  (see  §  239,  2),  ace.  iffT^n^, 
voc.  JTpl;  da.  neut.  JTftft,  pi.  JTfTf^rT  Otherwise  the  inBection 
is  like  that  of  participles. 

262.  The  feminine  of  participles  and  adjectives  in  ^|nT  (or 
~^7[)  is  always  made  with  j[,  and  the  form  is  always  identical 
with  the  nom.  dual  neuter. 

Vocabulary  XXIII. 

"Verbs;  1$  +  "'sSfXf  (apasdrati)  go  away;  in 

f«l«^  (nindati)  blame.  caus.  (apasdrdyati)  drive  away. 

JJB(r&jate)  shine;  rule. 


Nonns  (subst.  and  adj.): 
Wf«((4|  m.,  sun. 
TT^TRC.  (comp.)  very  honorable. 
^c^  (pr.  part,  of  ^T)  giving. 
«<flll\i^j  f-0^-,  bright,  glistening; 

(act.)  illuminating. 
^rf,  f.  °^TT;  become  (past.  pass. 

part,    of    3J);    as   neut.    subst., 


^T  m.,  calf. 

%^rt^.  better,  best ;  as  neut.  subst., 


salvation. 
^fnT   (neut.  Uftj  being,  existing; 
as  masc.  subst.,  good  man;   as 
fern.  (*Trft),  faithful  wife.* 

Adv.: 

^J^  to-morrow, 
being,  creature.  \  f%  surely,  indeed. 


Exercise  XXIII. 
ifta*:  (ace.  pi.)  %*r%  ^*k  i  R  i  vf-msmfewt  ^  ^r: 

*  Especially  a  widow  who  immolates  herself  on  the  funeral- 
pile  of  her  husband ;  whence  Anglo-Indian  suttee. 
"Even  though  they  exist". 
"^R  in  composition  often  conveys  the  idea  of  imitation. 


** 


Lesson  XXIII.  XXIV.  97 

m^mI  farnft"  <pzra:  i  m  i  *rrfr  (gen.  du.)  -?^fr  *nr*rr  *nct- 
*rnt  i  5  i  tott  ^fwr  ^RTfa  *TfTfar  ^%  i  ^  i  ^sra  *rr 

firfN5N<Tt*lTrn;:  f4«K4i  trct3*Ri  ^nf**ft  i  ^*j:  i  qo  i 

14.  We  blame  the  driver  who  strikes  (part.)  the  horses.  15.  The 
king  who  punishes  (part.)  the  bad  and  gives  (part.)  food  to  the 
good  is  praised.  16.  The  warrior  who  conquers  (part.)  in  battle 
attains  great  fame.  17.  Among  the  heavenly  bodies  the  sun  and 
moon  are  the  two  great  ones.  18.  In  the  field  I  saw  birds  flying. 
19.  He  who  lives  (part.)  to-day  is  dead  to-morrow.  20.  The  word 
of  the  good  must  be  followed  (done).  21.  Dwell  among  good  men. 
22.  A  maiden,  making  (W^  )  garlands,  sits  on  a  stone.  23.  A  hus- 
band shall  punish  a  wife  who  steals  (part.)  his  property.  24.  The 
child  (gen.)  was  afraid  (use  subst. ,  no  copula)  of  the  bees  (abl.) 
flying  about  (*&{)  in  the  house. 

Lesson  XXIV. 

263.  Declension.  Stems  in  ^(^  (or  1R{),  cont'd.  B.  Stems  in 
jp?r  (fjr[)  and  ^*<^  (^fO-  Adjectives  formed  with  these  suffixes 
are  possessives.  They  are  declined  precisely  alike  ;  and  differ  in 
inflection  from  the  participles  in  ypt{  only  by  lengthening  the  ^J 
in  the  nom.  sing.  masc.  The  feminine  is  made  in  ^;  thus,  ^ft- 
*nft.  In  the  dual  neut.  «^  is  never  inserted.  Thus,  3if\4{«d  , 
'  rich ',  '  celebrated : ' 


*  The  two  adjectives  ^<J«ri  ,  'so  great',  'so  many',  and  f^- 
IprT ,  'how  great?'  'how  many?'  are  similarly  declined. 

Perry,  Sanskrit  Primer.  ~ 


98  Lesson  XXIV. 

Masculine.  Neuter. 

Singular.       Dual.  Plural.         Singular.      Dual.      Plural. 

n.     ^fant    ^fNnft     5H*Mtt    nv.  ^fta^  ^fonft  ^ft*rf^ 
a.    ^fonw*t        »       «H*i*i^  »         »         » 

I.       ^ffacTT     *FI*l*mH  -sn+ir^t^  as  in  the  masculine. 

l.    ^forf*    sftoii^  -sfftraj 

V.      31>*K 

264.  A  stem  *T^nT*  (to  be  carefully  distinguished  from  *f«Tn^, 
pres.  part.  act.  of  W)  is  frequently  used  in  respectful  address  as 
a  substitute  for  the  pronoun  of  the  second  person.  It  is  con- 
strued with  the  verb  in  the  third  person.  Its  nom.  sing.  masc.  is 
*T3Tt  (fem.  *T^*ft);  and  Ht^5  the  contracted  form  of  its  older 
voc.  ^^^,  is  a  common  exclamation  of  address:  "you,  sir!",  "ho, 
there!";  and  is  often  doubled.** 

265.  Derivative  stems  in  "^r5^-  These  are  made  by  the  suffixes 
^rs^,  *p^,  and  ^^,  and  are,  with  one  or  two  exceptions,  masc. 
and  neut.  only.  The  stem  has  a  triple  form.  In  the  strong  cases 
of  the  masc.  the  vowel  of  the  suffix  is  lengthened  to  ^JT,  in  the 
weakest  cases  it  is  in  general  dropped;  in  the  middle  cases  the 
final  ^  is  dropped,  and  it  is  also  lost  in  the  nom.  sing,  of  all 
genders.  In  the  neuter,  the  nom.-acc.  pi.,  as  being  strong  cases, 
lengthen  the  vowel  of  the  suffix;- the  same  cases  in  the  dual  (as 
weakest  cases)  lose  ^  —  but  this  only  optionally.  After  the  ^ 
or  ^  of  J^  and  ^^,  when  these  are  preceded  by  a  consonant, 
the  •*%  is  retained  in  all  the  weakest  cases,  to  avoid  too  great  an 
accumulation  of  consonants.  Examples:  TT^ffi  m'»  'king';  «TT*T*t 
n.,  'name';  ^||4H    m.,  'soul,  self;  sTlF*  n.,  'devotion'. 


*  Probably  contracted  from  *J7R^  'blessed'. 
**  ^fr^  loses  its  final  ^  before  all  vowels  and  all  sonant  con- 
sonants; thus,  *ft  *ft  ^pj(. 


Lesson  XXIV. 

Masculine. 

Singular.         Dual. 

Plural.      Singular 

TT^T          <NI«n 

twtci;    tw 

99 

Neuter. 

Dual.  Plural. 

or  WT^\ 

a.    <NH*i       „        Trsra; 

L.      \\*U       Tr^C      TT5W  -lmft       4\*A\¥i      TTTO 

or  ^rftr  or  ?rrfa 

v.    xr^-^  wm^i  or  ?rm 

a.    wrarroi       »      wrimt      »  "  » 

i.    ^ii<4hi    ^rrwwrR  ^narf^^    ww^t     ww^rm;   warfare; 
v.   ^rreit  wwt  or  *w 

266.  Euphonic  rules.  Final  ^j,  "Z  and  T{_  remain  unaltered  be- 
fore initial  surd  consonants;  before  sonants,  whether  vowel  or  con- 
sonant, they  become  respectively  If  ,  ^,  ^  .  Before  nasals  they 
may  be  still  further  assimilated,  becoming  the  nasals  ^,  TO,  ?^. 
Thus,  TTT<s<I4  1  becomes  either  Tjf^^T^  or  Trf^sfTTJJ;  U«|«*  T 
becomes  4J44JM  or  ^n^T^-    The  latter  method  is  much  more  usual. 

267.  Before  initial  W  a  final  mute  is  made  sonant;  and  then 
the  ^  may  either  remain  unchanged,  or  be  converted  into  the  so- 
nant aspirate  corresponding  to  the  preceding  letter;  thus,  either 
*l«HS*sr:  or  qiqpTO:;  either  <\*#\$  f^TT^  or  d«a!^«dK.  In 
practice  the  latter  method  is  almost  invariably  followed. 


When  a  dental  mute  comes  in  contact  with  a  lingual  or  pa- 
latal mute  or  sibilant,  the  dental  is  usually  assimilated,  becoming 
lingual  or  palatal  respectively.  Thus,  tisthati  from  ti-stha-ti;  rdjnd 
instead  of  rdjnd. 

7* 


100 


Lesson  XXIV. 


Yerbs: 

ft^  +  ^ra  cut  off. 
jf^l  in  caus.  (mdrjdyati)  rub,  rub 
off,  polish. 


Vocabulary  XXIV. 

^TJJ^f  (denom.  —  varndyati)  de- 
scribe, portray. 

f^T  +^%  in  caus.  (udvejdyati) 
terrify. 


Subst.: 

^JT3I«T.  ni.,  soul,  self;  often  as  sim- 
ple reflexive  pronoun ;  in  geni- 
tive, his,  etc.;  one's  own. 

m$P{  n.,  deed;  ceremony;  fate. 

Tflf*^  n.,  hide,  skin;  leather. 

W1F{  n-,  birth. 

tft"^  n.,  bank,  shore. 

f^]|*l    f.,  name  of  a  metre. 

f^T  n.,  day. 

<f«j<*H  n.,  temple. 

«T^i  m.,  hell. 

Tjf^}«^  m.,  bird. 

XTT^  n.,  pot,  vessel. 

STSPl,  (brahman)  n.,  devotion; 
sacred  word  (of  God) ;  sacred 
knowledge;  the  world-spirit. 

9|$r«l  (brahman  —  a  personifi- 
cation of  the  preceding)  m.,  the 
supreme  All-Soul,  the  creator. 

^^•l.  n">  ashes. 

Tffft  m.,  ascetic. 

<M«t  m->  king« 

^tT5!.  n«j  hair. 

^"Bf  n.,  year. 

^TTTTT  m.,  meeting,  encounter. 


^fl^*^  f.,  border,  boundary;  oat- 
skirts. 

tpfT  m.,  slayer,  killer. 
Adj.: 

nSJTEWrT   long-lived  (often  used 
in  respectful  address). 

^<M«d    so  great,  so  much  (263). 

P**l«d  how  great?  how  much? 

gmU!,  f-  °^rr,  poor;  niggardly. 

diq^n    so  much,  so  many. 

f%fc(>  f-  °^T,  second. 

fH«J«MH  kind- 

fil^qi-e^  saying  pleasant  things, 
sociable. 

<4^c(«rlv  strong,  mighty. 

*f?TcjnI,f.^<f^,honorable;  blessed. 

*TT^«fT  shining,  brilliant. 

TTffTRnT   shrewd,  prudent. 

zrr^«rT   how  much,  as  many. 

l^f,  f.  o^RT:  harsh,  rough. 

f^*T,    f.    °*«ft,    pervading,    far- 
reaching;  omnipresent;  mighty. 

fcf,   f-  01?Srr  (pass.  part,  of  ^5f) 
killed. 

Adv.: 
MI^TUI  commonly. 


Lesson  XXIV.  101 

Exercise  XXIV. 

TTTf'TT  fcT^l  MUn^4lU|  ^t*rrf*T  f^I^  HNfnl  ^^TfW  I MT 
TTf?  ^%^  I  ^  I  Vein  TO^nT  <MM**lijmfafTT  ^nj  |  R  |  HT- 

^*  1^  ^  ^  f^Trro:  ^nr^  i  3  i  f^nft  ^rreT^TP^T- 

^rrf^r  *rf?m<ft  ^fr^r^wt (gen)  *  ?rfa: i  $ i  *rfa TTfsr 
fdBwra  ^fwf  ^  wri  to  t  f^rrf^  i  ^  i  ii<fcR*i3i*iir«i 
St  it^t  ^wre^r  rf  ^ar^i  ^4i^«j'M0renft  f%ftft  wnf*\ 
fl[5n<pft  *reg:  i  ^  i  *t%  tjfcwr^r  fire 3%  itfT**JT*wir  wr- 

5T?ra:  wz\  ^%5  ^f^  i  «w  i  ^p^fwt  ^rro  *ftof*r  ^n% <v- 
^Rxrerni  ii  «r  ii 

13.  Brahmaus  have  their  shoes  made  (use  efi  caws.)  of  leather 
(instr.)  or  wood.  14.  A  temple  of  blessed  Visnu  stands  in  the 
outskirts  of  this  village,  on  the  bank  of  the  river.  15.  Let  him 
rub  off  the  vessels  diligently  with  ashes  (jpL).  16.  The  servants 
announced  to  the  king  that  the  two  celebrated  poets  were 
coming  (use  or.  recta  with  XftO-  !?•  O  children  (du.) ,  tell  me 
your  (-4(|(4H  >  gen-  du.)  names.  18.  The  world-spirit  is  described 
in  many  Upanisads.  19.  It  is  said  by  the  seers  that  the  world- 
spirit  is  omnipresent  (use  or.  recta).  20.  That  part  of  the  world-spirit, 
which  is  encompassed  by  the  body,  is  called  the  soul  of  man  (cf. 
§  234).  21.  Candragupta  was  the  mighty  emperor  of  the  whole 
earth.  22.  All  the  mighty  warriors  who  fought  in  Krsna's  army 
were  killed  in  battle  by  the  enemy.  23.  In  the  Rigveda  (^Jr[  pi.) 
occurs  (f^TT  pass.)  also  the  Tristubh.  24.  The  king  of  Pataliputra 
is  by  birth  a  Qudra;  let  him  not  marry  the  beautiful  daughter  of 
the  ascetic  Mitratithi. 


102 


Lesson  XXV. 


Lesson  XXV. 


268.   Declension.     Perfect  Active  Participles  in  ^t^.     The 

active  participles  of  the  perfect  tense-system  are  quite  peculiar  as 
regards  the  modifications  of  the  stem.  In  the  strong  cases  the 
suffix  is  TRiC.?  which  hecomes  ^Tt.  in  the  nom.  sing,  masc,  and 
is  shortened  to  ^«^  in  the  voc.  sing.  In  the  weakest  cases  the  suffix 
is  contracted  into  \JU  ;  and  in  the  middle  cases  it  i3  changed  to 
^cT-  A  union-vowel  ^,  if  present  in  the  strong  and  middle  cases, 
disappears  before  ^11  in  the  weakest.  Radical  ^[  and  f^,  if  preceded 
by  one  consonant,  become  JJ  before  ^,  but  if  preceded  by  more 
than  one  consonant,  become  ^TJ  ;  whereas  radical  ^3  always  be- 
comes ^  before  ^3TJ ,  and  radical  ^?,  "^.  Thus,  f^«Tlqn^,  f*T- 
fU  T^"^'  WJ  ^ITr^i  ^^-  The  feminine  stem  is 
formed  with  %  from  the  weakest  stem -form;  thus,  fa«gqV 
Examples: 

1.  f^T^  'knowing': 
Masculine. 

Singular.        Dual.  Plural. 

n.  fa^Tt;    f^rcft    f^ranw^: 
a.  f^fwi;      „       f^ra: 
i.  t^^rr    f^srro;  f^rf^r 
l.  fa^fa   fwf^c   f^i 
v.  f^r. 

'2.  wf*H ej i^[  'having  gone'* 


Neuter. 
Singular.  Dual.      Plural. 

n.v.  f%^  "fa^fr  ft$\UA 

-n  y>  n 

as  in  the  masculine. 


Another  form  of  pert.  part,  of  this  verb  (3TJRQ  makes  the 
strong  and  middle  stems  OIJMJ^  and  SRP^;  the  weakest  form 
is  as  above,  KTira . 


Lesson  XXV.  103 

Masculine.  Neuter. 

Singular.  Dual.         Plural.      Singular.     Dual.         Plural. 

n.  wft^Tt  ^fuHjtO  °^"Rra:    *tft*H<t  wro^fr  *in*Hifa 
a.  ^n^«ii^H      »      «n{jmi        »  »  » 

I.   3N*jMT         °«f^I11      °TT^a:  as  in  the  masculine 

L.  ^rmfa       «N*jMt*t   ^fr^^r 

V.  *ffr*TcR 


269.  Stems  "^«^,  ^T^«^.  The  stems  ^5^  m.,  'dog',  and 
?m*{  m.,  n.,  'young',  have  as  weakest  stems  "sp^  and  ^jffi;  in 
the  strong  and  middle  cases  they  follow  tj^inj  voc.  *?f«^,  SPPT- 
Fern.  *pft  and  ^fTT. 

270.  The  stem  If^qn.  m->  'generous'  (in  the  later  language 
almost  exclusively  a  name  of  Indra),  has  as  strong  stem  JJTPfpT, 
mid.  o^T,   weakest  T^ffr     Norn.    sing.   «|V|c|'|,  voc.  °^«^.    Fem. 

271.  The  stem  ^^5^  n.,  'day',  is  used  only  in  the  stroug  and 
weakest  cases,  the  middle,  with  the  nom.  sing.,  coming  from  ^WT 
or  ^STf^      Thus  : 

Singular.  Dual.  Plural. 

N.A.V.  ^f^  (o^)  ^ft  or  ^[f\  ^^Tf«I 

L.  ^Tft«T  or  ^rf>  H£\*{  ^TfW  or  ^f TO 

272.  Compounds  with  \W^  or  ^T^-  The  adjectives  formed 
from  this  root  with  prepositions  and  other  words  are  quite  irregular. 
Some  of  them  have  only  two  stem-forms :  a  strong  in  ^SH3  and  a 
weak  in  ^pr^;  while  others  distinguish  from  the  middle  in  <4|-d  a 
weakest  stem  in  x^,  before  which  the  tR  is  contracted  with  a  pre- 
ceding ^  (T( )  or  ^  (^)  into  $"  or  ^f.  The  fem.  is  made  with  ^ 
from  the  weakest  (or  weak)  stem ;  thus ,  fefM-41-  The  principal 
stems  of  this  sort  are  as  follows : 


104                                         Lesson  X 

Strong. 
TTT^   'forward',  'eastward'     3JT1I 
^K^ra   'downward'                 ^RTTOf 

XV. 

Middle. 

Weak  (weakest) 

^^w   'northward                     ^J^W 
IT^TW  'backward '/westward'   TTSf^r 
JSTtf   'low'                                 *^L 

^5P3^  '  following                     V^[ 
fff^n?  '  going  horizontally '      fTT^f^ 

Vocabulary 

XXV. 

Verbs : 
^m  +  "!M*j(*i  (astamgdcchati)   go 
down,  set  (lit'ly  "go  home"  — 
used  of  the  heavenly  bodies). 


+  "&£  (udgdcchati)  rise. 
^jr^  (sprhdyati)  desire  (dat.). 


Snbst. : 
*fft;^  n.,  weight;  dignity. 

Q|9|7f  n.,  that  which  lives. 

<T^jf|j«!jff.,  n.  pr.,  a  city  (Taxila) 

in  India. 

f?p|9  m.,  n.,  animal. 

<3^J  m.,  n,  pr.,  a  god,  Tvastar. 

MfiM^  f«5  assembly. 

OTRK^g  n.,  Baroch  (a  holy  place 

in  India). 
JTERPC.  m.,  Indra. 
*T^  m.,  n.,  young;  f.  gifa. 
fqm«U  m.,  ripening;  recompense. 


■?HR  m.,  pains,  trouble, 
ftjf  m.,  lion. 
<sTM  n.,  bathing,  bath. 
^f^TJT  m.,  gazelle. 

Adj.: 
TJ(*ftrT»  f-,  °^5T,  learned,  studied. 
fffffl c| fw   having    stood;    as  n. 

subst,  the  immovable, 
f^ft'fl.  three-headed. 
<^TJ>  f-  °HT,  (part,  of  ^TfT  )  bitten. 
"^•!<iHfa«ts  forest-dwelling. 
fc(^i^  knowing,  wise,  learned. 


^  inserted,  irregularly,  in  weakest  forms  only. 
1  irregular  (f?TT^+,*reG- 


Lesson  XXV.  XXVI.  105 

Exercise  XXV. 

flRRTl  *T«f?r  *pf  f^TT  *pN  W^  ||  q$  || 

iTT^rt  f^fir  ^r<f\'^^f^T  3Tdl^m«siJi^rm  i  q  i  f^flr- 
^r  f^jt  ^r^fr  ^srra^  i  r  i  wsf^sfHm  vi  tim«ii«ik<i^  i  $  i 
^ft  ir^r  ^fwM^SidiH  i  8  i  :s3,n  ^r  fs*ifa;  «nm**i- 

yrnrafq  g^  *npif*?T  i  ^  i  trt:  <tiMm  f^n%*r  f^cftSr  «rt- 
fsf  frnsN  grrgia  Tfa  ^if^:  i c i  t^NY  fa^:  ^f  wr*t«i 

0 

^  m4fci^  wm  v^iri  fa*ra  *<Wi  ^fw  infNi  ^1- 
^raw:  11  «w  11 

12.  Vrtra  was  killed  (TpL,  caws.  />ass.)  by  Magbavan  and  the 
Maruts.  13.  Young  women  sang  a  song.  14.  Two  learned  Brahmans 
dispute.   15.  Sarama  is  called  in  the  Rigveda  the  dog  (/.)  of  the  gods. 

16.  Great  forests  are  found  in  the  west  (expr.  as  pred.,  nom.  pi). 

17.  In  the  assembly  let  the  best  among  the  learned  teach 
(^J-ftpTT)  the  law.  18.  Those  who  have  committed  evil  deeds 
must  stand  by  day  (ace.)  and  sit  by  night.  19.  Glory  was  attained 
by  the  young  warrior.  20.  Turned  toward  the  east  (nom.  sing.)  let 
one  reverence  the  gods;  the  east  (Hm1)  is  the  quarter  (t^T()  °f 
the  gods.  21.  Day  by  day  one  must  worship  (VR)  the  sun.  22.  The 
gazelle  has  been  killed  by  dogs.  23.  The  lion  is  king  of  forest- 
dwelling  animals. 

Lesson  XXVI. 

Some  Irregular  Substantives. 

273.  41Jcj|  f.,  k  mother':   voc.  sing.  ^<R. 

274.  1.  ^rt^T  m.,  'friend':  sing.  num.  TOT,  ace.  TOI*1R,  inst* 
TOTT,  dat.  ^(§r,  abl.-gen.  ^TCfTCt,  loc.  *Hstf|,  voc.  *r% ;  du.  «<aicT|, 


106  Lesson  XXVI. 

^r<a**NH>  OTft*U  pi-  nom.  ^r^T^C.,  ace.  *«|^,  instr.  ^rNfij^; 
the  rest  like  ilfa-  —  2.  trfff  m.,  is  declined  regularly  (like  ^ifM) 
in  composition,  and  when  meaning  'lord,  master';  when  meaning 
'husband',  it  follows  ^rf^f  in  the  following  forms:  inst.  sing.  VRll, 
dat.  Tfiif,  abl.-gen.  M<*|^,  loc.  T^ft. 

275 .  The  neuter  stems  tJ(^J«^  ' eye ' ,  -4|*-vy«^  '  bone ' ,  ^VJ«^ '  curds ' , 
fl^^T5!  'thigh',  form  only  the  weakest  cases;  thus,  -^tI^T?  3"W3C.i 
^r=r1|f^T  or  4ffcf>U{,  etc. ;  the  rest  of  the  inflection  is  made  from  cor- 
responding stems  in  X;  thus,  nom.  sing.  TjrfW  etc. 

276.  1.  ^p^ft  f«?  'goddess  of  fortune',  makes  nom.  sing.  Ht^TI^- 
—  2.  ^jsftf.,  'woman',  follows  a  mixed  declension;  thus,  nom.  sing, 
■%ft,  ace.  f^q*^  or  ^fr{,  instr.  f^TT-  dat.f^ff,  abl.-gen. f^qit^, 

loc.  fM<IIH;  du-  ft^ft*  W\ «J 11 >  f^foU  pl.  nom-  f^RH> 
ace.  fijKI^  or  ^^,  instr.  ^t^t.,  etc. ;  gen.  *$Tl«m*v 

277.  1.  ^|T^  f.,  'water',  only  pi.;  its  final  is  changed  to  <*"  be- 
fore W;  thus,  nom.  -4Hm^,  ace.  ^PHJ.,  instr-  ^f^^  dat.-abl. 
^T?H>  gen-  ^^TTR;,  loc.  ^n§-  —  2.  f^  f.,*  'sky',  makes  nom. 
sing,  ^ffa^,  du.  ^TTTt  pl-  (sometimes)  ^TT^^;  the  endings  are  the 
normal  ones ,  but  the  root  becomes  ^T  before  consonant-endings : 
thus,  ace.  sing.  f<^1,  nom. -ace.  pl.  f^^,  instr.  ^"f^l-  Not 
all  the  cases  are  found  in  use.  —  3.  Stem  "^  m.  (rarely  f.),  'wealth': 
sing.  -*J*[,  ^TCI,  TT^TTetc.;  du.  Tj^ft,  TTWT^,  TTOtl;  pl- 
T^l  (nom.  and  ace),  ^ff^^  etc. 

278.  1.  "SR^f  or  ^Pff  m.,  (from  ^R^  +  ^Bff  '  cart-drawing', 
i.e.) 'ox':  strong  stem  -4M^li£\  mid.  ^5f«f^2 ,  weakest  •«f«i^|! ; 
nom.  sing.  "4T*f^fT«^,  voc.  ^SRIOT.  —  2.  The  stem  TJ«SR  m.,  'road', 
makes  all  the  strong  cases,  with  irregular  nom.  sing.  M««Ht^;  the 
corresponding  middle  cases  are  made  from  nf%J,  and  the  weakest 
from    TJ^;    thus,   ace.    sing.    tJ38n«}^,   dat.    XJ%,    ace.   pl.    TO^b 


In  the  older  language  oftener  masculine. 


Lesson  XXVI.  107 

dat.  qf^|ttf{^.    [The  stems  JR^^  ra.,  'stirring-stick',  and  Vft*^ 
m.,  an  epithet  of  Indra,  are  said  to  follow  l|d!|«^.] 

279.  The  stem  tfaj  m.,  'man',  is  very  irregular.  The  strong 
stem  is  MtUt^,  mid.  TJ*^,  weakest  xj^.   Thus,  sing.  l|4J|«^,  M^l^^l 

q^rr,  etc.,  voc.  tpr^;  du.  iprftfT,  jj*«rm;,  Y^t^c;  pi-  ^Ti^, 
5^^,  ijftns;  etc.,  ij*. 

280.  For  the  stem  5RJ  f • ,  'age',  may  be  substituted  in  the 
cases   with   vowel -endings   forms   from   <q4<fl    f. ;  thus,    ST^TI   or 

281.  ||^  n.,  'heart',  does  not  make  nom.-voc.-acc.  of  any 
number  (except  in  composition),  these  being  supplied  from  £<£41  n. 

282.  The  stem  T[£  m.,  'foot',  becomes  VJ'S  in  strong  cases; 
and,  in  compounds,  in  the  middle  cases  also;  thus,  nom.  sing.  XJT?, 
ace.  Mld*^,  instr.  TJ^T,  etc.  From  f^'?  'biped',  ace.  sing.  f^[- 
xn^,  pi.  f^M<^,  instr.  pi.  f^nf^-  [The  stem  XTT^  m.,  'foot', 
has  the  complete  declension  of  a-stems.] 

283.  The  root  ^5^  'slay',  as  final  member  of  a  compound, 
becomes  Iff  in  nom.  sing.,  and  loses  its  «^  in  the  middle  cases 
and  its  ^f  in  the  weakest  cases  (but  only  optionally  i :  loc.  sing.). 
Further,  when  ^  is  lost,  ^  in  contact  with  «^  reverts  to  its  original 
Tl  ;  thus,  ^J^«^m.,  -killing  a  Brahman',  makes  nom.  sing.  3fi|rC> 
ace.  °flp^*,  instr.  WisT^T,  etc.,  loc.  W^f^  or  °ffl»r,  voc.  °f^; 
du-  TOlHlft  °f«IT^  etc.;  pi.  nom.  0fTTJ^,  ace.  °^^. 

284.  The  stems  UM«^  m.,  n.  pr.,  and  3r$RT*t.  na. ,  n.  pr.  (both 
personifications  of  the  sun),  make  the  nom.  sing,  in  ^tt,  but 
otherwise  do  not  lengthen  the  ^J;  thus,  nom.  VRJ,  ace.  TjpEpTJ?^,  instr. 


In  compound  words,  an  altering  cause  in  one  member  some- 
times lingualizes  a  «^  of  the  next  following  member.  But  a 
guttural  or  labial  in  direct  combination  with  «^  sometimes  prevents 
the  combination,  as  in  the  instr.  S^f^TT. 


108 


Lesson  XXVI. 


Vocabulary  XXVI. 


Verbs: 

■^  move ;  in  caus.  (arpdyati)  send ; 

put;  hand  over,  give. 
if^  (guhati)    in    caus.    (guhdyati) 

hide  away,  conceal. 


?m  (tfpyatO  De  pleased  or  satis- 
tied,  satisfy  or  satiate  oneself. 
«jTt^  -f  f^  (vildpati)  complain. 


Subst.: 
"^rWl  (^rN)  n.,  eye. 
^STsTtta  m.,  faithfulness. 
n!|W^  m.,  demon. 
f^rT  n.,  notice,  thought,  mind. 
l»'t|lfll  f.,  divinity,  deity. 
THHQ   (weakest  0\$faQm.,w./w\, 

a  Vedic  saint. 
TfZ  m.,  foot. 
M|t«M  n.,  protection. 


ITTT3  m.,  man  (homo). 

sT?T  n.,  vow,  obligation,  duty. 

Adj.: 
•qjTW  f-3  °^TT,  one-eyed. 
^ff^T^  four-footed,  quadruped, 
fl^  m.,  biped. 
f^ffi,  f-  °^n  (part,  of  f*!-*nO, 

ordained,  fixed,  permanent, 
ftp?,  f.  0^TJ,  beneficent,  gracious, 

blessed. 


Exercise  XXVI. 

wt  *rfw^ft  ^HuiHsfti^  *ifcwii  sTtto;  i 

WRf  *TT*TC  %W  f^RIff  £^fTi  sTTTO;  II  «*8  II 

«H<4«riicH^i£)  hi^H  wi  <tpr;  I  S  I  flTTr%  tpSJT'TO:  I  ^  I 

H^r4^HI^|  I  ^  I  1%bt  rpRTFtK  WW  WRTfa  I  8  I  W!W*ri  ^FH- 

<f<^  src^snw;  i  q  i  %*r  xren  wfrwt  «gHii*<  i  $  i  ^t 

TRT^n^^T  I  ^)  I  jfoi:  *Tf  WTTPT+I^isrc  I  *=  I  I  g*P*Wi 

*  ^jfa  i  Q.  i  ^rf^":  Trfr  ^w*<5iM  ^VKjnz  i  «io  i  wt  ^ 

f^T  I  ^  I  €t:  fqcIT  ^TWt  ^  *?TrTT  Wt  T^TR  I  S?  I  iffT  $M\M\ 
$<(§$  TR  ^f^rf^T  |  q8  I  W^^T  T   WR<T  T  ^    rTTTtym^^l- 

^W  i  «m  i  ^*f^t  ^prrsrre^T \^wi:  vr*ri  u\$M<n  cnfa^ 


Lesson  XXVI.  XXVII. 


109 


18.  The  meeting  of  the  men  and  women  took  place  on  the 
road.  19.  In  the  Veda  they  call  the  sun  Pusan,  Mitra  (m.),  Aryaman, 
and  Savitar.  20.  Water  also  is  named  (*N!J4J,  pass.)  among  the 
deities  in  the  Rik  (use  HMHQ  ana<  in  the  sacrificial  formulas. 
21.  Be  gracious,  O  Civa,  to  biped  and  quadruped.  22.  The  seers' 
view  is ,  that  fire  is  to  be  found  in  the  water  (use  ^p^ ,  and  make 
a  direct  statement  with  ^ff?f).  23.  The  Asura  was  slain  by  Maghavan 
with  a  bone  of  DadhyaSc.  24.  Who  knows  the  wind's  path  (pass.)  ? 
25.  Mother,  satisfy  (fft^  cans.)  the  child  with  curds.  26.  Have 
food  brought  (use  ^n-«ft,  cans.,  pi.)  from  our  friend's  house. 
27.   The  Maruts  are  Maghavan's  friends. 


Lesson  XXVII. 


285.  Demonstrative  Pronouns*  Two  demonstrative-declensions 
are  made  up  with  particular  irregularity:  they  are  those  of  the 
pronouns  -4|i|4^  and  ^TOT  (for  which  the  natives  give  the  stem-forms 
as  $rf|^  and  ^T2^  respectively).  The  first  is  a  more  indefinite  de- 
monstrative: 'this'  or  'that';  the  other  signifies  especially  the  re- 
moter relation. 


286.  ^rcro;  (XP0> 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

N. 

n 

T^* 

n 

TTPEC 

A. 

**HH 

n 

I. 

1'«R 

^1*11+1 

^M*ll 

-H\*U  IH 

D. 

^r# 

n 

TO*t 

r> 

uwra: 

Ab, 

^stwnt 

r> 

n 

"^^rr^ 

y> 

y> 

G. 

^ro 

*M*fitl 

UMIH 

n 

*M*ft*l 

■*II*IIH 

L. 

^ifaK 

» 

^ 
^ 

^^IIH 

y> 

*"3 

110 


Lesson  XXVII. 


Neuter:   Nom.-acc.  sing.  <^H>  du.  ^^t   pi.  ^**  ff*t  5  the  rest 
is  like  the  masculine. 


©■» 


287.    ^raTO*^:): 

Masculine.  Feminine. 

Sing.        Dual.        Plural.  Sing.  Dual. 

©\ 

A.  TMH  „  W^  ^RHl 

i.  ^nprr     ^ijjuiih  wffiro:      ^r^n 
d.  w^  „     wM^:      ^^m^ 

l.  -^rgfispt     „       -sufttj  ^nn; 


Plural. 


©v  ©•» 

©sN» 


Neuter:  Nom.-acc.  sing.  HdU,  du.  ^Sfjf,  pi.  ^5TTF*T;   the  rest 

^  ©\  ©s 

like  masc.  —  The  final  $^  of  ^l^ft  is  unchangeable  (cf.  §  161). 

288.  There  is  a  defective  pronominal  stem  1J«T ,  which  is 
accentless,  and  hence  used  only  in  situations  where  no  emphasis 
falls  upon  it.  The  only  forms  are  the  following:  Sing.  ace.  m. 
inj^,  n.  TT«n?>  f-  IpTl^C;  instr-  m->  n->  ^T>  f-  11*1*1 1-  Du.  acc- 
m.  T|^T,  f.)  n->  TJ%;  gen.-loc.  m.,  f.,  n.,  ^«i«Ti^.  PI-  »cc-  m-  H.ii«l,> 
n.  Tpn'f'I,  f.  TpTT^-  —  These  forms  may  be  used  only  when  the 
person  or  object  to  which  they  refer  has  already  been  indicated  by 
a  form  of  HM*{  or  TJ^.  Thus,  ^[Sr  ^JT^JH^IT^'T  «MI«h<*U- 
H  m  1  M  *|  "this  one  has  read  the  art  of  poetry  ;  teach  him  grammar". 

289.  Past  Passive  Participle  in  TTor  «T.  By  the  suffix  7f  —  or, 
in  a  comparatively  small  number  of  verbs,  «T  —  is  formed,  di- 
rectly from  the  root  of  the  verb,  and  unconnected  with  any  tense- 
stem,  a  verbal  adjective  called  the  past  passive  participle.  The 
fern,  ends  always  in  °^S[J.  When  this  participle  is  made  from 
transitive  verbs,  it  qualifies  something  as  having  endured  the  action 
expressed  by  the  verb;  thus,  ^tT  dattd,  'given';  ^5  uktd,  w  spoken'. 
When  made  from   an  intransitive   or   neuter   verb ,   the  same  par- 


Lesson  XXVII.  Ill 

ticiple  has  no  passive,  but  only  an  indefinite  past,  sense;  thus,  JHTt 
gone',  Wf,  'been';    TJTffrT,  'fallen'. 

290.  This  participle  is  often  used  as  an  adjective.  Very  com- 
monly, also,  it  supplies  the  place  of  a  finite  verb,  when  some  form 
of  nfl^,  'be',  or  ^  is  to  be  supplied;  thus,  ^  *fcf:  'he  is  gone"; 
*niT  Wft  fcfRsId^  "by  me  a  letter  was  written".  The  neuter  is 
frequently  used  as  a  substantive ;  thus,  ^tH^  ' a  gift ' ;  ^7^1*^  '  milk  ' ; 
and  also  as  nomen  actionis.  Sometimes  it  has  a  present  significa- 
tion, particularly  when  made  from  neuter  verbs ;  thus,  f^gHT  (from 
^gn)  often  'standing'. 

291.  A.  With  suffix  «f  M>  The  suffix  «T  is  taken  by  a  number 
of  roots.    Thus: 

1.  Certain  roots  in  tSTT,  and  in  i  and  u- vowels;  thus,  X5fT  or 
ift  'swell,  be  fat',  lft«T;  TfT  'abandon',  |JT*T;  ^T  'wither',  ^TPf; 
f^    destroy',    ^\U[;    ^J  or  f%  'swell',  *T*T;    «T  'cut',  5R. 

2.  The  roots  in  variable  ^  (so-called  f-rootsj,  which  before 
the   suffix   becomes   ^^  or  ^f^\   as  in  the  pres.  pass.;  thus,  2effi 

(fa$,  ^;  H,  <W;  15  (u$  'fill',  iw- 

3.  A  few  roots  ending  in  5f  (which  becomes  *J  before  the  «T) ; 
thus,  J^  'break',  ^;  1*J5^  'bend',  *J^;  *TSTV  'sink',  W, 
"^5f  'be  sick',  ^f;  f%5T  'fear',  f^Cf.  Also  one  or  two  others 
which  exhibit  a  guttural  before  the   «f:   ^ffl    'attach',  ^J;   ^*J 

'cut  up',  ^wm 

4.  A  number  of  roots,  some  of  them  very  common,  in  W 
(which  becomes  ^  before  «T):  ^ ,  jg^;  (f?j_^r,  f^^;)  f^r 
'cut',  fa^.* 

292.  Some  few  verbs  make  double  forms;  thus,  *3["^  'hasten', 
?nt  or  t^Rd;    f^TCjT  'acquire',  f^  or  f^rT- 

Commonest  exceptions:  <=U  f«(  H  from  *slT^  ' e»t '  j  Trf  from 
*^5  *jfli(rl  from  ?T^  'rejoice';  ^f^cT  from  ^  'weep';  ^ff^cl 
from    ^^    *  speak';    fcf'f^'cf    from    f^^    'know'. 


112 


Lesson  XXVII. 


Verbs: 
^?  +  ^T  (upeksate)  neglect. 
2eF  +  f^  (vikirdti)  scatter. 
3RER1  +  ^T^  (den.  —  avagandyati) 

despise. 
^^  +  \3^ ,  in  cans,  (uccardyati) 

pronounce,  say. 
<?  +  ^Sf^(  (avatdrati)  descend. 

+  ^^  (uttdrati)  emerge,  come 

out. 
TJT  or  TEn  (pyayate)  become  stout 

or  fat. 


Vocabulary  XXVII. 

}^T    (bhaksdyati)    eat. 

Vffi   break. 

2^*r   +  ^R  enjoy. 

*f  +  xrfT  (paribhdvati)  despise. 

*{V3\   (mdjjati)  sink. 

^pT     in    caus.     (yojdyati)    yoke, 

harness. 
^PI    Qdgati)  attach;  bang,  cling, 

adhere. 
^T^  (sldati)  sit,  settle  down;   be 

overcome,  exhausted. 


Snbst.: 

"^JpyHt  m.  du.,  nom.  pr. ,  the 
Acvins  (the  Indian  Aio?  xovpoi). 

•M\-q\^  m. ,  "walk  and  con- 
versation"; conduct  of  life,  ob- 
servance. 

^PJ  n.,  debt. 

qrcrH]  m.,  n.  pr.  a  mountain. 

^pj  f.,  hunger. 

^W^Th  n« >    life  of  holiness,  i.  e. 

religious  studentship. 
*ft*l«l  n.,  meal-time,  meal. 
H^Tni.,  n.pr.,  a  Vedic  personage. 
*^l|e$  m.,  sweet  drink. 
JpffT  t,  pearl, 
^l^jtl  na..,  demon. 
mJH  na.j  acquisition,  gain. 


f«J<JlU  m.,  wedding,  marriage. 

^UfV  ra.,  illness. 

IT^rj  m.,  car. 

I|«(T  i'-,  bed. 

^f  m.,  n.,  plough. 

^TT  m-i  chain,  garland. 
Adj.: 

^TJF  (part,  of  2f^J)  reduced,  de- 
cayed ;   ruined. 

rffa  f-  0^ST[,  great,  strong,  violent. 

iffa  (part,  of  tft)  fat. 

5(^^rF<«t  studying  sacred  know- 
ledge; as  m.  subst.,  Brahman 
student. 

Iffa  (part.)  abandoned;  wanting 
in ;  and  so  sometimes  w.  instr., 
=  'without'. 


Lesson  XXVII.  XXVIII.  113 

Exercise  XXVII. 

6  Cs. 

5r*Rrf^T  *RJ  <ftw  <*IIVj^l^(TT:  li  <N  II 

gWrT  i  <n  ^ft  irar**^*  Tf^wrrf^^rot  ifw^:  r  i  ^ 
t:  frrar  ttt^cW:  *wr  *f  *Rrra*rarftraf?r  i  ^  i  ^r^w 
fN  g*rre  f^rNww^Tnnsrf^r  **r:  i  8  i  ^ft  *rci  f^wnif 

WECQi  I  $  I  M*U<«1<*  "^  WX  I  ^  |  *pWMM*H«t^f:  W  I  *=  I 

ttwf&h  i  <\o  i  t^I**  vrerofimT  ^rro  ^T^T^rnt  *rw$  t^ 
%<t  II  «w  II 

12.  Have  medicine  given  quickly  (use  pass.  part,  of  ^^,  in 
nom.)  to  these  sick  persons.  13.  This  is  that  mountain  Kailasa,  on 
which  Qiva  dwells.  14.  In  order  to  attain  (5TW,  dat.)  this  and 
that  other  world  (gen.*)  the  priest  offered  sacrifice  for  me  (?f3(  caus.). 

15.  The  flowers  in  the  garlands  of  these  women    are    withered. 

16.  By  that  king,  who  was  praised  by  us,  we  were  delighted  with 
these  jewels.     17.  The  peasant  yoked  two  fat  oxen  to  the  plough. 

18.  The  learned  Brahman  emerged  (pass"  part.)  from   the    water. 

19.  Here  comes  (pass,  part.)  the  queen.  20.  A  chain  of  pearls 
hung  (pass,  part.)  on  the  neck  of  this  demon.  21.  What  sin  is 
not  committed  by  persons  reduced  in  fortune?  22.  This  garden  is 
filled  with  men  and  women. 

Lesson  XXVIIL 

293.   Past  Passive  Participle,  cont'd.   B  With  suffix  <f. 

I.   Without  union-vowel   ^.     Much  more  commonly  this  parti- 


*  "I  am  so-and-so;  N.  or  M." 

**  Translate  the  pronoun-forms  by  'here',  and  cf.  §  225. 

Perry,    Sanskrit  Primer. 


8 


114  Lesson  XXVIII. 

ciple  is  made  by  adding  the  suffix  <l  to  the  bare  root ;  thus,  "%Tr[ 
from  ^TT;  "fa?T  from  f^;  f^Jf  from  f^\;  ^r{  from  ^  (or  ^rr); 
1FH  from  ^c^. 

294.  If  the  root  end  in  a  consonant  other  than  35,  <^,  X^,  ^, 
the  ordinary  rules  of  euphonic  combination  apply   as  follows : 

1.  Final  ^  and  51  become  "^;  thus,  ffjtjfi  from  f^f^;  ^"35 
from  ^fj  Tjffifi  from  (Zf^. 

2.  Final  TT  becomes  TJ ,  after  which,  as  also  after  radical 
final  "q,  ?^  becomes  Z;  thus,  ^g  from  ^*{;  f^J  from  f^TJ .  *nj 
and  W2  are  made  from  ^f  and  Tfir  ,  and  f^r  from  Tfvl ,  contrary 
to  1.  Jfi£  makes  THJ;  and  cT^,  rfH- 

3.  Final  \r  becomes  2",  and  H  ,  ^ ;  and  the  following  W  be- 
comes  \J  ;  thus,  ^U  frorry  q^r ,  ?:3tT  from  ^fW . 

N  <i  tf       s  ^ 

4.  Final  ^  is  treated  in  various  ways,  according  to  its  his- 
torical value,  a.  Sometimes  ^  combines  with  c^  to  form  <|,  before 
which  short  vowels  (except  ^J)  are  lengthened ;  thus,  *n<g  from 
TTf,  ^ft(S  from  f%f,  "^5  from  ^f ;  Tf%  from  ?T^;  but  ^g  from 
"%%•  W%  forms  W{i£.  b.  Where  ^  represents  original  TJ  ,  the  com- 
bination is  TOJ;  thus,  <n*J  from  ^f;  ftTHf  from  f<r%;  q[rfcf  from 
*&%.  The  root  31^  forms  also  7(JVf.  c  «fijj ,  where  ^  represents 
original  \f  ,  makes  «HJ. 

295.  The  root  before  rf  usually  has  its  weakest  form,  if  there 
is  any  where  in  the  verbal  system  a  distinction  of  strong  and  weak 
forms.  Thus:  1.  A  penultimate  nasal  is  dropped;  e.  g.,  ^STfS  from 
^^5  W3  from  ^j  ^T  from  ^^  (or  ^RO;  ^T  from  jfo. 
2.  Roots  which  are  abbreviated  in  the  weak  forms  of  the  perfect 
suffer  the  same  abbreviation  here;  e.  g.,  ^f^i  from  ^x£>  ^f{  from  ^T^, 
5Rf|from^T^,  ^f5  from^^;  ^gfrom"?^  (the  same  form  from  ^151  ); 
f^U  from  ^T^j ;  rrg  from  JH£.  3.  Final  ^SR  is  weakened  to  %■ 
in  ifVtT  from  1[J  'sing',  tfttf  from  1X(J  'drink';  to  ^  in  f^StH  from 
1&1>  f^fi  fr°m  ^TT  'put'  (with  \J   also  changed  to  ^),  f^T<T  from 


Lesson  XXVIII.  115 

?TT  'measure',  and  a  few  others.  4.  A  final  ^  is  lost  after  "H  in 
TFT,  T?Tj  Trf,  T<T  (from  *rj^  etc.);  and  likewise  final  ^  in  ^J<T, 
rHT,  <HrT,  ^rT,  ^rT  (from  ^J«^  etc.).  5.  Isolated  cases  are  flJIJ 
from  ^JTH;  ^TcT  from  sfa    'play'. 

296.  More  irregular  are  the  following: 

1.  Some  roots  in  tSUI.  make  participles  in  ^TnT>  thus,  ^T«rT> 
^»TnT,  TRT,  clTnT,  ^TnT,  HT«rT-  ^TTnT,  from  cfi^  etc. 

2.  Sf^,  ^«^,  and  ^pf^  make  WTTT  etc. 

3.  The  root  l^T,  'give',  forms  ^TtT  (from  the  derivative  form 
'S'Z)-  The  contracted  form  ^f  is  widely  found  in  composition, 
especially  with  prepositions;  thus,  JfZy\  or  TTrf,  f^^TT  or  «?TtT>  etc 

297.  II.  With  union- vowel  ^.  The  suffix  with  ^,  or  in  the 
form  \J{,  is  regularly  used  with  the  derivative  verb-stems  in  se- 
condary conjugation,  also  often  with  roots  of  derivative  character 
(like  fll^ ,  f^^),  and  not  infrequently  with  original  roots. 

298.  When  \t{  is  added  to  causative  and  denominative  verb- 
stems  the  syllables  ^J  are  dropped  ;  thus,  rT^,  pass.  part,  ^tf^tf; 
*I«!!*J,  Tftpf;  <F3,  fTTf^rT;  *T,  caus.  *nx*Tfa>  caus-  Pass-  Pa,t- 
*lll\ci;  ft,  caus.  ^TfTCfH,  ^TfacT 

299.  Among  the  original  roots  taking  ^7J  may  be  noticed  the 
following: 

TI^  'fall',  TjfacT;  ^,  ^[fxjcf;  ^  'dwell',  ^f^cf;  ^1, 
^m;  ^\  'thirst',  ^fer?f ;  f^x,  f^ff^rT;  t^s,  tf^rT;  ^Tf, 
^t^<T-    ^If  makes  *j{\t{;   iff  'lie'  makes  Tjfarf. 

300.  A  few  roots  form  this  participle  either  with  or  without 
the  auxiliary  \;   thus,  Tf^\   and   4-1  f<f ^  from  ?T<*. 

301.  The  grammarians  reckon  as  participles  of  the  na-formation 
a  few  derivative  adjectives,  coming  from  roots  which  do  not  make 
a  regular  participle;  such  are  ^T*T  'burnt'  (Wl)i  ofil[  'thin',  'hag- 
gard' (|i*0;  1*1?  'riPe'  O^C);  T^  'dry'  (^FQ>  5^  'expanded' 

(3*0- 

8* 


116 


Lesson  XXVIII. 


302.  Past  ActiTe  Participle  in  rH^  (or  «fqvO-  Fron»  the 
past  pass.  part,  is  made,  by  adding  the  possessive  suffix  ^*f^  (f. 
•qrfr),  a  secondary  derivative  having  the  meaning  and  construction 
of  a  perfect  active  participle ;  thus,  ^d^t^,  TTf^JT?^'?^. 

303.  This  participle  is  almost  always  used  predicatively,  and 
generally  without  expressed  copula,  i.  e.,  with  the  value  of  a  per- 
sonal perfect-form.  Thus,  *TT  1  «*Py£  S^l^  "no  one  has  seen 
me";  or,  with  copula,  tngtftT^g  MIH^^f^f  "thou  (fem.)  hast  come 
into  great  misery".  This  participle  comes  to  be  made  even  from 
intransitives;  thus,  ^T  4|<f4|riV  "she  has  gone". 


Verbs: 

fl  +  U  in   caus.  {pratardyati)   de- 

ceive. 

*1i$+f!ft{(sa7iindkyati)  equip  one- 
self. 

TT%+  f^-^lTin  caus.  (vydpaddyati) 
kill. 

Tj^rfjj  *  (pdldyate)  flee. 

23T5T   enjoy,  eat. 

HH+Wl  honor. 


Vocabulary  XXVIII. 

T{^{muhyati)  be  confused  or  dazed 

or  stupid. 
^£*ls  +  ^STO  besiege. 
^^  +  JT  (prardhati)  grow  up. 
f^t,  +  II   (pravigdti)    penetrate, 

enter. 
3f^  +  Tf   in    caus.   (pravartdyati) 

continue. 
f^TGf   +  ,3Sf^  remain  over,  survive. 


^jj  +  ^JTJ  bestrew. 


Snbst. : 
"^Tfrl  in.,  end;  in  loc,  at  last. 

^gTJRll  n-,  n-  Vr->  Delhi. 

T^  m.,  ass. 

5TTfT  f-,  cave. 

^rfT*T  n>  behavior,  life. 

Tre<f|"4jyi  m.,  nom.  pr. 


xhr,  m->  citizen. 

nmn^  m->  palace. 

^J^»f  m.,  Greek,  barbarian. 
■sjTTT^f  m.,  jackal. 
^Tf^r^i  m.,  soldier. 
%f?I  n.,  army. 
^f*JTt  m->  elephant. 


A  ^u<m'-root  from  ^  'go'  +  H^T  'away'. 


Lesson  XXVIII.  XXIX. 


117 


Adj.: 

*{*&£   (comp.)    more.      In  neut. 
sing,  as  adv.:  mostly. 


f%TCT  (part,  from  f%^)  affectio- 
nate. 


Exercise  XXVIII. 
gfrnft  (abl.)  TT^:  ^*T%TfH:  3ffafafTHTf%  ^fa  ^«TTf^  I  ^  I 

fafifw  n?n(\d:  faw^i  jj<i«ii4<hm3<i  i*:  1 8  f3faj  firarr- 
faiNrRTRf^M  n^*i  i  m  i  ^rren*jfwfrwf*r.  irr^Tftr 

f^ft  (abi.)  *h3mtji^<*j  ^aftTra  V£H*gi<CMM  *if  I5- 
^rrnr:  i  >2>  i  xrf^r  «Ji^«tff^ft:  *rf  trg^  pm  i  ■«  i 
Trf^PTTwr  <Kifrd:  ^ff ^t  ffonfr  wrt  trf^nfr  ^t^flfcriN 
*Tfta:  irgrwrftRT  ^rrfira:  n  o.  n 

(In  the  following  render  all  finite  verbs  by  participles.) 
10.  Many  of  the  soldiers  were  killed;  some  tcbo  survived  fled 
into  the  city.  11.  The  gates  of  the  city  were  shut  fast  (^'ST  "^Tfa- 
ft?rn)>  the  citizens  equipped  themselves  for  battle.  12.  The  Ya- 
vanas  approached  and  besieged  the  city  (pass.).  13.  Finally  the 
Yavanas ,  proving  victorious  {past  act.  part.),  entered  the  city  by 
force.  14.  The  young  and  old  men  were  mostly  murdered;  the 
women  made  slaves ;  the  great  possessions  of  the  citizens  plundered, 
the  palaces  and  houses  burnt  with  fire.  15.  The  end  of  Prthvlraja 
has  been  described  by  the  Yavanas,  and  his  previous  life  sung 
by  the  poet  Canda. 


Lesson  XXIX. 

304.   Gerund,  or  Absolutive.    The  gerund  is  made  in  classical 
Sanskrit  by  one  of  the  suffixes  ^T  and  Jf. 


118  Lesson  XXIX. 

305.  A.  ^X  To  uncompounded  roots  is  added  the  suffix  <3T. 
It  is  usually  added  directly  to  the  root,  but  sometimes  with  the 
vowel  ^  interposed.  With  regard  to  the  use  of  \,  and  to  the  form 
of  root  before  it,  this  formation  closely  agrees  with  that  of  the 
participle  in  rf  or  »f.  A  final  root-consonant  is  treated  as  before 
7J.  Roots  which  make  the  past  pass.  part,  in  «T  generally  reject  ^ 
before  ^J. 

Examples.  1.  Without  inserted  ^:  -sJMI,  fw&H,  •ft^T,  ^*TT> 
H^T;  f^f^T  from  ^n,  ffWT  from  l^T  'place'  (cf.  ffTf)  and  from 
fT,  ^WT  from  ^T  (cf.  ^tT),  ?ft^T  from  *TT;  ^^[  from  ^, 
-g^iT  from  ^3fj  *I^T  from  *r*t,  *?^7  from  J?^,  f%T^T  from  2f^ 
'find';  cTtdl  from  7{  (cf.  tffaf),  TJ^ft  from  TJ  (cf.  tnjf);  "SJH  from 
1*1'  ITT  from  f*  i  TTT  from  ^  (cf.  §  295,  2),  ^fT  from  ^Sf , 
*f®«rT  from  ^f*^,  ^Tt^T  fr°m  ^f- 

2.  With  inserted^:  f^f^TTfrom  lf^^'know',  ^f^T  from 
TO  'dwell',  Iff^T  from  ^  (cf.  Iff^rT),   nftWi  from  Tf^  (cf. 

306.  Some  verbs  make  both  forms;  thus,  from  T^«^  either  1^- 
f^T  or  ^HT;  from  ?^  either  >*f*?WT  or  **T^T- 

307.  Causatives  and  denominatives  in  ^f  make  ^jf^I^T ;  thus, 

ttt,  ^tTf^^rr;  fT3,  <rrefa*rr;  wmf?r,  wrfimT. 

308.  B.  ^J.  Roots  in  composition  witb  prepositions  (or  some- 
times with  elements  of  other  kinds,  as  adverbs  or  nouns)  take  the 
suffix  T(,  before  which  ^  is  never  inserted.  A  root  which  ends  in 
a  short  vowel  adds  <T  before  Tf.     Thus,  MpLUp*^  ^R*nT;  —  f%- 

fwaj,  ^f^fw,  wta  (*rf%r-t)  *fa?w- 

309.  Roots  in  ^J^  and  ^J»^  whose  pass.  part,  ends  in  "^Jrf 
form  this  gerund  in  ^T3I;  thus,  07f^i,  °^3J.  But  such  cm-roots 
(not  aw-roots)  may  preserve  the  nasal;  thus,  °*r*Sr  Final  change- 
able ^g  becomes  ^T  or  ^5JT;  thus,  °t?V^  °9h«  Final  ^TT  remains 
unaltered;  thus,   flJT3"RT-    Some  roots  show  a  weak  form  before 


Lesson  XXIX.  119 

this  suffix;  thus,  H*JfJ,  ^^^5  "flt^I  (T?-"^^l)  from  tf-cjxT  ;  ^~ 
*Rr  from  ^-^f ;  3jW  from  f^-^f. 

310.  Causals   and  denominatives   in  tJRI  reject  those  syllables; 

thus,  HtfU^fH,  WPS;  ttpttsj;  itwto;  ^r^TT^r;  qrprrerefa 

O^TT-'ft).  liWWi-  But  if  the  root  ends  in  a  single  consonant  and 
encloses  short  ^f  which  is  not  lengthened  in  the  causative,  then 
the  gerund  of  the  caus.  ends  in  ^rgr,  to  distinguish  it  from  the 
gerund  of  the  simple  verb;  thus,  ^^-*n^,  ger.  "31^7^;  caus.  tJT^- 

aprerfo  ger-  ^r^w^r. 

311.  The  gerund  or  absolutive  is  used  generally  as  logical  ad- 
junct to  the  subject  of  a  clause.  It  denotes  an  action  accompanying 
or  (usually)  preceding  that  which  is  signified  by  the  verb  of  the 
clause.  (In  the  later  language  it  is  not  always  confined  to  the 
grammatical  subject  of  the  clause  as  an  adjunct.)  It  has  thus  vir- 
tually the  value  of  an  indeclinable  participle,  present  or  past,  qual- 
ifying the  actor  whose  action  it  describes. 

Thus,  cT^  ^TTcfi^  ^HT  (U^iT  ^H^T  ^Tf  ^TcH  "  having  heard 
this,  having  abandoned  the  goat,  having  bathed,  he  went  to  his 
own  house".* 

312.  The  gerunds  of  some  verbs  have  not  much  more  than 
prepositional  value;  thus,  <4||<^|i|  'having  taken',  i.  e.  'with',  like 
Greek  Xafiwv,  tfuw,  3J^TT  'having  released',  i.e.  'without',  'except'. 

313.  Before  all  gerunds  may  be  used  the  privative  ~^S[\  or  ^J; 
thus,  TsjrjjoTwfX" without  having  received";  -4Mle£tf  "without  having 
summoned. " 

Vocabulary  XXIX. 

Verbs:  ~%n\  acquire,  attain,  reach. 

tST^  +  f^T  (nydsyati)   entrust    (to    ^  +  U  go  forth  ;  die. 
one's  care). 


Of  course  the  absolutives  are  often  best  rendered  by  relative 
clauses,  or  even  by  clauses  coordinate  with  the  principal  clause. 


120 


Lesson  XXIX. 


35  +  ^rfV  put  at   the  head,    ap- 

point  as  ruler  over  (Zoc). 
^T  +  1?    (pracdlati)    move    on, 

march. 
fxf«Sr^  (cintdyati)  consider. 
^  (cydvate)  totter,  fall. 
3[T  +  ^TT  take.    Cf.  §  312. 
VT  +  TO^-^TT  lay  or  place  on. 
•ft  +  f*!^  (nirndyati)  bring  to  an 

end,  determine,  settle. 
*HI  +  f%  (vibhdjati,  -redistribute. 
sf5|  +  H(pravrdjati)  vvauder  forth ; 

leave  one's  home  to  become  a 

wandering  ascetic. 

Safest.: 

^f^TSTRT  m.,  plan,  design. 
^TfT^  n.,  bringing. 
qfflj  m.,  monkey. 
"SRfT'C  ra,j  elephant. 


gf!J  m.,  victory. 

■rf^^TT  f.,  misfortune. 

Tp5r  m.,  wing,'  side;  party. 

5fa  m.,  frog. 

^raHT  f-,  w.  p*-j  Ceylon. 

^rr^  m.,  hero. 

•H 1  V4«f  n.,  means,  device. 

Tfrf  m.,  bridge,  dike. 

f«np^ni.,  n.pr.,  a  monkey-king. 

3»7T3J^  (nom.  °V^)  m.,  fire. 

Adj.: 

^"HpT  disagreeable. 

^!ITH  responsible,  trustworthy. 

t$V(  du.,  both. 

W$T,  f.  0^TT,  little,  small. 

(TO,  f.  o^STT,  daily,  regular. 

THif^r  on  tbe  head. 

Prepos.: 
TTfri  (postpos.,  with  ace.)  against. 


Exercise  XXIX. 

sr^psft  ^t^T?c  i  <*  i  ^j^rr  Tft^T  %tt  tth  *pn:  i  R  i  >ft*mt  *- 
fn=mimiwi  yif*i3  f^^r  *pft  f*nsi»T«T:  i  3  i  *n§rr  f^mr- 
%g  ^»fxrf*i:  *rorfr  ^n  *refr  %<j  ^t  w^i  Trfm  ^  Tr*fr  TT- 


Lesson  XXIX.  XXX.  121 

11.  After  the  king  had  conquered  the  vassals  of  the  western 
kinds  he  marched  (pass,  part.)  against  the  eastern  vassals.  12.  The 
merchants,  in  joy  (pass,  part.),  took  the  money  and  gave  the  jewels 
to  the  king  (use  ger.,  and  pass,  constr.).  13.  "After  adoring  the  gods 
at  twilight,  and  placing  fagots  on  the  fire,  bring  water  from  the 
cistern":  thus  having  spoken,  the  teacher  seated  himself  (pass,  part.) 
on  the  mat.  14.  The  hero  fought  (ger.)  with  his  enemies  and  gained 
(part.)  great  glory  by  the  victory  over  them  (gen.).  15.  The  Brah- 
man, abandoning  hisown(pZ-),  became  an  ascetic  (if-  sf^f ,  pass. part.). 
16.  When  the  merchant  had  imparted  (f^T-'fa^,  caus:)  his  plan  to 
the  servant,  he  sent  him  into  the  village.  17.  The  master  of  the 
house  had  money  brought  (ger.)  and  distributed  it  to  the  poor. 
18.  Let  not  kings  decide  law-suits  without  hearing  the  arguments 
(e||xQ  of  both  sides.  19.  Whoever  despises  powerful  foes,  and 
fights  with  them  without  considering  the  means  to  victory  (gen.), 
perishes.  20.  Whoever  becomes  an  ascetic  without  having  studied 
the  Veda,  attains  (ger.)  not  salvation,  but  falls  into  hell  (loc). 

Lesson  XXX. 

314.  Infinitive.  The  later  language  has  a  single  infinitive,  the 
ending  of  which  is  7Rf£  (or  <rj*0-  The  root  takes  guna,  when 
possible. 

315.  The  ending  THT  is  added  directly: 

1.  To  almost  all  roots  ending  in  vowels,  except  those  in  ^R 
and  changeable  ^.     Thus,   tfT,  VWRf{ ;  3[T,  ^MH;  f^J>  3<JH5 

2.  To    a    number  of   roots   ending  in  consonants.     As  root- 


122  Lesson  XXX. 

finals,   g»,  c^,  t^  and  ^  remain  unchanged  before   <TJ^;    thus,   ^R, 

'curse',  TTH**.;  3^C  'dwell',  ^p^.  —  Other  finals  are  changed 
according  to  the  rules  given  in  Lesson  XXVIII  for  the  con- 
version  of  final   consonants  before  the  participial  suffix  7f.     Thus, 

tt^,  nw*;  m\,  anp;;  Tl*  ^I*t*;  ^'  ^fl*5  f\> 

Final  «*  becomes  <^,  and  final  J{,  \;  thus,  n5T|[,  -*tj+U  f^Tcf 
'know',  %rpt  (also  %f\<J*0;   T^,  T^- 

316.  The  ending  cj^;  with  ^  (in  the  form  *TJ*0  is  taken  by 
roots  in  final  long  ^»  and  the  root  ^,  with  a  few  other  vowel- 
roots;  by  the  majority  of  roots  in  consonants;  and  by  verbs  of  the 
secondary  conjugations.    Thus,   *f,    »?fW7fF{;    ift,    ^farj*U    X^v> 

317.  Causatives  and  denominatives  in  "^J  have  ^rftirj*^  the 
root  being  treated  as  iu  the  present;   thus,  ^"^,  ^V<f*M+iJ  ^W  » 

318.  Some  roots  in  consonants  insert  or  reject  5^  at  pleasure; 
thus,  TO  ,  JJlf^rJH.  or  TT^**-    The  root  ^  makes  ^J^rT^. 

319.  The  rules  for  the  use  of  ^  in  the  infinitive  agree  closely 
with  those  governing  its  use  in  the  formation  of  the  s-future  and 
of  the  vomen  agentis  in  H. 

320.  Uses  of  the  infinitive.  The  chief  use  of  the  infinitive  is 
as  equivalent  to  an  accusative,  as  the  object  of  a  verb,  especially 
of  the  verbs  ^5  'be  able',  and  tJI^    be  worthy',    'have  the  right 


*  The  increments  of  ^  are  sometimes  ^  and  "^  instead  of 
tR"^  and  ^JT^;  especially  where  a  difficult  combination  of  consonants 
is  thu9  avoided. 

**  In  all  the  tense-systems,  and  in   derivation,   the  root   3J^ 
exhibits  often  the  vrddhi  instead  of  the  ^wna-strengthening. 


Lesson  XXX.  123 

or  power';  thus,  cfiUjfad  IJ^ftfrT  "he  is  able  to  tell";  sftrj+lffrT 
efi^TT*  *'the  prince  ought  to  hear  it".  n!f^  is  often  thus  used  with 
the  infinitive  to  express  a  respectful  request  or  entreaty,  as  in  the 
last  example.  The  infinitive  is  also  often  found  with  verbs  of 
motion,  and  with  those  meaning  'desire',  'hope',  'notice',  'know', 
and  the  like. 

321.  But  often  the  infinitive  has  a  case-value  not  accusative. 
Thus,  a  dative  value:  IT^frT  ^ftWTW^  "there  is  food  to  eat"  i.  e. 
"for  eating";  a  genitive  value:  ^f5|^rr  TfHJ,  "capable  of  going". 
Even  a  construction  as  nominative  is  not  unknown. 

322.  In  certain  connections  the  infinitive  has  a  ^uasi-passive 
force.  Thus,  ofm*J|^dej:  "  begun  to  be  made  " ;  ^TfT  T  4jWd  "  it  is 
not  fit  to  be  heard."  This  is  especially  frequent  along  with  the 
passive  forms  of  ^r^i;  thus,  mJR  «f  IJdiYfil  "he  cannot  abandon", 
but  <5J#  »f  ^^r^  "he  cannot  be  abandoned";  «nft  1[Wf^T^<p^ 
"the  two  men  can  be  brought  hither." 

323.  Future  Passive  Participle,  or  Gerundive.  Certain  deriv- 
ative adjectives,  mostly  secondary,  have  acquired  a  value  quite 
like  that  of  the  Latin  gerundive;  thus,  cfc|{j  (from  qj)  'to  be  done', 

faciendus.    They  may  be   made  from   every   verb.     The  ordinary 
suffixes  are  three:  ^3f,  Tf^r,  and  '^vflif. 

324.  A.  Suffix  ^f.  a.  Before  this  suffix  final  radical  ^TT  be- 
comes X[;  thus,  from  3"[\  2"^T;  J^\,  if^T.  b.  Other  final  vowels  some- 
times remain  unchanged,  sometimes  have  the  guna  or  even  the 
vrcWfo'-strengthening;  andTJ  often,  and  ~^st[  always,  are  treated  before 
H  as  before  a  vowel;  thus,  from  fgj,  5f?J  and  5T5I;  from  *ft,  *J^J 
and  HftS;  from  ^r,  Tsjgj  and  ^TtcB;  from  q?,  ^TRI;  from  *J,  \jRI;  from 
*T»  3?T^T  —  c.  In  a  few  iustances,  a  short  vowel  adds  <T  before 
the  suffix;  thus,  ^J(^),  ^2T(fJ  (^f),  ^R2T  (3R).    d.  Medial  1Q  remains 

The  original  value  of  this  suffix  is  ia.    Hence  the  conversion 
of  TJ  to  ^J   and  of  ^jft  to  ^Rf    before  it. 


124  Lesson  XXX. 

unchanged  in  one  class  of  words,  and  is  lengthened  in  another 
class;  thus,  ^K(,  ^3T,  ^RT,  but  TTlZf  (*T^)>  TT^T  (^)- 
e.  Initial  or  medial  i,  u,  and  r- vowels  are  sometimes  unchanged, 
sometimes  have  the  (/Una-strengthening;  thus,  f^J,  T?T,  *T^T;  %3T, 
^^TST  ^THf-  /•  The  root  ^JT^C  makes  f^TSJ.  A  form  ^8f  (from 
the  defective  root  ^J  )  is  assigned  to  ^«^.  <3TT-<qTO  makes  ^TRP9 
and  -4IM+33T-  g.  Causatives  and  denominatives  in  ^r  are  treated  as 
in  the  present,  but  omit  the  syllables  ^J;  thus,  ^T,  ^Y^- 

325.  B.  Suffix  ffolf.  This  is  a  secondary  adjective  derivative 
from  the  infinitival  noun  in  <f.  Hence,  both  as  regards  the  form  of 
root  and  the  use  or  omission  of  ^,  the  rules  are  the  same  as  for 
the  formation  of  the  infinitive;  thus,  ^3)^1,  ^faq^r,  cJi^rfH^T  ^f'?- 
?F*t  (ift). 

326.  C.  Suffix  -^m  [^Hlfter]-  Generally  radical  vowels 
will  be  found  gunated  before  this  suffix;  causatives  and  denomin- 
atives in  ^STO  are  treated  as  in  the  present- system,  without  the 
syllables  ^T;  thus,  ^\  +  \i\  (^T),  J|l«fl*J  (*TT),  ^TWfa  (^),  *ft- 

327.  The  gerundives  in  "Jf^f  are  common  in  the  impersonal  pas- 
sive construction  described  in  Lesson  X,  and  not  seldom  have  a 
purely  future  sense ;  thus,  H«J  ^TT  ^jf^sRT  Hf^W^  "  with  that 
thou  shalt  be  happy". 


Yerbs: 

^3J^  (drhati)  have  the   right,  etc. 

(cf.  §  320.) 
^TR^  +  *J*t  finish,  attain. 
|l+^PMSrT  pay. 
1H  +  ^ITf*f    (abhigdcchati)    visit, 

attend. 


Vocabulary  XXX. 

TTf  +  ^5^  (avagahate)  dive  under 

(ace). 
cfx^    (tdpati,    -te)  burn   (tr.   and 

intr.);    pain;    in  pass.,    suffer, 

do  penance. 
\JT  +  fW  arrange,  ordain,  order. 
•T?^  (nftyati)  dance. 


Lesson  XXX. 


125 


»  +  TJ  be  mighty,  able ;  valere. 
^c^  +  Tf    (pravdrtate)    continue, 
go  on. 

Snbst.: 
apffall  m.,  husbandman. 
^ftcf  n.,  song,  singing. 
r\m^  n.,  heat;   self-torture. 
•TTZ«R  »•>  drama,  play. 
»PtT  n.,  dance,  dancing. 
^TJ^  n.,  body,  figure. 
CTTT3I  m->  convention,   company. 
3J"TO«^  n.,   Vedic  melody,   song; 
pi.,  the  Samaveda. 

Adj.: 
Tppr,  f.  °t,  young,  delicate. 


XTg  stout,  fat. 

fM^cj|f^«^  acceptably  speaking. 

Ifi^rq^  fruitful. 

^f-sj?!   destined  or  suitable   for 

sacrifice. 
f^ffcf  (part,  of  f%-\TT)  ordained. 
^Tr^f,  f.,  o^|T,  capable,  able. 
*^^W  self-existent;  as  m.  subst., 

epithet  of  Brahma. 

Adv.: 

"^JJ^H  enough,  very;  iv.  instr., 
enough  of,  away  with;  w.  dat., 
suitable  for. 

*<^H  at  pleasure. 


Exercise  XXX. 

f^t  mwwi  ^g  ^mft  **r^  Tfn  fJrenrrf^fr  wr  <nh*j- 
??» w:  i  r  i  tnm^n^rrf^^t  f^mrt-  i3^rn  *rr*rrf*r  tt  %- 
*nf*r  i  ^  i  cfVsf  <re^i7j  ^f?NfcrR?  jrf^w.  i  8  i  WTOPCtf*r§*n 

*tt  ^trg  ^f^nft  rat  ^ref^nw^  Tfa  Tr^rf^ira  i  c  i  i- 
w  wrr  tt^^rj  ^i^m  (§  322)  1  e  1  g^T^^rrt"  mat  ^\w 

(Sentences  with  must  may  6e  rendered  either  with  ^fif  or  ««$ 
gerundives).  12.  A  Brahmacarin  must  not  visit  any  companies 
to  see  (Tr-t^j)  dancing  or  to  hear  singing.  13.  Remembering 
that  works  will  be  fruitful  in  the  other  life  (use  "thus  thinking", 
after  or.   recta),  a  man  must   strive  to  perform  what  is  ordained. 


126  Lesson  XXX.  XXXI. 

14.  The  maidens  seated  themselves  (pass,  part.)  in  the  garden  to 
bind  wreaths.     15.  True   friends  are  able  to  save  from   misfortune. 

16.  The  daughters  came  (pass,  part.)  to   bow   before   their  parents. 

17.  How  is  the  delicate  body  of  this  fair  one  capable  of  enduring 
penance?  18.  You  must  become  a  scholar  (use  H^«rT  ,  end  cf. 
§  177).  19.  You  must  bring  a  boat  to  cross  the  river.  20.  Who 
is  able  to  stop  the  mighty  wind?  21.  The  gentlemen  (use  3^«rT  ) 
are  to  read  this  letter.  22.  Having  finished  the  Veda,  he  went  on 
to  study  the  other  sciences. 

Lesson  XXXI. 

328.  Numerals.  Cardinals:  TJ^5  1,  ^  2,  fs|  3,  ^7T$  4,  tR|  5, 
^  6,  *??  7,  ^  8,  *fcf  9,  ^t  10.  -  Trqrr^jr  11,  ^t^t  12, 
^Pt^ST  13,  ^rf^  14,  TJ^r  15,  ^t^H  M,  *TF^IT  *?,  WT^  18, 
•pr^r  19,  fSftjfa  20.  —  TJcRf^rcifa  21,  3[Tf<nif?T  22,  etc.  — 
fWt  30,  ^Wlft^l  40,  WTCT3:  50,  trfE  W  Utffa  70,  ^nft- 
frT  80,  ^fa  90,  ^  100.  —  f^  or  \  lf%  200.  —  *f^  1000, 

U,m**  or  1  ^%  2000,  nmw*  or  *n^  J00  ooo. 

329.  The  numbers  between  the  even  tens  are  made  by  pre- 
fixing the  unit -number  to  the  ten;  thus,  XJ^"fBf^jf<f  25.  But  note: 
U.«*"T^,  not  ^<%  11-  42,  52,  62,  72  and  92,  either  f^tj^l- 
nCU|ct,  or^T^-0,  etc.;  43—73,  and  93,  either  fao  or  ^"jr^^T0  etc.; 
48—78.  and  98,  either  ^re<>  or  WT^WT0  etc.    96  is  XfT^fTT. 

330.  There  are  other  ways  of  expressing  the  numbers  between 
the  tens.  Thus:  1.  By  the  use  of  the  adj.  ^Tf  'deficient',  in  com- 
position; e.  g.  T|cfft»jf^jfrT  '20  less  1',  i.  e.  19.  This  usage  is 
not  common  except  for  the  nines.  Sometimes  TJejj  is  left  off,  and 
^STTf^nrfTI,  etc.,  have  the  same  value.  2.  By  the  adj.  ^srfV«G  or 
^tR[  'more',  also  in  composition;  e.  g. ,  ^HntVofi'T^f?!  (also 
^lETfW  'Pffa)  98. 


Lesson  XXXI.  127 

331.  The  same  methods  are  used  to  form  the  odd  numbers 
above  100.   Thus,  J^f^T^lOl,  TOnpff('0#<  ugTfSRi  71^105, 

332.  Inflection  of  cardinals.  1.  T^}  is  declined  like  vT^T,  at 
§231  (pi.:  'some',  'certain  ones').  The  dual  does  not  occur. 
TJ^j  sometimes  means  'a  certain';  or  even  'an,  a',  as  an  indefinite 
article. 

2.  \  (dual  only)  is  quite  regular;  thus,  nom.-acc.-voc.  m.,  ^\ 

f.  n.  \,  3T*rR,  3*fr*:- 

3.  f^  is  in  masc.  and  neut.  nearly  regular;  the  fern,  has  the 
stem  "ffTO.  Thus,  nom.  m.  ^i|{^,  ace.  m.  "^ft"!,  nom.-acc.  n. 
■^frrf;  instr.  fV*i^,  dat.-abl.  fw^,  gen.  ^TnWT^,  loc.  f^TJ. 
Fem.:   nom.-acc.   ffT^t-   instr.  t^T^f*ra^-   dat.-abl.    frT^Wl^,  gen. 

4.  xj«i<  has  ^^TT  in  strong  cases;  the  fem.  stem  is  ^7T*T. 
Thus,  nom.  m.  ^cTn^,  ace.  m.  ^TTT^.;  nom.-acc.  u.  ^STTfT; 
instr.  ^7lfifo[  etc.    Fem.:  nom.-acc.  ^rT^^  instr.,  etc.,  ^rRTfH^, 

A  w  G  ™ 

(5 — 19.)  These  numbers  have  no  distinction  of  gender.  They 
are  inflected  with  some  irregularity  as  plurals.    Thus: 

5.  7,  9,  10.  V^,  H^f^ra:,  °«ra\  -q^T^T^.  tfWf  •  ^  ^ 
^Jl,  and  compounds  of  <^r,  are  similarly  declined. 

6.  t5jt^  as  follows:  T3c$,  T^ffa^,  ^wrac,  wr*k  ^Zf- 

8.  "!?rS  may  follow  TRj|\    or  be  declined  thus:   ^Tlft  ^T2TfK^» 

20,  30,  etc.  f^ljfTT,  f^^,  etc->  are  declined  regularly  as 
fem.  stems,  in  all  numbers. 

100,  1000.  1J7?  and  ^J^f  are  declined  regularly  as  neut. 
stems,  in  all  numbers. 

333.  Construction  of  numerals.  1.  The  words  from  1  to  19 
are  used  as  adjectives,  agreeing  in  case  (and  in  gender,  if  possible) 


128  Lesson  XXXI. 

with  the  nouns.  2.  The  numerals  above  19  are  usually  treated  as 
nouns,  either  taking  the  numbered  noun  as  a  dependent  genitive, 
or  standing  in  the  sing,  in  apposition  with  it;  thus,  ^T?t  ^(tJlii*!. 
or  ^Jff  SUffc  "a  hundred  female  slaves";  H&U  3|<rt4  "in  sixty 
autumns". 

334.  Ordinals.  "J^TR*  'first',  f^ftn,  <pfta>  ^<f«h  W*> 
TO,  ^7T*J,  ^TS*T,  ^TT,  ^5TT,  U«M<^U|  (to  iM,  the  same  as  the 
cardinals,   but  declined  like  <ra,  etc.);    f^J  or  f^jfTRTT  20th; 

f^TT  or  f^TJrra  30thi  etc-  Note  also  U«*l'lt^5r  or  ^fa^ 
U«J^RS{ffldRor^vrpij«j{f?TCT*T,  19th.  The  shorter  forms  (fchx  etc.) 
are  by  far  the  commoner. 

335.  STO7T,  f^cffa  and  rTcfT^I  make  their  fem.  in  °"31T;  the 
rest,  in  $\  Occasional  forms  of  the  pronominal  declension  are 
met  with  from  the  first  three;  but  the  usual  declension  of  nouns 
is  the  normal  one  for  ordinals  also. 

336.  Numeral  adverbs.  1.  <Q^K^  'once';  fl[^.  'twice';  f^^ 
'thrice';  ^di^  'four  times';  TJ^4i<«i^  or  m^TT*^  'fiye  times'; 
and  so  on,  with  °^i^^  or  °<ll<^.  —  2.  T£ofi\TT  'in  one  way'; 
f^TT  or  ^n  'in  two  ways';  fWT  or  ^TT,  ^cpiT,  ^^fJ,  VtZI 
or^T^TT, etc — 3.  U4)3{^  'one  by  one';  ^JTUT^  'by  hundreds', etc. 

Vocabulary  XXXI. 


Terbs: 
^5«5I  -f  ^i^  (sarhkaldyati)   put  to- 
gether, add. 
«Ft  +  ^ssrfTJ  pass  (of  time). 
^^J(jdlpati)  speak,  chat. 


W5T  in  caus.  (bhojdyati)  feed. 
f%^.  +  ^^rfH  (abhisincdti)  anoint 

as  king. 
^+^<*-'^n'  cite,  mention. 


Subst.: 
<4|\!|c(^|^  m.,  the  fourth  Veda. 

*  XRI  forms  no  ordinal. 


^Rf^MId**  n.,  n.  pr.  a  city. 


Lesson  XXXI. 


129 


qrflRjra  n.,  the  "Iron  Age"  of 
the  world. 

^fsfi  n.,  wheel. 

5?fYfrTO  n-i  astronomy;  astrono- 
mical text-book. 

?«j|«f  n.,  philosophical  system. 

•f^f  n.,  lunar  mansion. 

qrrQS^r  m«?  n-  Pr->  descendant  of 
Pandu. 

TJ<J(!J  n.,  one  of  a  class  of  works 
on  the  creation  of  the  world. 

f^sfPRTf^W  ni.,  n.  pr.,  a  famous 
king. 


■JTefi  ra.,  Scythian. 

TJT^T  f. ,    branch,    edition,    re- 
daction. 

^^nSTT  m.,  year. 
Adv.: 

■^'InlXt  (w.  abl.  —  often  post- 
pos.)  after,  immediately  after. 

fflf^Tf^  sometimes  (in  altern.). 

rT^r^TT  namely,  to  wit. 

*HHJdH  at  present. 


Exercise  XXXI. 

H<*Mi<u\:  n<(\*jnl  <Mftnf*i  *m  wpt  ii  <^  ii 

qHHI^MhM    irfKTfW    f^fW   TraTRTf^  JW%*   II  9  U 
^^Tft  %^T  1%3I%  SBT^II  JTTWTf^T  *C^f^r5[rTC  *Ff  ^TT* 

'ftfrT  f^rt  jtcto;  i  s  i  ^jqfi  %^nri  <j  *if^:  irn=rT  ^rf#r  i  3  i 
<ra*rr  i  ^<^i  vs  in^T  ^f^^i  ^i^aftfTT:  *n*^«g  *ttt- 
*r#%^  ^r%frT  1 8 1  *nrf :  s^rarai  ^Htrlt  ^rf  TITWPTT  ^£J%  II  M  II 

*HdA  tt^ttt  Tr^rrf^f^ai:  i  ^  i  ^  w  wst^i  wrfa  ^rrfr 

^  TpfTRf  TT^ft  ^^Iftr  Trnf^I  II  «=  II  ^VfW  *RTfW  ITT  *ft^T 
^"nRT^^H^%^  WTfiPJNt  ^TTTf^T  I  <>  I  *  nw  *f?  ^  iptoi^ 

susiuiMTOHtaun.  ii  w  ii 

11.  The  wagon  of  the  Acvins  is   fitted  (^pj ,  part,  pass.)  with 
three  wheels.    12.  The  Acvins  are  praised  by  the  seer  with  four 


*  i.  e.,  in  the  seven  stars  of  the  Great  Bear. 

Perry,  Sanskrit  Primer. 


1 30  Lesson  XXXI.  XXXII. 

Rik-verses.  13.  Krsna  is  the  eldest  of  six  brothers.  14.  Arjuna 
is  the  third  among  the  five  Pandavas.  15.  Some  think  there 
are  eight  sorts  of  marriage  (pi.);  others,  six  (model  after  2nd 
sentence  in  Sanskrit  above).  16.  Twenty-seven  or  twenty-eight  lunar 
mansions  are  mentioned  in  astronomy.  17.  One  should  consecrate 
a  Brahman  in  his  eighth  year,  a  Ksatriya  in  his  eleventh,  a  Vaicya 
in  his  twelfth.  18.  Two  great  lights  shine  in  the  sky.  19.  The 
teacher,    having    taught    the    fifth    Rik- verse,    recited   the  sixth. 

20.  Qakyamuni  Buddha  died  in  the  eightieth  year  of  his  age  (life). 

21.  Sometimes  33  gods  are  reckoned  in  the  Veda,  sometimes  3333. 

Lesson  XXXII. 

337.  Comparison  of  Adjectives.  Derivative  adjectives  having 
comparative  and  superlative  meaning  —  or  often,  and  more  origin- 
ally, a  merely  intensive  value  —  are  made  either  (A.)  directly  from 
roots  (by  primary  derivation),  or  (B.)  from  other  derivative  or  com- 
pound stems  (by  secondary  derivation). 

338.  A.  The  suffixes  of  primary  derivation  are  ^J^  for  the 
comparative,  and  ^J  for  the  superlative.  The  root  before  them  is 
accented,  and  usually  strengthened  by  guna  (if  capable  of  it),  or 
sometimes  by  nasalization  or  prolongation.  —  In  classical  Sanskrit 
few  such  formations  are  in  use;  and  these  attach  themselves  in 
meaning  mostly  to  other  adjectives  from  the  same  root,  which  seem 
to  be  their  corresponding  positives.  In  part,  however,  they  are 
connected  with  words  unrelated  to  them  in  derivation. 

339.  Thus  %tffajW  and  ^fTO  (j/f^PO  attac^  themselves  to 
f^n?  'quick';  ^0*1*1.  and  «rf<8  (V^t  'encompass'),  to  "^ 
'broad';  (TptY^Rit  an(*  TTpTOj  'worse'  and  'worst',  to  the  subst. 
^TO;    M«il*J^  and  Tjfe^,   to  q^    skilful';  ITffta^  and  jffgg  to 


LessoD  XXXII.  131 

TffTj  qJqHqH,  and  ^f^TO,  to  «|fa^  or  ^t^jt  ;  ^T^T^  and 
*?Tfa¥  to  KTV 

340.  The  following  are  examples  of  artificial  connections: 
•^rf^^fi'near',  %^t*r^,  %T^¥ ;  ^F3I  '  little',  ^sfaTCt,  ^fTO 

(but  also  ^^f| i\^,  ^rf^i^);  ^  heavy',  ^"O^C.  ifT*;  T^ 
'long',  ^ivfttj^  ^TfaS;  "H^I^  'praiseworthy',  'good',  fr^ 
'better',  %^  'best';  fTRf  'dear',   ifaw,  jftj;  ^1T  'much',   *RIH 

**f*re;  g^:  'young',  *xft^,  *rf?re;  ra  'ow,  ^flfaret,  ^- 

fa^J.  Sl|  l^fff  ano-  ^HJ  correspond  sometimes  to  1T9P3T  or  ^TT^' 
sometimes  to  ^njJ. 

341.  The  stems  in  Jj%  are  inflected  like  ordinary  adjectives 
in  ^Sf,  with  the  fem.  in  1R;  those  in  f"ST3[.  ha\e  a  peculiar  de- 
clension, with  a  strong  stem  in  l^jf^,  and  fem.  %^RTt,  for 
which  see  §  255.     So  also  5STTTH  and  WTO.« 

342.  B.  The  suffixes  of  secondary  derivation  are  cfT  and  <\H, 
They  are  of  almost  unrestricted  use.  That  form  of  stem  is  usually 
taken  which  appears  before  an  initial  consonant  of  a  case-ending. 
Stems  in  ^^  are  always  unchanged;  final  ^-^  and  ^-^  become 
^BF   and  ^'q' ,  after  which  the  c^  of  the  suffix  becomes  ^. 

Thus,  firenrr^,  frrsnrnsT  °wt;  ^rf*f*t,  ^Trn;,  °cw;  fa- 

343.  Some  stems  which  are  substantives  rather  than  adjectives 
are  found  to  form  derivatives  of  comparison;  thus,  JTTfTrffl  'most 
motherly ',  ipfR  '  most  manly ' ,  *HfrT*T  '  most  like  an  elephant. ' 

344.  Comparison  of  Adverbs.  Adverbs  are  compared  by  adding 
the  suffixes  in  the  forms  cHT^  and  r|4{|^;   thus,   ^  'well',   *TcT- 

345.  Construction.  With  a  comparative  (and  sometimes  with 
other  words  used  in  a  similar  way)  the  ablative  is  the  regular 
construction;  thus,  lH|r+«4JT  rT^T  TTEI?ft  "a  daughter  is  dearer 
to    him    than   a   son";    *rfa^   «?<?fls?0*J*n    "intellect   alone  is 

9* 


132 


Lesson  XXXII. 


stronger  than  force".  After  the  superlative  either  genitive  or  locative 
may  be  used.  The  comparative  often  has  the  force  of  a  strength- 
ened superlative;  thus,  J|  0  *J  I  *l  'most  honorable'. 

Vocabulary  XXXII. 

fljsq  m.,  n.  pr.,  the  Indus. 


Subst.: 

Jptjcfm.,  one  of  a  band  of  celes- 
tial singers,  a  Gandharva. 
^5J  m.,  n.  pr. 
^CT^T  n.,  running,  course. 
MMHcH^  n)->  the  world-spirit. 
jft^J  m-j  deliverance,  salvation. 
OR*lH  f-,  n.  pr. 
^"^  n.,  metal;  iron. 
eH'tJH  m.,  crow. 

^^T«ff  m.,  a  system  of  philosophy . 
TT<5«fl<!H  f.,  n.  pr. 


WfJH  m.,  drunkard. 
%7T«tT  m.,  winter. 

Adj.: 
^JI!T  little,    small;    as    n.  subst., 

atom. 
H"PJ  swift. 

tfl'  f-  t?*ft>  such. 
ipTO  f.  o^rr  and  o^,  old. 
^ffl«^  abiding,  being. 

Indecl.: 

^  sometimes  in  sense  of  if. 


Exercise  XXXII. 
#ft  WTT  fUcTT  TTfa  ^  f^T  ITO^fTT  I 

*t^to^  i  $  i  ^ThroY  w*if  ^trw^er.  i  8  i  ^  #bhtt  *rr- 

*TR1T  3if^re:  3ft  5rr%<T  cf^T  *  TpT  ^  ^^J  *TR  *TO^^t  I  M  I 

^T^idiiuTtiuiuD^i^^dl  sf<?  *r#ten^<wg  ^wr  i  $  i  tr^- 
f^rmfM^fH:  *f  *rct:  f%^%T^n  ^fa  T^ftrpf  isra  i  ^  i 
*n  ^aifa^fa^^r  ff?<T<jy«5?.*<*H  trfwtawi^ri  TtffJSft 
^:  ^^  i  ^  i  fm*n  f<jm:  mimWr:  ^Ht^r  i  o.  i  m- 
^■rt  TnmFra  wot  i  90  i  ir^ft  ^Ham  *£t^zr^R  *r- 
«R  ii  99  n 

*  Translate  as  though  genitive. 


Lesson  XXXII.  XXXIII.  133 

12.  Of  the  three  wives  of  Dacaratha,  Kausalya  was  older  and 
morehonortd(*p§,  comp  )  than  Kaikey!  and  Sumitra.  13.  In  winter  the 
nights  are  very  long.  14.  Not  very  many  (express  as  pred.)  such 
jewels  are  found  on  earth.  15.  Among  those  kings  of  the  North 
Prthvlraja  was  the  mightiest.  16.  The  poems  of  Kalidasa  are 
sweeter  than  the  works  of  Bana.  17.  Anathapindika  was  the  richest 
among  all  the  merchants  in  Rajagrha.  18.  Iron  is  lighter  than  gold, 
but  heavier  than  wood.  19.  In  running  the  horse  is  the  swiftest 
of  quadrupeds.  20.  Qakuntala  was  more  beautiful  than  all  other 
women  of  that  time,  and  became  the  wife  of  the  mightiest  monarch 
(^PEJT^T  )  of  the  whole  earth.  21.  The  crow  is  called  the  shrewdest 
of  birds. 

Lesson  XXXIII. 

(Part  I.) 

346.  Compounds.  In  all  periods  of  the  language  the  combination 
of  stems  of  declension  with  one  another,  forming  compounds  which 
are  treated  in  accent,  inflection  and  construction  as  if  simple  words, 
is  one  of  the  most  striking  peculiarities  of  the  Sanskrit  tongue. 
In  the  Vedic  period  compounds  of  more  than  two  elements  are 
rare.  In  the  later  language  this  moderation  is  abandoned;  and 
the  later  the  period,  and  especially  the  more  elaborate  the  style 
of  composition,  the  more  unwieldy  and  difficult  do  the  compounds 
become.  To  such  an  extent  is  this  carried  that  the  advantages 
of  an  inflective  language  are  often  deliberately  thrown  away,  and 
a  clumsy  aggregation  of  elements  replaces  the  due  syntactical 
union  of  inflected  words  into  sentences. 

347.  Sanskrit  compounds  fall  into  three  principal  classes: 

I.  Copnlative  or  Aggregative  compounds,  of  which  the  members 
are  93  ntaciically  coordinate:  a  joining  together  of  woids  which  in 


134  Lesson  XXXin. 

an  uncompounded  state  would  be  connected  by  'and'.  E.  g.  ^5- 
ctl<*dH  'done  and  undone';  ^Tn^^TT^TT:  'gods  and  Gan- 
dharvas  and  men'.  The  members  of  such  a  compound  may  obvi- 
ously be  of  any  number,  two  or  more. 

II.  Determinative  compounds,  of  which  the  former  member  is 
syntactically  dependent  on  the  latter,  as  its  determining  or  quali- 
fying adjunct:  being  either  a  noun  limiting  it  in  a  case-relation, 
or  an  adjective  or  an  adverb  describing  it.  Thus  may  be  distin- 
guished two  sub-classes:  A.  Dependent,  and  B.  Descriptive,  com- 
pounds; their  difference  is  not  absolute. 

Examples  are:  of  dependents,  1?rf*R%Tr  'army  of  enemies'; 
Ml<ft<<*  'water  for  the  feet';  ^cJiH  'made  with  hands';  —  of 
descriptives,  HfTTT^'great  king';  fJWEPH  (§353,  2)  'dear  friend'; 
^^EfifT  'badly  done'. 

348.  The  character  of  compounds  of  classes  I.  and  II.,  as 
parts  of  speech,  is  determined  by  their  final  member,  and  they  are 
capable  of  being  resolved  into  equivalent  phrases  by  giving  the 
proper  independent  form  and  formal  means  of  connection  to  each 
member.  But  this  is  not  true  of  the  third  class,  which  accordingly 
is  more  fundamentally  distinct  from  them  than  they  from  each 
other. 

349.  III.  Secondary  Adjective  compounds,  the  value  of  which 
is  not  given  by  a  simple  resolution  into  their  component  parts,  but 
which,  though  having  as  final  member  a  noun,  are  themselves  ad- 
jectives. These  again  are  of  two  sub-classes:  A.  Possessive  com- 
pounds, which  are  noun-compounds  of  the  preceding  class  (II.  A. 
or  B.),  with  the  idea  of  'having'  added,  turning  them  from  nouns 
into  adjectives ;   and  B.  compounds  in  which  the  second  member  is 


*  This  class  of  compounds  is  of  comparatively  recent  devel- 
opment; only  the  other  two  are  common  in  others  of  the  related 
tongues. 


Lesson  XXXIII.  135 

a  noun  syntactically  dependent  on  the  first:  namely,  1.  Participial 
compounds  (only  Vedic),  of  a  present  participle  with  its  following 
object;  and  2.  Prepositional  compounds,  of  a  preposition  and  fol- 
lowing noun.    This  whole  sub-class  B  is  comparatively  small. 

Examples :  T^%«T  '  possessing  a  hero-army ' ;  TTSTRTRT  '  having 
desire  of  progeny';  'JfffTRTPI  'excessive'. 

350.  The  adjective  compounds  are,  like  simple  adjectives,  some- 
times used,  especially  in  the  neuter,  as  abstract  and  collective 
nouns;  and  in  the  accusative  as  adverbs.  Out  of  these  uses  have 
grown  apparent  classes  of  compounds,  reckoned  and  named  as  such 
by  the  Hindu  grammarians. 

351.  A  compound  may,  like  a  simple  word,  become  a  member 
in  another  compound,  and  so  on  indefinitely.  The  analysis  of  a 
compound  (except  copulatives),  of  whatever  length,  must  be  made 
by  a  series  of  bisections.  Thus  the  dependent  compound  (jqb|«41- 
Vif,  '  done  in  a  previous  existence ',  is  first  divisible  into  ^kT  and 
the  descriptive  Tj^rgjtjrw,  then  this  into  its  two  elements. 

352.  Euphonic  combination  in  compounds.  The  final  of  a  stem 
is  combined  with  the  initial  of  another  stem  in  composition  according 
to  the  general  rules  for  external  combination.    But: 

1.  Final  ^^  and  ^T^  of  a  prior  member  become  ^TO  and  ^tf 
before  surd  gutturals,  dentals,  and  labials;  thus,  otHfdMic^. 

2.  Final  ^J^  of  a  prior  member  often  remains  unchanged  under 
similar  circumstances. 

3.  After  final  7»  ^>  ^&,  an  initial  ^  often  becomes  lingual. 

4.  Pronouns  generally  take  the  stem-form  of  the  neuter;  for 
the  personal  pronouns  are  oftenest  used  Zfe  and  t^f  in  the  sing., 
^T9?^  and  ^P*^  in  the  pi. 

5.  For  Tj|f»rT  ,  in  the  prior  member  of  descriptive  and  possess- 
ive compounds,  is  used  J(^\. 

6.  A  case-form  in  the  prior  member  is  not  very  rare. 


136  Lesson  XXXIII. 

353.  In  all  classes  of  compounds,  certain  changes  of  finals  are 
liable  to  appear  in  the  concluding  member;  generally  they  have  the 
effect  of  transferring  the  compound  as  a  whole  to  the  a-declension. 
Thus:  1.  A  stem  in  ^pr^  often  drops  the  final  *^,  as  in  °^TW,  0"^l^ 
°T*t,  °TT5T-  2.  An  ?  or  f  is  changed  to  ^J,  as  in  ©Wf,  °TT%  °^RT, 
•TTSJ.  3.  An  ^  is  added  after  a  final  consonant,  sometimes  even 
after  an  w-vowel  or  a  diphthong,  as  in  °^T|f  (^HpO,  T^  (^ft)- 

The  separate  classes  of  compounds   will  now   be    taken    up. 

(Part  II.) 

354.  I.  Copulative  compounds.  Two  or  more  nouns  —  much 
less  often  adjectives,  and  once  or  twice  adverbs  —  having  a  co- 
ordinate construction,  as  though  joined  by  '  and ',  are  sometimes  com- 
bined into  a  compound.* 

355.  The  noun-compounds  fall,  as  regards  their  inflective  form, 
into  two  classes: 

A.  The  compound  has  the  gender  and  declension  of  its  final 
member,  and  is  in  number  a  dual  or  plural,  according  to  its 
logical  value  as  denoting  either  two,  or  more  than  two,  individual 
things.  Examples  are:  sTtf^TO^"  'rice  and  barley';  "^TT«R- 
XU^"  'Rama  and  Krsna';  -3|3||c('<q:  'goats  and  sheep';  Wfi|P!r^rfam 
^pt^PTsTH  'Brahmans,  Ksatriyas,  Vaicyas  and  Qudras';  ftjfTPJ^t 
(§  352,  6)  'father  and  son'. 

B.  The  compound,  without  regard  to  the  number  denoted  or 
to  the  gender  of  its  constituents,  becomes  a  neuter  singular  collective 
(so-called  samahara-dvandva).  Thus,  TITfTUMId*^  'hand  and  foot'; 
QvPniW{  'snake  and  ichneumon';  ^"-cftUM^H  (§353,3)  'um- 
brella and  shoe';  '^nftTT^'^  (§353,2)  'day  and  night'. 

356.  The  later  language  preserves  several  dual  combinations 

This   class  is  called  by  the  Hindus  dvaudva,  'couple';  but  a 
dvandva  of  adjectives  thev  do  not  recognize. 


Lesson  XXXIII.  137 

of  the  name9  of  divinities,  etc.,  which  retain  their  earlier  forms; 
thus,  'STRWfa^ft  and  <£|l«M*T7ft  'Heaven  and  Earth';  f*fTT- 
^^Uft  'Mitra  and  Varuna  ' ;  ^SJ^fftftTT  'Agni  and  Soma'. 

357.  Adjective  copulative  compounds  are  made  likewise,  but 
are  rare.  Examples  are:  *pffcP*»T  'light  and  dark';  cpfpftl ' round 
and  plump';*    ^TrTrTf^ffT  'bathed  and  anointed'. 

358.  Determinative  compounds.  A  noun  or  adjective  is  often 
combined  into  a  compound  with  a  preceding  determining  or  qual- 
ifying word  —  a  noun  or  adjective  or  adverb.  The  two  principal 
divisions  of  this  class  are,  as  indicated  above,  A.  Dependent,  and 
B.  Descriptive,  compounds.  Each  class  falls  into  two  subdivisions, 
according  as  the  final  member,  and  therefore  the  whole  compound, 
is  noun  or  adjective. 

359.  A.  Dependent  compounds.  1.  Noun -compounds.  The 
case-relation  of  the  prior  to  the  second  member  may  be  of  any 
kind,  but  is  oftenest  genitive,  and  least  often  accusative.  Thus, 
<T7*J^  =  cT^I  *JW;  ^sNpTTf^  'hundreds  of  fools';  —  Ml<\<«* 
(="<n^r  ^<<**l)  'water  for  the  feet';  —  f^rn*T  'money  (ob- 
tained) by  science';  ^n^WTf^  (=  ^Srn3J«n  SHf  331*1)  'likeness  with 
self;  —  ^fa^TC  (=^CK  1^*1*0  'fear  of  a  thief;  —  qorshlTT 
(=  «f%  3^°)  '  sport  in  the  water ' ;  —  «HKWR?T  (=  WC  1°)  '  going 
to  the  city';  ^l^^rfff  'lord  of  speech',  n.  pr.  (§352,  6.). 

360.  2.  Dependent  adjective  compounds.  Only  a  very  small 
proportion  of  the  compounds  of  this  class  have  an  ordinary  adjective 
as  final  member ;  usually  the  final  member  is  a  participle,  or  a  de- 
rivative   of  agency  with  the  value   of  a  participle  (§  204).     The 


*  The  Hindus  reckon  these  as  kormadharayas  (see  next  note). 

**  The  whole  class  of  determinatives  is  called  by  the  natives 
tatpurusa  (the  name  is  a  specimen  of  the  class,  meaning  'his  man'); 
the  second  division,  the  descriptives,  bears  the  special  name  karma- 
dhdraya,  a  word  of  obscure  meaning  and  application. 


138  Lesson  XXXIII. 

prior  member  stands  in  any  possible  case-relation.  Thus,  ^TTTTTfcf 
'gone  to  the  village';  ^Tf^T  'Veda-knowing';  —  ftpjTf^RJ 
'protected  by  Civa';  ^ftf^W  (=  3jif  f^rlO  'good  for  the  cow';  — 
M^Mfdd  'fallen  from  the  sky';  rT^^^U^TcTT  'more  mobile  than 
waves';  —  ■f^<jTtii*l  (=  fl^WTTRl.  ^3tW)  'best  of  Brahmans';  — 
4g|l<dlM€h  'cooked  in  a  pot'. 

361.  Compounds  of  this  sort  having  as  final  member  the  bare 
root  —  sometimes  modified  in  form,  and,  if  it  end  originally 
in  a  short  vowel,  generally  with  an  added  f^  —  are  very  numerous: 
thus,  %^f%T  above  (§360);  "^*§I  'standing  in  the  wagon'  (or 
simply  'in  the  wagon');  *T\J1  'on  the  head';  TToRH  'only-born'; 
cHtH  (§  352>  6)  ' forest-dwelling';  *lf%lfST  'firm  in  battle';  ^T- 
fj-TSf  kborn  in  the  heart'  (i.  e.  'love'). 

362.  B.  Descriptive  compounds.  In  this  division  of  tbe  deter- 
minatives, the  prior  member  stands  to  the  other  in  no  distinct  case- 
relation,  but  qualifies  it  adjectively  or  adverbially,  according  as  the 
final  member  is  noun  or  adjective.  Thus,  fl|4KI<sl  (§  353,  2);  ^f^irl 
'well-done';  ZiA^  'evil-doing'  (adj.). 

The  compounds  of  noun-value  cannot  well  be  separated  in 
treatment  from  those  of  adjective-value. 

363.  The  simplest  case  is  that  in  which  a  noun  as  final  member 
is  preceded  by  a  qualifying  adjective  as  prior  member.  Thus,  m- 
H!j|jy  (=  «ftmH  <f^0  'black  horse';  tfifnTCq  'great  man'.  Instead 
of  an  adjective,  the  prior  member  is  in  a  few  cases  a  noun  used 
appositionally  or  with  a  gwasz-adjective  value;  thus,  3^|fM  'priest- 
sage';  ^TWf^  'king-sage'. 

364.  Sometimes  compounds  of  this  sort  express  a  comparison; 
thus,  VHSiJUT  'black  as  a  thunder -cloud'  (cf.  'coal-black',  etc.). 
Reversed,  TJ^'q'^lTEf  'man-tiger',  i.  e.,  'a  man  fierce   as  a  tiger';* 

Literally,   a  tiger   which  is  not  a  tiger  after  all,  but  a  man. 
Or,  perhaps  better,  '  tiger  of  (or  among)  men '  (so  Whitney). 


Lesson  XXXIII. 


139 


•TCftr^  'man-lion';    M|^M<|  'foot-lotus',  i.  e.  'a  foot  lovely  as  a 
lotus'. 

365.  The  adverbial  words  most  commonly  used  as  prior 
members  of  descriptive  compounds,  qualifying  the  other  member, 
are  the  verbal  prefixes  ("prepositions"),  and  the  words  of  direction 
related  to  them;  likewise  the  inseparable  prefixes  tJP^  or  ^r  priva- 
tive, ^f  'well',  ^TW  'ill',  etc.  These  are  combined  with  nouns  (in 
^uasf-adjectival  value)  as  well  as  with  adjectives.  Thus,  <4|cftd  'not 
done';  ^mftS^rT  'not  a  scholar';  TR^TBf  'misfortune';  "^rfw^^ 
'more  than  a  god  ' ;  ^I'fd'^T  'exceedingly  far';  ^ffTPTO  '  excessive 
fear';  KfrlM^  'opposing  side.' 


Verbs: 
■411 H^  +  ^T*^  complete. 
^*l  +  f*J  station,  place,  appoint 


Vocabulary  XXXIII. 

T*T   +  ^T   (anurdjyati,    -te)    be 

devoted  to,  inclined  to  (loc). 
^^4 -IT  go  away  (on  a  journey). 
^<^  +  f^f  return  home. 


Subst.: 

^t^tst m-'  air»  sky- 

^"P^TST  m.,  hermitage. 

^j*!3  m.,  n.  pr. 

^TTT  m.,  boy,  prince. 

"5RT^T  f-,  game,  sport. 

fcT^feR  m.,  ornament  (often  Jig.). 

TfTSf  n.,  b,athing-place;   place   of 

pilgrimage. 
f^^cfi  n.,  o^t  f.,   the  threefold 

world. 


$*N41  m.,  n.  pr. 
^|fM«j^  m.,  panther. 


TJ^  n.,  step;  place. 

TJ^  m.,  n.  pr. 

*lf^«=n  f-  queen. 

ZpHTI  f»5  <-'hase. 

TT^T1"-*  march,  journey;  support. 

■^^r  m.,  race,  family. 

<^TTl«rl  m.,  state  of  affairs;  news. 

CTgrT  f-,  female  friend. 

*Jc=Mi!  m.,  hospitality. 

Adj.: 
^•HEl?,  f.  o-sjrr,  suitable. 

3ifW,  f.  o^TT,  adopted. 


140 


Lesson  XXXIII. 


^T7«tr^5  f-  °%,  in  the   manner  of, 
or  suitable  for,  tbe  Gandharvas. 
f«raf,  f.  °T!rr,  heavenly,  divine. 
4JMM,  f-  °t",  human. 


'^M\ % f-  °^IT,  near;  as  neut.subst., 
vicinity,  nearness,  presence. 

Adv.: 

TT^T  earlier,  formerly. 


c 


Exercise  XXXIII. 

««<l«H    TTf^n   I  R  I    crf^%  f^nfT  4*1 <* I «^u y  f*M$l fa <t 
*TR  TWt  i^T^T  *T^<ffT  f^TSTO^  l^TR  I  8  I  ^re? 

jrraTrrf^hrr  u  $  n 

(Form  compounds  of  words  joined  by  hyphens). 
7.  When  he  had  seen  her,  brilliant  (JJ^i  pres.  part.)  with  di- 
vine-beauty, as  though  ($$)  more-than-human,  the  heart  of  the 
king-sage  was  inclined  (pass,  part.)  toward  her.  8.  Thereupon, 
having  learned  that  she  (ace.)  was  the  dayghter-of-an-Apsaras  (ace), 
he  married  her  by  the  gandharva-ceremony  (f«H|^)  snitable-for- 
Ksatriyas.  9.  Dussanta,  after  dwelling  very  many  days-and-nights 
in  the  hermitage,  abandoned  Cakuntala  and  returned  to  his-own- 
city.  10.  Afterwards,  when  Kanva  had  finished  his  pilgrimage, 
and  returned  to  the  hermitage,  learning  (f%«T)  the  news^of-his1- 
daughter's2-marriage3,  he  sent  her  into-the-presence-of-Dussanla. 
11.  The  royal-sage  at  first  disowned  (THSTT-^sST^r.)  Cakuntala  when 
she  was  come^to-the-city1 ;  but  at  last  he  put  (fsT-'3I5T  ,  part,  in  °^trT  ) 
her    in-the-place3-of-the-first1-queen2.     12.  In    the    course    of  time 


*  "To  engage  in  the  sport  of  hunting";  cf.  below,  §375,  3. 


Lesson  XXXIII.  XXXIV.  141 

(3RT*Ff  T^f>rTT)  a   beautiful-prince,   named  Bharata,   was  born  to 
her  (loc). 

Lesson  XXXIV. 

366.  III.  Secondary  Adjective  Compounds.  A  compound  with 
a  noun  as  final  member  very  often  wins  secondarily  the  value  of 
an  adjective,  being  inflected  in  the  three  genders  to  agree  with  the 
noun  which  it  qualifies,  and  used  in  all  the  constructions  of  an 
adjective.  The  two  divisions  of  this  class  have  been  given  above 
(§  349). 

367.  Certain  changes  are  sometimes  necessary  in  the  stem  of 
the  final  member  to  make  possible  the  inflection  in  different  genders. 
Masc.  and  neut.  stems  in  ^f,  and  fem.  in  "^Sfj,  generally  interchange; 
thus,  from  Tf  +  ^T  comes  the  compound  tftftgl  'with  excellent 
hands ',  nom.  sing.  4j^H-  °^T,  °^R. ;  so  also  (from  f^  +  f^JTT) 
faf*!£f*,,  °£T,  °^ ;  and  (from  *J  +  "qj^r  n.)  Sp?t^,  °^T,  o*nR\ 
The  same  holds  good  for  masc,  fem.,  and  neut.  stems  in  ^  and  ^, 
and  stems  in  consonants. 

368.  But  often  a  fem.  in  f^  is  used  by  the  side  of  a  masc.  and 
neut.  in  ^f;  thus,  f^tnjj-  'two-leaved',  f.  f^THlfT. 

369.  Very  frequently  the  suffix  c?;  (attenuated  into  an  element 
of  indefinite  value)  is  added  to  a  pure  possessive  compound ,  to 
help  the  conversion  of  the  compounded  stem  into  an  adjective; 
especially  tojfem.  stems  in  %"  and  ^Jf,  and  to  stems  in  ^J;  and  in 
general,  where  the  final  of  the  stem  is  less  usual  or  manageable 
in  adjective  inflection.  Thus,  ^^fe^cfi  'rich  in  rivers';  ;RrT*n^JTf., 
'whose  husband  is  dead',  i.  e.  'widow';  H^I^Jir^  (nom.  masc. 
and  fem.  °?fTQQ  or  *T^Rrer^ff. 

370.  Sometimes  the  possessive-making  suffix  ^^  is  added  to 
secondary  adjective  compounds,  without  effect  upon  the  meaning; 
thus,  J|^*Hlf^«t  (=  °«TR£)  '  having  an  ass's  voice. ' 


142  Lesson  XXXI V. 

37!.  A.  Possessive  compounds.  The  possessives  are  determin- 
ative compounds  to  which  are  given  both  an  adjective  inflection 
(as  just  shown)  ,  and  also  an  adjective  meaning  of  a  kind  best 
defined  by  adding  'having'  to  the  meaning  of  the  determinative. 
Thus,  the  dependent  ^^^TJ  n.,  'beauty  of  a  god',  becomes  the 
possessive  Y^?|JJ,  °^TT,  m.  f.  n.,  'having  the  beauty  of  a  god'; 
the  descriptive  ^"^T^Tjf  m. ,  'long  arm',  becomes  the  possessive 
?|^  131  m.  f.  n  ,  'having  long  arms'.* 

372.  Dependent  compounds  are,  by  comparison,  not  often  thus 
turned  into  possessives.  But  possessively  used  descriptives  are 
extremely  frequent  and  various;  and  some  kinds  of  combination 
which  are  rare  in  proper  descriptives  are  very  common  as  pos- 
sessives. 

373.  An  adjective  as  prior  member  takes  the  masculine  stem- 
form,  even  though  referring  to  a  feminine  noun  in  the  final  member; 
thus,  ^M <=l ^  I M  (from  ^TT^T)  'possessing  a  beautiful  wife'. 

374.  As  prior  members  are  found: 

1.  Adjectives  proper;  thus,  <3|«iq^»q  '  of  other  form'.  —  2.  Parti- 
ciples; thus,  ^r|J4H<ft  'whose  mother  is  slain'.  —  3.  Numerals; 
thus,  ^cW!  'four-faced';  fa^xM  'three -eyed'.  —  4.  Nouns 
with  quasi- adjectival  value;  thus,  f^^W^T  'gold-handed'.  Es- 
pecially common  is  the  use  of  a  noun  as  prior  member  to  qualify 
the  other  appositionally ,  or  by  way  of  equivalence.  These  may 
well  be  called  appositional  possessives.  Thus,  cfiuyMT^*^  '  having 
"Krsua"  as  name';  ^T^TJ^TiJ  'having  men  who  are  heroes'; 
^TT!^"W^.  'using  spies  as  eyes';  ^T<TfT  'having  thee  as  mes- 
senger'.  —  5.  Adverbial   elements  (especially  inseparable  prefixes); 


This  ehiss  of  compounds  is  called  by  the  natives  bahuvrihi; 
the  name  is  an  example  of  the  class,  meaning  'having  much  rice'. 
—  The  possessive  may  generally,  in  accented  texts,  be  distinguished 
from  the  original  determinative  by  a  difference  of  accent. 


Lesson  XXXIV.  143 

thus,  -4H«r1  'endless';  -*|IH  'childless';  Wi^  'with  excellent 
sons';  35rf5q  'ill -savored'.  The  associative  prefix  ^f  (less  often 
^f^)  is  treated  like  an  adjective  element;  thus,  3%JJ  'of  like  form  '; 
WTl  or  3fTCnf  vwith  a  son',  or  'having  one's  son  along  with  one'; 
33fT*rai*t  (^T  + '^•TeR^T  n.)  'favorable'.  —  6.  Ordinary  verbal  pre- 
fixes;  thus,  TTSf^^  'of  wide  fame';  ^J^f  'limbless';  f^Nf 
'powerless';  3TO§  'with  uplifted  face'.  —  7.  Ordinary  adverbs; 
thus,  ^frj-rf  '  with  mind  directed  hither '. 

375.  Certain  words,  very  frequent  in  the  compounds  mentioned 
at  §  374,  4,  have  in  part  won  a  peculiar  application. 

1.  Thus  with  TSrrf^  'beginning'  (or  the  derivatives  -H\<H  or 
■^nf^^i)  are  made  compounds  signifying  the  person  or  thing  de- 
signated along  with  others  —  such  a  person  or  thing  et  cetera. 
Thus,  ^TT  ^«£|<^*j:  'the  gods  having  Indra  as  first',  i.  e.  'the 
gods  Indra,  etc'  Often  the  qualifying  noun  is  omitted;  thus, 
^dMMI^Tfa  'food,  drink,  etc'  —  2.  Words  like  Tf$  (TT^NO  etc,» 
are  used  in  the  same  way,  to  denote  accompaniment;  chiefly  ad- 
virbially.  —  3.  The  noun  "^J  'object',  'purpose',  is  used  at  the 
end  of  a  compound,  oftenest  as  a  neut.  subst.  (ace  or  instr.  or  loc), 
to  signify  'for  the  sake  of,  and  the  like;  thus,  ?7fi|nil^  'for 
Damayantrs  sake';  ITSIT^T  'for  a  bed'.  (See  below,  §  379).  — 
4.  ^nT"^  (as  neut.  subst.)  often  means  'other'  in  possessives;  thus, 
%^fT5rTT  "•>  'another  region'  (lit.  'that  which  has  a  difference  of 
region '). 

376.  In  appositional  possessives ,  the  final  member,  if  it  de- 
signate  a  part  of  the  body,  sometimes  signifies  the  part  to  which 
belongs  what  is  designated  by  the  prior  member :  that  on  or  in 
which  it  is.  Thus  2TfTT}^ffa  with  necklace  on  neck'.  Such  com- 
pounds are  commonest  with  words  meaning  hand ;  thus,  ^f f4j  M  |  fUJ 
'with  sword  in  hand';   ^T3^I  'with  club  in  hand'. 

377.  The  possessives  are  not  always  used  with  the    simple 


144  Lesson  XXXIV. 

value  of  qualifying  adjective.  Often  they  have  a  pregnant  sense, 
and  become  the  equivalents  of  dependent  clauses;  or  the  'having' 
implied  in  them  becomes  about  equivalent  to  our  'having'  as  a 
sign  of  past  action.  Thus,  JJIH^JT^R  'possessing  attained  ado- 
lescence', i.  e.  'having  reached  adolescence';  ^MfcHM9i IfcJ 
'with  unstudied  books',  i.e.  'one  who  has  neglected  study';  ■JTrTTTTCT 
'whose  breath  is  gone',  i.  e.  'lifeless';  ^TRTWT(2J  'to  whom  death 
is  come  near'. 

378.  B.  Compounds  with  governed  final  member. 

1.  Participial  compounds,  exclusively  Vedic. 

2.  Prepositional  compounds.  Thus  may  conveniently  be  called 
those  compounds  in  which  the  prior  member  is  a  particle  with  true 
prepositional  value,  and  the  final  member  a  noun  governed  by  it. 
Thus,  ,?rf?RT^  'lasting  over  night';  ^STf^WT"^  'beyond  measure', 
'excessive';    3|flJcfiT!J  'next  the  ear'. 


379.  Adjective  compounds  as  nouns  and  adverbs.  Compound 
adjectives,  like  simple  ones,  are  freely  used  substantively  as  ab- 
stracts and  collectives,  especially  in  the  neuter,  and  less  often  in 
the  feminine ;  and  they  are  also  much  used  adverbially,  particularly 
in  the  ace.  sing,  neuter. 

380.  The  substantively  used  possessive  compounds  having  a 
numeral  as  prior  member,  with  some  of  the  strictly  adjective  com- 
pounds, are  treated  by  the  Hindus  as  a  separate  class,  and  called 
dvigu*.  Examples  of  such  numeral  abstracts  and  collectives  are: 
f^pi  n.,  'the  three  ages';  f^ft^PT  n.,  'space  of  three  leagues'. 
Feminines  of  like  use  occur  in  the  later  language ;  thus  fatsfteft 
(by  the  side  of  °^i  n.,)  'the  three  worlds'. 

381.  Those  adverbially  used  accusatives  of  secondary  adjective 

The  name  is  a  sample  of  the  class,  and  means  'of  two  cows' 
(said  to  be  used  in  the  sense  of  'worth  two  cows'). 


Lesson  XXXIV. 


145 


compounds  which  have  an  indeclinable  or  particle  as  prior  member 
are  considered  by  the  Hindus  a  separate  class  of  compounds,  and 
called  avyayibhdra  .  1.  The  prepositional  compounds  are  especially 
frequent  in  this  use;  thus,  TTfa«(tM*^  'at  evening';  CTTOTT  'in 
sight';  ^njpr^  (=^^7^  "3R)  'along  the  Ganges';  ^W§^ 
'on  the  G. ';  Hfd^MH.  'every  year'.  —  2.  A  large  class  of  avyayi- 
bhdvas  is  made  up  of  words  having  a  relative  adverb,  especially 
*reT,  as  prior  member.  Thus,  ^rt^r^,  ^^ToRTW;,  ^I«j^*i' 
'as  one  chooses'.  And,  with  other  adverbs:  ^TN^D'ciT^  'as 
long  as  one  lives';   ^T^3il*IH  'whitbor  one  will'. 

382.    Occasionally   quite  anomalous   compounds   will   be   met 
with.    For  such,  cf.  Whitney,  §  1314. 


Verbs: 


Vocabulary  XXXIV. 

|  2cf  (vardyate)  choose,  select. 


f^f  +  f'TO  determine,  decide. 
^T  +  f^(  in  caus.  (viddrdyati)  tear 

open. 
try  (pdtdyati)  split  open. 
*T  +  ^?f*T  overpower. 


^T^T  +  ^T  (dsidati)  approach. 

+  l$Wl  in  caus.   (samdsdddyati) 

meet  with,  encounter. 
H"ET   (hdrsati;  hfsyati)  rejoice,  be 


delighted. 


Sobst.: 

"3J"3?  n.,  limb,  member,  body. 

4II4K  m>  form>  fiSure- 
^=ar  m.,  moon. 

■^7;  n.,  belly. 

ififT  m.,  banner. 

cR^tZ  f-5  peak;    point,  tip. 

^gT  f..  top-knot,  scalp. 

On. 

^fT«T  n.,  knowledge;  insight. 


<fT5f  n.,  palate. 

fltigT  f-»  thirst,  desire. 

^y>\  f.,  tooth. 

3lfrT  f-,  brilliancy. 

Tjrq'ff  m.,  mountain. 

uRi«d  m.,  a  tribe  in  India. 

U^TT  m«,  stroke,  shot;  wound. 

TTTW  ni.,  breath,   life  (often  pi.). 

mni  n.,  head. 


*  The  word  means  'conversion  to  an  indeclinable'. 

Perry,  Sanskrit  Primer.  .n 


146 


Lesson  XXXIV. 


*fi«!  m.,  fish. 

ZT^CT  n.,  chest,  breast. 

^TTf  ™~>  boar. 

juncture  (§  375,  4.) 
TJ^  skilled. 

^t*t,  f-  °^rr,  young. 

q^TI  *•>  pain. 

^Tra  m.,  tendon;  bowstring. 

Adj.: 

^«T^I,  f.  °^rr,  blameless,  fault- 
less. 

Indecl.: 
^TSJ  then,  thereupon. 
7T?  (adw.  ace.)  therefore. 
?TRRr  so  long;   often    merely  = 

done,  dock. 

VTOra,    f-  04II ,    favorable;    as 

neut.  subst.,  favor. 
WCi   f-  °^5T>   inner;    as  neut. 

subst.,     the    interior,    middle; 

interval,    difference;    occasion, 

Exercise 

grpfgr  as  long  as,  while;  as  soon 

as. 
^J  asseverative  particle;  gives  to 

the    present    the    force    of    an 

historical  tense. 

XXXIV. 

o                                              c 

^f^ina^r  yfa«^:  jif<H4i 

(h  ^  i  s  i  ^  ^«*<i  *ni*H  «*3 

3rf^JrT:  I  R  I  Wf  %f  TW^TT  (pres.  part.)  lWfafi(<sK leftist  TfT" 

TTTf :   ^RT^rrf^rT:  I  $  I  cj  J%T  «*<l!(«rtl<*£i3!TW  *r  %t  wr- 

fe<ft^T:  ^f^r^r  TfTmuft  wrrni^  im^r  *rra  ^rrnre 
^Trfr  «fxi  ih«*k«<«ht  *<t:  i  $  i  iprf^Rnif^  ^f3r^rew*raj: 

^^t^*nT^v:  i  «^  i  fTrrg  ^f^  ^nsft  cn^  Ri<i$  v^T- 
f^^^r^T  fa"*  Ml  M8  i  ^r  ^t  ttt:  imm  11 

s 

16.  Those-who-have-done-evil   must  do    penance   twelve-days, 


Lesson  XXXIV.  XXXV.  147 

six-days,  or  three-days.  17.  Pururavas,  Iudra's-friend,  married  the 
moon-faced*,  faultless-limbed*  Apsaras  Urvaci.  18.  Bhrgukaccha 
is  situated  (epfj  on  the  Narmada.  19.  There  stands  the  lorg- 
armed,  broad-chested  king-of-the- Angas ,  sword-in-hand.  20.  The 
path-of-knowledge  is  better  than  the  path-of-works.  21.  In-the- 
opinion-of-the-ancient-seers  (cpd  in  loc.  or  instr.)  one-whose-hus- 
band-is-dead  may  choose  a  second  at-pleasure.  22.  Love  is  bodiless, 
and  tears-a-fish-in-his-banner ;  so  say  the  poets.  23.  TbeBrahman's- 
daughter,  Sita-by-name*,  is  lotus-eyed.  24.  The  king,  although 
(''IffM)  many-wived,  is  childless.  25.  The  eloquent**  pandit  has 
arrived  with-his-scholars.  2G.  With-upturned-face  (v3«JT'(3')  Cataka 
prays  for  rain-water. 

Lesson  XXXV. 

383.  First  Conjugation  of  Verbs.  Present  System.***  In  this 
conjugation  the  optative  act.,  the  2nd  sing.  iniv.  act.,  and  the  3rd 
pi.  mid.,  are  formed  otherwise  than  in  the  a-conjugation. 

384.  Strong  forms.  The  forms  in  which  the  stem  assumes  its 
strong  form  are  these :  the  three  persons  sing,  of  the  pres.  and 
impf.  indie,  act.,  all  first  persons  of  the  imv.,  act.  and  mid.,  and 
the  3rd  sing.  imv.  act.  All  other  forms  of  the  present  system 
are  weak. 

385.  Endings.  For  the  middle  endings  W^,  ,3TnT>  and  -*MIH. 
are  substituted  ^frf,  ^Tff,  and  -4MIHJ  and  after  reduplicated  stems 
(and  a  few   others)  ^SffH,   ^ffi,  and  ^^   are    substituted  for  the 


Secondary  adj.  cpds.,  fem.  in  %. 
Dep.  cpd,  "skilled  in  speech". 

For  a  comprehensive  view  of  the  ways  of  forming  the  present- 
stems  of  verbs  following  this  general  conjugation,  see  Introduction, 
§78. 

10* 


148 


Lesson  XXXV. 


active  endings  "4|f«ri>  ^|«n,  and  "^Sf^  (impf.).  The  2nd  sing.  imv. 
often  takes  the  ending  f^  or  f^.  Otherwise  the  endings  are  the 
same  as  in  the  a-conjugation. 

386.  Optative  mode-sign.  The  sign  of  the  opt.  act.  is  JR  yd, 
with  secondary  endings;  but  ^£  is  the  ending  in  the  3rd  pi.,  and 
,3STT  is  dropped  before  it;   thus,  °TH{. 

387.  Present  participle  middle.  In  the  first  conjugation  this 
participle  is  made  with  the  suffix  -4JM  [^TTWL  before  which  the 
stem  takes  the  same  form  as  before  the  3rd  pi.  pres.  ind.  The  fem. 
is  always  in  ^J. 


388.  Class  IV.  A:  nw-class.  The  present-stem  is  made  by  adding 
to  the  root  the  syllable  if  nu  [W  nu\ ,  in  strong  forms  «ft  no 
[^t  ?d].  The  ^3  of  the  class-sign  may  be  dropped  before  ^  and 
J^  of  the  1st  du.  and  1st  pi.  endings,  except  when  the  root  ends 
in  a  consonant;  and  the  ^  before  a  vowel-ending  becomes  ^f  or 
1T3"  ,  according  as  it  is  preceded  by  one  or  by  two  consonants. 
The  ending  f^  of  the  2nd.  sing.  imv.  is  dropped  if  the  root  end 
in  a  vowel. 

389.  I.  Roots  in  vowels.     JS  'press'. 

Indicative. 


Active. 

**^ 

Middle. 

»v 

1. 

IN* 

*3W 

$3*^ 

N»N»          ^ 

sundmi 

sunuvds 

sunumds 

sunve 

sunuvdhe 

sunumdhe 

2. 

?pTtfa 

13^ 

3T* 

ffl^ 

33^ 

sundsi 

sunuthds 

sunuthd 

sunuse 

sunvdthe 

sunudhve 

3. 

q«ltfd 

*!W 

vsati 

sundti 

sunutds 

sunvdnti 

sunute 

mnvate 

sunvdte 

The  forms  ^P3^,  ^EPSTOj   ^«^%»  ^^Wi  are  alternative  with 
those  given  above  for  1st  du.  and  pi.,  and  occur  oftener. 


Lesson  XXXV. 


149 


QUOAAr^ 


'""W 


Imperfect. 

2.  ^ijpfta:  w^tw;    ^HJ<r    ^J^TO  ^prrwi  °-p*R 

3.    *IU«iH     ^5-H^ldlH    ^^  ^J-Jr*         ^l*MMI*i    °^fT 

The  briefer  forms  ^W^f,  ^f^p^  ^'SP^ff ,   ■*J«»^ff,  are  al- 
lowed and  more  usual. 


Imperative. 


sundvdni  sundvdva 


*R3 

s» 


2.  *R 

sunu* 


sunutdm 


s»\» 


3.  wtg     i^ttr: 


sunota 


sunutdm 


sunavdma  sunavdi 
sunutd  I  sunusvd 
sunvdntu     sunutdm 


sundvdvahdi 

*MiqiH 

sunvdthdm 

sunvatdm 


sundvdmahdi 
sunudhvdm 
sunvatdm 


Optative. 

1.  *H*JIH    *pJ*TR        °^TR         *pffa  f^fff 

sunuydm  sunuydva      sunuydma     sunvlyd  sunvtvdhi 

Participle. 

390.   II.  Roots  in  consonants.    ,?JTTt  'acquire'. 

Indicative. 

Active.  Middle. 

1.  ^rrstf*T    ^IH«l*t     TTSW5.      ^^STT^  'TTSpt 

3.  ^TTftfrT    ITSpm.     ^TRI     ^TJpT  ^TS*n7t 


?pft<Rff 

sunvimdhi 


The  augment,  without  any   exception  in  verbal  conjugation, 

is  the  accented  element  in  the  verbal  form  of  which  it  makes  a  part. 

**  The  rare  imv.   in   rTTcf^  (cf.    §  196)  would  be  formed  thus: 


150 


Lesson  XXXV. 


Imperative. 

1.  ,*rr5nrrfa  ^rraTre  ^rrcnrR    ^ts%      ^rra^T^f   °^m% 

3.  ^Hifld       *MMdlH  W*r*J      WrTTR;    ^imqicim.  °^nn*t 

Participle. 

The  other  forms  of  this  tense  follow  the  model  of  *J. 

391.  1.  The  root  -g,  'hear',  contracts  to  *J  before  the  class- 
sign,  forming  *njft  ^rno  and  3qm  crnu  as  strong  and  weak  stem; 
2nd  sing.  imv.  act.  "stm;  2nd  du.  ind.  act.  *U!|cm  or  "*F5P^,  etc. — 
2.  The  root  "«[  shortens  its  vowt-1  in  the  present-system. 

Vocabulary  XXXV. 

y erKS.  i^J  (dhundti,  dhunute)  shake. 

^p^  (acnute)  acquire,  obtain.  l^(rr«o7/,  vr«ute')coYer,surround. 

+  "^Tr  cover,  etc.. 


+  (BWfl  obtain 

» 

^TR^  (apnoti ,   rarely  apnute)  ac- 
quire, reach. 
+  ^R,  "R,  or  ^,  reach. 

f^"  (cindti,  cinute)  gather. 
+  JJ  or  ^TR;,  gather. 
+  f^  or  'faf«rHj  decide,  con- 
clude. 

^T  +  Tf  (pracoddyati)  urge  on. 

«[  (dundti),  intr.,  burn,  feel  pain 
or  distress;  tr.,  pain  or  distress 
(ace.) 


+  ^JUT  open. 

+  f^  explain,  manifest. 

+  ^fH  shut. 
•jrgj  (cakndti)  be  able. 
TS(  (crnoti,  crnute)  hear. 
w  (strnoti,  strnute)  scatter,  strew. 

+  ^XJ  scatter. 
f^  (hindti)  send. 
W+Jf^E[t(jpratyaJidratt)  bring  back. 


Subst.: 
^rrf  TT  m.,  food. 
f^^cT  m.,  day. 


^r:^T  m.,  doorkeeper. 

trflTrm.  pi.,  n.  pr.,  certain  demons. 

TT3TTW  m.,  might,  power. 


Lesson  XXXV.  151 


HR  m.,  enjoyment. 

<R^T  n.,  root. 

"^J  m.,  taste,  feeling. 

TTfH^   ni->  a  Brahman  in   the 

third  period  of  his  life. 
f^TT  m.,  Brahman. 
1(5^  m.,  sound;  noise;  word. 

Adj.: 
•TO,  f.  o^T,  new. 


TJTgi,  f.  °^n,  meritorious,  holy, 
auspicious. 

°^T*I    sharing. 

JRtfT>  f-  0-^lT,  entrancing,  agree- 
able. 

T?ER«fl ,  f.  ^tft,  tasteful. 

^7J,  f.  •%,  similar;  worthy. 


Exercise  XXXV. 
^rRTTTf^Tt  RTTT  ^  ^tR*|*npf  I 

TOir:  JTOTf  §  *Rci:  *TfT*rR7^R  ^n^TT  ^iT^^jpn  Tj&fa- 

f^fT^:  irofa  1 8 1  ^rw^^-r^j  ^r«fr:  ^^  tot**  *r£*ttr- 

•jto  i  m  i  TO^wftrw  ^it>(5r  *rt:  ^*f  ^^nnrr  ^  f%3rr^n- 

^TCrRTTRR  I  $  I  ^f%^  ftrp^f^fTT  ^^m  *ftlj  ^^"R I  9 1 
W^R  TTTR  lifter  ^$f^?TO  WBHJ  RTTflT^T*RTO- 

q en  c  i  **p?i*nf^  to  ^twttto  irf^MK^MfeR:  i  Q.  i  *jf^cf: 

11.  Having  entered  the  temple  of  the  worshipful(H*R<^)- 
Visnu  we  heard  the  ear-entrancing  03Tf?T*Rt^T)  song-of-the-young- 
women  (use  *r*T  at  end  of  cpd).  12.  Listen  to  this  word  of  a  de- 
voted (f%^,  pass,  part.)  friend.  13.  The  greedy  (wT*T  ,  pass,  part.), 
who  are  always   gathering  riches,  never  attain   the   enjoyment  of 

*  Infin.  of  <J. 

**  The  instr.  is  sometimes  used  to  express  the  medium,  or  space 
or  distance  or  road,  traversed. 


152  Lesson  XXXV.  XXXVI. 

them.  14.  By  tasteful,  well-composed  poems  ye  may  attain  glory 
in  the  ten  regions  of  the  world  (f^Q.  15,  Cakuntala,  mayest  thou 
get  (imv.)  a  husband  worthy-of-thee.  16.  My-ftoo-brothers  deter- 
mined to  travel  to  Benares.  17.  May  the  king's-sword  bring  grief  to 
(«[,  imv.  or  opt.)  the  hearts-of-the-wives-of-his-enemies.  18.  Clouds 
cover  the  sky.     19.  Let  the  doorkeeper  close  the  door. 

Lesson  XXXVI. 

392.  Verbs.  Class  IV.  B.  wclass.  The  few  roots  (only  six) 
of  this  sub -class  end  already  in  ^  —  except  one,  ^J,  of  consid- 
erable irregularity  —  and  so  add  only  ^J  as  class-sign.  The  in- 
flection is  quite  that  of  the  rm-class,  the  ^  being  gunated  in  the 
strong  forms,  and  dropped  (optionally,  but  in  fact  nearly  always) 
before  ^f   and  ^  of  1st  dual  and  plural. 

393.  Thus  rf^,  'stretch',  makes  <fftf*T,  rfftfa,  etc.;  1st 
du.  rf;^  (or  d«J«NO>  1st  pi.  71*3?^  (or  7f«J*T*0;  mid.  TT^T,  cT^%. 
cTfT%,  etc.  —  all  like  a  vowel-root  of  the  raj-class. 

394.  The  root  lcfi,  'make',  makes  the  strong  stem  cjf^t,  weak 
3^;  the  class-sign  ^  is  always  dropped  before  ^  and  ?^  in  1st 
du.  and  1st  pi.,  and  also  before  ^T   of  the  opt.  active.    Thus : 

Indicative. 

Active.  Middle. 

l-  ^iftfa    ^pf*c       «5^       *b^  $$%  ^r% 

2.  ^RTtfci      44|V!|^      ^^r  f^  ^#t§  ^^ 

3.  ^iftffT       $M«i       ^NT        3g^  ^^TH  ^frf 

Imperfect. 

i.  ^ran^m;  ^^f       ^$*      ^^       ^ra^ff      *$tfff 

2.  ^«*0h.  ^gVR    ^<*M      ^<*W*l  ^*4l«ll^  ^f^^R* 


Lesson  XXXVI.  153 

Imperative. 
1.  <*TTTftr  sfiTTR     *RTWT*    *fiT%  ^T^N%     W^T^Tf 

3   3rfT<J        $MT*l     ^j3*T        <«Wl       ^4lHI*i      <$4dl*l 

Optative. 

i.  splm     ^i^      ^fa     ^^t*r       ^^Nrff     <pf?*frr 

etc.  etc.  etc.  etc.  etc.  etc. 

Participle. 

395.  This  root  sometimes  assumes  (or  retains  from  a  more 
original  condition)  an  initial  ^  after  the  prefix  ?J7{*;   thus,  ^P^i- 

396.  The  adverbial  prefixes  ^Jlf%^  and  *n<p*,>  'forth  to  sight', 
'in  view';  f?R3J.  'through',  'out  of  sight';  XR^  'in  front, 
forward';  and  the  purely  adverbial  "^^T^  'enough,  sufficient', 
are  often  used  with  cG,  and  with  one  or  two  other  verbs,  oftcnest 
^r^  'be'  and  H  'become'. 

397.  Any  noun  or  adjective-stem  is  liable  to  be  compounded 
with  verbal  forms  or  derivatives  of  the  roots  cfj  and  W,  in  the 
manner  of  a  verbal  prefix.  If  the  final  of  the  stem  be  an  a- vowel 
or  an  e-vowel,  it  is  changed  to  f";  if  an  w-vowel,  to  ^  Conso- 
nantal stems  take  the  form  which  they  have  before  consonant- 
endings  —  of  course  with  observance  of  the  usual  euphonic  rules; 
but  stems  in  ^S^  change  those  letters  to  f^.  Thus,  ^T«fiO fd  'ne 
makes  his  own',  'appropriates';  ^^chOfa  (*PHiO  'he  CDanges 
to  ashes',  i.  e.  'burns':  ^roft^frT  'becomes  a  post'  05RT); 
^r^jf^ffi  'becomes  pure'  ("Tf^);   ^TT^r^ttfT  'makes  holy'. 

398.  The  suffixes  TfT  (f.)  and  ^  (n.)  are  very  extensively 
used  to  form  abstract  nouns,  denoting  'the  quality  of  being  so- 


*  Also  sometimes  after  XJT\  and  "^t|. 


154 


Lesson  XXXVI. 


and-so',    from    both  adjectives   and  noons.      Thus,  ^rf^WTI  ^i 
^ff^SI^  D->  'the  rank  of  a  Ksatriya'. 


Verbs: 

^R  (karoti,  kurute)  do,  make. 
+  nJIXJ  do  evil   to ,  harm   (gen., 

loc,  or  ace). 
+  ^F5TH  Prepare.  adorn 


Vocabulary  XXXVI. 

+  MI4H.  make  known,  or  visi- 
ble. 

+  WC  (§  395)  prepare,   adorn  ; 
consecrate. 
^•^  (ksanoti,  ksanute)  wound. 


+   "^Tf^^     (dviskardti)     make  cT«^  (tanoti,  tanute)  stretch,   ex- 
known,  exhibit.  tend  (tr.);  perform  (a  sacrifice). 

+  xJTJ  do  good  to,  benefit  (gen.,  +  tJJT   cause,  bring  about. 

loc).  +  jj  spread  abroad  (tr.). 


+  f^T^T.  hide;  blame,  find  fault 

with  (ace). 
+  *n^  put  at  the  head. 
+  T?fFT  pay,  recompense;  punish 

(ace.  ret,  gen.,  dat.orloc.  pers.). 


T^f  (diisyati)  be  defiled. 
T\*{  (manute)  think,  consider. 


Subst.:  ^ffa  '»••  fault. 

^fvTjftf^  rn.,   priest  of  a  cer-    •ftfW  f..  conduct  of  life;   ethics; 

tain  kind.  politics. 

^Ttf^J  m.,  progeny,  descendant.    !  VTWH    m.,  king. 
^jfHlTmni-5 plan;  view;  opinion.   *T*TT«T^r  n-»  kitchen. 


<3^^  n.,  breast. 
cRf%^  m.,  name  of  a  tribe. 
oRTf^cT  f-,  charm,  grace. 
^It^FFT  m.,  astonishment. 
^T«J*H«$|  n.,  a  certain  sacrifice. 
^nfra  m->  name  of  a  tribe. 
fHT^rftTjft  f-,  veil. 


HTfH  n.,  flesh. 
^f^TJT  n.,  salt. 
<*l3H  n.,  spice. 
3J^TT  m->  trade. 
TiT^Ef  m.,  doubt. 
JfS  m--,  cook. 


Adj.: 
^}*1,  f.  «^IT,  blind. 
^TCTO,  f.  °^,  necessary. 
°ir,  f-  °^n^  knowing. 
°"H^   enjoying. 


Lesson  XXXVI.  155 

^WT,  f-  °1-  dear. 
=5^5,  f.  °^JT,  wrong,  false. 
*T*f.  f.  o^,  good,  proper. 
^l^T.  f.  o^STT,  ready. 


Exercise  XXXVI. 

^wft  3j*ftarT"fa  tj:  firsr:  fr?^r  to*  w.  i 
*?r  tt^r:  ^fttlwrf  ?rf^jrr*rfwrRt  "sj*n  ^rf^r  fTc^f^M  131 

f^fWT  ^rfaT^J^T  ifa-sjMUM  *4H«IIHM|J|^f^T  II  ^  II 

8.  Every-year  an  Agnihotrin  must  perform  the  Caturmasya  (pi.)- 
9.  Mayest  thou,  O  Great-King,  protect  thy  kingdom,  benefitting 
thy  friends  and  harming  thy  enemies.  10.  Brahmans  find  fault 
with  the  trade-in-salt.  11.  What  thou  didst  (mid.),  that  distresses 
thy  friends  even  now.  12.  May  I  recompense  him  (dat.)  who  has 
done  me  a  service.  13.  By  the  command  of  the  great-king  consecrate 
the  four  princes  according  to  the  law  (f^TO,  instrS).  14.  The 
Caulukyas  held  sway  (TJ*$  ^d)  in  Anahilapataka  247  years. 
15.  By-the-charm-of-her-face  the  lotus-eyed  eclipses  (fflTTfO  even 
the  moon.     16.  If  one  consecrates  a  scholar ,   teaches  him ,  makes 


*  Poss.  cpd,  cf.  §  374,  5. 


156 


Lesson  XXXVI.  XXXVII. 


him  holy,   then  this  one  becomes  his  child  (H^l).    17.  The  king- 
of-the-Kalingas  wounded  his  enemy  in  the  breast  with  an  arrow. 


Lesson  XXXVII. 

399.  Verbs,  rca-class.  The  class-sign  is  in  the  strong  forms 
the  syllable  «TT  ^a  [TJJT  ?a],  accented,  which  is  added  to  the  root; 
in  the  weak  forms  it  is  «ft  m  [TJ^  nt] ;  but  before  an  initial  vowel 
of  an  ending  the  ^  l  of  «ft  nt  [Tjft  nl]  disappears  altogether. 

400.  Thus,  ^ft  'buy':  strong  stem  sflUJJ  krind,  weak  shl^jfl 
krtni  (before  a  vowel,  sffan   krln). 

Indicative. 

Active.  Middle. 


«fW^i      «tIHu^ 

Imperfect. 


°Wfaff 
°'U!MIH 


0WrI 


2.  wftrra:  ^to;  ^sflufld    °wt«ito: 

3-  WfarTri;    4|shl<in<TTR:  -41shl<!H       °TlfTfr 

Imperative. 

1-  sfluufa     ^RTCT^        sRtcm        «RT% 

2-  ^Wff     ^WfT^     ^Wf?        shYufr^ 
3.  ^T<5Tfl[       shKHd'R;     WfrT«rT         W\W\t\TH    sfH <!T I <T  1T«=C     sfl«!!ril*i 

Optative. 

i-  ^teftaro;  sflufl^r^  ^NfNrr*  ^NfNj     ^VnfNff   aifcffrTfi 

etc.  etc.  etc.  etc.  etc.  etc. 

Participle. 

401.   The  ending  of  the  2nd  sing.  imv.  act.  is  f^,  never  f%f; 
and  there  are  no  examples  of  its  omission.    But  roots  of  this  class 


Lesson  XXXVII.  157 

ending  in  a  consonant  substitute  for  both  class-sign  and  ending  in 
this  person  the  peculiar  ending  tSJTT  and;  thus,  ^\fT»T  ^JIJT'T'  ,5T- 
TR,  ^fTTIT  (see  §§  402,  403). 

402.  The  roots  ending  in  ^f  shorten  that  vowel  before  the 
class-sign ;  thus,  TJ,  TJ«nf?I,  UfTivJ.  The  root  TCZ  is  weakened  to 
*Jf ;  thus,  J|^,|fa- 

403.  A  few  roots  which  have  a  nasal  in  some  forms  outside 
the  present-system,  lose  it  in  the  present;  thus,  U7t  or  1J7VI ,  ^T- 
^TffT;  «!**,  ^ifa;  Wv  or  ^n»,  ^T^rrf^T-    Similarly,  ^T  makes 


404.  Root-class.  In  this  class  there  is  no  class-sign;  the  root 
itself  is  also  present-stem,  and  to  it  are  added  directly  the  per- 
sonal-endings; in  the  opt.  (and  subj.:  §60,  end)  of  course  combined 
with  the  mode-sign.  The  root-vowel  takes  guna,  if  capable  of 
it,  in  the  strong  forms. 

405.  Roots  ending  in  vowels.  Roots  in  ^T  of  this  class  are 
inflected  only  in  the  active.  In  the  3rd  pi.  impf.  act.  they  may 
optionally  take  as  ending  ^3^  instead  of  ,?J^,  the  ^JT  being  lost 
before  it.* 


406.   Thus,  *n  'go 


3  . 


Indicative.  Imperfect. 

i.  *nf?r    *trs:      *rre^       ^^tr:     *wi4        ^rrt 
3.  ^nt>i     ^rrcra:      *nf*?r       ^?n<i     ^^rRrm;     ^rcn^ 

or  "^H^EC 


The  same  ending  is  also  allowed  and    met  with  in  a  few 
roots   ending  in  consonants;  viz.  lf^^  'know',  ^f,   f?^  ,   Spg, 


158                                    Lesson  ] 

SXXV.II. 

Imperatire. 
1.    ^Tf^f      *TR            *IT* 

Optative. 

^rrerro;    ^trttc       h[h\h 

2.  ^rrff     <jmh      vm 

*rnrra:    ^rreTcm     ^rnrra 

3.    ^ng        *lldl*i      ^^T 

^t^t^    ^TOTfTro;    *n^ 

Part.    ^TnT,  f.  *TTnft  or  *n<ft  (260). 

Vocabulary  XXXVII. 

Verbs: 

«SJ  +  ^TT  (apldvate)  drench. 

2^pT  (afndti)  eat. 

^5W   (badhndti,    badhntte)    bind; 

■?ft  (krinati,  krinite)  buy. 

catch;  join;  compose. 

^J^  (grathndti)  string  together; 

3fT  (bfidti)  gleam,  glance. 

compose. 

?TT  (mati)  measure. 

^H»  (grhnatty  grhnlte)  take,  seize. 

+  f^T^  work,  create. 

+  f^f  hold,  restrain,  check. 

TPj   (rnusndtt)  steal,  rob. 

+  irfrT  take,  receive. 

2^J  (^W)  +  f^  steal. 

1J7  (Jan&ti,  janite)  know. 

2^    (wrnfte':    also    vardyati,    -te) 

+  ^f«T  allow,  permit. 

choose. 

2TJT  (p®(0  protect. 

fljl?    +  ~^S  remain  over. 

TTGf    (pusndti)    make  increase  or 

■^f    (strndti,   strnlte ;    see  also  in 

2                 " 

grow. 

Vocab.  XXXV)  strew. 

TJ  (jmndti,  puntte)  clean. 

^"f  (sndti)  bathe. 

J(\(prindti, primte),  act.,  delight; 

^•H  +  W?  remove. 

mid.,  rejoice. 

Subst.: 

cffij  f.,  crescent. 

^5j^f%  m.,  a  gesture  of  respect- 

ef\f?[ f.,  work  (literary). 

ful  greeting. 

efctl|  m.,  treasure;  treasury. 

^5T  f-,  wish. 

^plf  m.,  n.,  moment;  time. 

xj<^<{  m.,  rise. 

■^T*Tta\  "-,  gold. 

The    two    hands    hollowed    and  opened,  and  raised  to   the 
forehead. 


Lesson  XXXVII. 


159 


TTT^  m.,  demon. 

•TTT  m.,  snake. 

^T^f  n.,  leading-rope,  cord. 

*W^  (§  278)  m.,  stirring-stick. 

*l«rfT  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  mountain. 

IJTJ  m.,  sacrificial  post. 

rjf^li  n.,  forehead. 

1^"^  [yard)  m. ,  suitor,  bride- 
groom. 

2~^X  (vara)  m.,  choice,  privilege, 
favor. 

^JH  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  snake -demon 
who  supports  the  earth. 


^PJ^kT  f-i  height,  elevation  ;  high 
position. 

Adj.: 

■55«<S|rl«1*  of  to-day. 
\nf^R  right,  just. 
"JT^W  (Part  °f  "T-^T^)  kindly  dis- 
posed. 
°f^S  knowing. 
fd|cjf«ti,l.  shrewd. 

Adv.: 
^RHJH   before,    in   the  presence 
of  (w.  gen.). 


Exercise  XXXVII. 

fefTf  TffRWfff  ^T^iTf^nfrf^^  II  *M  II 
^feraTHfa^*l*!*fH:  n^iT  %^fa^  ^lf^>  |#rTT^I  <\  I 

^%^  M^?l«ijdg  ^53    T^WNfsrT  II  *  II  ^"PTT    «*lMlfM 

w  2^*J  ii  m  ii  n^vjsra  ^T^rr^f  WT"nrr  ^  viM  f?rr  \^V~ 

1TT  **m3  ^Tt^RTT^:  II  $  ||  *raT  H^  ^^  HTfa  cTOT 
TTMMM^rtJ  JI^UNI^ffT  TTT  fwf'rT  II  ^  II  ^fcT*T^P^f  JJ^<II- 
?^IHWf5f5iWT!rT  II  «  II 

9.  Allow  me  to  go  now.     10.  Take  these  jewels  which  I  have 

With  the  suffix  cT«T  (sometimes  «^)  are  made  adjectives  from 
adverbs,  especially  of  time;  thus,  Tfijf  'ancient',  HIHt^M  'early', 
1}4$M  '  of  the  morrow'. 


1 60  Lesson  XXXVII.  XXXVIII. 

given  you  (pass,  constr.).  11.  Let  the  great  poet  weave  ("?T»2J, 
^«tj )  a  verse-wreath  of  word-pearls  (instr.).  12.  E very-day  two 
thieves  robbed  the  king's  treasury.  13.  He  who  receives  (pari.) 
gifts  from  every  one  is  polluted  (H'q ).  34.  The  Creator  formed 
the  world  by  his  will  Oft^^TT)  al°De-  15-  Betake  thyself  (^fT)  for 
salvation  to  the  gods'  protection.  16.  Let  kings  restrain  the  wicked 
by  punishments.  17.  We  saw  Rama's  daughter  coming  out 
(pres.  part.)  of  the  house.  18.  Let  the  bridegroom  grasp  the  maid- 
en's hand  before  the  fire.  19.  An  Aryan  must  not  eat  an- 
other's leavings  (^^-fspi  ,  pass,  part.,  neut.  sing.).  20.  One  must 
bathe  daily  in  unconfined  (part,  from  f^T--?^)  water.  21.  May  the 
three-eyed  god,  the  great-lord  (f^nO  whose-forehead-is-adorned- 
with-the-crescent,  protect  yon. 

Lesson  XXXVIII. 

407.  Verbs.  Root -class,  cont'd.*  Roots  ending  in  an  i-vowel 
or  an  w-vowel  (except  \/^  'go')  change  these  into  ^f  and  ^a 
before  vowel-endings  in  weak  forms,  when  not  gunated. 

408.  Root  ^  'go'  (act.,  but  used  in  mid.  with  the  prep.  ^rfVT: 
'go  over  for  oneself,  i.  e.  'repeat,  learn,  read';  the  ^  then  be- 
comes ^Tf  ,  as  above). 

Indicative. 

Active.  Middle. 

i-  irf*J      t^c.    T*ret     ^ft%      "wfa%        "wN% 


A  number  of  roots  belonging  to  this  class  accent  the  root- 
syllable  throughout,  in  weak  as  well  as  in  strong  forms — except 
of  course  in  the  imperfect. 


Lesson  XXXVIII.  161 

Imperfect. 

(for  augment  cf.  §  179.) 

3- %t  ^<Tm:    ^STR^      ^TW<T  ^JW^TrTm:      ^T^HT 

Imperative. 

i.  wrfa  -4j4iici   wmv    ^ji?       ^rsj*rre%     ^rw^TRt 

Optative. 
<i,q\*{  etc.,  3rd  pi.  ^J^  ^^fftfftr  etc. 

Participle. 
^TnT,  f.  ^nffr  ^farR,  f-  °^IT 

409.  The  root  ^  (mid.),  'lie',  has  guna  throughout;  thus,  ^J^Sf, 
?!%,  ijfr  SNf  etc-  5  impf.  ^TClf*?,  ^^T^  etc. ;  opt.  VJ*fl±I  etc., 
part.  Tr^nT-  Other  irregularities  are  the  3rd  persons  pi.:  indie. 
t[T7T,  imv.  ^fTR;,  impf.  ^TCp;?T- 

410.  The  roots  of  this  class  ending  in  ^  have  in  their  strong 
forms  the  vrddhi  instead  of  the  ^wna-strengthening  before  an  ending 
beginning  with  a  consonant. 

411.  Thus,  ■**?  'praise': 

Indicative. 

Active.  Middle. 

i.  ^Tfa    ^rar,    ^F*C  ^     ^f*       ^f 

2.  ^frfa    ^nm    ^  ^%     wr%      ^^ 

3.  ^PrfTT     ^?ra:    ^^fr         ^      ^^       ^% 

Imperfect.  Act.:  1.  4|*d4*t,  2.  ^^ffar^,  3.  ^ra^,  3rd  pi. 
^^^^.     Mid.:  1.  ^THr,  3rd  pi.  ^TcTcr 

Imperative.  Act.  :  ^efTR,  ^ff ,  ^ffa,  *3TR  etc. ,  3rd  pi. 
^jR^T    Mid.:  ^f,  ^p^,  ^rfTT*C,  ^TWT^f  etc.,  3rd  pi.  ^pTcTT?{- 

Optative,    ^J^TT^  etc.    fejcH'tf  etc. 

Perry,  Sauskrit  Primer.  .  . 


162  Lesson  XXXVIII 

Participle.     Act.:  t^ct *T .  f.  °^rft    Mid.:  %HH- 

412.  The  root  ^,  'say',  takes  the  union-vowel  Rafter  the  root 
when  strengthened,  before  the  initial  consonant  of  an  ending.*  Thus: 

Indicative. 

Active.  Middle. 

1.   sT^frfa      W^      5W*C  3%       ^5f       ^<R% 

Imperfect.  Act.:  ^rsre^,  ^sffl^  ^TW^t^;  ^5T^  etc.;  3rd 
pi.  ^Tsf^l.-    Mid.:  ^fa,  ^5T^  etc-5   3rd  P1-  *W^T- 

Imperative.  Act.:  sHnfrf,  ff$>  snfftj;  sfTR  etc.;  3rd  pi. 
5pT*J.     Mid. :  sT%,  sj^  etc. 

Optative.     Act. :  $H\t{  etc.    Mid. :  Wcffa  etc. 

Participle.     Act. :  JC^ift  .    Mid. :  WTI«T- 

413.  Emphatic  Pronoun.  The  uninflected  pronominal  word 
«S«4*^  signifies  'self,  'own  self.  It  is  oftenest  used  as  a  nomin- 
ative, along  with  words  of  all  persons  and  numbers;  bnt  not 
seldom  it  represents  other  cases  also. 


Verbs: 

+  ^TTV  (adhUe)  repeat,  read. 
+  Um  (apditi)  go  away,  depart. 
+  '^rf^  approach. 
+  ^1  *sm  set  (of  heavenly  bodies). 
+  ^^  rise  (of  heavenly  bodies). 
+  ^TJ  approach. 
^f  (braviti,  brute)  speak,  say,  state. 


Vocabulary  XXXVIII. 

+  Tf  explain,  teach  ;   announce. 

+  fa  explain,  etc. 
"^  (rduti)  cry,  scream. 

+  fa  scream. 
^  (fete)  lie,  sleep. 

+  ^lf\sl  lie  asleep  on  (ace). 
?J  (sute)  bring  forth,  bear. 

+  TJ  bring  forth. 
■*jl  (stautt)  praise. 


Special  irregularities  in  this  verb  are  occasionally  met  with, 
such  as  sj[f*T  W^fa-  Some  of  the  verbs  in  ^J  are  allowed  to  be 
inflected  like  3\  but  forms  so  made  are  rare. 


Lesson  XXXVIII. 


1G3 


Subst.: 
f^i«Tm.,  n.pr.,  a  name  of  Buddha. 

f^^T  f.,  tongue. 

^(TJf  m.,  logic. 

tjtti  n.,  flower. 

JT*r  m.,  question. 

*TPfrcr  n-5  sense,  understanding. 

■^V  m.,  killing,  murder. 

"^•rfpT  m.,  n.  pr. 


wife. 


companion 


>ft  f., 


^nf^T'l.  m»  witness. 
^TT^I  m->  crane. 

Adj.: 
^<T,  f-  °^,  ready. 
73^ftf«T5^  diligent,  energetic. 
oR^TJT,  f.  °"^n,  lamentable. 
°W\  fX*i,  making,  doing. 

Adv.: 

^^T^.    below,     down,     on     the 
ground. 


Exercise  XXXVIII. 

^rtt^  wmi*  Jfajwfa  wmmi  n  *.%  ii 

(§  264)  Xf <T  II  ^  II  ^lf5T  ^TT^TlW  ^5WT  FR^Nm  I  $  I  *rRT^tf% 

*nf  ^*rrf*T  ^n«fiHci,i^MfTr^fT^i  */%  if  JTOfa  ii  8 11  ^frft*rr- 
^Frf^fr^f^T^tf^^TSWt  ^  f^f^:  II  m  ii  ^3ftf*re 
j^rfai  ^^*pf?r  *r<3ft:  ii  $  n  *t  fm^i  m  f^M  ^ftfir  fff^Ti 
*rf55i%  t^i  n  ^  n  ^T^rHh:  fwr*re  u^m  n  c  n  ^  ct*f^tt: 
*nwn  ^w  f^rNr  n  o.  n  $\*\£\  TrafHTT^rn:  ^fr^crr: 

11.  The  three  wives  of  Dacaratha  bore  four  sons.  12.  Rama 
and  Laksmana,  followed-by-Slta,  went  (^)  into  the  forest. 
13.  Women  whose-husbands-are-dead  must  sleep  six  months  on 
the  ground.  14.  A  witness  stating  anything  other-than-what-was- 
seen-or-heard  is  to  be  punished  (Jut.  pass.  part.).  15.  All  guilt 
departs  from  one-who-has-done-penance.     16.  One  must   not  look 

11* 


164  Lesson  XXXVIII.  XXXIX. 

at  (1?-%^  )  the  rising  or  the  setting  sun.  17.  Why  hast  thou  come 
(■^rfjJ-T)  to-my-house  with-wife  and  with-children?  18.  "Praise 
Varuna'':  thus  the  gods  addressed  Cunahcepa  who  was  bound  to 
the  sacrificial  post.  19.  Always  speak  the  truth.  20.  In  a  kingless 
land  the  rich  do  not  sleep  in  peace  0FR§«T). 

Lesson  XXXIX. 

414.  Verbs.    Root-class,  cont'd.    Roots  ending  in  consonants. 

The  endings  of  the  2nd  and  3rd  sing.  impf.  act.  are  generally  dropped, 
and  the  resulting  root-final  treated  according  to  the  usual  rules  for 
finals.  Cf.  §§  239,  242.  But  a  root  ending  in  a  dental  mute  some- 
times drops  this  final  mute  instead  of  the  added  W  in  the  second 
person;  and,  on  the  other  hand,  a  root  or  stem  ending  in  ^  some- 
times drops  this  ^  instead  of  the  added  <^  in  the  third  person: 
in  either  case  establishing  the  ordinary  relation  of  ^  and  fT  in 
the  second  and  third  persons. 

415.  Roots  in  ^  and  5?  substitute  ^j  for  those  letters  before 
c^,  ^f  and  ^  (which  then  becomes  ^  );  and  31  before  V  •  Thus, 
^^  'speak':  ^f^T,  ^TW>  *(flfi  (only  these  three  forms  used). 

416.  Root  lf^^  'know,  (act.  only): 

Indicative.  Imperfect. 

i.  %fa    fa^e;    f^ret    w§%*t  ^3       ^if%?r 

Imv.:  %^Tf5T,  f%rfe,  %^j;  %^R,  f^rTR;,  f^TR*;  %^T*, 
f%rt,  f^J-  —  Opt.:  f%3TPR;,  etc. 

*  In  the  inflection  of  roots  with  final  consonant,  of  this  class  and 
the  reduplicating  and  nasal  classes,  euphonic  rules  find  very  fre- 
quent application.  The  student  is  therefore  advised  at  this  point 
to  read  carefully  the  chief  rules  of  euphonic  change  in  Whitney's 
Grammar,  §§  139 — 232  (the  two  larger  sizes  of  print). 


Lesson  XXXIX.  165 

417.  This  root  also  makes  a  perfect  without  reduplication  (but 
otherwise  regular)  which  has  always  the  value  of  a  present.  The 
forms  of  the  indie,  are: 

Sing.  1.%^,  2.  ^f,  3.%^;  du.  1.  f%^,  2.  f^J^,  3.  f^fT^; 
pi.  1.  fro  2.  f^,  3.  f^^.  The  participle  is  f^^T^,  f.  faf^ 
(cf.  §268). 

418.  The  root  tJT?,  'eat'  (act.),  inserts  If  before  the  endings 
of  the  2nd  and  3rd  sing.  impf. ;  thus,  -41 1  <^,  ^TT^fl.- 

419.  The  root  ||^,  'kill'  (act.),  is  treated  somewhat  as  are 
noun-stems  in  ^f^  in  declension  (§  283).    Thus: 

Indicative.  Imperfect. 

2.  ffa        f^RC        f^  ^WK         ^cH*       ^frT 

3.  ff^rT       frTO:        ^Tf*rT  ^1^         ^ffTm;      ^^ 

Imv.:  f^TTfa,  *rff*,  f^s  f^T^,  fcP*,  fcTO*;  fTR,  f<f, 
^ffT.  —  Opt.:  i<H\l{  etc.  —  Part.:  ^«a ,  f.  Wt 

420.  Roots  in%  ^ ,  ^ ,  substitute  ^  before  ^  (which  then 
becomes  W),  ^  before  ?^  and  Wx  (which  become  "Z  and  ^),  and 
^  before  \^  (which  becomes  £)•  Thus,  f^  'hate'  (act.  and 
mid.): 

Indicative    Act.  Imperfect    Act. 

2.  if^    f^*;    f^  ^     ^rf^i   ^f^H 

3.  Its     firs*:     f^rfa        ^z      ^sro;  ^fs^ 

Imv.  Act.:  %crrfr!\  flFff%>  3f  5  %^T^  etc. 

421.  ^,    'see'  (mid.):    Pres.  Ind.:   ^%,  ^%,  ^TJ;  ^T^f%, 

^nrra,  ^T?h  TOf,  ^ff.  ^W  —  ImPf-:  *Wfa>  w*»k«u 


*  Anomalous  dissimilation. 


166 


Lesson  XXXIX. 


422.  1.  $"*^,  '  rule '  (mid.),  inserts  ^  before  endings  beginning 
with  ^  and  \r ;  thus,  2nd  sing,  ffipt  —  2.  ^*^,  '  wish '  (act.),  is  in 
weak  forms  contracted  to  xj*^ ;  thus,  3rd.  pi.  ^Sjf^J. 

423.  *T5f ,  'rub',  'clean'  (act.),  has  vrddhi  in  the  strong  forms, 
and  optionally  also  in  weak  forms  when  the  endings  begin  with  a 
vowel.  In  the  treatment  of  the  root-final  this  verb  follows  the 
roots  in  *T.     Thus,   ind.  3rd  sing.   JTrfSj   du.  3TH^,   pi.  4J?|f*f  or 


Verbs: 

%t  (*>'?e)  ru'e5  own  (w-  gen.). 
^5T  (ca'.ste)+^TTrelate ;  call,  name 

+  cf(\  explain. 
f$^(  (dvesti,  dviste)  hate. 

+  TI  hate  extremely. 
ff^t    (mdrsti)  rub,  wipe. 

+  ^m  wipe  away,  off. 


Vocabulary  XXXIX. 

+■  TT  wipe  off. 
^TTO    +  "^PJ    (aparadhnoti)     do 

wrong. 
^*^  (vdsti)  wish. 
lf^(Z  (vetti;  veda)  know,  consider. 
Tpt+^rfH  smite. 

+  fif  kill. 


Subst.: 
^t^  m.,  lip. 

~^H  m.,  decay,  destruction. 
^^  n.,  eye. 
%7f  m.,  conqueror. 
^■€TT  £}  compassion,  pity. 
vmif  m.,  destruction. 
*f«T  ni.,  n.  pr.,  a  name  of  (piva. 
7T«ftm.,  sacred  text;  spell,  charm. 
^HU  m.,  watch  (of  the  night). 

^TtT  d-i  conduct. 

*. 


3JT3iTW  n-s  grammar. 

CQ1J3  m.j  n.  pr.,  a  Rishi. 

^IWT  f-,  hesitation. 

■^Tq  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  name  of  Qiva. 

^Tc!  n.,  learning. 

JfT[  m.,  creation. 

f^lfff  f.,  condition,  existence. 

Adj.: 
^r^T,  f.  °^n,  blameworthy,  cul- 
pable. 


Lesson  XXXIX.  167 

Exercise  XXXIX. 

n%fH  ^rrwwrrrg  *r  ^i^nif^r  «i^dTH  ii  ^  11 
tjw  TO*ra  ffsR  TIT  ff*W  'NM3  I 
TtrWgT-pT  fT>T  *^T  ^MHd*  II  **=  II 
*HI  ^TTTnT  ^TT|-d^N^g*i  II  q  II  irf  Tt^  THW>  fipRT- 

^^  w  t<*K3:  ii  %  ii  xrf^qcft"  *rretf  f^  *ri  %^T<?jsNTf*r- 
f^«  ii  3  n  grwg  f^j^rerot%fd « h  m  i  ^t*t  *tr%  1 8  i  *it 
^iT^fs  *j  ^  *rt  f^rerefw^f  *tpr  ii  mi  ^t  W3R$  -mR^i 

^WT^trTtfr  ^TTf^f^  ^TOl  <T  ^^t^^i  WTrTO  t^:  II  $  II 

*mm<i^'  fT^r^^ruf  ^f  *ft:  *J"nrra^  *rf  if*  11  ^  n  ^t>- 
fa*rn  ii  g.  n  it  wen'  ^t#  *nwta  u  qo  u  ^*fa  tpftrn* 

fa^JT  (§  374,  6)  zr^TT  ^TWI^  II  <M  II 

12.  Hear  the  words  of  the  learned  man  who  explains  (pres. 
part.)  the-scienee-of-grammar.  13.  Know  that  Rama  (ace.)  is  the 
son,  famous  in  the-three-worlds,  of  Dacaratba,  and  the  conqueror 
of  Ravana,  lord-of-Lanka.  14.  Having  sipped  (^TT-^*0  water 
thrice,  one  wipes  the  lips  twice;  according  to  others,  once.**  15.  Two 
warriors  smote  (^rf^-IpO  witn  arrows  the  king-of-the-Angas,  who 
had  murdered  their  companions.  16.  Kill  without-hesitation  even 
("^(m)  a  teacher  who  approaches  (past.  pass,  part.)  in  order  to  kill 
you.  17.  Why  dost  thou  consider  (f%^)  me  a  £udra,  though  know- 
ing (iCT  ger.)  my  learning-and-conduct?  18.  Do  not  hate  the  sons- 
of-Pandu.  19.  The  women  w^ose-sons-u:ere-dead,  having  lamented 
greatly,  wiped  the  tears  from  their  eyes.  20.  Thou,  O  Lord,  rulest 
over  bipeds  and  quadrupeds  (gen.). 

*  Refers  to  false  witness  before  a  court.  An  untruth  where 
small  beasts  (sheep,  etc.)  are  concerned,  involves  the  destruction 
of  five  ancestors ;  where  cattle  are  concerned,  of  ten,  etc. 


108  Lesson  XL. 

Lesson  XL. 

424.  Verbs.    Root-class,  cont'd.      ^STl^    'sit'    (mid.):    Indie. 

^rr%>  ^rrir,  ^rr%;  ^rrefetc.;  ^rr^ff,  ^n^*,  wm%   impf. 
^rrf^,  "^rr^rT^,  ^rx^r etc.  im?.  ^rr%,  ^rre^r,  ^i^ih  etc.  Part. 

irrafcT  (unique). 

425.  The  root  3Jf^,  'command'  (act.),  substitutes  in  the  weak 
forms  with  consonant- endings  the  weakened  stem  fj^f  ;  thus, 
indie,  sing.  mf^I  etc.;  du.  f^risg^  etc.;  but  3rd  pi.  U}iqfif. 
Iinpf.:  ^ntTOt,  WRT^  W^**;  ^rf^  etc.;  but  3rd  pi. 
Wrercr-    Imv.  2nd  sing.  ^TfV;   3rd  pi.  STTOrT- 

426.  The  extremely  common  root  l^f^,  'be'  (act.),  loses  its 
vowel  in  weak  forms,  except  when  protected  by  the  augment.  The 
2nd  sing.  imv.  is  TjfV;  in  the  2nd  sing,  iudic.  one  ^  is  omitted; 
in  the  2nd  and  3rd  sing.  impf.  ^  is  inserted  before  the  ending. 
Thus: 

Indicative. 
1-   "?fW         ^  ^ 

2.   'STfa  ^T*t         W 

Imperative. 
1.   ^WTf^T      ^TCTR       ^TCTR  Opt.:  ^TR  etc.;  3rd  pi.  ^\ 

2    ITfa  ^W[  ^1  Part.:  ^nT  ,  f.  ^rft. 

3.  wm        wm.      *r*r 

427.  Roots  in  ^  (except  f^^  and  ^^)  combine  ^  with  <^, 
^  and  >J  into  <g,  and  then  lengthen  preceding  "%  ^,  ^;  before 
^,  |f  becomes  ^B;  in  2nd  and  3rd  sing.  impf.  act.  (where  the 
endings  are  dropped)  the  ^  becomes  ^.  Thus,  f^Jf  'lick'  (act. 
and  mid.):  Impf.  act.:  ^%f^,  "3T%Z,  ^Z;    ^f^5,  wte**, 

Or  ^fT^f.     So  ^ITin^  or  "30"*^  (imv.,  impf.). 


Imperfect. 

-441*1*1 

^?T^ 

*rro 

^XTW^ 

^ira 

^l*dlH 

^*n*K 

**   o 


See  §  414.     tSNJTc^  is  said  to  be  used  in  2nd  pers.  also. 


Lesson  XL.  169 

428.  In  the  two  roots  ^^",  'milk'  (act.  and  mid.),  and  fs^, 
'smear'  (act.),  the  final  ^  represents  an  earlier  guttural  which 
reappears  in  the  inflection.    Thus,  from  «gt|: 

Indicative.  Imperfect. 

2.  ^jtrV      fierce     ^r        wn«     ^1^1    ^ti^ 

3.   ^TfHf**      ^l^       ^f*fT        ^TV^R        ^f^TOR;     1*$$^ 

Ind.  mid.:  ^|,  T*%,  ^3$;  o[£f  etc.  Impf.  mid.:  ^Tfff, 
^^TRC,  "^f^T;  Wf^ff  etc.;  ^^frff,  ^TW^,  ^TffcT- 
Imv.  mid.:  ^tf,  ^^,  ^Tm;;   ^tfT^f  etc.;  ^lW|,  V*1^, 

429.  The  roots  ^^,  'weep',  5<^tJ,  'sleep',  ^Ft,  'breathe', 
■g^,  'breathe'  (all  act.),  insert  ^  before  all  endings  beginning 
with  a  consonant,  except  ^  and  ?^  of  2nd  and  3rd  sing,  impf., 
where  they  insert  either  ^Sf  or  %.  Thus,  ?£<?:  Pres.  indie:  -^- 
f^f*T,  frf^fa  etc.,  3rd  pi.  ^firT.  Impf.:  ^jft^,  ^ft^  or 
°^ftr>,  0^  or  °^rT;  ^^f^  etc.;  3rd  pi.  ^q[^\  Imv.:  ^t- 
^lf%  ^[f%,  Ttf^  etc.    Opt.:  ^n^Cetc.  (^TT  being  mode-sign). 


Verbs: 
^St%  (dniti)  breathe. 
+  TT  (prdniti)  live. 
^R^  (dsti)  be. 


Vocabulary  XL. 

^m.  (aste)  sit. 
-f  ^TJ  sit  by ;    wait  upon ;  at- 
tend; reverence. 


*  cf.  §§  244,  249. 

*  When  the  final  sonant  aspirate  of  a  root  is  followed  by  ?^ 
or  7f  of  an  ending,  the  whole  group  is  made  sonant,  and  the  aspir- 
ation of  the  root-final  is  not  lost,  but  is  transferred  to  the  initial 


of  the  ending. 


170 


Lesson  XL. 


^^  +  JT-fa  (pravicdlati)  move, 

stir  (tr.). 
fe?  (degdhi)  smear. 
«T^  (dogdhi,  dugdhe)  milk. 
*fl«jlv  +  f^f   (nimllati)    shut  (the 

eyes). 
■^^  (roditi)  weep. 
f^T^f  (ledhi,  lldhe)  lick. 

+  ^m  lick. 


f%TTv  +  ^iWT  approach. 
^JT^C.  (f&ste)  command,  govern. 
^^  (gvdsiti)  breathe. 
+  ^SfT  or  J&HJ  breathe    gently, 

revive. 
+  f%  be  confident,  trust  (w.  gen. 
or  loc.  of  pers.) 
TfTT  +  ^^*  (uttisthati)  arise. 


Subst.: 
^XJJ^J  m.,  enjoyment. 
■^■Jf  m.,  hair. 
^7T  n.,  gift,  generosity. 
mm  f.,  girl,  maiden. 
3flre^T  m.,  n.,  club,  pestle. 
T$ftpt  n->  blood. 
TUtH  n.,  sacrifice. 
*jfacT  m. ,    n.  pr.,   the  sun -god 
Savitar;   the  sun. 


33ff*CT  m.,  shoulder. 

Adj.: 
\JYT!i  f-  0,?IT  firm,  resolute. 
RlUlj,  f-  °^n,  shrewd,  skilled. 
^TRZT,  f-  0,?rr,  right,  proper. 
H+ITI,  f-  °,?n',  careless. 

Iudecl.: 
3?TfT?3  earbr>  m  toe  morning. 
VTSP^  greatly,  much. 


Exercise  XL 
^le^lrM^:  TTfT^jffirT  ^  ^  *ftTT:  II  ^Q.  II 

%*fr  Tpoti  ^u%  f  *rr  BrJi^sft  TT5rr*mw  Trfa  *Tfa- 
fm*n<l  ii  q  n  f*rewf  u%  i  froftrfa  «rflr*n^  ii  *  ii  *fr- 

After  ^,   the  initial  ^  of  ^fT  and  ^PW   is  dropped;    thus, 
^WTH^  for  ^r^JTfW;. 


Lesson  XL.  XLI.  171 


^TfatlT    J|«rJ*HTjl<fr    $TO^*IT    *PsTRt   snTTrt  II   M  II   *R[fT 

^  ii  $  ii  jj^s^vjf^ftrn:  fwr  ttR  ^■R^m  n  ^  n  ^ 
*rer:  ^H^%  ^rt  f%rs:  ^gig  nfw  faTT  ^rft  irrcprr:  ii  ^  u 

wsr^t  ^Tf^r  ii  w  ii 

11.  Long  may  the  great-king  govern  the  earth  according  to 
law.  12.  There  was  a  mighty  king  Nala  by  name  («TTfl),  son  of 
Virasena.  13.  The  lion,  satiated-with-the-blood-of-the-slain-gazelle, 
licked  his  mouth  with  his  tongue.  14.  Let  the  householder  say  to 
the  guest:  "where  didst  thou  sleep  during  the  night"?  15.  The 
cowherd  milked  the  cows  twice  daily.  16.  The  boy,  beaten  by 
his  father,  wept  bitterly  (^nj^).  *7-  Whose  daughter  art  thou, 
girl?  18.  Know  that  that  by  which  thou  livest,  and  the  whole 
world  lives,  is  the  world-spirit.  19.  Having  arisen  in  the  morning, 
reverence  the  sun  (^jf^rf)-  20.  If  you  do  not  praise  Rama,  there 
will  be  no  salvation  for  you  (use  ^PEt>  in  pres.  opt.). 

Lesson  XLI. 

430.  Verbs.  Reduplicating  Class.  This  class  forms  the  present- 
stem  by  prefixing  a  reduplication  to  the  root.* 

431.  The  rules  governing  the  reduplication  are  as  follows: 

1.  The  consonant  of  the  reduplicating  syllable  is  in  general 
the  first  consonant  of  the  root;  thus,  27,  <^2JT-  But,  (a)  a  non-as- 
pirate is  substituted  for  an  aspirate;  and  (b)  a  palatal  for  a  guttural 


*  Only  a  small  proportion  of  the  roots  of  this  class  retain  the 
accent  on  the  root-syllable  in  the  strong  forms.  In  the  great  ma- 
jority, the  accent  is  on  the  reduplication,  both  in  the  strong  forms 
and  in  those  weak  forms  whose  endings  begin  with  vowels. 


172  Lesson  XLI. 

or  ^;  thus,  V[\,  ^TT;  f^Tf,  f^f^;  jft,  f«n£t;  (<0  if  the  r00t 
begin  with  a  sibilant  followed  by  a  non-nasal  mute,  the  latter  is 
repeated  (with  observance  of  a),  not  the  sibilant;  thus,  ^gfT,  fT^T- 
2.  A  long  vowel  is  shortened  in  the  reduplicating  syllable; 
and  ^g  is  replaced  by  T;  thus,  <*^T  and  ^TT  above;  *ft,  f%*ft; 

**,  fw 

432.  The  present-stem  gunates  the  root-vowel  in  the  strong 
forms;  thus,  f^ft,  strong  f&;  fro,  strong  f^TT- 

433.  The  verbs  of  this  class  lose  the  «^  from  the  endings  of 
the  3rd  pi.  in  the  active  as  well  as  in  the  middle;  and  in  the  3d  pi. 
impf.  act.  always  take  ^^,  before  which  a  final  radical  vowel  has 
guna;  thus,  ^f^T^t- 

434.  Root  W,  '  bear,  carry '.  For  2nd  and  3rd  sing.  impf.  act., 
cf.  §§  122,  414. 

Indicative. 

Active.  Middle. 

i.f*re?3     f^ra;     f%wr^     f^         f^f|       f*w*% 
2.f%i*f^     fwrs;     faare        fkm       fwro       fa*ra 

3.f^Hf(i       f^HtT^       fsrefa         f*WT         f*Wm  f%**H 

Imperfect. 

i.  'srfsFRTc  ^if*npr     ^rf^^fl      ^srfafsr      ^rfa^rff    °*|*rff 

Imperative. 

G  O  G  O  C 

3.f^Hg      f^Hcn^    f^rag       f^jfni    fsraicroR:   f^rem*; 

Opt.  act.:  f^rj^rf^  etc-5  mid.:  fsr^T^T  etc. 

Part,  act.:  fsp*^  (§  259),  f.  f^nffr;  mid.:  f^WTCT- 

435.  Thp  roots  l^T,   'give',  and  i.Tjrr,   'put',  lose  their  radi- 
cal vowel  in  the  weak  forms,  leaving  the  weak  stems  ^^  and  ^el . 


Lesson  XLI.  173 

In  the  2nd  sing.  imv.  act.  they  form  ^f^  and  vtlf-    The  inflection 
of  >n  is  as  follows  :* 

Indicative. 

Active.  Middle. 

l-  ^nfa    ^ret     ^*?s;      ^v        ^wf|         ^r% 
3.  ^rrfa     ^ttto:     ^^rfTT      \r%        ^erra         ^m 

Imperfect. 

i.  ^«r\n^  ^^^     ^^*rr      ^fa      ^^cf%      ^^rff 

2.  ^^*T*t  ^hiti^  ^nrrr      ^rawr^  ^^nm*c  ^ras*t 

3.  ^^Tfi:  ^ttpr:  ^^    ^^rarr      ^vTcrnR:   ^r«^ra 

Imperative. 

l-  ^rrfa    ^tr     ^nw      ^        ^rnrf        ^nrf 

Opt.  act.:  <Jfc£||i^  etc.;  mid.:  ^'vfl"^  etc. 
Part,  act.:  t[V^,  f.  ^\ffiT;  mid.:  ^^TR- 

436.  The  root  1^7  is  inflected  in  precisely  the  same  way,  but 
with  change  everywhere  of  \J  to  W,  except  where  V  belongs  to 
the  ending. 

437.  The  root  l^f,  'quit,  abandon'  (act.),  drops  the  ^TT  in 
weak  forms  where  the  ending  begins  with  a  vowel,  and  in  the  opt.; 
thus,  indie.  3rd  sing.  ^frf^T,  pi.  Wff^T;  impf.  3rd.  sing.  "^fT^, 
ph  ^J5TF^ ;  opt.  aniJTft.-  The  2nd  sing.  imv.  is  SfifTff  or  5jff  ff . 
In  the  other  weak  forms  before  consonant-endings  the  stem  is  either 
^tfT  or  *|ff ;  thus,  5Tffa^  or  Wff*TO> 

438.  HIT,  'measure'  (mid.),  and  2^f,  'move,  go'  (mid.),  form 


*  In  combination  with  <^  or  H   of  an  ending,   the  TI   of  ^y( 
does  not  give  U,   but  follows  the  general  rule  of  aspirate  and  of 
surd  and   sonant  combination ;  and  the  lost  aspiration  is   thrown 
back  upon  the  initial  of  the  root. 


174 


Lesson  XLI. 


f*Tift  and  "fal^D  before  consonant-endings,   f*i*^   and   f^nf  before 
vowel-endings;  thus,  3rd  persons  indie.  fij*ft%,  f*f*n%,  fWJffi. 

439.  ^  'pour,   sacrifice'  (act.  and  mid.),   makes  the  2nd  sing. 
imv.  5prf%i;   3rd  persons  impf.  "SpSpft^,  ^ksMUH,,  ^^1^^- 

440.  1.  }ft,  'fear'  (act.),  may  shorten  its  vowel  in  weak  forms; 

thus,  -faHtos:  or  t%fa*^,  fwftrm: or  Wotr^-  —  2.  #,  < be 

ashamed'   (act.),   changes  its   weak  stem    f5frjf^  to  fafg^I    before 
vowel-endings;    thus,  indie.   3rd   persons    f^ffa,    fajfl<R0    fsj- 


Verbs: 

lyr  (ddddli,  datte)  give. 

+  Tf  entrust. 
l^TT  (dddhdti,  dhatte)  put,  place 

+  ^Sffx?  close,  shut. 


Vocabulary  XLI. 

+  ^STTputon;  (mid.)  take,  receive. 

+  f%(  arrange,  ordain. 

+  ^f  J^  unite,  put  together ;  lay  on. 
lW\(jdhati)  quit,  abandon,  neglect. 
j^"  (jihreti)  be  ashamed. 


Subst.: 
^SmU  n.,  safety;  feeling  of  safety. 

^J&X  m.,  demon. 

^T¥f?T  f-,  oblation. 

*rff^  m.,  n.  pr. 

JflJ  m.,  gazelle. 

f^Tf  n.,  possessions,  wealth. 

1J^  m.,  n.,  rest,  remainder. 

tfTRra  m-5  °ne  wn°  nas  per" 


formed  the   ablution  customary 
at  the  end  of  religious  pupilage. 

Adj.: 

^,  f.  of^,  divine. 
faf^JH>  f-  °^T>  excellent,  remark- 
able. 

Adv.: 

<QT^TC  at  evening. 


Exercise  XLI. 


^^<lf%  Msfswfr  WT^STTf*  f^*T  f^%  I 


Lesson  XLI.  XLII.  175 

uw  thrift  ^nol^H^ii#  ^r?f  fsrefa  11  ^  u 

^  r**#T  T  WlfrT  II  9  II  *m  3nrT#H^Tf^  TTOf  *rf*WreTTr^- 
^ToC  II  ^  II    %  1  ^T^T  fWrT%  *f<ft  5lfrf<T^t    ^r^tf^T  II  $  II 

^ejj  ^t^#  ^TT^^^Trnf^^n^T  ii  8  ii  ^"Rrf^rrgTw"^ 

fa  (voc.  sing,  f.)  tfrfrT  ^f^ft  fH^f  ^T^^ll  $11  ^TT  WW 
^T?RTnt  Tjffi  ^  WSlfo  1  WIH^  II  ^  II  *R  *reU!H<*di  ^TT 

^rnft  (part.,  ace.  pi.)  ffT  ^^fwfa^  \r3fr:  *?rerrrra;  II  o.  II 
HT*iPa-rrro  svn*  WTinffaT  WFf^T  II  W  || 

11.  Let  the  Adhvaryus  pour  the  sacrificial  offerings  into  the 
fire.  12.  The  seers  ordain  forty  sacraments  in  the  law-books 
(^TffT)-  13.  Dacaratha  entrusted  his  sons  to  Vasistha  as  scholars. 
14.  Meeting  a  woman  in  the  forest,  one  should  say  to  her:  "Sister, 
be  not  afraid".  15.  Let  a  Snataka  carry  (wear)  a  garland,  and  an 
umbrella-and-shoes.  16.  One  who  takes  (part.)  roots-fruits-or-grain 
from  a  strange-field,  is  to  be  punished.  17.  Let  the  two  doorkeepers 
close  the  door.  18.  Do  not  neglect  the  teacher's  command.  19.  The 
royal-sage,  who  wore  much  jewelry,  shone  (f^-HT)  with  great- 
brilliancy,  like  the  sun.  20.  The  scholars  who-have-not-learned- 
i/ieir-lessons  are  ashamed  before  their  teacher  (ace.  or  gen.). 

Lesson  XLII. 

441.    Verbs.    Nasal  class.     All  roots  of  this  class  end  in  con- 
sonants.   As  class-sign   they  insert  a  nasal   before  the  final  con- 


*  With  the  suffix  IJJl,  f.  °^,  are  formed  adjectives  signifying 
'made  or  composed  or  consisting  of.  —  In  the  second  line,  'bear 
the  name '  merely,  i.  e.  are  not  in  reality  such. 


176 


Lesson  XLII. 


sonant,  unless  one  be  there  already  (as  in  *fff  );  this  nasal  is 
adapted  to  the  consonant,  except  in  the  strong  forms,  where  it  is 
expanded  to  the  syllable  «T  [T£],  which  bears  the  accent. 

442.  The  combination  of  the  final  radical  consonants  with 
those  of  the  personal  endings  is  in  accordance  with  the  rales  al- 
ready given  for  the  root  and  reduplicating  classes. 

443.  Thus,  ^r^  'join';   strong  stem  ^JT^,  weak  ^ff . 

Indicative. 

Active. 

*pf5*  ^^  *p^rs:  ^t 
gut*  ^f  ^^*  ^*  W 
yfa      TO*      TO**     si 

Imperfect. 


Middle. 

3"^% 

3^5*1 

^i^ 

^rf?T 

W* 

wf       "^^^"ra:  -*i^ny(*t    ^*K4^^ 


^ra^irT'w:    ^j^r 


^prsrrf'? 


^prsrR 

TO* 

W* 


*pnt"Rf 


^m^       *TO 
Imperative. 

TO  ^ 

W^       TO1* 

Opt.  act.:  ^piZTTTT.  etc.;   mid.:  ^Jlffa  etc. 

Part,  act.:  ^«rTN,  f.  ^<fh  mid.:  *J^R. 

444.   Root  ^J  'obstruct';   strong  stem  ?[T!ra,  weak  ?[«tf . 

Indicative. 

Active.  Middle. 

Tartar      ^^^c     ^*ra;      ^t       ^"M|       v»ft 
^wf^        ^¥^      ^rf^fT       ^--%        ^ifrl        ^5^ 


*  Instead  of  ^T^cp^l^,  S^tS?,  and  the  like,  it  is  allowed 
(and  more  usual)  to  write  sy^VtJ^,  Spg^f  etc;  also  ^**l^,  ^%Jetc, 
instead  of  ^g'^C.  etc.;  in  each  case  omitting  the  consonant  im- 
mediately following  the  nasal. 


Lesson  XLII. 


177 


Imperative. 

^r\nfa    wwr    w*tr     ^jr^      ^wr^t    "^trI 

Imperf.  act.:  ^Tir^R;,  ^Uf^,  ^ppfc^;  ^V^ef  etc.;  mid.: 
T5T^f«^  etc.  —  Opt.  act.:  ^F^rR  etc.;  mid.;  ^«*ffal  etc.  —  Part, 
act.:  ^I^T,  f.  "^Tffh   mid.:  ^ITR- 

445.  Roots  ftT9,  'grind,  crush'  (act.);  and  f|f^,  'injure, 
destroy'  (act.): 

Imperfect. 

^rfarz     ^rftre**;  ^fro    ^rff^R;  ^rft**R    *rfw 

^rt^rz    ^srfqFR  *rfM«H  ^rf^R:  or  «>^  ^rf^rR;  ^xTi *rc; 

Ind.  2nd  persons:  ftRf%,  ftfe^,  fTO;  —  ff^fW,  fiNR;, 
fTO-    ImT*  2nd  persons:  fwft,  ftfe^,  ftfe;  —  fff**,  ff^R,, 

446.  7{%  'crush'  (act.),  combines  HUfff  with  f?f  and  H  into 
<1%f%  and  rf%S- 


Verbs: 
^J    (inddhe)  kindle,  light. 

fl^  {chindtti,   chinddhe)  cut,  cut 

off. 

+  "^JT  take  away,  remove. 

+  ^3^  exterminate. 
oTRPC^l  (caus-  stem)  awaken. 
fcrq   (pindsti)  grind,  crush. 
^^  (bhandkti)  break,  destroy. 
f^fi?  (bhindtti,  bhinddhe)  split. 
*Hf  (bhundJcti,  bhunkte)  eat,  enjoy. 

Perry,  Sanskrit  Primer. 


Vocabulary  XLII. 

^J3T  (yundkti,  yunkte)  join;  yoke, 
harness. 
+  f^  appoint,  establish. 

T^f  (rundddhi,  runddhe)  obstruct, 
check;  besiege. 

ftra    (find.sti)    leave,    leave   re- 
maining. 
+  f^  set  apart,  distinguish. 

f^  +  ^  unite. 

f^^  (hindsti)  injure,  destroy. 


12 


178  Lesson  XLII. 


Subst.: 
•^cJ^IT  f-,  condition,  state, 
^q*^  f.,  dawn ;   also  personified, 
Usas,  the  Dawn. 
^jT^^R  m.,  thorn;   enemy. 
^"PE!  m.,  bite,  mouthful. 
<TX^T  m-,  rice. 
XTRT^i  n.,  crime. 
xn"^  m.,  grandson. 
^«*|  m.,  relative. 


^flg«f  n.}  writing,  copying. 
f^#H«d    m.,  the  Himalaya  Mts, 

Adj.: 
^at^fT  high. 

^JT^  suitable  for  Ksatriyas. 
3[]|J  domestic. 

Hf7fc69r,  f.  °^TT,  unfavorable. 
TjpT,  f.  "^STT,   splendid,  beautiful, 
excellent. 


Exercise  XLII. 

rt^lJnrfieirt-1  *ft*  ff^f^  T  t^f^T  n  3^  || 
fRit  ci^rm^wr^t  frwsr  wnrrsra  11  33  11 

^fRTr^^  ^t  %*T  fa?^  cfT  T  TT  II  38  II 

^  m  ff^fnr  ?rt**  ifta  urof^i  f^rfn  aqmri  tt 
tff^i  11  «*  11  ^T^f^fHt  ^Hhi<i  f^m»^<*  TTsif  ^j^fir  «M*n 
'•h<kmji3<k  11  ^  n  ^rr  Tnfr  ^t%t  ^tp^j^ieN  *?  %  fl^fr 
t^t  11  3  11  t%  iprf^fcr*rre:  *rs  <*iPafeMf»n;foH<3>Mi 

fa^^MI<lf<<***f*MlfaMct    II  8  II    gRITfWyTOI  ^^TT 

*i  wrrfa  wkPsjh  fr^%  t%  wh"  "*r^  T«f^  «nw  n  m  11  *fr 
tt  *pjsf:  wm  11  $  11  ^ft  irfTT^t  fafafffiprfs  irffcti 

11.  After  Jayasinba  had  long  besieged  Girinagara,  he  destroyed 

The  antecedent  of  this  relative  is  the  subject  of  ^r?TTTTtf?T' 
Translate  as  though  dative. 


Lesson  XLIII.  179 

(*^)  it  at  last.  12.  An  ascetic  shall  eat  only  240  raouthfuls  in  a 
month  (loc).  13.  "Kindle  the  fire;  cut  branches  for  firewood 
(*lf*t*4*J*0;  m'lk  the  cows;  grind  grain":  thus  said  one  priest 
to  another  early  in  the  morning.  14.  The  teacher  entrusted  (f^J-?I5T ) 
the  scholars  with  the  copying  of  the  books  (cpd.,  dat.).  15.  The 
mountain  -  range  Himavant  checks  the  coarse  of  the  clouds 
with  its  exceedingly-high  peaks.  16.  The  doers-of-right  (°eRJ) 
are  happy  in  Heaven,  enjoying  the  fruits-of-^e/r-works.  17.  A 
king  who  has  conquered  a  foreign  realm  must  not  exterminate 
the  royal-family.  18.  Aryans  must  kindle  the  domestic-fire  at  the 
time-of-the-wedding.    19.  Women  pounded  the  rice  with  pestles. 

Lesson  XLIII. 

447.  Verbs.  Perfect-System.  In  the  later  language  the  perfect- 
system  comprises  only  an  indicative  mode  and  a  participle,  each 
both  active  and  middle.  Its  formation  is  essentially  alike  in  all 
verbs;  its  characteristics  are:  1. reduplication;  2.  distinction  of  strong 
and  weak  forms;  3.  endings  in  some  respects  peculiar;  4.  the  fre- 
quent use  of  the  union-vowel  i. 

448.  Reduplication.  1.  Initial  consonants  are  reduplicated  ac- 
cording to  the  rules  given  in  Less.  XLI  for  the  reduplicated  pre- 
sent-stem. 

2.  Medial  and  final  vowels,  short  and  long,  are  represented  by 
the  corresponding  short  vowel,  diphthongs  by  their  second  element ; 
but  ^J  (or  ^T^)  is  represented  always  by  "^f,  never  by  ^[  as  in  the 
reduplicated   present-stem.     Thus,    sfpF^,   -qsn*^;   WT,    cHHT;  fa "4., 

3.  Initial  ^f,  followed  by  a  single  consonant,  becomes  ^T 
(through  =5-^0;  thus,  ^1^,  ^TT^- 

4.  Initial  ^  and  ^  follow  the  same  analogy ;  but  in  the  strong 


180  Lesson  XLTII. 

forms,  where  the  root-vowel  is  ganated,  the  reduplicating  vowel  is 
protected  from  combination  by  the  insertion  of  ^J  or  "Gf  ;  thus, 
^n  ,  strong  perfect-stem  f^fc  (}-y-e§)  weak  ^Tf  (i.  e.  i-is) ;  ^^, 
strong  g^t'^  (u-v-oc),  weak  ^^  (u-uc). 

5.  Roots  beginning  with  vowels  long  by  nature  or  position  do 
not  in  general  make  the  ordinary  perfect-system,  but  use  instead 
a  periphrastic  formation  (see  below).  But  ^(J\  is  an  exception, 
making  the  constant  perfect-stem  ^TPC ;  and  a  few  roots  with  initial 
^J  or  ^J  show  the  anomalous  reduplication  "3TT"t.  in  the  perfect.* 

449.  Strong  and  weak  forms.  In  the  three  persons  sing.  act. 
the  root-syllable  is  accented,  and  exhibits  usually  a  stronger  form. 
As  regards  the  strengthening: 

1.  In  roots  with  medial  vowels  long  by  nature  or  position, 
and  in  those  with  initial  ^f,  the  difference  of  strong  and  weak  forms 
does  not  appear,  except  in  accented  texts. 

2.  Medial  and  initial  vowels  are  gunated,  if  possible,  in  the 
strong  forms ;  thus,  f^T,  w.  f^*rf|T,  s-  f^l^T ;  |TT ,  w.  $T^,  s. 
^%i*  ;  ^,  w.  ^,  s.  ^3<ft^  (§  448,  4). 

3.  Medial  ^J  before  a  single  final  consonant  is  vriddhied  in  the 
3rd  pers.,  and  optionally  in  the  1st;  thus,  from  TJtT,  in  1st  sing, 
either  TJTT^  or  WF^,  in  2nd  T?TJ^\  m  3rd  tJUT^- 

4.  A  final  vowel  takes  either  guna  or  vrddhi  in  the  1st  person, 
guna  in  the  2nd,  vrddhi  in  the  3rd;  thus,  from  «ft,  in  1st  f^fST  or 
f*T%,  2nd  f*J%,  3rd  fa%. 

450.  The  root  m  makes,  irregularly,  the  perfect-stem  mi,  and 
adds  "^  before  a  vowel-ending. 

451.  Some   roots,   instead  of  strengthening  the   vowel   in   the 

*  The  grammarians  prescribe  (doubtless  falsely)  this  redupli- 
cation for  all  verbs  beginning  with  ^Jf  or  ^J  followed  by  more  than 
one  consonant. 


Lesson  XLIIT.  181 

strong  forms,  weaken   it  in   the  weak  forms;  some  few   even  do 
both.     See  below. 

452.  Personal  Endings.     The  perfect-endings  are  these: 

Active.  Middle. 

1.  a  vd  md  e  vdke  mdhe 

2.  tha       dthus  d  se  dthe  dhve 

3.  a  dtus  us  e  ate  re 

But  roots  ending  in  a   take  du  in  1st  and  3rd  sing.  act. ;  thus, 

453.  Union-vowel.  The  endings  beginning  with  consonants 
are  in  classical  Sanskrit  usually  joined  to  the  base  by  the  union- 
vowel  ^.  The  most  important  rules  for  the  use  of  ^[  are  as 
follows : 

1.  The"^  of  3rd  pi.  mid.  always  has  ^  before  it. 

2.  The  other  endings  beginning  with  consonants,  except  ^J, 
take  it  in  nearly  all  verbs.  But  it  is  rejected  throughout  (except 
from  "^)  by  eight  verbs:  viz.  13fi  'make',  It  'bear',  W  'go', 
2^  'choose',  ^T  'run',  "*£  'hear' ,  TjT  'praise',  ^  'flow'. 

3.  For  its  use  or  omission  in  2nd  sing.  act.  the  rules  are  too 
complicated  to  be  given  here. 

454.  With  the  union-vowel  ^  a  final  radical  ^[  or  %"  is  not 
combined  into  ^,  but  becomes  H  or  (if  more  than  one  consonant 
precede)  ^TO  ;  thus,  from  «ft,  f^rfa?^  ni-ny-i-va. 

Examples  of  inflection.    A.  Roots  in  final  vowels. 

455.  I.  Roots  in  ^  or  %.  The  T[  and  XT  of  gunated  and  vrid- 
dhied  vowels  become  ^sr^r  and  ^TT^T  before  the  vowel  beginning 
an  ending.     See  also  §  454. 

Thus,  1.  *ft:  Act.:  Sing.  1.  (^Hq  or  f^TTO,  2.  f^rftra  or 
■faSTO,  3.  fqWW,  du.  1.  f^f^cr,  2.  f^RJW^,  3.  f%*nj^;  pi.  1. 
f^rfcrjT,  2.f^^,3.f^^Tv.  — Mid.:  Sing.  l.f^TO,  2.f?rfcR,  3.fsy^; 


1 


182  Lesson  XLIII. 

du.  i.  f^rf^f ,  2.  fvRn%,  s.  fwm;  pi.  i.  t^f^mf,  2.  f^fara, 

2.  sfiT:  Act.:  Sing.  1.  "fasfRT  or  fasfiltf,  2.  f^-*R|«|  or  f^lfa, 
3.  fTCRT;  du.  1.  f^f^f^^,  2.  f^f^I^,  3.  °^H^;  pi-  I-  "N- 
t%f^T,  2.  f^f^R^,  3.  frfogCl- 

456.  II.  Roots  in  3  or  ^S  follow  the  model  of  the  last- mentioned. 
Thus,  ^J:  Act.:  Sing.  1.  rJE^  or  <JB"nT,  2.  <JET«T  (not  HSfa*l  — 
see  §  453,  2),  3.  <JFR;  du.  l.£§*,  2.^^,  3.*J^7J^.  -  ^: 
Act.:  du.  ^rf^  etc. 

457.  ^  is  irregular  in  the  perfect.     (Cf.  §  450): 

Active.  Middle. 

2.  ^jf^ra  ^J5^   ^5        *ajM   «r^n^     ^jf^ 
^T*      ^npw  ^^      ^?      ^^     *S^ 

458.  III.  Roots  in^.     1.  m  (see  §  453,  2): 

2.  ^TO  ^«fi^      ^«R  ^J**       ^^iT%     ^|T^ 

3.  ^^rn;  ^ra»<js.    ^pc         *ra      ^^rm    ^f^r 

So  also  *T,  *J,  2"^  'choose'.  2.  The  other  roots  in  "^  make  the 
first  persons  thus:   from  V,   ^TT  or  ^TFTr  ^f^T^,   ^fOT;  ^t 

459.  If  the  final  ^J  be  preceded  by  more  than  one  consonant, 
the  formation   is   as   follows:    ^,    1.   *T^nC  or  ^TOTT;  2-  HW$> 

3.  Mm\K;  du.  TOft^  *H4K«|«l>  etc.  —  the  ^  being  gunated. 

460.  IV.  Roots  in  ^TT  (including  those  written  by  the  natives 
with  TJ  or  ^  or  Tjft).  These  take  ^ft  i"  1st  and  3rd  sing,  act.;  and 
the  ^5T  is  lost  before  vowel-endings  and  X-     1-  1^TT: 

i.  ^ft  ^ftre     ^P**     ^     <f*wi  ^Pwl 

2.  ^n^i,  ^ftro    ^r^c    ^         ^fW%  ^rro     ^fw 

3.  ^  ^th^    ^^       ^      T*n*     ^^ 

2.  "RTT,  ^T,  and  similar  roots,  make  their  weak  forms  from  the 


Lesson  XLIII.  183 

simpler  root-forms  ift,  "g  etc.;  and  "£"[  makes  its  strong  forms  also 
from  "g;  thus,  ^l^^  or  5fifra  etc. 

B.  Roots  in  final  consonants. 

461.  I.  With  medial  vowel  capable  of  guna. 

1.  fHf :  Act:  Sing.  1.  f^^,  2.  fwf^ZI,  3.  fsW^;  du.  fafa- 
f^  etc.;  pi.  f^rfaf^T  etc.  Mid.:  fwfa^  etc.  2.  So  from  tf^: 
^ffr^  etc.;  3.  from  f*{:  1.  ^^f,  2.  ^flfa  or  ST^S,  3.  ^Tt; 
du.  ^^f^f^  etc. 

462.  II.  With  initial  vowel  capable  of  guna. 

1.  ^:  Sing.  1.  T^T  2.  ^fTTO,  3.  ^?;  du.  1.  ^facf, 
2.  t^^C'  3-  t^^5  pi.  I-  TfW,  2.  ^,  3.  f^.  2.  ^: 
^cpfTj  etc.  3.  The  root  ^,  'go%  also  follows  this  rule,  forming 
^gfra  etc. ,  3rd.  pi.  f^J^-  4.  ^^  makes  (see  §  448 ,  5)  ^TTfir 
^TRf^T  etc. 

463.  III.  With  initial  ^. 

"31^,  ^TRT  etc.;  ^T,  ^rT^  etc.  But  "3P^  (originally  ^FTj 
makes  ^n«TI[  etc.  (§  448,  5). 

464.  IV.  With  medial  ^f. 

1.  sR^:  Act.:  sing.  1.  ^^j*T  or  ^sRT*T,  2.  ^if*TO,  3.  ^TR; 
du.  ^grfjf^  etc.     Mid.:  ^3i5t  etc. 

Thus  all  sucb  roots  beginning  with  more  than  one  consonant, 
or  with  an  aspirate,  a  guttural  mute,  or  ^. 

465.  2.  Roots  in  general  having  medial  ^f  before  a  single 
final  consonant,  and  beginning  also  with  a  single  consonant  which 
is  repeated  unchanged  in  the  reduplication  —  i.  e.  not  an  aspirate, 
a  guttural,  or  ^  —  contract  with  the  reduplication  into  one  syllable, 
with  TJ  as  its  vowel,  in  the  weak  forms;  and  this  is  allowed  also 
in  2nd  sing.  act.  when  the  union-vowel  ^  is  taken.  Thus,  H^T, 
s.  MMx|  and  Ml||-^,  w.   TJ^: 

*  Several  roots  not  having  the  form  here  defined  are  said  to 
undergo  the  same  contraction,  most  of  them  optionally. 


184  Lesson  XLIII. 

TjTjcj*j,  ^f^     "q^W^    *^T  ^f^ft      ^tTT%        ^fW 

466.  3.  Certain  roots  beginning  with  ^  va  (also  one  with  Jf  ya) 
and  ending  in  one  consonant,  reduplicate  with  the  syllable  ^f  (the 
one  root  just  mentioned,  with  ^[),  and  abbreviate  the  ^  (^J)  of  the 
root  to  ^  (X)  *n  weak  forms.  They  are  treated  like  roots  with 
initial  ^  (\:  §  463)  but  retain  the  full  root  form  in  the  strong 
persons.  These  roots  are  ^\  ^,  ^,  ^"J^,  cf^  'dwell',  and 
^f ;  also  ZJ5T  Thus,  ^t^:  Act.  sing.  1.  ^^  or  ^T^,  2.  ^3^- 
^^J  or  ^5^f%f^r,  3.  ^T-eJ;  du.  v*fa^  (u-uc-i-va)  etc.  Mid.  ^>%  etc. 
-  -?r^:  Act.  sing.  1.  JZ(^  or  {t||4>  2.  J^  or  ^£*rf^  3.  fin*!; 
du.  ^fsre  etc.     Mid.  ^%  etc. 

467.  4.  Several  roots  which  have  medial  ^  between  single 
consonants,  but  cannot  follow  the  rule  of  §  465,  drop  out  the  ^J 
from  the  weak  forms.  These  roots  are,  in  the  classical  language, 
?|[*^,  TTj^,  ^T^,  ||«^;  and  also  of«^,  which  might  be  expected  to 
follow  §  465.  They  form  the  weak  stems  ^f,  ^JTJ^,  ^IW  ,  5f^J  ; 
and  5fU  .  Thus,  ^SfW^  or  ^"sTTT  etc.,  ^fri^  etc.  lp^  makes  its 
strong  stem  ^JV|«^  and  ^J^TT^- 

468.  5.  The  roots  ^J\iJ ,  ^t^,  and  one  or  two  others,  redupli- 
cate from  the  semivowel,  and  contract  If  and  cT  to  ^  and  ^  in 
weak  forms.    Thus,  strong  ^TEgf1^  or  '<Qbe||i^,  weak  ^T*P£. 

469.  1.  The  root  ^Hf[,  'speak',  is  found  only  in  this  tense, 
and  only  in  the  following  forms:  sing.  2.  -H\JH,  3.  "4||^;  du.  2.  ^J"J- 
*fST^,  3.  ^IT^d^;  ph  3.  -411^4^-  These  forms  have  only  the  value 
of  the  present.  —  2.  The  root  lf^T,  'know  ',  makes  a  perfect  without 
reduplication,  but  otherwise  regular,  which  has  only  present-value; 
see  §  417.     2f^T,  '  find ',  forms  the  regular  f^%^. 

470.  The  roots  f^(,  f^f^,  f^f,  and  f^,  form  as  perfect-stems 
f%faj,  f^f^,  f%Tf9T,  and  f^rf%T 


Lesson  XLIII.  185 

471.  Perfect  participle.  1.  Active.  The  ending  of  the  pf.  part, 
active  is  ^T^  (mid.  ^?^,  w.  ^f),  which  is  added  to  the  weak  per- 
fect-stem.* When  this  is  monosyllabic  the  union-vowel  ^  is  inserted 
(but  not  in  the  weakest  cases,  before  ^TJ).  Thus,  a.  from  ^, 
strong  stem   of  part.  ft^RT^.   mid.   $f*^,   w.  t^;  from  TJ^, 

^f^rrac.,  mR^.  ^f\>  from  ^>  ^rf^rfafc  *fa«H,  ^*  > 
from  ^r,  ^f^rrct,  ^f^*C>  ^T*  •  But'  from  *ft>  f*rofarrcfc  f*~ 

^&!<l,  f^TO  5  from  ^,  JfTRC  <J^^,  31f\»  from  f**f >  t^~ 
fH^rfa;,  f^f*T3[cT\  faf*l$H/  —  6.  The  root  ^  makes  as  its 
strong  stem  of  pf.  part.  arflTTTfar,  or  3R7crfcr^  mid.  arfTinRC  or 
gjTf;^,  weakest  only  3f7*pr  Similarly,  from  <fp^,  ^Tfaqi^  or 
araarfaTo  ^f^tl  or  SR^,  ^^  —  c.  lf^ff ,  « know ',  makes 
■^ra:  etc.;  2f^,  'find',  f%f^^  etc. 

2.  Middle.  The  pf.  part,  middle  is  made  with  the  suffix  ^TT, 
which  is  added  to  the  weak  stem  as  this  appears  in  the  middle 
voice;    thus,  ^\J ,  «MMM;    >*T,  S^TR;  3>  ^^TW;    *ft  f^RTR; 


Periphrastic  Perfect. 

472.  Most  roots  beginning  with  a  vowel  long  by  nature  or  po- 
sition adopt  a  periphrastic  formation  in  the  perfect  tense;  the  same 
is  also  taken  by  the  secondary  conjugations,  and  optionally  by  a 
few  primary  roots  not  falling  in  the  above  category.  It  is  made 
as  follows: 

473.  To  the  accusative  of  a  derivative  noun-stem  in  ^TT,  made 
from  the  present-stem  which  is  the  general  basis  of  each  conjugation, 
are  added,  for  the  active,  the  perfect  active  forms  of  "^j  or  ^f^  (or, 
very  rarely,  of  if);   for  the  middle,  only  the  perfect  middle  forms 


*  Mechanically,  the  weakest  participle-stem  is  identical  with 
the  3rd  pi.  act.  (of  course,  ^  instead  of  ^). 


186  Lesson  XLIII.  XLIV. 

of|i.     Thus,  from  '-^Hl'trf*,  pf-    ^fH«n«TO    or  ^TT^ri^^n:; 
from  ^,  t^t^%- 


474.  Force  of  the  Perfect.  In  classical  Sanskrit  the  perfect 
coincides  in  meaning  with  the  imperfect,  as  a  tense  of  narration, 
but  is  less  often  met  with. 

Lesson  XLIV. 

475.  Verbs.  Future-System  (aud  Conditional).  The  verb  has 
two  futures:  I.  The  simple,  or  s-future,  which  is  by  far  the  older, 
and  much  more  common,  than  the  other;  and  II.  the  periphrastic 
future. 

476.  I.  Simple  Future.  This  tense  contains  an  indicative  mode 
and  a  participle,  active  and  middle.  It  may  be  made  from  all 
verbs.  The  tense-sign  is  the  syllable  Tgg,  added  to  the  root  either 
directly,  or  by  the  union-vowel  ^  (in  the  latter  case  becoming  ^5J). 
The  root  has  the  gwna-strengthening  when  possible;  and  some  roots 
with  medial  ^g  gunate  with  ^  instead  of  ^.  The  inflection  is 
precisely  like  that  of  the  present  indicative  of  a  verb  of  the 
a-conjugation ;  thus,  from  *?,  ^rf^raf^,  o^. 

477.  When  ^  is  not  taken,  final  radical  consonants  suii'er  the 
same  changes  before  ^J  as  before  ^  in  the  inflection  of  the  root- 
class   or  reduplicating  or  nasal  class.     Thus,  from  ^f,   \ftwffT; 

%^fff7l;  ff* ,  l^lfrT;  ft,  ^^Tf!f.    The  root  cf^  '  dwell ',  makes 

478.  1.  Most  roots  ending  in  vowels  reject  \;  thus,  TT,  37- 
^Tfa;  JTT,  TT^rfTT;  fa,  %t*rf?T;  ^T,  ^TTSTflT.  2.  But  all  roots  in 
^T  take  Xi  thus,  ^,  ^f*TqfrT;  <J ,  tTfXmPd;  and  also  the  roots  *ft 
(iff^lfrT)  and  ^(HfTOfa).     3.  ^  makes  Hffcrflr. 


Lesson  XLIV.  187 

479.  In  general,  the  verbs  which  take  ^  in  the  infinitive  and 
periphrastic  future  (see  below),  take  it  also  in  this  tense.  But  the 
accordance  is  far  from  complete;  and  these  parts  should  be  learned, 
as  a  matter  of  usage,  for  any  given  verb. 

480.  Stems  of  causative  inflection,  and  denominatives  in  tST^\ 
make  their  future-stems  in  ^f^TO;  thus,  ^TT,  ^tTf^f^rf?T- 

481.  Participle.  The  participles,  act.  and  mid.,  are  made  from 
the  future-stem  precisely  as  from  the  present-stem;  thus,  W[,  "ZJ- 
^P<T  (f.  °^Trft),  ^RRTT;  f,  3ifWtT,  qrfTTZOTR.  Cf.  §§  260, 
262. 


482.  Conditional.  A  tense  called  the  conditional  (indie,  only) 
is  made  from  the  stem  of  the  simple  future  precisely  as  the  im- 
perfect is  made  from  the  present-stem,  and  similarly  inflected. 
Thus,  ^T^f^,  ^^jfT^FC ;  ^T#,  -4|c|,(\5}.  It  is  of  extremely 
rare  occurrence. 


483.  II.  Periphrastic  Future.  This  tense,  which  is  allowed  to 
be  made  from  ail  verbs,  contains  a  single  indicative  tense,  active,* 
It  is  formed  by  the  nomen  agentis  in  <J,  having  the  value  of  a  future 
active  participle,  to  the  nom.  sing,  of  which  (cfT)  are  added,  in  the 
1st  and  2nd  persons  of  all  numbers,  the  corresponding  inflected 
forms  of  the  pres.  of  l^R^  *be\  In  the  3rd  persons  the  nomen 
agentis  is  used  alone,  in  the  proper  number,  without  the  auxiliary. 

484.  The  root  has  in  most  cases  the  same  form  before  the 
suffix  ?f  which  it  takes  before    the  TfTT    of  the   infinitive.     Thus, 

*rnj;  f%  %<t;  ^,  ^rt<T;  *r>  Hf^*r;  **,  ^fij;  ^rcre,  <*«ilej7T. 

485.  The  inflection  is  then  as  follows: 


The  Hindus  also  prescribe  a  middle  formation ;  it  has,  how- 
ever, practically  no  existence. 


188  Lesson  XLIV. 

1-     Wrf%        ^<TT^T*C        «*«$H*m. 

3.     ^rTT  <*dlO  «*<1K«, 


Aorist-System. 

486.  The  aorist  comprises  three  quite  distinct  formations,  each 
with  certain  sub-varieties;  but  all  are  bound  together  into  one 
complex  system  by  certain  correspondences  of  form  and  meaning. 
In  classical  Sanskrit  aorists  are  comparatively  rare.  Their  value 
is  quite  that  of  impf.  or  pf.  as  tenses  of  narration.  But  they  are 
used  also  (though  not  nearly  so  often  as  the  prohibitive  opt.)  with 
the  particle  *n,  in  prohibitions,  the  augment  being  then  omitted; 
thus,  *TT  ^T.  'do  not  give';  TfJ  *Nfc  'do  not  fear'.  With  this  ex- 
ception the  aorist  always  has  the  augment  in  classical  Sanskrit. 
The  tense  comprises,  in  the  later  language,  only  an  indicative  mode.* 
The  main  varieties  of  aorist  are  three:  I.  Simple  Aorist;  II.  Redu- 
plicated Aorist ;  III.  Sibilant  Aorist. 

487.  I.  Simple  aorist.  (1)  Root  aorist.  This  aorist  is  precisely 
like  an  imperfect  of  the  root-class.  It  is  limited  to  the  active  voice 
of  a  few  roots  in  ^[J,  and  of  W.     E.  g. 

2.  ^to:    ^7<n*     ^^Tri         ^wa;      ^r^c    ^ct 

3.  ^TcC     ^l<idm;     ^^  ^r^       ^W?T*l   "^^t 

Like  ^T:  \rr,  ^3^-  WT,  ^RITrt;  *TT,  ^^5  TT  'go',  ^~ 
TTrX. 

488.  (2)  The  a-aorist.  This  is  like  an  imperfect  of  the  a-class, 
active  and  middle.  Thus,  from  1%^5  1st  persons  ^f  fa ■<*{,,  ^tf^TTTW* 
^TftpTW;  ^ffa%,  ^Tfax||ejff,  ^rf^TTff-     In  general  the  root 

The  precative  is  strictly  a  peculiar  aor.  optative;  but  it  is  so 
rare  that  its  formation  need  not  be  explained  here. 


Lesson  XLIV.  189 

assumes  a  weak  form ;  but  three  or  four  roots  in  final  ^g  take  guna. 

Thus,  nsrr^,  ^n^;  ti^,  ^ji**^;  >j%  ^rercr^;  w^s,  w^; 

^,  ^RP^;  ^>  "**!«*<tj  ^TC^  ^HN*K-  —  Irregular:  T^TT,  ^31- 
*§RU  ST>  ^QPl»  ^T-  WScl;  Tim,  ^rf%T^^;  2^RC  'throw',  ^T- 
^fc^  (anomalous).  ^^s  makes  ^|^tx|c^,  and  TJc^,  ^5m^c^,  which, 
with  one  or  two  others,  were  doubtless  originally  reduplicated 
aorists. 

489.  II.  Reduplicated  Aorist  (3).  This  aorist  differs  from  all 
others  in  that  it  has  come  to  be  attached  nearly  always  to  the  deriv- 
ative (caus.,  etc.)  conjugation  in  'Optf,  as  its  aorist.  The  connection 
is  not  formal,  as  the  aorist  is  not  made  from  the  stem  in  ^f,  but 
from  the  root.  Its  characteristic  is  a  reduplication,  of  quite  pe- 
culiar character. 

490.  The  reduplicated  aorist  is  very  unusual  in  classical  San- 
skrit, and  it  will  be  sufficient  for  the  present  to  give  an  example 
or  two  of  its  formation.  Thus,  ^«^  makes  ^ftSTTc^ ;  W^,  ~^Xf^- 
^JTCpt  >  WTi  ^rffff^Rt,-  The  inflection  is  the  usual  one  of  imper- 
fects  of  the  a-conjugation. 

491.  III.  Sibilant  Aorist,  of  four  varieties.  (4)  The  s-  aorist. 
The  tense-stem  is  made  by  adding  ^  to  the  augmented  root,  which 
usually  has  its  vowel  strengthened.  E.  g.  «ft:  Act.:  sing.  1.  ^J%- 
VP%,  2.  ^1%^^,  3.  ^3mH;  du.  1.  W3,  2.  ^3?%^  3.  ^tefPR;; 
pi.  1.  ^R*Jf,  2.  ^r%,  3.  ^%^-    Mid.:  sing.  1.  ^Rfa,  2.  ^f%T^, 

3.  ^?te;  du.  i.  ^Tzrff,  2.  ^^t^to;,  s.  ^sRimrra;;  p1-  l  ^* 

^ff,  2.  ^%!*t,  3.  -41^  Md-  —  *TW  (mid.only):  sing.  1.  wf^, 
2.  ^MdcJItt  3.  ^JS*  etc. 

492.  (5)  The  *s-aorist.  The  tense-stem  is  made  by  adding  ^ 
by  means  of  an  inserted  ^[.  The  root  is  generally  strengthened. 
E.  g.  TJ  'purify':  Act.:  sing.  1.  ^TOff^R^,  2.  "^tn^W,  3.  WT- 
^;  du.  1.  WFf^zr,  2.  WTfa^,  3.  o^rjrj  pi.  i.  of^, 
2.  °Ore,  3.  f^^.  —  Mid.  sing.  1.  WTfrfa  2.  ^nif^"^,  3.  ^- 


190  Lesson  XLTV.  XLV. 

inf^re;  du.  i.  »f^ff,  2.  °fcpn*rw;,  3.  °cnra;;  pi.  i.  °f*nwff, 

2.  °fcjd*^,  3.  °"ftffc(cf.  —  This  is  the  only  aorist  of  which  forms  are 
made  in  the  secondary  and  denominative  conjugations  (but  for 
causatives  and  denominatives  in  Iffi,  cf.  §  489). 

493.  (6)  The  sw-aorist  is  active  only,  the  corresponding  middle 
being  of  the  s-forra.  An  example  will  suffix  here.  JJJ:  sing.  1.  "^J- 
qiRjMH.  etc.,  quite  like  the  inflection  of  the  ts-aorist. 

494.  (7)  The  sa-aorist.    f«j^:  Act.  sing.  1.  '-4|f<j[^l^,  2.°^^, 

3.  °^t^;  and  so  on;  like  an  impf.  of  the  a-conjugation.  But  in  the 
mid.  the  grammarians  prescribe  the  1st.  sing,  ^H'fef^!',  and  2nd  and 
3rd  du.  Wf^TTTH  and  °fTR;. 


495.  Aorist  Passive.  Generally  the  middle  forms  of  aorists  4, 
5,  or  7,  are  used  also  for  the  passive.  Roots  which  do  not  ordin- 
arily take  aorists  of  these  forms,  may  make  them  like  4  or  5  espe- 
cially for  the  passive. 

496.  But  a  3rd  pers.  sing.,  of  peculiar  formation,  has  become 
a  recognized  part  of  the  passive  conjugation.  It  is  formed  by  add- 
ing ^  to  the  root,  which  takes  also  the  augment,  and  is  usually 
strengthened,  in  some  cases  by  guna,  in  others  by  vrddhi.  After 
final  nSTTis  added  *J.  Thus,  ift,  4MlRl;  ^J,  ^r^TTf^;  g,  ^^5TfT; 
^,  ^RTfa;  —  but  ^,  ^f*T;  f^,  ^fifr;  ^T,  ^Tfa. 

Lesson  XLV. 

Derivative  or  Secondary  Conjugations. 

497.  Secondary  conjugations  are  those  in  which  a  whole 
system  of  forms,  more  or  less  complete,  is  made  from  a  derivative 
conjugation-stem ,  this  whole  system  being  usually  connected  with 
a  certain  definite  modification  of  the  original  radical  sense.  These 
conjugations  are:  I.  Passive.  II.  Intensive.  III.  Desiderative. 
IV.  Causative.     V.  Denominative. 


Lesson  XL V.  191 

498.  I.  Passive.  The  present-system  of  the  passive  has  been 
described;  as  also  the  peculiar  3rd  pers.  sing,  used  as  aor.  pass., 
the  past  pass,  participle  in  7\  or  «f,  and  the  fut.  pass,  participles 
or  gerundives.  In  all  other  parts  of  the  verb  middle  forms  are 
used,  if  necessary,  with  passive  meaning. 

499.  II.  Intensive.  The  intensive  conjugation  signifies  the 
intensification  or  the  repetition  of  the  action  expressed  by  the 
primary  conjugation  of  a  root.  Forms  outside  the  present-system 
are  too  rare  to  need  notice  here;  indeed,  even  within  that  system 
they  are  by  no  means  common  in  the  later  language.  Intensives 
fall  into  two  classes. 

500.  1.  The  verbs  of  the  first,  class  (only  act.)  form  their  in- 
tensive-stem by  reduplication,  and  the  reduplicating  syllable  is 
strengthened,  a.  Radical  ^SJ  and  ^|  are  reduplicated  with  1R,  ^ 
and  ^  with  TJ,  ^  and  ^  with  ^;  thus,  TT^,  ^TcT,  %«ft,  "Sft^J^- 
b.  Sometimes  the  reduplicating  syllable  has  a  final  consonant,  taken 
from  the  end  of  the  root;  thus,  T^rf"^,  TfTf^f.  c.  Sometimes  the 
reduplication  is  dissyllabic ,  an  i-vowel  being  inserted  after  the 
final  consonant  of  the  reduplicating  syllable;  thus,  ej^d^.  — 
The  model  of  inflection  is  the  present-system  of  the  reduplicating- 
class,  but  deviations  are  not  rare;  in  particular,  an  "^ is  sometimes 
inserted  between  stem  and  ending. 

501.  2.  From  the  intensive-stem  as  just  described  may  be  formed 
another ,  formally  identical  with  a  passive-stem ,  by  the  suffix  ^Ef. 
It  takes  middle  inflection,  but  has  no  passive  value,  being  used 
precisely  as  is  the  intensive  just  mentioned.    Thus,  TRvf ,  Tfflslffi. 

502.  A  few  intensives ,  having  lost  their  value  as  such,  come 
to  be  used  as  presents,  and  are  treated  by  the  native  grammarians 
as  simple  roots.  Thus  W[1t,  really  intensive  of  3T  'wake',  is 
assigned  to  the  root-class :  pres.  5TITf*T  etc. ,  du.  ^XT^^C.  etc- » 
impf.   1.  4HHIMl>   2.  ^WTTJ,  3.  1M|J|^;   du.  WRpT  etc.    So 


192  Lesson  XLV. 

also  rf(\j*  |,  intens.  of  "gj  'run',  used  as  a  present  with  the  sense 
'be  poor',     fsf^    'wash',    and  some   others,    use    the    intensive 
present -system  in  the   same   way,    and  are  assigned  to  the    re- 
duplicating class;   thus,  3rd  sing.  ^%fr?i,  3rd  pi.  %f%«rffT- 
Intensive  forms  outside  the  present-system  are  very  rare. 

503.  III.  Desiderative.  By  this  conjugation  is  denoted  a  desire 
for  the  action  or  condition  denoted  by  the  simple  root;  thus, 
fxRrrfrr  'I  drink',  desid.  fwnnf*T  'I  wish  to  drink'. 

504.  To  form  the  desiderative-stem  the  root  is  reduplicated, 
and  adds  ^f,  sometimes  ^[^  .  The  consonant  of  the  reduplication 
is  determined  by  the  usual  rules:  the  vowel  of  reduplication  is  ^ 
if  the  root  has  an  o-vowel,  an  ^-vowel ,  or  ^g,  and  \3  if  the  root 
has  an  u-vowel.    Thus,  ^JT,  t%RT^rf7r;  *ft  f^P^fafTT;  W,  ^g^ffl; 

w,  f^reHfa;  fire,  fafa(*rf?r;  f?r^,  fafirw 

505.  A  number  of  roots  form  an  abbreviated  desiderative- 
stem  ;   thus,  W^>  t^ff^;   ^T>  f^rfa- 

506.  The  conjugation  in  the  present-system  is  like  that  of 
other  a-stems.  Outside  of  that  desiderative  forms  are  quite  in- 
frequent. The  perfect  is  the  periphrastic.  The  aorist  is  of  the 
t's-form;  thus,  %"^J,  Tjf^Plft.;  ^TffTf^f^  2-  The  futures  are  made 
with  the  auxiliary  vowel  \;  thus,  ^f^'RlffT,  frfWcTTf^-  The 
verbal  nouns  are  made  with  ^[  in  all  forms  where  that  vowel  is 
ever  taken.  A  passive  may  be  made;  thus,  ^x^ffi  'it  is  desired 
to  be  obtained';   part. %f^J7?. 

507.  IV.  Causative.  1.  The  present-system  of  the  causative 
has  been  treated  of  already.  2.  The  perfect  is  the  periphrastic, 
the  derivative  noun  in  ^TT  being  formed  from  the  causative-stem; 
thus,  ^nT^rf  ^^TFX'  3.  The  aorist  is  the  reduplicated,  made  in 
general  directly  from  the  root,  and  formally  unconnected  with  the 
causative-stem;  thus,  \J,  ^3T*JT^>  ^PfW^t-  ^n  a  ^ew  instances, 
where  the  root  has  assumed  a  peculiar  form  before  the  causative- 
sign,  the  reduplicated  aorist  is  made  from  this  form,  not  from  the 


Lesson'LXV.  193 

simple  root;  thus,  ^TT,  ^I'R^fTT,  ^f^f^^ft..  4.  Both  futures  are 
made  from  the  causative-stem,  the  auxiliary  ^[  replacing  the  final 
^;  thus,  \nTj^rsrf?T »  \TTTf*J ft  I !%•  5-  The  verhal  nouns  and 
adjectives  are  in  part  formed  from  the  causative-stem  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  futures,  in  part  from  the  causatively  strengthened 
root-form;  thus,  pass.  part.  ^nf%cT;  fat.  pass.  part,  (gerundive) 
fTOf^rra,  ^J"TO;  inf-  sftWftnpi;  gerund  fM^fiMI,  °^?TO,  °1- 
VTQ  (§  310). 

508.  Cansative  passive  and  desiderative.  These  may  be  made 
from  the  causative-stem  as  follows.  1.  The  passive-stem  is  formed 
by  adding  the  usual  passive  sign  ^J  to  the  causatively  strengthened 
root,  the  syllables  ^§Rl  being  omitted;  thus,  \sTT3ffi-  2.  The  desider- 
ative-stem  is  made  by  reduplication  and  addition  of  the  syllables 
^q,  of  which  the  ^  replaces  the  final  ^f  of  the  causative-stem; 
thus,  f^jTfcnxf^T^f^T,  f^HT^T^ff^-     This  is  a  rare  formation. 

509.  V.  Denominative.  A  denominative  conjugation  is  one 
that  has  as  basis  a  noun-stem.  In  general,  the  base  is  made  from 
the  noun-stem  by  means  of  the  conjugation-sign  Jf ,  which  has  the 
accent.  Intermediate  between  the  denominative  and  causative  con- 
jugations stands  a  class  of  verbs  plainly  denominative  in  origin  but 
having  the  causative  accent.  Thus,  from  ?Tn^,  iTn^T cf  mantrdyate ; 
from  ^ftfr?,  «$Yr|i|fii  klrtdyati.    See  §  76. 

510.  The  denominative  meaning  is  of  the  greatest  variety; 
e.  g.  'be  like',  'act  as',  'regard  or  treat  as',  'make  into', 
'desire,  crave'  —  that  which  is  signified  by  the  noun-stem. 
Examples:  from  ?TM^  'penance,  asceticism',  rfmirfH  'practise 
ascetism';  from  «f*{^,  «T7T^rf?T  'honor';  c(iUyi*J%  'blacken'; 
^■^"T^rfH  'seek  horses';  ^TTTT^jf?!  'play  the  herdsman,  protect'; 
^^4j(7T '  desire  wealth ' ;  fH^WfrT  ' play  the  physician,  cure' ;  M^«*i- 
5Rrf?T  'desire  a  son',  from  the  poss.  cpd.  (PTOFR  'desiring  a  son'* 


Perry,  Sanskrit  Primer. 


13 


194 


I.   Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


Glossary  to  the  Exercises. 

For  the  alphabetic  order  of  Sanskrit  words  see  p.  xii. 


I.  Sanskrit-English. 

Adjectives  in  -a  form  their  feminine  in  -a,  unless  otherwise  stated. 


aksa  m.,  die,  dice. 

aksan  (aksi:275)  n.,  eye. 

agni  m.,  fire ;  as  n.  pr.,  Agni,  the 

god  of  fire. 
agnihotrin  m.,  a  kind  of  priest. 
agra  n.,  front;  tip.  end. 
anga  n.,  limb;  body. 
angiras  (253)  m.,  certain  mythical 

characters. 
anjali  m. ,  a  gesture  (Voc.  37). 
anu  a.,  small;  as  n.,  atom. 
atas  adv.,  hence. 
ati  adv.,   across,    past;  in   cpds, 

to  excess. 
atithi  m.,  guest. 
atra  adv.,  here,  hither. 
atha  adv.,  then ;  thereupon. 
atharvaveda  m.,  the  fourth  Veda. 
adas  (asdu :  287)  pron.,  that  one ; 

so-and-so. 
adya  adv.,  to-day. 
adyatana  adj.,  of  to-day. 
adroha  m.,  faithfulness. 
ad /tar  ma  m.,  injustice,  wrong. 


adhas  adv.,  below,  down. 
adhastat  adv.,   below;  prep.,   w. 

gen.,  underneath. 
adhi   adv.,  over,  above,  on. 
adhika  a.,  additional ;  superior. 
adhita  part,   of  adhi-i. 
adhuna  adv.,  now 
adhvaryu  m..    priest   who  recites 

the  Yajurveda. 
\    an  (dniti:  429)  breathe; h 

pra  breathe;  live, 
an,  before  cons.  a.  negative  prefix. 
anaduh  (278)  m.,  ox. 
anantaram  adv.,  after,  immediately 

afterward ;    as   prep.,    w.    abl., 

right  after. 
anartha  m.,  misfortune. 
anavadya  a.,  faultless. 
anahilupataka  n.,  n.  pr.,  a  city. 
ami  adv.,  after,  along,  toward. 
anukula  a.,  favorable ;  as  n.,  favor. 
anujna  f.,  permission. 
anurupa  a.,  suitable. 
aneka  a.,  several. 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


195 


anrta  n.,  untruth. 

anta  m.,  end  ;  in  loc,  at  last. 

antara  a.,  inner ;  as  n.,  interior, 
middle;  interval,  difference;  oc- 
casion, juncture.     Cf.  375,  4. 

andha  a.,  blind. 

ondhra  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  people. 

anna  n.,  food,  fodder. 

any  a  (231)  pron.  adj.,  other. 

anyatra  adv.,  elsewhere. 

anvanc  (272)  a.,  following. 

anvaya  m.,  descendant,    progeny. 

ap  (277)  f.  pi.,  water. 

apara  (233)  pron.  adj.,  hinder; 
other. 

apt  (190)  adv.,  unto;  further;  as 
conj.,  also,  even. 

apsaras  f.,  heavenly  nymph. 

abhaya  n.,  feeling  of  safety  ;  safe- 
ty- 

abhi  adv.,  to,  unto. 

abhipraya  m.,  plan,  design  ;  view. 

abhydsa  m.,  study,  recitation. 

amrta  a.,  immortal;  as  n.,  nectar. 

amba  (273)  f.,  mother. 

ay  am  same  as  idam. 

ari  m.,  enemy. 

artha     m.,     purpose;     meaning; 

wealth. 
y  arthaya  (den. :    artlidyate)  ask 

for  (w.  two  ace);  +  pra  idem. 
aryaman  (284)  m.,  n.  pr. 
]/  arh    (drhati)   deserve;    have   a 

right  to ;  w.  inf.  (320),  be  able. 
alam adv., enough;  very;  w.instr., 

enough  of,  away  with;  w.  dat., 

suitable  for. 
ali  m.,  bee. 
ava  adv.,  down,  off. 


avagya  a.,  necessary. 

avastha  f.,  condition,  state. 

avanc  (272)  a.,  downward. 

\/  lap  (apnute)    acquire,    obtain; 

1-  nam-upa  idem. 

j/  2af  (agnati)  eat;  caus.  (dedya- 

ii)  make  eat,  give  to  eat. 
afiti  (332)  num.,  eighty. 
agru  n.,  tear. 
agva  m.,  horse. 
agvin  m.   du.,  n.  pr.,  the  Acvins 

(the  Indian  Aioc,  xovpoi). 
asta  (332)  num.,  eight. 
astadaga  (332)  num.,  eighteen. 
astavingati  (329,332)  num.,twenty- 

eight. 
I  las  (dsti :  426)  be,  exist. 
V  2as    (dsyati)    throw,     hurl; 

-1-  abhi  repeat,  study,  learn ;   — 

-I-  m   entrust;    —  +  pra    throw 

forward  or  into. 
a  si  m.,  sword. 
asura  m.,  demon. 
asau  same  as  adas. 
asthan  (asthi:  275)  n.,  bone. 
asmad  same  as  vayam;  as  stem 

in  cpds,  cf.  352,  4. 
ahan  (ahar,  ahas :  271)  n.,  day. 
aham  (223)  pron.,  I. 
ahita  a.,  disagreeable. 
aho  excl.,  oh  !  ah  I 
ahoratra  n.,  a  day  and  a  night. 


a (130) adv.,  hither,  unto;  as  prep., 

w.  abl.,  hither  from;  until. 
akara  m.,  form,  figure. 
akdga  m.,  air,  sky. 
akrsta  part,  of  a-krs. 
akranta  part,  of  a-kram. 
13* 


196 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


dgamana  n.,  arrival. 
dcdra  m.,  "walk   and    conversa- 
tion"; conduct;  observance. 
deary  a  ra.,  teacher. 
djiid  f.,  command. 
dtman  m.,  soul,  self;  often  simple 

reflexive  pronoun. 
ddi  m.,    beginning;    in   cpds,  cf. 

375,  1. 
aditya  m.,  sun. 

ddega  m.,  command,  prescription. 
Y  dp  (dpn6ti,dpnute)  acquire,  reach; 

r  ava,  pra,  or  ami  pra,  idem ; 

+  sam  idem  ;  finish. 
opad  f.,  calamity. 
dpta  part,  oi  dp,  trustworthy;  fit. 
dyusmant  (263)  a.,  long-lived. 
avista,  part,    of  vig  +  d,   entered 

(by),  i.  e.  filled  (with). 
dgd  f.,  hope. 
dgu  a.,  swift. 
dgrama  m.,  hermitage. 
\'  as    (dste:  424)    sit;    caus.    (a- 

sdyati)  place; \-  upa  sit  by; 

wait  upon;  reverence. 
dsana  n.,  seat,  chair. 
dharana  n.,  bringing. 
dhdra  m.,  food. 
dhuti  f.,  oblation,  offering. 


\/i  (eti  [-tie:  408])  go:  —  +  adhi 
mid.,  go  over,  repeat,  read; 
caus.    (adhydpdyati)    teach;    — 

4-  anu  follow ; \-  apa  go  away ; 

\-  abhi  approach  ; h  astam 

(lit'ly  go  home)  set  (of  the  sun, 
etcj ; \-  ud  rise ;  +  upa  ap- 
proach;   y pra  go  forth;  die. 

icchd  f.,  wish. 


tiara  (231)  pron.  adj.,  other. 

tias  adv.,  hence. 

iti  adv.,  thus,  so. 

ittham  adv.,  in  this  way,  so. 

idam  (285-286)   pron.,  this,  this 

here. 
\'idh,  indh  (inddhe:  444)  kindle, 

light. 
indu  m.,  moon. 

indra  m.,  n.  pr.,  the  god  Indra. 
indraprastha  n..  n.  pr.,  Delhi. 
indrdni  f.,  n.  pr.,  a  goddess. 
iyant  (263)  a.,  so  great ;  so  much. 
iyam  fem.  of  idam. 
iva  adv.,  postpos.,  as;  like. 
y'lis  (icchdti:  109)  wish,  desire. 
isu  m.,  arrow. 
iha  adv.,  here,  hither. 


]/  iks  (iksaie)  see,  behold ;  — 1-  upa 

neglect; \-prati  expect. 

tdrg,  f.  -J,  a.,  such. 

\l\g  (iste:  422)  rule,  own  (gen.). 

igvaram.,  master;  lord;  rich  man. 


ucchrita  part,  of  ud-gri,  high. 
ud  adv.,  up,  up  forth  or  out. 
udaiic  (272)  a.,  northward. 
udadhi  m.,  ocean. 
udaya  m.,  rise. 
udara  n.,  belly. 
udyata  part,  of  ud-yam,  ready. 
udydna  n.,  garden. 
udyoga  m.,  diligence. 
udyogin  a.,  diligent,  energetic. 
upa  adv.,  to,  toward. 
upanayana  n.,  initiation. 
upanisad  f.,  certain  Vedic  works. 
upabhoga  m.,  enjoyment. 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


197 


upavtta    n.,    sacred  cord    of   the 

three  higher  castes. 
updnah  (249)  f.,  sandal,  shoe. 
ubha  a.,  du.,  hoth. 
uras  n.,  breast. 
uru,  f.  urvi,  a.,  wide. 
urvaci  f.,  n.  pr.,  an  Apsaras. 
usas  f.,   dawn;    as  n.   pr.,  Usas, 

goddess  of  the  dawn. 


\r  (rcchdti:   109)   move;  go  to; 

fall  to  one's  lot,  fall  upon;  caus. 

(arpdyati)  send;  put;  give. 
rksa  m.,  bear. 
rgveda  in.,  the  Rigveda. 
re  f.,  verse  of  the  Rigveda;    in 

pi.,  the  Rigveda. 
rna  n.,  debt. 
rtvij  ni.,  priest. 
rsi  m.,  seer. 


eka  (231)  num.,   one;   pi.,   some; 

eke  •  •  eke,  some  •  •  others. 
ekadd  adv.,  once  upon  a  time. 
ekddaca  (332)  num.,  eleven. 
ekddaca  (334)  a.  eleventh. 
etad  (231)  pron.,  this,  this  here. 
eva  adv.,  just,  exactly. 
evam  adv.,  so,  thus. 
esa  same  as  etad. 


ostha  m.,  lip. 


ausadha  n.,  medicine. 


ka  (232)  pron.  1.  interrogative, 
who,  what;  kim  w.  instr.,  cf. 
note  on  p.  89.  —  2.  indefinite, 
adj.  and  subst.,  chiefly  w.  parti- 


cles ca,  carta,  rid,  api,  some  one 

or  other;   so  also  w.  relatives; 

oftenest  in  neg.  clauses :  no  one 

whatever  (236). 
kata  m.,  mat. 
kantaka  m.,  thorn,  enemy. 
kantha  m.,  neck. 
kanva  m.,  n.  pr. 
katham  adv.,  how  ? 
\kathaya  (den.:  kathdyati)  relate, 

tell. 
kadd  adv.,  when  ? (-  cana,  rid, 

api,  at  some  time,  ever;   often 

w.  neg. 
kanistha  a.,  youngest. 
kaniyas  a.,  younger. 
kanyd  f.,  daughter,  maiden. 
kapi  m.,  monkey. 
kapota  m.,  dove. 
yjkamp  (kdmpate)  tremble. 
kara  m.,  hand ;  trunk  (of  elephant) ; 

ray;  toll,  tax. 
karin  m.,  elephant. 
karuna  a.,  lamentable. 
karna  m.,  ear. 
kartr   m. ,    doer,     maker    (202); 

author. 
karman  n.,  deed;  ceremony;  fate. 
\/ kal  +  sam    (samkaldyati)     put 

together,  add. 
kalaha  m.,  quarrel. 
kald  f.,  crescent. 
kalinga  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  people. 
kaliyuga  n.,  the  "Iron  Age"  of 

the  world. 
kalydna  n.,  advantage;  salvation. 
kavi  m.,  poet.  A-«Wi",,»'.  p»ei 

kana  a.,  one-eyed. 
kdnti  f.,  charm ;  grace. 


198 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


karna  m.,  desire,  love ;  as  n.  pr., 
the  god  of  love. 

kdmadugha  a.,  granting  wishes; 
as  f.  subst.,  8c.  dhenu,  the  fab- 
ulous Wonder-cow. 

kdmaduh  a.,  idem. 

kdya  m.,  body. 

karana  n.,  reason,  cause. 

-kdrin  a.,  causing,  making. 

kdrya  n.,  business,  concern. 

kola  m.,  time. 

kdliddsa  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  poet. 

kdvya  n.,  poem. 

frap*  f.,  n.  pr.,  a  city,  Benares. 

kastha  n.,  fagot;  wood. 

kdsthamaya  a.,  made  of  wood. 

kirn  neut.  of  &a ;  w.  tu,  however. 

kiyant  (263)  pron.  adj. ,  how 
great  ? 

klrti  f.,  glory. 

&utas  adv.,  whence?  why? 

kutra  adv.,  where?  whither? 

kunta  m.,  spear. 

Y  kup  (kupyati)  be  angry  (gen. 
or  dat.). 

kumdra  m.,  boy,  prince. 

kugala  a.,  able;  clever;  learned. 

{/  ikr(karoti,  kurute:    394-5)  make, 

do,  perform; 1-  adhi  put  at 

the  head,  make  ruler  over  (loc.) ; 

h  apa  do  evil  to,  harm  (gen., 

loc,  ace);  —  +  apa-d  pay;  — 

+  alam  prepare,  adorn ; \-  avis 

(dviskarotf)  make  known,  ex- 
hibit;   \- upa  do  good  to,  be- 
nefit (gen.,  loc); \-tiras  (<«'- 

rask.)  hide ;  blame ; 1-  puras 

put  at  the  head ; 1-  prati  pay, 

recompense,    punish    (ace    rei, 


gen.,    dat.,    or    loc.    pers.);   — 

+prddus  make  known  or  visible ; 

1-  sarn  (395)  prepare,  adorn. 

]/2kr  (Jcirdti)  strew,   scatter;  — 

+  vi,  idem. 
]/krt  (krntdti:  110)  cut,    cut  off; 

—  +  ava  idem. 
krti  f.,  work  (literary). 
krtrima  a.,  adopted. 
krtsna  a.,  whole,  entire. 
krpana  a.,  poor;  niggardly. 
kfpd  f.,  graciousness,  pity. 
]/  krs  (Jcdrmti)  draw ; V  a  draw 

on  or  up;  —  (krsdti)  plough. 
krsi  f.,  agriculture. 
krsivala  m.,  husbandman,  peasant. 
krsna  a.,  black;  as  m.,  n.  pr.,  the 

god  Krsna. 
^ kip  (kdlpate)  be  in  order;  tend 

or  conduce  to  (dat.);  caus.  (kal- 

pdyati,  -te)  ordain,  appoint. 
ketu  m.,  banner. 
ke$a  m.,  hair. 

kdildsa  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  mountain. 
koti  f.,  peak ;  point,  tip. 
kopa  m.,  anger. 
kosa  m.,  treasure ;  treasury. 
kdunteya  m.,  n.  pr. 
kdusalyd  f.,  n.  pr. 
]/ kram    (kramati,    krdinate:  134) 

step;    —    +  ati    pass    beyond; 

transgress;    pass   (of  time);  — 

+  d   stride    up   to,    attack;  — 

-I-  nis  go  out. 
\/ krl  (krlnati,  krintte)  buy. 
krldd  f.,  game,  sport. 
tfkrudh  (krudhyati)  be  angry  (gen. 

or  dat.). 
krodha  m.,  anger.  » 


I.  Sanskrit- English  Glossary. 


199 


kva  adv.,  where?  whither?  +  cit 
sometimes,  ever. 

ksana  m.  n.,  moment;  time. 

ksatriya  m.,  warrior,  man  of  the 
second  caste. 

kmya  m.,  decay,  destruction. 

)  ksan  (ksanoti,  ksanute)  hurt, 
wound. 

\/ksal  (ksaldyati)  wash; \- pra 

idem. 

ksatra  a.,  suitable  for  Ksatriyas. 

\/2ksi  (ksindti)  destroy. 

ksitipa  m.,  king. 

yksip  (ksipdti)  hurl,  throw. 

kstna  part,  of  2ksi,  reduced,  de- 
cayed, ruined. 

kstira  n.,  milk. 

ksudra  a.,  little,  small. 

ksudh  f.,  hunger. 

ksetra  n.,  field. 


V  khan  (khdnali)  dig. 
khara  m.,  ass. 


gangd  f.,  n.  pr.,  the  Ganges. 

gaja  m.,  elephant. 

}' ganaya  (den.:  gandyati) number, 
count;  —  +  ava  despise. 

gaii  f.,  gait;  course. 

gandha  m.,  odor,  perfume. 

gandharva  m.,  a  Gandbarva,  one 
of  a  band  of  celestial  singers. 

V  gam  (gdcchati :  100)  go ; f-  anu 

follow; h  abhi  visit,  attend; 

1-  ava  understand ; Y  astam 

go  down,  set  (cf.  i  +  astam) ;  — 
+  a  come;  —  +  ud  rise;  — 
+  nis  come  forth;  proceed  from; 


h  sam  (mid.)  come  together, 

meet  (instr.). 

gariyas  comp.,  very  honorable. 

\/2gd  (ghyati)  sing. 

gandharva,  f.  -i,  a.,  in  the  manner 
of  Gandharvas. 

\l gah  (gdhate)  plunge;  —  +  ava 
dive  or  plunge -under  (ace). 

gir  f.,  voice,  song. 

giri  m.,  mountain. 

glta  n.,  song;  singing. 

guna  m.,  quality,  excellence. 

guru  m.,  teacher. 

y guh  (guhati:  101)  hide,  conceal; 
cau8.  (guhdyati)  idem. 

guha  f.,  cave. 

grha  n.,  house. 

grhastha  m.,  householder,  head  of 
family. 

grhya  a.,  domestic. 

go  (209)  m.,  f.,  bull,  steer,  cow; 
as  f.,  6g.,  speech. 

gotva  n.,  ox-nature,  stupidity. 

gopa  m.,  cowherd,  shepherd; 
guardian. 

1  9°Vdya  (den. :  goptdyati)  be  keep- 
er ;  guard. 

gdurava  n.,  weight;  dignity. 

]/  granth  (grathn&ti)  string  to- 
gether; compose. 

granth  a  m.,  literary  work,  book. 

] '  grah  (grhnati,  grhnlte)  receive, 
seize ;  —  +  ni  hold,  restrain, 
check ; 1-  prati  take. 

grama  m.,  village. 

grdsa  m.,  bite,  mouthful. 


ghafa  m.,  pot,  vessel. 


200 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


ghdsa  m.,  fodder,  hay. 

ghrta  n.,  clarified  batter;  ghee. 

\fghrd  (jighrati:  102)  smell. 


ca  encl.  conj.,  and,  also,  re,  -que; 

sometimes  =if. 
cakra  rc.,  wheel. 
Y cafes  (caste:  421)    see,    behold; 

—  +  a  relate;  call,   name;  — 
+  vi-d  explain. 

caksus  n.,  eye. 

catur  (332)  num.,  four. 

caturtha,  f.  -I,  a.,  fourth. 

caturdaca  (332)  num.,  fourteen. 

catuspad  (282)  a.,  quadruped. 

catvdrincat  (332)  num.,  forty. 

candra  m.,  moon. 

candramas  m.,  moon. 

\/cam,  used  only  with  a  (dedmati), 

sip;  rinse  the  mouth. 
camatkara  m.,  astonishment. 
\' car  (cdrati)  go,  wander;  graze 

(of  cattle);  tr.,  perform, commit; 

Yd  perform,    complete,   do; 

—  +  sam-d  idem ; \-  ud  caus. 

(uccdrdyati)  pronounce,  say. 

-cava  a.,  moving,  going. 
carana  m.,  n.,  foot,  leg. 
carita  n.,  behavior,  life. 
carman  n.,  hide,  skin;  leather. 
carmamaya  a.,  leathern. 
\' cal  (cdlati)  stir;  —  +  pra  move 

on,  march ; [-pra-vi,  tr.,  move, 

stir. 
cdturmdsya  n.,  a  certain  sacrifice. 
camtkara  n.,  gold. 
car  a  m.,  spy. 
cdru  a.,  beautiful. 
\ ci  (cinoti,   cinute)  gather; \- 


nis  or  vi-nis  decide,    conclude ; 

+  pra  gather;  —  +  vi  idem ;  — 

+  sam  collect. 
citta  n.,  notice  ;  thought;  mind. 
i  cint  (cintdyati)  consider. 
ciram  adv.,  long,  a  long  time. 
j/  cud + pra  in  caus.  (pracoddyati), 

impel. 
y  cur  (cordyati)  steal. 
cudd  f.,  top-knot,  scalp. 
ced  adv.,  postpos.,  if. 
\/cest  (cestati,  -te)  stir,  be  alive. 
cdulukya  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  people. 
\/cyu  (cydvate)  totter,  fall ; \-vi 

fall  away. 


chattra  n.,  umbrella. 

chdyd  f.,  shade. 

\' chid  (chindtti,  chinddhe)  cut,  cut 

off;  —  +  ava  idem ; f-«  take 

away,  remove ;  —  +  ud  exter- 
minate. 


jagat  n.,  that  which  moves  ;  men 
and  beasts;  the  world. 

,.  •      ffsljj*      .       ,  trey  fas. 
Vjan  (jdyate :  155 ;  janayati)  trans. 

(jandyati  and  active  forms)  beget, 

produce;    intrans.    (jdyate    and 

middle  forms)  be  born  (mother  in 

loc),  arise,  spring  up; (-  ud 

(ujjdyate)  be  born,  arise  (abl.); 

h  pra  or  sam  idem. 

jana  m.,  man;  pi.,  and  coll.  in 
sing.,  people,  folks. 

janaka  m.,  father. 

janam  f.,  mother. 

janman  n.,  birth,  existence. 

jaya  m.,  victory. 

jaras  (280)  f.,  old  age. 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


201 


jara  (280)  f.,  old  age. 

jala  n.,  water. 

X'jalp  (jdlpati)  speak;  chat. 

j  jdgaraya  (caus.)  awaken. 

jati  f.,  birth;  caste;  kind. 

jamatr  m.,  son-in-law. 

jaya  f.,  woman,  wife. 

jala  n.,  net. 

\  ft  (jdyati)  trans,  and  intrans., 
conquer,  win;  —  +  para,  mid., 
be  conquered  (cf.  in  Voc.  9). 

jina  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  name  of  Buddha. 

jihva  f.,  tongue. 

\  jiv  (jivati)  live. 

jivita  n.,  life. 

juhu  f . ,  spoon,  esp.  sacrificial 
spoon. 

jetr  m.,  conqueror,  victor. 

-jna  a.,  knowing. 

\  jna  (janati,  jdnite  :  403)  know; 

—  +  anu  permit; Yd  caus. 

(djnapdyati)  command  ; \-  vi 

recognize. 

jndna  n.,  knowledge;  insight. 

jya  f.,  bowstring. 

jyestha  (340)  a.,  best;  oldest. 

jyotisan.,  astronomy;  astronomi- 
cal text-book. 

jyotis  n.,  light;  star;  heavenly 
body. 


ta  (228-230)  pron.,  he,  etc. ;  that, 
both  subst.  and  adj. ;  also  as 
def.  article. 

taksapild  f.,  n.  pr.,  Taxila,  a  city. 

\/  tad  (tdddyati)  strike,  beat. 

tadaga  m.,  pond. 

tadit  f.,  lightning. 

tandula  m.,  rice. 


tatas  adv.,  thence,  therefore;  there- 
upon. 
tatra  adv.,  there,  thither. 
tatlid  adv.,  in  that  way,  so. 
tad  nom.  and  ace.  s.  n.  to  ta;  as 

adv..  therefore. 
tada  adv.,  then. 
tadyatha  adv.,  namely,  to  wit. 
\  tan  (tanoti,  tanute),  tr.,  stretch, 

extend;    perform    (a   sacrifice); 

Yd  cause,  bring  about;  — 

-f  pra  extend. 
\/tap  (tdpati,    -te),  tr.   and  intr., 

burn;  pain;  in  pass.,  suffer,  do 

penance. 
tapas  n.,  heat;  self-torture. 
tapasvin  a.,  practising  ascetism ; 

as  m.,  ascetic. 
]/ tam  (tdmyati:  131)  be  sad. 
taru  m.,  tree. 

taruna,  f.  -I,  a.,  young,  delicate. 
tasthivans  pf.  part,  of  stha;  as  n., 

the  immovable. 
tadrg  a.,  such. 
talu  n.,  palate. 
tdvant  adj.,   so  great,   so   much; 

tavat  as  adv.,  so  long,  so  much ; 

often  concessive,  like  done,  dock, 
tiraskarinl  f.,  veil. 
tiryanc  (272)  a.,  going  horizontally; 

as  subst.,  animal. 
tilaka  m.,  ornament  (often  fig.). 
fir  a  n.,  bank,  shore. 
tirtha  n.,  bathing-place;  place  of 

pilgrimage. 
tivra  a.,  great,  strong,  violent. 
tu  conj.,  but,  however. 
\/tud  (tuddti)  push;  strike. 
ytul  (toldyati)  weigh. 


202 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


y'tus  (tusyati)  rejoice,  take  pleasure 

in  (w.  instr.). 
y'tr  (tdrali)  cross  over; \-  ava 

descend;  +  ud  emerge;  —  +  pra 

in  caus.  (pratdrdyati),  deceive. 
trtiya,  f.  -d  (335),  a.,  third. 
V  trp  (tfpyati)  satisfy  oneself. 
trsnd  f.,  thirst,  desire. 
tejasvin  a.,  courageous. 
\/tyaj   (tydjati)    leave,   abandon; 

+  pari  leave  off,  give  up. 
trayodaga  (332)  num.,  thirteen. 
tri  (332)  num.,  three. 
tringat  (332)  num.,  thirty. 
triloka  n. ,    -kl  f. ,    the  threefold 

world. 
trivrt  a.,  triple,  threefold. 
trigtrsan  a.,  three-headed. 
tristubh  f.,  name  of  a  metre. 
tryaglti  num.,  eighty-three. 
tva  stem  of  pron.  of  2d  pers.  (226 ; 

cf.  352.  4). 
tvad  so-called  stem  of  pron.  tva. 
tvastr  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  god,   Tvastar. 


\/ dang  (ddgati)  bite. 

danstrd  f.,  tooth. 

daksa  m.,  n.  pr. 

daksina  a.,  right-hand;  southern. 

danda  m.,  stick;  punishment. 

y dandaya  (den.:  danddyati)  pun- 
ish. 

dadhan  (dadhi:  275)  n.,  curds. 

dadhyanc  (weakest  -d/ric)  m.,  n.  pr. 

]/  dam  (damyati :  131)  control ;  caus. 
(damdyati)  tame;  compel. 

dayd  f.,  compassion,  pity. 

daridra  a.,  poor. 

dargana  n.,  philosophical  system. 


daga  (332)  num.,  ten. 

dagaratha  m.,  n.  pr. 

dasta  part,  of  dang. 

]/ dah  (ddhati)  burn. 

j/lrfd  (dddati,  datte :  436)  give;  in 
caus.  (ddpdyati)  make  give  or 

pay; Yd  take  (312);  —  +pra 

entrust;  give  in  marriage. 

]/  2da  (dydti :  132)  cutj  qvve 

ddtr  m.,  giver;  as  adj.  (204),  gen- 
erous. 

ddna  n.,  gift,  present;  generosity. 

ddnava  m.,  demon. 

ddsa  m.,  slave,  groom. 

ddsi  f.,  female  slave,  servant. 

dina  n.,  day. 

div  (277)  f.  (rarely  m.),  sky. 

divasa  m.,  day. 

divya  a.,  heavenly,  divine. 

y/ dig  (digdti)  show,  point  out;  — 
4-  a  command ;  —  +  upa  teach, 
instruct. 

dig  f. ,  point,  cardinal  point; 
quarter,  region ;  direction. 

j/  dih  (degdhi :  428)  smear. 

dlrgha  a.,  long;  —  am  adv.,  afar. 

dlrghdyus  a.,  long-lived. 

Y  div  (divyati)  play. 

\  du  (dunoti),  intr.,  burn,  feel  dis- 
tressed; tr.,  distress  (ace). 

duhkha  n.,  misery ;  misfortune. 

dugdha  n.,  milk. 

durjana  m.,  scamp,  rogue. 

durdagd  L,  misfortune. 

durlabha  a.,  hard  to  find  or  reach; 
difficult. 

\'  dus  (dusyati)  be  defiled. 

dusprayukta  a.,  badly  arranged. 

dus&anta  m.,  n.  pr. 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


203 


dus  insep.  prefix,  bad;  hard. 

yduh  (dogdhi,  dugdhe:  428)  milk. 

dukitr  f.,  daughter. 

duta  m.,  messenger,  envoy. 

|/ dr  in  caus.  (ddrdyati)  +  vi  tear 

open. 
\'drg  (127)  see;  cans,  (dargdyati) 

show ;     pass,    (drgydte)    seem, 

look. 
drf  f.,  look,  glance;  eye. 
deva    m.,    god;    f.    -I,    goddess; 

queen. 
devakl  f.,  n.  pr. 
devakula  n.,  temple. 
devata  f.,  divinity,  deity, 
ctefa  m.,  region,  land. 
ddiva,  f.  -i,  divine. 
dosa  m.,  fault. 
dyuti  f.,  brilliancy. 
dravya  n.,  property ;  object. 
drastr  m.,  seer;  author  (ofVedic 

hymns,  etc.). 
X1  dru  (drdvati)  run. 
\S  druh  (driihyati)  be  hostile,  offend. 
d«a  (332)  num.,  two. 
dvahstha  m.,  doorkeeper. 
dvdr  f.,  door,  gate. 
<fo?/a  m.,  Aryan. 
dvijdti  m.,  Aryan. 
dvitlya  (335)  a.,  second. 
dvipad  (282)  a.,  biped. 
|/dn'.s  (dvesti,  dviste)  hate; h 

pra  hate  extremely. 
dvis  m.,  enemy. 
dvis  adv.,  twice. 
dvlpin  m.,  panther. 


dhona  n.,  money,  riches. 
dhanin  a.,  wealthy. 


dhanus  n.,  bow. 

dharma  m.,  right;  law;  virtue. 

j  lrf^a  (dddhdti,  dhatte :  435)  put, 
place;    —  +   opt  close,    cover, 

keep  shut; yd  put  on;  mid., 

receive;  —  +  sam-d  lay  or  place 
on;  —  -f  ni  lay  down;  —  -f 
pari  in  caus.  (-dhdpdyati),  make 
put  on,  clothe  in  (two  ace); 
—  +  vi  arrange,  ordain;  —  + 
sam  put  together,  unite;  lay  on. 

\/2dhd  (dhdyati:  126)  suck. 

dhdtr  m.,  creator. 

dhdnya  n.,  grain. 

dhdrmika  a.,  right,  just. 

\' dhav  (dhdvati)  run;  —  +  anu 
run  after. 

dhdvana  n.,  running;  course. 

dhl  {.,  understanding,  insight. 

dhimant  a.,  wise,  prudent. 

dhlra  a.,  steadfast,  firm,  brave. 

V dhu  (dhunoti,  dhunute:  391), 
shake. 

\'  dhr  in  caus.  (dhdrdyati)  bear. 

dhrti  f.,  firmness;  courage. 

dhenu  f.,  cow. 

dhdirya  n.,  steadfastness. 

]/ dhyd  (dhydyati)  think,  ponder. 


na  adv.,  not ;  with  opt.,  cf.  207. 

naksatra  n.,  lunar  mansion. 

nagara  n.,  -I  f.,  city. 

nadl  f.,  river. 

I  nand  (ndndati,  -te)  +  abhi  re- 
joice in,  greet  joyfully  (ace). 

\'nam  (ndmati),  intr.,  bow,  bend; 
tr.,  honor,  reverence  (ace). 

namas  n.,  honor,  glory. 

nara  m.,  man  (vir  and  homo). 


204 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


naraka  m.,  hell. 

narmada  f.,  n.pr.,  a  river  in  India. 

nala  in.,  n.  pr. 


nava  a.,  new. 


nava  (332)  num.,  nine. 

navati  (332)  num.,  ninety. 

navadaga  (332)  num.,  nineteen. 

navlna  a.,  new. 

]/nap  (ndgyati)  perish;  —  +  vi 
perish;  disappear. 

X'nah  (ndhyati)  bind;  —  +  sam 
gird,  equip  oneself. 

ndga  m.,  snake. 

ndtaka  n.,  drama,  play. 

ndraan  n.,  name;  ndma  adv.,  by 
name. 

ndri  f.,  woman,  wife. 

ndll  f.,  pipe,  conduit. 

ndga  m.,  destruction. 

ni  adv.,  down;  in,  into. 

nitya  a.,  constant;  daily;  -am  as 
adv.,  always,  daily. 

nidega  m.,  command. 

\fnind  (nindati)  blame. 

nipuna  a.,  shrewd,  skilled. 

niyata,  part,  of  ni-yam,  ordain- 
ed, fixed,  permanent. 

nirdaya  a.,  pitiless. 

nirvrti  f.,  contentment,  happiness. 

nis  adv.,  out,  forth. 

nigcaya  m.,  decision,  certainty. 

\fnl  (ndyati;  caus.  ndydyati)  lead, 

guide ; 1-  opa  lead  away ;  — 

+  a  bring;  —  4-  upa  introduce, 
consecrate,  initiate;  —  +  nis 
bring  to  an  end,  determine, 
settle;  —  +  pari  lead  about; 
marry. 

nlca  a.,  low. 


niti  f.,  conduct  of  life;  ethics,  pol- 
itics. 
niruj  a.,  healthy,  well. 
nilakantha  m.,  to.  pr, 
\/nrt  (nftyati)  dance. 
nrtta  n.,  dance,  dancing. 
nrpa  m.,  king. 
nrpati  m.,  king. 
netr  m.,  leader. 

netra  n.,  leading-rope,  cord;  eye. 
nau  f.,  ship. 
nyanc  (272)  a.,  low. 
nydya  m.,  logic. 
nydyya  a.,  right,  proper. 


paksa  tn.,  wing,  side;  party. 
paksin  m.,  bird. 
panka  n.,  mud,  bog. 
|/pac  (pdcati)  cook. 
panca  (332)  num.,  five. 
pancadaga  (332)  num.,  fifteen. 
pancapanedga  (334)  a.,  fifty-fifth. 
panedgat  (332)  num.,  fifty. 
l/pa£  (pdtdyatt)  split  open. 
pa£u  a.,  skilled. 
l/pa^A  (pdthati)  recite,  read, 
pam  m.  pi.,  n.pr.,  certain  demons. 
pandita  m.,  learned  man;  pandit. 
)/pat  (pdtati)  fall,    fly; \-  ud 

fly  up. 

pati  (274)  m.,  lord,  master;  hus- 
band. 

pattra  n„  leaf,  letter. 

patnl  f.,  wife,  consort. 

pathi  same  as  panthan. 

pathya  a.,  wholesome. 

parf  (282)  m.,  foot. 

\/pad  (pddyate)  go; f-  v?'-«  in 

caus.    (vydpdddyati)  kill; H 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


205 


nis  (nifpddyate)  grow,  arise  from 

(abl.); \-  pra  flee  for  refuge 

to  (ace.). 
pada  n.,  step;  place. 
padma  m.  n.,  lotus. 
panthan  (278)  m.,  road,  path. 
payas  n.,  milk. 

para (233)  a.,  chief,  highest;  other. 
paramatman  m.,  the  world-spirit 
para^u  m.,  axe. 
para  adv.,  to  a  distance,  away. 
pari  adv.,  round  about,  around. 
parivrdj  (247,  2)  m.,    wandering 

ascetic. 
parisad  f.,  assembly. 
parvata  m.,  mountain. 
V paldy  (pdldyate:  cf.  p.  116,  note) 

flee. 
V 'pa?  (pdgyati:  127)  see. 
pa^u  in.,  beast. 
pagedt  adv.,  behind  (w.  gen.). 
\/\pd  (pibati:  102)  drink;    caus. 

(paydyati)  give  to  drink,  water. 
\/2pd  (pali)  protect;  caus.  pdld- 

yati)  idem. 
pdtaliputra    n.,    n.    pr.,    the  city 

Patna. 
pdtha  m.,  lecture,  lesson. 
pdni  m.,  hand. 
pdnini  m.,  n.  pr. 
pdndava  m.,  descendant  of  Pandu. 
pdtaka  n.,  crime,  sin. 
pdtra  n.,  pot,  vessel. 
pada  m.,  foot ;  quarter ;  ray,  beam. 
papa  a.,  bad;  as  n.  subst.,  sin. 
pdrthiva  m.,  prince. 
pdrvatl  f.,  n.  pr. 
palana  n.,  protection. 
pd$a  m.,  noose,  cord,  snare. 


pdgupalya  n.,  cattle-raising. 

pitr  m.,  father;  du.,  parents;  pi., 
Manes. 

\/pis  (pindsti)  grind,  crush. 

y  pi  same  as  pyd. 

plna  part,  of  pi,  fat. 

]/ptd  (piddyafi)  torment,  vex. 

purhs  same  as  pumdm. 

punya  a.,  meritorious,  holy,  aus- 
picious; as  n.,  merit. 

putra  m.,  son ;  -tri  f.,  daughter. 

punar  adv.,  again,  but. 

pumans  (279)  m.,  man,  male. 

pur  f.,  city. 

purd  adv.,  earlier,  formerly. 

pur  ana,  f.  -a  and  -I,  a.,  former, 
ancient;  as  n.,  one  of  a  class  of 
works  on  the  creation,  etc. 

purusa  m.,  man  (homo). 

pururavas  m.,  n.  pr.,  Pururavas. 

purohita  m.,  domestic  priest. 

pidinda  m.,n.  pr.,  a  tribe  in  India. 

\lpus  (pusndti)  make  increase  or 
grow. 

pusta  part,  of  pus,  stout,  fat. 

puspa  n.,  flower. 

pustaka  n.,  book  (manuscript).    ■ 

y ' pu  (pundti,  puntte)  clean. 

ypuj  (pujdyati)  honor. 

pura  m.,  flood,  high-water. 

puru  m.,  n,  pr. 

pumn  (284)  m.,  n.  pr.,  Ptisan, 
the  Sun-god. 

prthivl  f.,  earth,  ground. 

prthu  a.,  broad,  wide. 

prthvi  f.,  earth. 

prthvirdja  m.,  n.  pr. 

\'\pr  (ptparti)  fill.  ,V")p>;  fpaV^/^^'    i?t/6« 

po?aka  m.,  supporter,  maintainer. 


206 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


pdutra  m.,  grandson. 

pdura  m.,  citizen. 

\'pyd  (pydyate)  swell,  get  stout. 

pra  adv.,  forward,  forth. 

prakdgxn  a.,  bright,  glistening; 
act.,  illuminating. 

\/prach  (prcchdti)  ask,  ask  about. 

praja  f.,  creature,  subject. 

prati  adv.  and  prep.,  back,  back 
again ;  towards  (postpos. ,  w. 
ace.). 

pratikula  a.,  unfavorable. 

pratyanc  (272)  a.,  backward,  west- 
ward. 

pratyaham  adv.,  daily. 

\lprath  in  caus.  (prathdyati), 
spread;  proclaim. 

pralhama  (335)  a.,  first. 

prabhdva  m.,  might,  power. 

prabhuta  a.,  much ;  many. 

pramatta  a.,  careless. 

praydga  m.,  n.  j)r.,  Allahabad. 

prayukta  part,  of  pra-yuj. 

prayoktr  m.,  arranger,  user. 

pralaya  m.,  destruction. 

pragna  m.,  question. 

prasanna,  part,  of  pra-sad,  well- 
disposed. 

prahdra  m.,  stroke,  shot;  wound. 

prdnc  (272)  forward,  eastward. 

prdna  m.,  often  pi.,  breath,  life. 

prdnin  m.,  living  creature. 

prdtar  adv.,  early,  in  the  morning. 

prdyagcitta  n.,  penance,  expiation. 

prdyena  adv.,  commonly. 

prdsdda  m.,  palace. 

pn?/a  a.,  dear. 

priyakarman  a.,  kind. 

priyavdc  a.,  saying  pleasant  things, 


sociable. 

priyavddin  a.,  idem. 

V'jjri   (prindti,  prtnlte),  act.,  de- 
light; mid.,  rejoice;  caus.  (pri- 
ndyati),  make  glad,  please. 
\/plu  (pldvate)  +  a  drench. 


phala  n.,  fruit,  reward. 
phalavant  a.,  fruitful. 


]' bandh  (badhndti,  badhnlte)  bind; 

entangle,     catch;     join;     com- 
pose. 
bandhu  m.,  relative. 
bala  n.,  strength,  might. 
balavant  a.,  strong,  mighty. 
balistha  a.,  strongest. 
bahu  a.,  much,  many. 
bdla  a.,  young;  as  m.,  child,  boy; 

f.  -a,  girl. 
bdspa  m.,  tear,  tears. 
bdhu  m.,  arm. 
bindu  m.,  drop. 
buddha  part,  of  ftucM,  awakened ; 

enlightened. 
buddhi  f.,  prudence,  intelligence. 
buddhimant  a.,  prudent. 
Y budh  (bodhati,  -te  ;  budhyati,-te), 

wake ;  know. 
budha  m.,  wise  man,  sage. 
brahmacarya  n.,  life   of  holiness, 

esp.  religious  studentship. 
brahmacdrin  a.,   studying  sacred 

knowledge;     as    m. ,    Brahman 

student. 
brahman  n.,  devotion;  sacred  word 

(of    God);    sacred    knowledge; 

world-spirit. 
brahman  (a  personification  oibrd- 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


207 


hman)m.,  the  supreme  All-Soul; 

Brahma,  the  Creator. 
brahmahan  (283)   m. ,    killing    a 

Brahman. 
brahmana  m.,  priest,  Brahman. 
y'bru  (braviti,  brute),  speak,  say; 

\pra  explain,  teach,  announce; 

—  +vi  explain,  announce. 


bhakta  a.,  devoted,  true. 
bhakti  f.,  devotion;  honor. 
\'bhaks  (bhaksdyati)  eat. 
bhaksana  n.,  eating. 
bhagavant  a.,  honorable,  blessed. 
y'bhaj  (bhdjati,  -te)  divide;  —  +vi 

distribute. 
\'bhanj  (bhandkti)  break,  destroy. 
bhadra  a.,  good,  pleasant;  as  n., 

fortune. 
bhaya  n.,  fear. 

bharatakhanda  m.,  n.  pr.,  India. 
bliartr  m.,  supporter;  preserver; 

lord,  master;  husband. 
bhava  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  name  of  Civa. 
bhavant,  f.  bhavati;  in  voc.  bhos, 

f.  bhavati;    used    in    respectful 

address  instead  of  pronoun  of 

2nd  person.    Cf.  §  264. 
bhasman  n.,  ashes. 
]  bhd  (bhkti)  gleam,    glance;    — 

-I-  a  or  vi  idem. 
bhdga  m.,  part,  piece,  share. 
-bhaj  a.,  sharing. 
bhanu  m.,  sun. 
bhara  m.,  burden. 
bharyd  f.,  wife,  woman. 
\  bhds  (bhdsate)  speak;  —  +prati 

answer  (ace.  of  pers.); \-sam 

converse. 


bhdm  f.,  speech,  language. 
bhdwant  a.,  shining,  brilliant. 
\'  bhiks  (bhiksate)  beg,  get  by  beg- 
ging- 
bhiksd  f.,  alms. 

bhiksu  m.,  beggar;  ascetic. 
}'bhid  (bhindtti,  bhinddhe)  split. 
\'bhl  (bibheti)  fear;  in  caus.  (bh'i- 

sdyate,  bhdydyate)  terrify. 
[  2bhuj   (bhundkti,     bhunkte)    eat, 

enjoy;  caus.  (bhojdyati)  feed ;  — 

+  upa  enjoy. 
-bhuj  a.,  enjoying. 
bhujyu  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  Vedic  persorf. 
bhuvana  n.,  world. 
\/bhu  (bhavati,    -te)  become;  be, 

exist;    —    +   abhi    overpower; 

—  +  pari    despise; 1-  pra 

arise;  be  mighty,  rule;  valere. 
bhu  f.,  earth,  ground. 
bhuta   part,  of  bhu;  as  n.  subst., 

being,  creature. 
bhuti  f.,  prosperity,  blessing. 
bhubhuj  m.,  king. 
bhubhrt  m.,  king;  mountain. 
bhumi  f.,  earth,  ground,  land. 
bhuyas  (340)  comp.    adj.,    more; 

-yas  adv.,  mostly. 
bhusana  n.,  ornament. 
\  bhr  (bhdrati,  -te)  support  (lit.  and 

fig')- 
bhrgukaccha  n.,  n.  pr.,  Baroch,  a 

holy  place  in  India. 

bhrtaka  m.,  servant. 

bhrtya  m.,  servant. 

bhr^am  adv.,  greatly,  much. 

bheka  m.,  frog. 

bhoga  m.,  enjoyment. 

bhojana  n.,  meal. 


208 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


bhos  see  bhavant. 

)'bhram  (bhrdmyati :  131)   wander 

about,  flit ; 1-  pari  idem. 

bhrdtr  m.,  brother. 
bhru  f.,  eyebrow. 


maksikd  f.,  fly,  gnat. 

maghavan  (270)  m.,  Indra. 

I  majj  (mdjjati)  sink ;  —  +  ni  id  em. 

mani  m.,  jewel. 

mati  {.,  mind. 

matimant  a.,  shrewd,  prudent. 

matsya  m.,  fish. 

mathi  same  as  manthan. 

mad  called    stem    of   aham;    cf. 

352,  4. 
\/mad  (mddyati)    get    drunk;    — 

+  pra  be  careless. 
madhu  n.,  honey. 
madhuparka  m.,  sweet  drink. 
madhulih  m.,  bee. 
madhyaa.,  middle;  as  n.,  middle; 

waist. 
]/man  (mdnyate;    manute)  think, 

suppose ; 1-  sam  honor. 

manas  n.,  mind. 
manusya  m.,  man  (homo), 
manoratha  m.,  wish. 
manohara  a.,  agreeable;  entranc- 
ing. 
mantra    m.,    sacred    text;    spell, 

charm. 
mantrin  m.,  minister;  councillor. 
\' manth  (mathnati)  stir. 
manthan  (278)  m.,  stirring-stick. 
mandara  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  mountain. 
marana  n.,  death. 
marut  m.,  wind;   pi.,   n.  pr,,  the 

Storm-gods. 


mastaka  n.,  head. 

mahant  (261)  a.,  great. 

mahdnasa  n.,  kitchen. 

mahardja  m.,  great  king. 

mahisa  m.,  n.  pr. 

mahisi  f.,  queen. 

j/lma  (jndti;  mimite:  438)  mea- 
sure;   J-  nis  work,  create. 

m a  adv.  and  conj.,  not;  used  in 
prohibitions,  etc.,  like  Lat.  ne, 
greek  ^uvf;  cf.  195. 

mdhsa  n.,  flesh. 

mdtr  f.,  mother. 

madhurya  n.,  sweetness. 

mdnava  m.,  man  (homo). 

manasa  n.,  sense;  understanding. 

mdnusa,  f.  -£,  human. 

marga  m.,  road,  way,  street. 

mfl/«  f.,  garland. 

fflajB  m.,  month. 

mitra  n.,  friend. 

mitradruh  (249)  a.,  friend-be- 
traying. 

mina  m.,  fish. 

tfmtl  (milati)  wink;  +  ni  close 
the  eyes. 

muktd  f.,  pearl. 

mukti  f.,  salvation,  deliverance. 

mukha  n.,  mouth,  face. 

mukhya  a.,  principal,  first. 

\/muc  (muncdti:  110)  free,  release; 
muktvd,  without  (312). 

]/mud  (modate)  rejoice; h  anu 

allow. 

muni  m.,  sage;  ascetic. 

[' mus  (musndti)  steal,  rob. 

musala  m.  n.,  club,  pestle. 

\/muh  (muhyati)  be  confused  or 
dazed  or  stupid. 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


209 


murdhaga  a.,  on  the  head. 

murdhan  m.,  head. 

mula  n.,  root. 

\'mr  (mriydte:  155)  die;  caus.  (md- 

rdyati)  kill. 
mrga  m.,  wild  animal;  gazelle. 
\lmrgaya    (den.:   mrgdyate)    hunt 

for,  seek. 
mryayd  f.,  chase,  hunting. 
y/mrj  (rndr&ti:  423)    rub,    wipe; 

caus.  (mdrjdyati)  rub  off,  polish; 

h  apa,  pari  or  pra,  wipe  off. 

mrta,  part,  of  mr,  dead,  fallen. 

mrtyu  m.,  death. 

»nrrf  f.,  earth,  dirt. 

mekhala  f.,  girdle. 

megha  m.,  cloud. 

moksa  m.,  deliverance;  salvation. 

»<o/ja  m.,  infatuation. 


ya  (231)  rel.  pron.,  used  as  subst. 
and  adj.,  who,  which,  what;  cf. 
234  ff. 

V  yaj  (ydjati,  -te)  sacrifice  (ace. 
pers.,  instr.  rei);  caus.  (ydjd- 
yati)  make  to  sacrifice,  offer  sa- 
crifice for  (ace). 

yajus  n.,  sacrificial  formula,  text. 

yajna  m.,  sacrifice. 

yajniya  a.,  suitable  for  sacrificing. 

y'yat  (ydtate)  strive  after  (dat.). 

yatas  adv.,  whence;  wherefore. 

yati  m.,  ascetic. 

yatna  m.,  exertion. 

yatra  adv.,  where,  whither. 

yathd  adv.,  in  which  way ;  as. 

yadd  adv.,  when,  if. 

yadi  adv.,  if. 

•\Jyam  (ydechati:  100)  furnish,  give ; 

Perry,  Sanskrit  Primer.     P* 


(-  ud  undertake ; \-  ni  or- 
dain, fix,  appoint. 

yamundf.,  n.  pr.,  the  river  Jumna. 

yavana  m.,  Greek,  barbarian. 

yapas  n.,  glory,  fame. 

yasti  f.,  stick,  staff. 

\' yd  (ydti)  go;  with  abstracts, 
come  into  such  and  such  a  state; 

—  +  a  approach. 

ydtrdt,  march,  journey ;  support. 
ydma  m.,  watch  of  the  night. 
ydvant  a. ,   how  much   or  many ; 

ydvat  as  adv.,  as  long  as,  while; 

as  soon  as. 
yuga  n.,  age  of  the  world. 
yugma  n.,  pair. 
Vyuj  (yundkti,  yunkte)  join,  yoke, 

harness;  caus.  (yojdyati)  idem; 

h  ni  place,  appoint,  establish ; 

—  +  pra  arrange ;  use. 
yuddha  n.,  battle. 

\yudh  (yudhyate)  fight  (instr.). 
yuvati  f.  to  yuvan. 
yuvan  (269)  a.,  young;  f.  yuvati. 
yusmad  called  stem  of  yuya?n;  as 

stem  in  cpds.  (352,  4.),  you. 
yupa  m.,  sacrificial  post. 
yuyam  (226)  pron.,  you. 


yraks  (rdksati)  protect. 

raksana  n.,  protection. 

raksitr  m.,  protector. 

y'rac  (racdyati)  arrange,  compose 

(a  literary  work). 
rajju  f.,  cord, 
j  ranj  +  anu  (anurdjyati ,  -te)   be 

inclined  or  devoted  to  Hoc). 
rana  m.  n.,  battle. 
ratna  n.,  jewel. 

14 


210 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


ratha  m.,  wagon. 

rathya  f.,  street. 

\/rabh  (rdbhate)  grasp;  —  -fa 
take  hold  on,  begin. 

\/ram  (rdmate)  amuse  oneself;  — 
+  vi  (virdmati)  cease  (abl.). 

rapmi  m.,  ray ;  rein. 

rasa  m.,  taste,  feeling. 

raxavant  a.,  tasteful. 

raksasa  m.,  demon. 

\/rdj  (rdjati,  -te)  direct,  rule; 
shine;  be  illustrious. 

rajan  m.,  king. 

rajya  n.,  kingdom. 

ratri  f.,  night. 

\'  rddh  (radhnoti)  succeed  ;  —  -f  apa 
do  wrong. 

rdma  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  hero. 

ramdyana  n.,  a  noted  poem. 

ravana  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  demon. 

rap  m.,  heap. 

\iru  (rduti:  410)  cry,  scream;  — 
-f  vi  idem. 

\/ruc  (rocate)   please  (dat.,  gen.). 

ruj  f.,  sickness,  disease. 

yrud  (roditi:  429)  weep. 

ruddha,  part,  of  rudh ,  besieged, 
surrounded;  suffused. 

\/rudh  (rundddhi,  runddhe)  ob- 
struct, check,  besiege; \-  upa 

besiege. 

rudhira  n.,  blood. 

}/ruh  (rohati)  rise,  spring  up, 
grow;  caus.  (roJidyati,  ropdyati) 
make  rise  or  grow,  plant;  — 
+  ava  descend;  —  +  a  climb, 
mount,  ascend ;  —  +  pra  grow 
up. 

ruksa  a.,  harsh,  rough. 


rupa  n.,  form,  beauty. 
rupaka  n.,  gold-piece. 
rat  (277)  m.,  rarely  f.,  possessions, 

wealth. 
rohini  {.,  n.  pr. 


laksa  n.,  a  hundred  thousand. 

laksmi  (276)  f. ,  goddess  of  for- 
tune. 

]  lag  (lagati)  attach,  hang,    cling. 

laghu,  f.  -ghu  or  -ghvt,  a.,  light; 
small,  little. 

lanka  f.,  n.  pr.,  Ceylon. 

\  lap  (lapati)  prate; \-  vi  com- 
plain. 

[  labh  (Idbhate)  receive,  take; 
caus.  (lambhdyati)  make  receive, 
give. 

lalata  n.,  forehead. 

lavana  n.,  salt. 

Jangala  n.,  plough. 

labha  rn.,  acquisition,  gain. 

]/  likh  (likhdti)  scratch,  write. 

]/ lip  (limpdti)  smear. 

\'lih  (ledhi,  lidhe:  427)  lick;  — 
+  ava  idem. 

X'lunth  (lunthdyati)  +  nis  rob. 

\;lup  (lumpdti)  break  to  pieces; 
devastate ;  plunder. 

j  lubh  (lubhyati)  covet  (dat,  loc). 

lekhana  n.,  writing,  copying. 

loka  m.,  world ;  sing,  and  pi., 
people. 

lobha  m.,  desire,  avarice. 

loman  n.,  hair. 

loha  n.,  metal;  iron. 


vahga  m.,  race,  family. 
vakra  a.,  crooked,  bent. 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


211 


vaksas  n.,  chest,  hreast. 

\/vac  (vdkti:  415)  speak,  say; 
name;  caus.  (vdcdyati)  make  (a 
written  leal)  speak,  i.  e.  read. 

vanij  m.,  merchant. 

vatsa  m.,  calf. 

I'vad  (vddati)  speak,  say;  — 
+  abhi  in  caus.  (abhivdddyati) 
greet;  —  +  vi  (mid.)  dispute, 
argue. 

vadha  in.,  killing,  murder. 

vadhu  f.,  woman ;  wife. 

vana  n.,  woods,  forest. 

vanavdsin  a.,  forest-dwelling. 

]/  vand  (validate)  greet,  honor. 

\!vap  (vdpati)  scatter;  sow. 

vapus  n.,  body;  figure. 

vayam  (223)  pron.,  we. 

vayas  n.,  age. 

lvard  m.,  suitor,  bridegroom. 

2vdra  m.,  choice,  privilege;  favor. 

Zvara  a.,  best;  better  (w.  abl. : 
than). 

vardha  m.,  boar. 

varuna  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  god. 

varna  m.,  color ;  caste. 

\  varnaya  (varndyati)  describe, 
portray. 

vartin  a.,  abiding,  being. 

varsa  n.,  year. 

vallabha  a.,  dear. 

\  ra<;  (vdsti)  wish. 

\'vas  (vdsati)  dwell; \-  ni  in- 
habit, dwell ; V  pra  go  away 

on  a  journey;  —  +  prati  in- 
habit. 

vasati  f.,  dwelling. 

vasu  n.,  wealth,  money. 

vasudeva  m.,  n.  pr. 


vastra  n.,  garment. 

y'vah  (ydhati)  tr. ,  carry,  bear; 
intr.,  proceed;  flow;  blow. 

vd  encl.,  or. 

vac  f.,  voice ;  word. 

vdcya  a.,  blameworthy,  culp- 
able. 

vanijya  n.,  trade. 

vata  m.,  wind. 

vdnaprastha  m.,  a  Brahman  in 
the  third  stage  of  his  life. 

vapi  f.,  cistern. 

vdyasa  m.,  crow. 

vayu  m.,  wind. 

vari  n.,  water. 

vi  adv.,  apart,  away,  out. 

vinca  (334)  a.,  twentieth. 

vincati  (332)  num.,  twenty. 

vincatitama  (334)  a.,  twentieth. 

vikramdditya  a.,  n.  pr.,  a  king. 

\/vij  (vijdti)  tremble; h  ud  in 

caus.  (udvejdyati)  terrify. 

tu'tta  n.,  possessions;  wealth. 

\/vid  (vetti;  veda:  416 — 417)  know, 
consider;  caus.  (veddyati)  inform 
(dat.); h  ni  caus.,  idem. 

\/2vid  (vinddti,  -te)  find,  acquire. 

-vid  a.,  knowing. 

vidya  f.,  knowledge,  learning. 

vidoans  a.,  knowing,  wise. 

vidvista  pass.  part,  of  vi-dvi§, 
detested. 

vidhi  m.,  rule,  fate;  Brahma. 

vidheya  a.,  obedient. 

vinaya  m.,  obedience. 

Btnfi  prep.,  without  (with  instr. 
or  ace,  often  postpos). 

vipaka  m.,  ripening;  recompense. 

vipra  m.,  Brahman. 
14* 


212 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


vibhu,  f.  -bhvi,  a.  pervading,  far- 
reaching;   omnipresent,  mighty. 

vivdha  m.,  wedding,  marriage. 

vivekin  a.,  shrewd. 

[/vig  (vigdti)  enter;  —  +  sam-d 
approach;  —  +  upa  seat  one- 
self;   1-  pra  enter,  penetrate. 

vig  m.  pi.,  people;  the  Vaicya- 
caste. 

vigista  part,  of  vi-gis,  excellent, 
remarkable. 

vigruta  part,  of  vi-gru,  famous. 

vigva  (231)  a.,  all  (Vedic). 

vigvdsa  m.,  trust,  confidence. 

visa  n.,  poison. 

visnu  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  god. 

vihaga  m.,  bird. 

vihita  part,  of  vi-dhd,  ordained. 

]/  lvr  (vrnoti,  vrnute)  cover,  sur- 
round ; 1-  d  cover ; r  apa-d 

open ; f-  vi  explain ;  manifest ; 

1-  sam  shut. 

\/ 2vr  (vrnlte  ;  vardyati,  -te)  choose, 
select. 

vrka  m.,  wolf. 

vrksa  m.,  tree.  ,^ 

yvrt  (vdrtate) turn;  exist,  subsist, 
be, become;  —  +m return  home; 

\-pra  get  a-going,  break  out, 

arise;  continue;  caus.  (act.)  con- 
tinue (trans.). 

vrtta  n.,  conduct. 

vrttdnta  ra. ,  state  of  affairs ; 
news. 

vrtra  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  demon. 

rrddha  part,  of  vrdh,  old. 

]/  vrdh  (vdrdhate)  grow ;  caus. 
(vardhdyati ,  -te)  make  grow; 
bring  up. 


[  vrs  (vdrsati)  rain ,  give  rain  ; 
fig.,  shower  down;   overwhelm. 

veda  m.,  science,  knowledge;  esp. 
sacred  knowledge,  holy  writ. 

vedand  f.,  pain. 

veddnta  m. ,  a  system  of  philo- 
sophy. 

vedi  f.,  altar. 

vdi  assev.  particle,  to  be  sure,  in 
sooth;  often  untranslated. 

vdigya  m.,  man  of  the  third  caste. 

vyanjana  n.,  spice. 

yvyath  in  caus.  (vyathdyati)  tor- 
ment. 

y'vyadh  (vidhyati)  hit,  pierce. 

vyal'ika  a.,  false,  wrong. 

vyavahdra  m.,  trial,  law  -suit;  trade. 

vydkarana  n.,  grammar. 

vydghra  m.,  tiger. 

vyddha  m.,  hunter. 

vyddhi  m.,  disease,  illness. 

vyddhita  a.,  sick,  ill. 

vyasa  m.,  n.  pr. 

\/vraj  (vrdjati,  -te)  proceed;  — 
-f  wander  forth ;  become  an  as- 
cetic. 

vrana  m.,  wound. 

vrata  n.,  vow,  obligation;  duty. 


]/gans  (gdnsati)  praise;  proclaim; 

\-  pra  proclaim. 

\'gak  (gaknoti)be  able;  sometimes 

pass.,  cf.  322. 
gaka  m.,  Scythian. 
gakata  m.,  car. 
gakuntald  f.,  n.  pr. 
gankd  f.,  hesitation. 
gata  (332-333)  n.,  a  hundred. 
gatatama  a.,  hundredth. 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


213 


gatru  m.,  enemy. 

gabda  m.,  sound,  noise,  word. 

y gam    (gdmyati)    become    quiet, 
be  extinguished,  go  out. 

gayyd  f.,  bed,  couch. 

gara  m.,  arrow. 

garana  n.,  protection. 

garad  f.,  autumn;  year. 

garlra  n.,  body. 

garva  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  name  of  Qiva. 

fafc/?a  f.,  branch;  edition,  red- 
action. 

gdnti  f.,  repose. 

j/pds  (paste)  command;  rule;  pun- 
ish. 

gdstr  m.,  governor,  punisher. 

gdstra  n.,  science;  text-book. 

V'piArs  (giksate)  learn. 

gikhara  m.,  summit. 

p?'ras  n.,  head. 

firaa.,  beneficent, gracious;  bless- 
ed; as  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  god. 

gigu  m.,  child. 

\'  gis  (gindsti)  leave,  leave  remain- 
ing; —  +  ava  remain  over,  sur- 
vive; —  +  ud  idem;  —  +vi  set 
apart,  distinguish. 

gisya  m.,  pupil,  scholar. 

y  gl  (gete:  409)  lie;  sleep;  — 
+  adhi  lie  asleep  on  (ace). 

git  a  a.,  cold. 

]/ guc  (gocati)  grieve,  sorrow. 

guci  a.,  pure,  clean. 

gunahgepa  m.,  n.  pr. 

]/  gubh  (gdbhate)  be  brilliant,  shine. 

gubha  a.,  good;  splendid. 

\;  gus  (gusyati)  dry  up. 

gudra  m.,  man  of  the  fourth  caste. 

gudratva  n.,  condition  of  a  Cudra. 


gura  m.,  hero. 

grgala  m.,  jackal. 

gem  m.  n.,  rest,  remainder. 

gesa  m.,  a  fabulous  snake  sup- 
porting the  earth. 

}/ gram  (grdmyali:  131)  become 
weary. 

grama  m.,  pains,  trouble. 

grdddha  n.,  oblation  to  the  Manes 
(cf.  in  Voc.  16). 

}/ gri  +  d  (dgrdyate)  go  for  pro- 
tection, take  refuge  with  (ace). 

grl  f.,    luck,    fortune,   riches;  as  |>(ess 
n.  pr.,  goddess  of  fortune ;  as 
prefix  to  proper  names,  famous, 
honorable,  etc. 

grlmant  a.,  rich ;  famous. 

\ ' gru  (grnoti,  grnute:  391)  hear;  in 
caus.  (gravdyatf)  make  hear,  i.  e. 
recite,  proclaim  (ace.  pers.). 

gruta  part,  of  gru;  as  n.,  learning. 

gruti  f.,  hearing;  holy  writ. 

greyas  a.,  better;  best;  greyas  as 
n.,  salvation. 

gvan  (269)  m.,  dog. 

gvagura  m.,  father-in-law. 

gvagru  f.,  mother-in-law. 

gvas  adv.,  to-morrow. 

y  gvas  (gvdsiti :  429)  breathe ;  — 
■\-sam-d  breathe  gently:  revive; 

\-vi  be  confident;  trust  (gen. 

or  loc.). 

gveta  a.,  white. 


sattringat  (329)  num.,  thirty-six. 
sadag'iti  (329)  num.,  eighty-six. 
sas  (332)  num.,  six. 
sasti  (332)  num.,  sixty. 
j  saslha,  f.  -7  (334),  a.,  sixth. 


214 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


sodaca  (332)  num.,  sixteen. 


samyukta  part,  of  sam-yuj,  pro- 
vided with. 

sairwatsara  m.,  year. 

sampaya  m.,  doubt. 

sakrt  adv.,  once. 

sakthan  (sakthi:  275)  n.,  thigh. 

sakhi  (274)  m.,  friend. 

sakhi  f.,  female  companion,  friend. 

sajja  a.,  ready. 

y  sanj  {sdjati ;  sajjdte:  cf.  in  Voc. 
22)  hang  on,  be  fastened  on 
(loc). 

satkdra  m.,  hospitality. 

sattra  n.,  sacrifice. 

mtya  n.,  truth,  righteousness. 

\' sad  (sidati)  sit;  settle  down;  be 

overcome  or  exhausted  ; \-  a 

approach; \-sam-d  seat  one- 
self; caus.  (saddyati)  meet,  en- 
counter;   \-  ni  sit  down;  — 

+  pra  be  favorable. 

sadd  adv.,  always. 

sadrpa,  f.  -e,  a.,  similar;  worthy. 

sathdigdha  a.,  doubtful;  unsteady. 

samdhyd  f.,  twilight. 

sant,  part,  of  las,  being,  existing ; 
good ;  as  m.,  good  man ;  as  f. 
satl,  good  woman,  especially  a 
widow  who  immolates  herself. 

sapta  (332)  num.,  seven. 

saptati  (332)  num.,  seventy. 

saptadapa  (332)  num.,  seventeen. 

sabhd  {.,  council,  meeting,  court. 

sam  adv.,  along  with;  completely. 

samaksam  adv.,  before,  in  the 
presence  of  (gen.). 

samartha  a.,  capable,  able. 


samagama  m.,  meeting,  encounter. 
samdja  m.,  convention,  company. 
samidh  f.,  fagot. 
samlpa  a.,  near;  as  n.,   vicinity, 

nearness,  presence. 
samudra  m.,  ocean. 
samunnati    f. ,    height ,  elevation ; 

high  position. 
sameta  a.,  provided  with. 
sampurna    part,    of    lpr  +  sam, 

full. 
samyak  adv.,  well,  properly. 
samrdj  m.,  great  king;  emperor. 
sarit  f.,  river. 
sarga  m.,  creation. 
sarpa  m.,  snake. 
sarva  (231)  a.,  all. 
sarvatra  a.,  everywhere. 
savitr  m.,  n.  pr.,  the  Sun-god  Sa- 

vitar;  sun. 
l/saA  (sdhate)  endure, 
sa^a  adv.,  together;  prep.,  often 

postpos. ,     with ,     along     with, 

(instr.). 
sahacara   m.,    companion;    -l    f., 

wife. 
sahasa  adv.,  suddenly,  quickly. 
sahasra  n.,  a.,  thousand. 
sahaya  m.,  companion,  helper. 
saksin  m.,  witness. 
sddhana  n.,  means,  device. 
sddhu  m.,  holy  man,  saint. 
sdman  n.,  Vedic   melody,  song; 

pi.,  the  Samaveda. 
sdmanta  in.,  vassal. 
sdmpratam  adv.,  at  present. 
sdijam  adv.,  at  evening. 
sdrasa  m.,  crane. 
smk  m.,  lion. 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


215 


y  sic  (sincdti)  drip,  drop,  moisten  ; 

\-abhi  anoint  as  king. 

yisidh  (sedhati)  repel;  —  +prati 

hold  back;  forbid. 
V  2sidh  (sidkyati)  succeed ;  in  caus. 

(sddhdyati)  perform;  acquire. 
sindhu  m.,  n.  pr.,  the  Indus. 
siman  f.,  border,  boundary;   out- 
skirts. 
su  adv.,  well ;  easy ;  very. 
\  su  (sunoti,  sunute)  press. 
sukha  n.,  fortune,  luck,  happiness. 
sundara,  f.  -z,  a.,  beautiful. 
sumanas  a.,  favorably-minded ;  as 

f.,  flower. 
surdpa  m.,  drunkard. 
suvarna  n.,  gold. 
suhrd  m.,  friend. 
y  su  (sute)  generate,  bring  forth; 

—  +pra  generate. 
sukta  n.,  Vedic  hymn. 
suta  m.,  driver,  charioteer. 
suda  m.,  cook. 
surya  m.,  sun. 
]/ sr (sdrati)  flow;  —  -\-anu  follow 

up; \-apa  go  away;  in  caus. 

(-sdrdyati)  drive  away. 
\/ srj  (srjdti)   let   go,    create;  — 

+  ud  let  loose  or  out ;  raise  (the 

voice,). 
y  srp  (sdrpati)  move ; — \-pra  idem. 
srsti  {.,  creation. 
setu  m.,  bridge,  dike. 
send  f.,  army. 
y'sev  (sevate)  serve,  honor;  —  + 

ni    dwell;    devote    oneself   to; 

attend. 
sdinika  m.,  soldier. 
sdinya  n.,  army. 


soma  m.,  the  intoxicating  ferment- 
ed juice  of  the  Soma-plant. 

skandha  m.,  shoulder. 

y  stu  (stduti:  411)  praise. 

stuti  f.,  song  of  praise;  praise. 

|  str  (strnoti,  strnute;  strnati, 
strnite)  scatter,  strew ;  —  4  upa 
scatter,  bestrew. 

stena  in.,  thief. 

stotra  n.,  song  of  praise. 

strl  (276)  f.,  woman. 

y  sthd  (tisthati)  stand,  intr. ;  be  in 
or  on,  etc.,  be  situated;  caus. 
(sthdpdyati)  put,  place;  appoint; 
stop;  —  +  adhi  mount,  stand 
over;  rule,  govern;  —  +  anu 
follow  out,  accomplish  ;  (cf.  also 

p.  96,  last  note); 1-  ud  arise, 

rise  (cf.  Voc.  40); \-  upa  ap- 
proach, reach;  —  +  pra  mid., 
start  off;  in  caus.  (act.),  send ;  — 
+  sam  in  caus.,  cause  to  remain 

sthdna  n.,  place,  locality;  stead. 

sthita  part,  of  sthd;  cf.  290,  end. 

sthiti  f.,  condition. 

}'  snd  (snati)  bathe. 

sndtaka  m.,  one  who  has  perform- 
ed the  ablutions  customary  at 
the  end  of  religious  pupilage. 

sndna  n.,  bathing,  bath. 

sndyu  m.,  tendon,  bowstring. 

snigdha  part,  of  snih,  affectionate. 

y snih  (snihyati)  feel  inclined  to, 
love  (gen.,  loc). 

snusd  f.,  daughter-in-law. 

y  sprg  (sprgdti)  touch. 

ysprh  (sprhdyati)  desire  (dat.). 

sma  encl.,  slightly  assev. ;  often 
accompanies    a    present    tense, 


216 


I.  Sanskrit-English  Glossary. 


giving  it  the  force  of  an  histor- 
ical tense. 

y  smr  (smdrati)  remember;  think 
on ;  call  to  mind ;  teach ;  esp.  in 
pass,  smaryate  'it  is  taught,  i.  e. 
traditional'. 

smrti  f.,  tradition ;  law-book. 

sraj  f.,  garland. 

srasjr  m.,  creator. 

sva  a.,  own ;  one's  own. 

V svanj  (svdjate)   embrace; \- 

pari  (Cf.  Voc.  21)  idem. 

svadrq  a.,  similar. 

y  svap  (svdpiti:  429)  sleep. 

svapna  m.,  sleep,  dream. 

svayam  pron.,  own  self,  self. 

svayambhu  a.,  self-existent;  asm., 
epithet  of  Brahma. 

svarga  m.,  heaven. 

svasr  f.,  sister. 

svddu  a.,  sweet. 

svadhyaya  m.,  private  recitation 
of  sacred  texts. 

svdmin  m.,  possessor,  lord. 

svdiram  adv.,  at  pleasure. 


hata  part,  of  han. 

y  han  (hdntix  419)  kill;  caus. (gha- 
tdyati),  have  killed;  —  +  apa 
remove;    —  +  abhi   smite;  — 

-1-  sam-d  wound; h  ni  kill; 

\-prati  hinder;  injure,  offend; 

—  +  sam  write. 

-han  (283)  a.,  killing. 

hanu  f.,  jaw. 

hanumant  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  monkey- 
king. 

hantr  m.,  killer,  slayer. 

hari  m.,  n.  pr.,  a  god. 


harina  m.,  gazelle. 
hala  m.  n.,  plough. 
havis  n.,  oblation. 
hasta  m.,  hand. 
hastin  m.,  elephant. 
y lhd  (jdhdli)  abandon,  give  up; 
neglect.  ChTytx^e   (f  <•**.) 

)/2hd  (jihite:  438)  move. 

]/hi  (hinoti)  send; \-pra  idem. 

hi  assev.  particle,  surely  ;  causal, 
for,  because. 

\' hins  (hindsti)  injure,  destroy. 

hita  part,  of  ldlid;  as  adj.,  ad- 
vantageous ;  as  n.,  advantage. 

himavant  a.,  snowy;  as  m.,  the 
Himalaya  Mts. 

hma  part,  of  \hd,  abandoned; 
wanting  in;  w.  instr.,  without. 

]/  hu  (juhoti,  juhute)  sacrifice. 

hutabhuj  (nom.  -bhuk)  m.,  fire. 

y  hu  see  hvd. 

\  hr  (Jidrati)  take  away  ;  steal ; 
plunder;  —  +  apa  idem;  —  + 
a  act.  and  mid.,  fetch,   bring; 

h  ud-d  cite,  mention; h 

praty-a  bring  back;  —  +  ud 
save,  rescue. 

hrd  (281)  n.,  heart. 

hrdaya  n.,  heart. 

y  hrs  (hdrsati,  hfsyati)  rejoice,  be 
delighted; h  pra  idem. 

he  interj.,  O,  ho. 

hemanta  m.,  winter. 

hrasvam  adv.,  near  by. 

\'hri  (jihreti)  be  ashamed. 

hrl  f.,  modesty,  bashfulness. 

yhva  (hvdyati)  call ;  in  caus.  (hvd- 
ydyati)  have  called ;  —  +d  call, 
summon. 


II.  English-Sanskrit  Glossary. 


217 


II.  English -Sanskrit. 


abandon,  to:  tyaj;  Ihd. 

able:  samartha;  galcya. 

able,  to  be:  cak. 

according  to :  anu,  postpos. 

acquire,  to:  labh ;  dp. 

Acvins:  acvindu,  du. 

address,  to:  bru. 

adore,  to:  nam  +  pra. 

adorn,  to:  \kr  +  alam. 

advantage:  hita  n. ;  kalyana  n. 

adversity ;  duhkha  n. 

afraid,  to  be :  bhl. 

afterward :  tatas. 

again:  punar. 

against :  prati. 

age:  vayas  n. 

all:  sarva;  (entire)  vicva. 

all-protecting:  vicvapd. 

allow,  to:  jiid  +  anu. 

alms :  bhiksd  f. 

alone  (adv.) :  eva. 

also :  api. 

altar:  vedi  f. 

although :  api. 

always  :  sadd,  nit  yam. 

amuse  oneself,  to :  ram. 

ancient:  pur  ana. 

and  :  ca,  postpos. ;  tathd. 

anger:  kopa  m.;  krodha  va. 

animal:  tiryanc  m. 

announce,  to:  Ivid+ni,  caus. 


answer,  to:  bhds  +  prati. 
appoint,  to:  kip,  caus.;  yuj  +  ni. 
approach,  to:  gam  +  d;  yd+d. 
argument  (reason):  vac  f. 
arise,  to:  bhu;  (get  up)  sthd+  ud. 
arm:  bdhu  m. 
army  :  send  f. 
arrive,  to:  gam  +  d. 
arrow :  gara  m. ;  isu  m. 

Aryan:  dvija  m.;  dvijdti  m. 

ascetic :  muni  m. ;  yati  m. ;  pari- 
vrdj  m.;  tapasvin  m. ;  —  to  be- 
come an  a.,  vraj+pra. 

ashamed,  to  be:  hrl. 

ashes:  bhasman  n. 

ask,  to  (inquire):  prach. 

ask  for,  to:  arthaya. 

assembly :  sabhd  f. ;  parisad  f. 

astronomy :  jyotisa  n. 

attain,  to:  labh ;  2vid;  lac;  dp; 
Qp  -\-ava  or  pra. 

attainment :  labha  m. 

author:  kartr  in.;  (of  Vedic 
hymnns,  etc.)  drasfr  m. 

axe;  paracu  m. 


bad  :  papa.  \  V\    ^  w 
bank :  tira  n. 
banner:  ketu  m. 
barbarian :  yavana  m. 
bathe,  to:  ma. 


218 


II.  English-Sanskrit  Glossary. 


battle:  rana  m.  n. ;  yuddha  n. 
be,   to:    bhu;  vrt;    (be    situated) 

sthd. 
bear,   to:  bhr ;   (bring  forth)  su; 

su  +pra. 
bear :  rksa  va. 
beat,  to:  tad. 

beautiful:  sundara;  rupavant. 
beauty :  rupa  n. 
become,  to:  bhu;  vrt. 
bee:  alt  va. ;  madhulih  m. 
beg,  to :  bhiks. 
begin,  to:  rabh  +  d. 
behind  :  pagcdt  (w.  gen.), 
behold,  to:  tks. 
Benares :  kdfi  f. 
bend,  to:  nam. 
benefit,  to;  lkr  +  upa. 
beseech,  to:  pad+pra. 
besiege,  to:  rudh;  rudh  +  upa. 
best :  crestha;  jyestha. 
betake  oneself,  to:  yd;  cri  +  d. 
better :  creyas  ;  jydyas. 
bind,  to:  bandh. 
biped :  dvipad. 
bird :  vihaga  va. ;  paksin  m. 
birth  :  jdti  f. ;  janman  n. 
black  :  krsna. 

blame,  to:  nind;  lkr  +  tiras. 
blessed :    bhagavant ;    (as    prefix) 

prf. 
blood:  rudhira  n. 
blow,  to  (intr.) :  vah. 
boat:  ndu  f. 
body:   garira  n.;  vapus  n. ;   kdya 

m. ;  (heavenly :  sun,  etc.):  jyotis  n. 
bone:  asthan  n. 
book:    (manuscript)   pustaka   n.; 

(work)  grantha  m. 


born,  to  be:  jan;  jan  +  ud. 

both :  ubha  du. 

bow,  to :  nam. 

boy  :  bdla  m. ;  kumdra  m. 

Brahman :  brdhmana  m. ;  dro/'a  m. ; 

drijdti  m.;  y/pra  m. 
branch :  Qdkhd  f. 
brave:  dhira. 
breast:  «ras  n.;  vaksas  n. 
bridegroom :  uar«  m. 
bring,  to:  m  +  a;  hr  +  d. 
broad  :  prthu  ;  uru. 
brother:  bhratr  m. 
burn,  to :  dah. 
business:  kdrya  n. 
but:  tu;  kimtu ;  punar. 


call,  to:  hvd;  (name)  vac;  vad. 

capable:  samartha. 

caste :  jdti  f. 

cattle :  go  va.  pi. 

cease,  to:  gam;  ram  +  vi. 

celebrated :  vicruta  ;  crimant. 

chain :  hdra  m. 

charioteer;  suta  m. 

charm :  kdnti  f.. 

check,  to:  dam,  caus. ;  rudh. 

chest:  vaksas  it.;  uras  n. 

child:  bdla  m.;  cicu  m. 

choose,  to:  2i\r. 

cistern :  vdpi  f. 

citizen :  pdura  m. 

city :  nagara  n. ;  -j  f.;  pur  f. 

cleverness:  buddhi  f. 

climb,  to :  ruA  +  a. 

close,  to :  lur  +  sam ;  lcMa  +  apt. 

cloud:  megha  m. 

coachman:  suta  m. 

come,  to:  graw  +  a;  ya  +  6;  t  -f 


II.  English-Sanskrit  Glossary. 


219 


abhi  or  a;  come  out:  gam  +  nis; 

yd  +  nis. 
command,  to:  dig+d;  jnd+d  caus. 
command :  Txjnd  f. ;  nideca  m. 
commit,  to :  car  +  a ;  \kr. 
companion:    sahdya   m.;   sahaca- 

ra  m. 
company:  samdja  m. 
compose,  to:  rac. 
conduct:  vrtta  n. 
confine,  to:  rudh  +  ni. 
conquer,  to:  ji. 
consecrate,  to:  ni  +  upa. 
consider,  to  :  cint ;  Ivid. 
consort :  patnl  f. 
cook,  to:  pac. 
copying:  lekhana  n. 
cord,  sacred:  upavita  n. 
count,  to :  ganaya. 
courageous :  tejasvin. 
course:  gati  f. 
cover,  to :   \vr  (mid.)  ;   \vr  +  sam 

(mid.), 
cow:  dhenu  f. ;  go  f. 
cowherd:  gopa  m. 
create,  to :  srj. 
creator:  dhdtr  m.;  srastr  m. 
creature:  prdnin  m. ;  jagat  n. 
crescent:  kald  f. 
cross,  to:  tr. 
crow:  vdyasa  m. 
curds:  dadhan  n. 
cut,  to:  krt;  chid.  ■tdi,-?(i 

cut  off,  to :  kft  +  ava;  chid  +  ava. 


daily:  nitya;  (adv.)  nityam ;  pra- 

tyaham. 
dancing:  nrtta  n. 


daughter:  kanyd  f . ;  putri  f . ;    f/u- 

tor  f. 

day:  divasa  m. ;  rfma  n. ;  ahan  n.; 

d.  by  d. :  dine  dine ;  pratyaham ; 

a  day  and  a  night:  ahordtra  n. 
dead:  mrta;  vipanna. 
decide,  to  (settle) :  nl  +  nis. 
deed :  karman  n. 
deity  :  devatd  f. 
delicate:  taruna. 
delight,  to  (tr.):  tus,  caus. 
deliverance :  mukti  f. 
demon:  rdksasa  m. 
depart,  to  :  i  -f  apa. 
describe,  to:  varnaya. 
desire,  to :  lubh. 
destroy,  to:  bhanj. 
despise,  to :  man  +  ava  ;  bhu  -f  pari. 
determine,  to:  ci  +  nis  or  vi-nis. 
devoted:  bhakta;  snigdha. 
devotion:  bhakti  f. 
die:  aksa  m. 

die,  to :  mr ;  i  +  pra ;  pad  +  vi. 
difficult:  durlabha;  duskara. 
dig,  to:  khan. 
diligence:  udyoga  m. 
diligently:  bhrcam. 
disappear,  to :  nac  +  vi. 
disease :  ruj  f. ;  vyddhi  m. 
dismount,  to :  ruh  -f  ava. 
disown,  to:  khyd  -f-  prati-d. 
dispute,  to:  vad  +  vi. 
distress,  to :  du. 
distribute,  to :  bhaj  +  vi. 
divine :  divya. 
do,  to:  \kr ;  car  -f  sam-a. 
domestic:  grhya. 
dog :  cvan  m. ;  cum  f. 
door:  dvar  f. 


220 

doorkeeper:  dvdhstha  m. 
dove :  kapota  m. 
draw,  to:  vah. 
drink,  to:  \pd.  j.t<\ 
driver:  suta  m. 
drop,  to:  sic. 
drop:  bindu  m. 

dwell,  to:  Bvas;  vas  +  ni;  dwell 
on  (fig.):  sanj. 


II.  English-Sanekrit-Glossary. 

p. 7? 


ear:  karna  m. 

earth :  prthivi  f. ;  bhu  f. ;  bhumi  f. 

east,  eastern :  prdnc ;  the  E. :  prdcl 

f.,  8c.  die. 
eat,  to;  ad;  2ac;  bhaks;  bhuj. 
eating:  bhaksana  n. 
eclipse,  to :  \kr  +  tiras. 
eight:  asta. 
eighth:  astama. 
eighty:  aciti  f. 
eightieth:  acltitama. 
eldest:  jyestha. 
elephant :  gaja  m. ;  hastin  m. 
eleventh :  ekadaca. 
emerge,  to :  tr  +•  ud. 
eminent,  to  be:  cubh. 
emperor:  samraj  m. 
encompass,  to:  Icr ;  chid  +  ava. 
end:  anta  m. 
endure,  to:  sah. 

enemy :  ari  m. ;  catru  m. ;  dvis  m. 
enjoy,  to:  bhuj. 
enjoyment:  bhoga  m. 
enter,  to :  vie  -f  pra. 
entrancing :  manohara. 
envoy:  data  m. 
entrust,  to:  Ida  +  pra. 
equip,  to  :  nah  +  sam. 
eulogy:  stotra  n. 


even  (adv.):  api. 

every:  sarva. 

evil  (adj.):  pdpa\  (subst. ) papa  n. 

exceedingly:  ati. 

explain,   to:  bru  +  vi\    \vr  +  vi; 

caks  +  vi-d. 
exterminate,  to  :  chid  +  ud. 
eye:  netra  n. ;  caksus  n. ;  aksan  n.; 

locana  n. 


face:  mukha  n. 

fagot :  samidh  f. 

fair:  sundara. 

fall,  to:    pat;    pat  +  ni ;  fall   to 

one's    lot:    r;     fallen    (killed): 

patita;  mrta. 
fame  :  kirti  f. ;  yacas  n. 
family:  vahga  m. 
famous:  vicruta. 
fast  (firm):  drdha. 
fasten,  to:  bandh. 
fat:  pina;  pusta. 
father:  janaka  m. ;  />?7r  m. 
fault,  to  find :  Ikr  +  tiras. 
faultless:  anavadya. 
fear:  bhaya  n. 
field :  ksetra  n. 
fifth:  pancama. 
fight,  to:  #«dA. 
filled:  puma;  sampurna. 
finally:  ante. 
find,  to:  2y»d. 
finish,  to:  dp  +  sam. 
fire:  agni  m.;  hutabhuj  m. 
firewood:  samidh  f. 
first:   prathama;    at    first 

thamam. 
fish :  tnatsya  m. ;   mina  m. 
fit,  to :  «/w;'. 


2?ra- 


II.  English-Sanskrit  Glossary. 


221 


five:  paiica. 

flee,  to  :  paldy. 

flit,  to:  bhram. 

flock  :  papu  m.  pi. 

flower:  puspa  n.;  sumanas  f. 

fly,  to:  pat;  fly  up  :  pat  +  ud. 

fodder :  ghdsa  m. 

foe:  ari  m. ;  catru  m. 

follow,  to:  <7a?w  +  anu;  i  +  anw. 

fond,  to  be:  tus. 

food :  anna  n. 

foot :  pada  m. ;  pad  m. 

force :  bala  n. 

foreign:  para. 

forehead:  lald{a  n. 

forest:  vana  n. 

forest-dwelling:  vanavdsin. 

form,  to :  lwd  +  nw. 

formula  (sacrificial):  yajus  n. 


generous :  ddtr. 

get,  to:  /aM;  lac;  dp. 

gift:  dana  n. 

gird,  to:  nah  +  saw*. 

girdle:  mekhald  f. 

girl :  kanyd  f. ;  2>a7a  f. 

give,  to:  yam;  Ida. 

giver:  ddtr  m. 

glance:  drc  f. 

glory :  ktrti  f. ;  yacas  n. 

go,  to:  car:  yd;  gam;   i;   go   on 

(continue):  vrt  +  pra. 
god :  deva  m. ;  goddess  :  devl  f. 
gold:  suvarna  n. 
govern,  to:  pas;  rajyam  kr. 
good:  sddhu;  sant. 
gracious:  civa. 
graciousness :  krpd  f. 
grain :  dhdnya  n. 


fortune :  crl  f.,  often  pi. ;  goddess  grammar :  vyakarana  n. 


of  f. :  crl  f. 
forty:  catvarincat  f. 
four:  catur. 
free,  to:  muc. 
friend:    mitra  n.;    sakhi  m.;  su- 

hrd  m. 
friend -betrayer :  mitradruh. 
front:    agra    n.;    in  f.  of:    agre, 

samaksam  (gen.), 
fruit:  phala  n. 
fruitful:  phalavant. 
full:  purna;  sampurna. 


gain,  to:  ZaM. 
garden:  udydna  n. 
garland:  «ao/a  f. ;  sraj  f. 
gate:  drar  f. 
gather,  to:  ci  +  sam. 
gazelle:  harina  in. ;  wroa  m. 


grasp,  to .  grah. 

graze,  to :  car. 

great:  mahant. 

great  king:  mahdrdja  m. 

greater:  mahlyas;  adhika. 

greatly:  bahu;  bhrcam. 

greedy :  lubdha. 

Greek:  yavana  m. 

greet,  to :  vand ;  vad  +  abhi,  caus. 

grieve,  to:  du. 

ground  ;  bhumi  f. ;  on  the  g. :  adhas. 

grind,  to:  pis. 

guard,  to:  raks;  gopdya. 

guest:  athiti  m. 

guilt:  papa  n.;  enas  n. 


hand:  kara  m.;  pdni  m.;  hasta  m. 
hang,  to  :  sanj ;  lag. 
happiness:  sukha  n. 


222 


II.  English-Sanskrit  Glossary. 


happy,  to  be:  mud. 

hard  to  find :  durlabha. 

harm,  to :  \kr  +  apa. 

hate,  to :  dvis ;  dvis  +  pra. 

hear,  to:  gru. 

heart :  hrdaya  n. ;  hrd  n. 

heaven :  svarga  m. 

heavy :  guru. 

hell :  naraka  m. 

here:  atra;  iha. 

hero :  gura  m. ;  vtra  m. 

hesitation:  gankd  f. 

high:  ucchrita. 

high  water:  pura  m. 

hold  shut,  to:  Idha  +  apt. 

holy:  sddhu. 

holy  writ:  gruti  f. 

home  (adv.);  grham. 

honey :  madhu  n. 

honor,  to:  puj;  nam;  sev. 

hope:  dgd  f. 

horse:  agva  m. 

house :  grha  n. :  master  of  the  h., 

grhastha  m. 
householder :  grhastha  m. 
house-priest :  purohita  m. 
how?:  katham. 
human:  mdnusa. 
hunter:  vyddha  m. 
hurl,  to:  2as;  ksip. 
husband:  pati  m.;  bhartr  m. 
hymn:  swfcto  n. 


injustice:  adharma  m. 
intelligence:  buddhi  f. 
iron:  io^a  n. 


I :  aham. 

impart,  to :  Void  +  ni,  caus. 
inclined,  to  be:  snih. 
increase,  to:  vrdh. 
India:  bharatakhanda  m. 
initiate,  to:  ni  +  upa. 


jaw:  hanu  f. 

jewel :   mani  m. ;   rafria  n. ;   bhu- 
sana  n. 


kill,  to  :  mr,  caus. ;  han ;  Aan,  caus. 

kindle,  to:  idh. 

king:  nr/ja  m.;    nrpati  m.;    pa- 

rthiva    m. ;  ra/an    m. ;    bhubhuj 

m.;  bhubhrt  m. 
kingdom :  rdjya  n. 
know,  to:  lvid;jnd. 
knowledge:  m'cfya  f . ;  jnana  n. 


lament,  to:  Jap  +  tri. 

land:  depa  m. 

language:  bhdsd  f. 

last,  at:  ante. 

law:  dharma  m. ;  w'dfo"  m. 

law-book:    «mrti  f.;    dharmagd- 

stra  n. 
law-suit:  vyavahdra  m. 
lead,  to:  m. 
leader:  netr. 
learn,  to:  #«?«  +  ava;  Ivid;  i  + 

learned :  vidvdhs ;  pandita ;  kugala. 

learning:  wicfya  f. 

leather:  carman  n. 

leavings:  ucchista  n. 

lesson:  adhydya  m. 

lick,  to:  &7t;  fo'A  +  ara. 

life :  jivita  n.;  ayws  n.;  carita  n. 

light:  jfyoft's  n. 

light  (not  heavy):  laghu. 

like:  ioa. 


II.  English-Sanskrit  Glossary. 


223 


limb:  afiga  n. 

lion:  sinha  xa. 

lip :  ostha  m. 

listen,  to:  cru. 

live,  to :  jlv ;  vrt ;  an  +  pra. 

long:  dirgha;  (adv.)  dram. 

look  at,  to:  Iks  +  pra. 

lord:  icvara  m. ;  pati  m. 

lotus:  padma  m.  n. 

love,  to :  snih. 

love,  god  of  1. :  kama  m. 

lanar  mansion :  naksatra  n. 


maiden :  kanyd  f. ;  bald  f. 

maidservant:  ddsl  f. 

make,  to:  \kr. 

man  (w>):  nam  m.;  pumdns  m.; 

purusa    m.;   (homo):    jana   m.; 

mdnava  m. ;  manusya m. ;  wara  m. 
mankind:  jiawa  m.  pi. 
many:  5aAw;  prabhuta. 
march,  to:  cal+pra. 
marriage:  vivdha  m. 
marry,  to  :  rat  +  pari. 
master:  bhartr  m. ;  pafi  m. 
mat :  Acta  m. 
means:  sddhana  n. 
medicine:  dusadha  n. 
meet,  to  (intr.) :  jam  +  sam  (mid.), 
meeting:  samdgama  m. 
melted  butter:  ghrta  n. 
mention,  to :  hr  -f  urf-a. 
merchant:  vanij  m. 
merit:  punya  n. 
mighty:  balin;  balavant;  vibhu. 
milk,  to:  <iuA. 
milk:  fcszra  n.;  payas  n. 
mind:  manas  n.;  waft"  f. 
minister:  mantrin  m. 


misfortune:    duhkha  n.;  a/»arf  f. 

modesty:  Art  f. 

moisten,  to:  sic. 

monarch;  samrdj  m. 

money:  dhana  n.;  rasu  n. 

month:  mdsa  m. 

moon:  candramas  m.;  candra  m.; 
inaw  m. 

mostly  :  bhuyas. 

morning,  in  the:  prdtar. 

mother:  mdtr  f . ;  amfta  f. 

mother-in-law :  cvacru  f. 

mountain :  giri  m. ;  parvata  m. 

mouth :  mukha  n. 

much:  prabhuta;  bahu. 

mo-ithful :  grdsa  m. 

murder,  to :  mr,  caus. ;  han ;  han, 
caus. 

must:  arh;  cf.  §320  and  Exer- 
cise 30. 


name:  ndman  n. ;  by  n. :  ndma. 
name,    to:    vac;    vad;    (reckon) 

ganaya. 
neck:  kan\ha  xa. 
neglect,  to:  \hd. 
net :  jala  n. 
never:    na    kadd  +  api,    cid,    or 

carta. 
news:  vrttdnta  m. 
night:  rdtri  f. 

no  one :  na  ka  +  api,  cid,  or  cana. 
north,  northern:  udanc ;   the  N. : 

wdw  f.,  sc.  dig. 
not:  way  ma. 
nothing:    na    kirn  +  api,    cid,    or 

cana. 
now :  adhund  ;  sdmpratam. 


224 


II.  English-Sanskrit  Glossary. 


O:  he. 

obedient:  vidheya. 

oblation :  havis  n. 

occur,  to:  drc,  pass.;  2vid,  pass. 

ocean :  udadhi  m. ;  samudra  m. 

offend,  to:  han+prati;  Via. 

offering  (sacrificial):  havis  n. 

old:  vrddha;  older:  jydyas. 

omnipresent :  vibhu. 

once :  sakrt. 

one:  eka. 

only:  eva. 

opinion;  mati  f . ;  mata  n. 

or;  vd,  postpos. ;  athavd. 

ordain,  to:  kip,   caus. ;  ldha  +  vi; 

ordained:  vihita. 
order,  to:  jna  +  a,  caus. 
other;  anya;  itara,  apara. 
outskirts:  siman  f. 
overcome,  to:  2pr.  ».<^3 
overwhelm,  to:  vrs. 
own,  one's  own:  sva. 
ox :  anaduh  m. 


pair:  yugma  n. 

palace:  prdsdda  m. 

parents:  pitr,  m.  du. 

part :  bhdga  m. 

path :  mdrga  m. ;  panthan  m. 

pearl :  muktd  f. 

peasant:  krslvala  m. 

penance:  tapas  n.;  prdyagcitta  n. 

people  :  ./ana,  pi. ;  loka,  s.  and  pi. 

perform,    to:    sidh,    caus.;    car; 

car  +  sam-d;  (a  sacrifice)  tan. 
perfume:  gandha  m. 
perish,  to:  nac  +  vi. 
pestle:  musala  m.  n. 
pierce,  to:  vyadh. 


pilgrimage:  iirthayatrd  f. 

pious:  sddhu. 

place,  to  :  ldhd  ;  dhd  +  sam-d. 

place:  pada  n.;  deca  m. 

plan :  abhiprdya  m. 

plant,  to :  ruh,  caus. 

play,  to :  div. 

please,  to:  rue.    pAl 

pleasure:  sukha  n. ;  with  p.,  pleas- 
antly: sukhena ;  (wish,  choice) 
icchd  f. ;  kdma  m. ;  at  p. :  sve- 
cchayd. 

plough:  larigala  n.;  hala  m.  n. 

plough,  to  :  krs. 

plunder,  to:  lunth;  hr ;  lup, 

poem:  kdvya  n. 

poet:  kavi  m. 

point  out,  to;  die. 

polluted,  to  be:  dus. 

poor:  daridra. 

possessions:  dhana  n. 

post,  sacrificial:  yupa  m. 

pot:  ghata  m. 

pound,  to :  pis. 

pour,  to:  hu. 

power:  bala  n. 

powerful:  balinj  balavant. 

praise,  song  of  p. :  stutii. ;  stotra  n. 

praise,  to:  gam;  stu. 

pray  for,  to :  arth. 

prescription:  ddeca  m. 

presence:  samlpa  n. 

previous ;  purva. 

priest:  rtvij  m. 

prince :  kumdra  m. 

property:  vasu  n.;  dhana  n. 

prosperity:  bhuti  f. 

protect,  to :  raks  ;  2pd ;  pa,  caus. 
protection;  carana  n. 


II.  English-Sanskrit  Glossary. 


225 


protector :  raksitr  ra. 
punish,  to:  dandaya ;  gas. 
punishment:  danda  m. 
put,  to:  stha,    caus.;    ldhd;    yuj 
+  ni. 


quadruped :  catuspad. 

quarter:  pdda  m.;  (of  the   sky) 

dig  f. 
queen:  devl  f. ;  rajni  f.;  mahisl  f. 


rain :  vrsti  f. 

rain,  to  (give  rain) :  vrs. 

raise,  to  (the  voice) :  srj  +  ud. 

ray:  pdda  m. ;  ragmi  m. 

reach,  to:  labh ;  dp  +  pra. 

read,  to:  i  +  adhi;  (aloud)  path; 
vac,  caus. 

realm :  rajya  n. 

receive,  to:  labh;  grah;  grah 
+  prati;  Ida  +  a. 

recitation  (private):  svddhyaya  m. 

recite,  to:  path;  (tell)  kath. 

reckon,  to:  ganaya. 

recompense,  to  :  \kr  +  prati. 

reduced  (in  fortune):  kslna. 

region:  die  f. ;  deca  m. 

rein :  racmi  m. 

rejoice,  to:  tus;  mud. 

remember,  to:  smr. 

restrain,  to :  grah  +  ni. 

return,  to :  vrt  +  ni. 

rice :  tandula  m. 

reverence,  to:  nam\puj;  ds  +  upa. 

reward :  phala  n. 

rich:  dhanin;  crimant;  vasumavt 
(comp.  and  sup.  sometimes  va- 
sty as,  vasistha). 

Perry,  Sanskrit  Piimer. 


riches:  dhana  n.;  vasu  n.;  crii. ; 

rdi  m. 
righteousness:  satya  n. 
right  (subst.):  dharma  m. 
Rigveda:  rgveda  m.;  rcas  f.  pi. 
rise,  to  (of  sun,  etc.):  gam-\  ud; 

i  +  ud. 
river:  nadi  f . ;  sarit  f. 
road:  mdrga  m.;  panthan  m. 
rob,  to:  mus,  lunth. 
root:  inula  n. 
rub,  to :  mrj ;  wir;',  caus. 
royal:  raja-,  in  cpd. 
rule,  to  :  stha  +  adhi ;  Ig. 
run,  to :  d//a<; ;  dru. 
running:  dhdvana  n. 


sacrament:  samskdra  m. 
sacrifice,  to:  yaj;  (for  some  one) 

ya;',  caus. 
sacrifice:  yajna  m. 
sacrificial  formula  :  yajus  n. 
sage:  rsi  m. 
sake   of,    for   the:    artha  in  cpd. 

(cf.  375,  3). 
salt:  lavana  n. 

salvation:  muktii.;  bhutii.;  hitan. 
satiated :  trpta. 
satisfy,  to :   trp,   caus. ;  (oneself) 

trp. 
save,  to :  hr  +  ud. 
Savitar:  savitr  m. 
say,  to  :  vad ;  vac ;  bru. 
scatter,  to:  2kr. 
scholar:     gisya:    (learned    man) 

pandita  m. 
science:  gdstra  n. 
sea :  udadhi  rn. ;  samudra  m. 
seat  oneself,  to  :  sad  +  ni. 
15 


226 


II.  English-Sanskrit  Glossary. 


second :  dvitiya. 

see,  to:  pac;  drc;  ties;  Iks  +  pra. 

seer:  rsi  m. 

send,  to:  sthd+pra,  caus. 

servant:  bhrtya  m.;  bhrtaka  m. 

serve:  sev. 

set,  to:  (place)  \dhd;  (intr.,  of 
sun, etc.)?  4-  astam;  gam  +  astam. 

shade:  chdyd  f. 

she,  etc. :  sd,  f.  of  ta. 

shine,  to :  cubh ;  rdj ;  bhd  +  vi. 

ship :  ndu  f. 

shoe:  updnah  f. 

show,  to:  drc,  caus. 

shrewd:  patu. 

shut,  to:  \dhd  4-  api;  \vr  +  sawi. 

sick  :  vyddhita ;  rugna. 

side:  paksa  m. 

sin  :  /?apa  n. ;  enas  n. 

sing,  to:  2gd. 

singing:  gita  n. 

sip,  to :  cam  -f  a. 

sister:  swasr  f. 

sit,  to:  sad\  sad  +  ni. 

situated,  to  be:  vrt. 

six:  sas. 

sixth :  sastha. 

skilled:  patu. 

sky:  div  f. ;  die  f.  pi.;  akdea  n. 

slave:  c/aso  m. ;  ddsl  f. 

slay,  to:  wr,  caus.;  Aan. 

sleep,  to:  svap;  ci. 

smell,  to;  ghrd. 

smite,  to:  hr  +  pra;  han  +  abhi. 

so:  *fo";  evam:  tathd. 

soldier:  sdinika  m. 

some  (pi.):  eka  pi.;  some  ■  ■  oth- 
ers: ke  cit '  •  ke  tit. 

sometimes:  kva  tit. 


son :  putra  m. ;  suta  m. 

son-in-law :  jdmdtr  m. 

song:  gir  f . ;   gita  n.;  (of  praise) 

stotra  n. ;  stfwto'  f. 
soul:  dtman  m. 
sow,  to:  vap. 
speak,  to:  vad:  vac;  bhds. 
spear:  kunta  m. 
speech:  vac  f . ;  bhdsd  f. 
spoon :  juhu  f. 
stand,  to  (intr.):  sthd. 
state,  to:  6rS. 
steal,  to:  cur;  mm;  lunth. 
steer:  go  m. 
stick:  danda  m. 

stone :  drsad  f. ;  (precious)  mani  m. 
stop,  to  (tr.):  rudh. 
strange  (another's):  para. 
street :  rathyd  f. ;  mdrga  m. 
strike,  to:  tad. 
strive,  to :  yat. 
strongest:  balistha. 
study,  to:  i  +  adhi  (mid.);  2as  + 

abhi. 
subject:  prajd  f. 
such:  idrc. 
suffering:  duhkha  n. 
suffused:  ruddha. 
suitable:  anurupa. 
summit:  cikhara  m. 
snn :  bhdnu  m. ;  dditya  m. 
survive,  to :  cis  +  ud. 
sweet:  svadu. 
swift:  dcu. 
sword:  asi  m. 


take,  to:  da  +  a;   grah;    grah  + 

prati. 
take  place,  to :  jan;  bhu 


II.  English-Sanskrit  Glossary. 


227 


take  refuge,  to:  pad  +  pra. 

tasteful:  rasavant. 

tax:  kara  m. 

teach,   to:   i  +  adhi,  caus.;  dig  + 

upa. 
teacher :  guru  m. ;  dcdrya  m. 
tear:  agru  n.;  bdspa  m. 
tell,  to:  kathaya;  vad. 
temple:  devakula  n. 
ten :  daga. 
tend  to,  to :  kip. 
terrify,  to:   bhi,  caus.;    vij  +  ud, 

cans, 
text-book:  gdstra  n. 
that:  ta;  ay  am;  asau. 
then :  tadd. 
there :  tatra. 
thereupon :  tatas. 
thief:  stena  m.;  caura  m. 
think,  to:  tint;  man;   think  on: 
smr;  dhyd. 

third:  trtiya. 

thirty:  tringat. 

thirty-three :  trayastringat. 

this:  ta;  ay  am. 

thou:  tvam. 

three :  tri. 

threefold:  trivrt. 

thrice:  tris. 

thus:  iti;  evam;  tathd. 

time :  kdla  m. 

to-day:  adya. 

to-morrow:  gvas. 

tongue :  jihvd  f. 

torment,  to :  pid;  vyath,  caus. 

touch,  to  :  sprg. 

trade :  vyavahara  m. ;  vdnijya. 

travel,  to  :  vas  +  pra;  sthd  +  pra 
n.  (mid.). 


treasury :  kom  m. 

tree :  vrksa  m. ;  taru  m. 

tremble,  to:  kamp. 

true:  satya;  (faithful)  bhakta. 

truth :  satya  n. 

twelfth:  dcddaga. 

twelve:  dvddara. 

twenty-eight :  aMdvihgati. 

twenty-seven :  saptavihgati. 

twice:  dvis. 

twilight:  sandhyd  f. 

twine:  bandh. 

two:  dva. 


umbrella:  chattra  n. 
understand,  to:  gam  -f-  ava. 
unite,  to  (intr.) :  gam  +  sam  (mid.), 
untruth  :  anrta  n. ;  asatya  n. 
upanisad :  upanisad  f. 
useful,  to  be:  sev. 


vassal :  sdmanta  m. 

Veda:  veda  m. 

verse :  gloka  m. ;  (of  Rigveda)  re  f. 

vessel :  pdtra  n. 

victorious,  to  be:,;i. 

victory:  jaya  m. 

view  (opinion):  mati  f. ;   mata  n. 

village:  grama  m. 

virtue :  dharma  m. ;  punya  n. 

visit,  to :  <7<zw  +  abhi. 

voice :  vac  f. ;  gir  f. 


wagon:  ratha  m. 
warrior:  ksatriya  m. 
wash,  to:  ArsaZ;  «pff. 
water :  jala  n. ;  ran  n. ;  ap  f.  pi. 
wave:  vlci  m. 
va^a/n. 

15* 


we: 


228 


II.  English-Sanskrit  Glossary. 


wear,  to :  dhr,  caus. ;  bhr. 

weary,  to  become:  gram. 

weave,  to:  granth ;  bandh. 

wedding:  vivdha  m. 

weep,  to:  rud. 

west,    western:     pratyanc;     the 

West:  pratici  f.,  sc.  dig. 
what  (rel.):  ya. 
wheel:  cakra  n. 
when  (rel.):  yadd. 
when  ? :  kadd. 
whence?:  kutas. 
where  (rel.):  yatra. 
where?:  kva;  kutra. 
which  (rel.) :  ya. 
which  (of  two)  ? :  katara. 
white:  gveta. 
whither?:  kva;  kutra. 
who  (rel.):  ya. 
who?:  ka. 
whoever :    ya    ka  +  api,    cid    or 

cana;  often  by  rel.  alone, 
whole:  krtsna. 
why?:  kutas;  kasmdt. 
wicked:  papa. 

wife  :   bhdryd  f. ;  nan  f. ;  patnl  f. 
win,  to :  ji. 
wind:  vdyu  va. ;  vdta  ta. 


winter:  hemanta  m. 

wipe,  to:  mrj;  mrj  +  apa  or  pari. 

wish,  to:  is. 

with:  saha,  w.  inst.;  or  by  instr. 

alone, 
withered :  mldna. 
without:  vind  (instr.,  ace), 
witness:  saksin  m. 
wolf:  vrka  m. 
woman:  ndrt  f. ;  vadhu  f . ;  strl  f. ; 

jay  a  f. 
woman-servant:  ddsl  f. 
wood:  kdsthan.;  (forest)  vana  n. 
word  :  vac  f. ;  gabda  m. 
work :  karman  n. ;  (literary)  gra- 

ntha  m. 
world:    loka   m.;  jagat  n.;    bhu- 

vana  n. 
world-spirit:  brahman  n. 
worship,  to :  _pfi;'. 
worthy:  sadrga. 
wound,  to :  ksan. 
wreath :  maid  f. ;  sraj  f. 


year:  samvatsara  m.;  varsa  m.  n. 
yoke,  to:  ^iy,  caus. 
yonder:  tatra. 
young:  yuvan. 


Appendix. 


Hindu  Names  of  Letters. 

The  Hindus  call  the  different  sounds,  and  the  characters  re- 
presenting them,  by  the  word  kara  ('maker')  added  to  the  sound 
of  the  letter,  if  a  vowel,  or  to  the  letter  followed  by  a,  if  a  con- 
sonant. Thus,  a  (both  sound  and  character)  is  called  akdra ;  u, 
ukara;  k,  kakara;  and  so  on.  But  sometimes  kara  is  omitted,  and 
a,  u,  ka,  etc.,  are  used  alone.  The  r,  however,  is  never  called  ra- 
kara,  but  only  ra  or  repha  ('snarl').  The  anusvara  and  visarga 
are  called  by  these  names  alone. 

Modern  Hindu  Accentuation  of  Sanskrit. 

In  the  pronunciation  of  Sanskrit  almost  all  Brahmans  employ, 
with  insignificant  variations,  an  ictus-accent,  which  is  quite  different 
from  the  older  musical  accent  (svara)  described  in  Indian  and 
European  grammars,  and  employed  nowadays  exclusively  in  the  rec- 
itation of  the  Yeda  The  older  system,  moreover,  as  marked  in 
the  Vedic  texts,  has  been  subjected  to  very  considerable  modi- 
fications by  the  Hindus  in  the  traditional  recitations  of  the  Vedic 
schools. 

The  modern  ictus-accent  is  weaker  than  that  of  English.  The 
more  important  rules  governing  its  use  are  as  follows: 

1.  a.  In  primitive  verbs  and  derivatives  from  them  the  root- 
syllable  is  usually  accented,  b.  But  the  accent  never  goes  further 
back  than  the  fourth  place,  and  seldom  back  of  the  third.  It  may 
rest  on  the  third  syllable  only  if  the  penult  be  short;  on  the  fourth, 
only  if  both  antepenult  and  penult  be  short;  thus,  kdranam,  kdranat, 
but  karanena ;  bodhati,  kxipasi,  nflvyatha,  but  bodhdvah,  ksipdmah, 
napydnti;  duhitd,  duhitaram,  but  duhitfndm. 

2.  Derivatives  from  nouns  generally   retain  the  accent   of  the 


230  Appendix. 

primitive,  with  the  limitations  given  in  1.  b.;  thus,  rdnku,  rankava; 
gdrga,  gdrgyah,  but  gargyayani.  A  naturally  short  vowel  in  the 
penult,  if  followed  by  a  group  of  consonants  containing  y  or  u, 
does  not  generally  become  long  by  position;  thus,  prdbala,  prdba- 
lyam;  ukta,  uktatvat. 

3.  In  verbs  and  verbal  derivatives  joined  with  prepositions,  in 
augmented  and  reduplicated  forms,  and  sometimes  in  declensional 
forms,  the  accent  is  recessive,  if  the  root  or  stem-syllable  be  short ; 
thus,  dgamat,  dnatam,  anusthitam,  but  utkfstam,  niruktam ;  dgamat, 
dksipat,  but  bibhdrti,  tustdva,jagdu.  Polysyllabic  prepositions,  when 
prefixed  to  other  words,  retain  their  own  accent  as  secondary  accent; 
thus,  upagacchati,  upagdmatdm. 

4.  In  compounds,  unless  the  first  member  be  a  monosyllabic 
word,  each  part  generally  retains  its  own  accent,  but  that  of  the 
principal  member  is  the  strongest ;  thus,  rdjapurusam,  pdrvatagi- 
khardkaram ;  but  unmukham,  diggajam,  pragisyam. 

The  division  of  syllables  is  much  more  apparent  in  Sanskrit 
than  in  English.  In  reading  Sanskrit  prose  the  Hindus  generally 
drop  into  a  sort  of  sing-song  recitativo.    Verses  are  always  chanted. 


Corrections  and  Additions. 


P.  10.   At  end  o/§  38  add:  The  four  semivowels  are  always  sonant. 
P.  27.   Add  to  §  102 :  The  final  ^S({  a  of  the  root  is  shortened  in 

the  reduplicated  stem,  except  in  the  first  persons.  —  Add 

to  §  103 :    In  the  dual  and  plural   of  all   declensions  the 

vocative  is  like  the  nominative. 
P.  31.   Add  to  §  112.5:  It  is  also  used  as  terminus  ad  quern. 
P.  39,  1.  7.   For:    makes  some  forms  with  short  If  a  read:    makes 

also  forms  according  to    the    unaccented    a  -  class :    thus, 

^rTf?T  bhrdmati  etc. 
P.  40,  1.  7.    At  beginning  of  line  insert:  the. 
P.  43,  Vocab.,  s.  v.  tj  pr.   After:  overcome  insert:  (evils). 
P.  49,  Vocab.,  s.  v.  ifj^  +  ^n^.    After:  meet  insert:  (w.  instr.). 
P.  53,  1.  9  from  below.   After  'WSffi  insert :  \  <\. 
P.  56,  1.10.   For:    besought  read:    beseech.  —  L.  11.    For:    were 

read:  are. 
P.  59.    At  end  of  §  188  add:   The  impf.  pass,  is  similarly  inflected. 
P.  60,  1.  19.    For:  pratisedati  read:  pratisedkati. 
P.  65.    Dele  the  first  word  (the)  of  the  page. 
P.  70,  1.  10  from  below.    Bead:  accompanied. 
P.  72,  1.  12.    After:  are  insert:  so. 
P.  73,  1.  9  from  below.   For:  «nT«  read:  ^TH- 
P.  74,  1.  7.    After:  saved  insert:  (ud-hr:  cf.  §  267). 
P.  87,  1.  12.   Bead:  Final  ^  and  ^    of  a  stem  regularly  become. 
P.  90,  last  line.    Bead:  possessive. 
P.  117,  1.  6.    For:  T^TT  read:  Trf^fSTT. 

P.  119,  Vocab.    Insert  in  last  line:  +  ^r^— "^JT  come  together,  join. 
P.  126.    Add  to  §  329  the  following:   Note  also:  $1<^3|  12,  etc.,  but 

for  82  only  gnftf?!;  ^ftf^lTfTT  23,  WM*K  33>  for 

83  only  ^nfffil;   ^H  #i   M^RujfH  26,  etc.;    ^TTT- 

f^hrfa  2#,  ^Tf^nrct  38,  ^anflOi  88. 


Corrections  and  Additions. 

P.  135,  1.  5.   For:  ^^  read:  41  <*R. 

P.  137,  1.  2.    Bead:  yrWTffiPft- 

P.  138,  1.  1'2.    Z)eZt!  ^fcrfST  'firm  in  battle'. 

P.  180,  1.  17.   For:  f^rf^  read:  f%f^. 

P.  182,  1.  1.  For:  fM5*rf  read:   fafacQ. 

P.  186,  1.  1.   .Kead:  ^T^fff. 

P.  190,  1.  6.   For:  suffix  read:  suffice. 

P.  192,  1.  13  from  below.  For:  qf^jM^  read:  \*1$\\. 

P.  196,  col.  1.  S.  v.  \fi,  insert:  +  sam-d  come  together,  join. 

P.  197,  col.  1.   Insert:  rsabhadatta  m.,  n.  pr. 

P.  199,  col.  1.   S.  v.  \/gam,  insert:  +  upa-a  come  near. 

P.  205,  col.  2,  1.  2  from  below.  Read:  ]<  lpr  (piparli;  caus.  purdyati) 
fill.  Also  insert  in  Vocab.:  j/2  pr  (pardyati)  overcome 
(evils);  prevail. 

P.  207,  col.  2,  1.  5.  Read:  bhiksa  f.,  begging,  alms. 

P.  208,  col.  1,  1.  2.  Read:  \/bhram  (bhrdmati,  -te;  bhramyati:  131).  — 
Col.  2,  1.  11.  Read:  Greek  w  ;  cf.  195,  486.  —  L.  9  from 
below.    After:  release  insert:  let  fly.  shoot. 

P.  209,  col.  2,  1.  2.  Insert:  +  pra  give,  give  in  marriage.  —  S.  v. 
\/yuj  +  ni,  add:  caus.  set  (as  jewels). 

P.  212,  col.  1,  1.  5.  Insert:  +  pra  idem.  —  Col.  2,1.15  from  below. 
Read:    +  pra  wander  forth.  L.  9  from   below.     Read: 

+  pra  idem. 

P.  214,  col.  2,  1.  9.  Read:  sameta  (|  i  +  sam-a)  a.,  followed  by,  pro- 
vided with. 


F  *  "I  "     7P  /*<V*4 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 


This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 

Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


OCT  2 1  US9  68 


B 


EC£*VED 


OCT  IV 


69  41  MA 


%&&& 


P£PT* 


OCT  15 1970  9  0 


D6C  I5t  W6 


■  u    ■  • 


^RECDtD    **EC    970  -8  PM^'fc 


>VIAY  u  9 





■ - 


LD  21-40m-2,'69 
(J6057sl0)476 — A-32 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


IN 


U.C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


CD3TS7bTD^ 


! 


¥>. 


.'  hi 


7\ 


</ 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


■   :    '     ■ 

! 

^mm^ 

